FloSystem V3.6e User Guide - Print

FloSystem User Documentation
Version 3.6e
October 2001
EDINBURGH PETROLEUM SERVICES LTD

(C) Copyright EPS Ltd. 1991-2001.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
FloSystem User Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1 - Introduction to FloSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1. 1. What Is FloSystem? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
1. 2. PC Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
1. 3. Versions of the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
1. 4. How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
1.4.1.Manual Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
1. 5. FloSystem Product Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
1.5.1.Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
1.5.2.The Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
1.5.3.EPS Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Chapter 2 - Getting Started With FloSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2. 1. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
2. 2. Licensing and Accessing Valve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2. 3. The Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2. 4. Setting up File Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
2. 5. Using the Word Macro for Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2. 6. Starting FloSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
2.6.1.Starting WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
2.6.2.Starting Well Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
2.6.3.Starting FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
2. 7. Security Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Chapter 3 - On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3. 1. Using Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
3.1.1.FloSystem Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
3.1.2.Context Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Chapter 4 - Using the FloSystem Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4. 1. Working With WellFlo and FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

4.1.1.FloSystem Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
4.1.2.FloSystem Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
4. 2. Working With WellFlo and Well Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
4.2.1.FloSystem Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
4. 3. FloSystem Units System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
4.3.1.Units System Terminology and Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
4.3.2.Switching Units Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
4.3.3.Creating or Editing a Units System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
4.3.4.Example Units Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
4. 4. Getting Hard Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
4.4.1.Installing a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
4.4.2.Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
4.4.3.Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
4.4.4.Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
4. 5. FloSystem Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
4.5.1.Graphing Window Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
4.5.2.Graphing Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Chapter 5 - Introduction to WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

5. 1. WellFlo - General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
5. 2. This Section Of The Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
5. 3. WellFlo Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
5.3.1.Deliverability Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
5.3.2.Diagnostic Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
5. 4. Setting Up and Running a Well Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
5.4.1.What is Involved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
5.4.2.Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

5.4.3.Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
5.4.4.Outputting Your Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Chapter 6 - WellFlo System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

6. 1. Overview Of System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
6. 2. WellFlo Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
6.2.1.File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
6.2.2.Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
6. 3. Well Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
6.3.1.Using The Tabular and Graphical Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
6.3.2.Well Components Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
6.3.3.Surface Components Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
6.3.4.Graphical Editor Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
6. 4. General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
6. 5. Well and Flow Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
6. 6. Reservoir Control - Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
6.6.1.Black Oil PVT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
6.6.2.Dry Gas PVT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.6.3.Condensate PVT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.6.4.Volatile Oil PVT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
6. 7. Reservoir Control - Inflow Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
6.7.1.Layer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
6.7.2.Entry models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
6.7.3.Layer IPR Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
6.7.4.Well orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
6.7.5.Skin analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
6.7.6.Relative Permeabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
6.7.7.Composite IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
6.7.8.Nodal analysis reservoir sensitivities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
6. 8. Gas Lift Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
6.8.1.Gas Lift Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
6.8.2.Gas Lift Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Chapter 7 - WellFlo Analysis Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
7. 1. Setting Up Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

7. 2. Pressure Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
7.2.1.Calculation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
7.2.2.Selecting The Range Of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
7.2.3.Selecting The Flowrates For Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
7.2.4.Choice Of Flow Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
7. 3. Temperature Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
7.3.1.Manual Temperature Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
7.3.2.Calculated Temperature Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
7.3.3.Calibrated Temperature Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
7.3.4.Coupled Pressure-Temperature Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
7. 4. Gas Lift Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
7. 5. Sensitivity Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
7.5.1.Automatic L-factor calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
7.5.2.Stability check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
7.5.3.Iteration to exact operating point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
7. 6. Gas Lift Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
7.6.1.Input data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
7.6.2.Design option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
7.6.3.Re-calculate option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
7.6.4.Sizing option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
7. 7. Intermittent Gas Lift Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

7.7.1.Intermittent Gas Lift Design Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
7.7.2.Intermittent Gas Lift Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
7. 8. Methodology of Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
7.8.1.Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
7.8.2.Calculation Background Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
7. 9. Advanced Gas Valve Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
7.9.1.Gas Valve Modelling Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
7.9.2.Sensitivities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
7.9.3.Calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
7.9.4.Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Chapter 8 - Output of WellFlo Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

8. 1. Outputting the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
8. 2. Outputting the Results of Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
8.2.1.Graphical Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
8.2.2.Report Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
8.2.3.Calculation Log Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
8.2.4.File export in VFP, BHP and other formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
8.2.5.Pseudo-Pressure File Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Chapter 9 - WellFlo Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

9. 1. Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
9. 2. Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
9. 3. Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Chapter 10 - References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Chapter 11 - Introduction to Well Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
11. 1. Well Data Manager - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

11. 2. Vertical Lift Performance (Well Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
11.2.1.Wells Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
11.2.2.Sheet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
11.2.3.Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
11.2.4.Using the Function Buttons and Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
11. 3. Layer Inflow Performance (Layer Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
11.3.1.Wells Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
11.3.2.Layers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
11.3.3.Sheet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
11.3.4.Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
11. 4. Eclipse VFP Table Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
11.4.1.Wells Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
11.4.2.Units Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
11.4.3.Sheet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
11.4.4.Generate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
11.4.5.Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Chapter 12 - Introduction to FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

12. 1. FieldFlo - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
12. 2. This Section Of The Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
12. 3. FieldFlo Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
12.3.1.Gas Lift Optimisation/Allocation Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
12.3.2.Field Modelling Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
12. 4. Use of WellFlo within FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
12. 5. Setting Up / Running A Field Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
12.5.1.What Is Involved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
12.5.2.Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
12.5.3.Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
12.5.4.Outputting Your Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
12. 6. Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
12.6.1.Configure Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
12.6.2.Configure Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Chapter 13 - FieldFlo System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

13. 1. Overview of Field System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
13. 2. FieldFlo Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
13.2.1.Data Organisation - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
13.2.2.Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
13.2.3.Solution Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
13.2.4.Calculated Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
13. 3. Using The Graphical Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
13.3.1.The Graphical Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
13.3.2.Representation of the Field Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
13.3.3.Recalling and Saving Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
13.3.4.The Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
13.3.5.Moving About In A Field Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
13.3.6.Selecting Items For Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
13.3.7.Viewing The Field Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
13. 4. Setting Up and Editing The Field Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
13.4.1.Editing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
13.4.2.Editing Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
13. 5. Setting Up And Editing Wells And Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
13.5.1.Setting up and Editing Wells Using WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
13.5.2.Setting up and Editing Surface Facilities Using WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
13. 6. Editing Field Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
13.6.1.Editing Well Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
13.6.2.Editing Unit Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
13.6.3.Calibrating Well Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
13. 7. Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
13. 8. Batch Control File for Updating L-Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
13.8.1.Well Test Data Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
13.8.2.Batch Control File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Chapter 14 - FieldFlo Solution Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
14. 1. Overview of Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

14.1.1.Well Performance Curve Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
14.1.2.Build Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
14.1.3.Allocate Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
14.1.4.History Match Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
14. 2. Running The Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
14.2.1.Running Well Performance Curve Generator (WellPCG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
14.2.2.Running Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
14.2.3.Running Allocate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
14.2.4.Running History Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Chapter 15 - FieldFlo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

15. 1. Outputting The Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
15.1.1.Field Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
15. 2. Outputting the Results of Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
15.2.1.Gas Allocation and Oil Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
15.2.2.Unit Performance Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
15.2.3.Gas versus Gas, Oil or Revenue per Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
15.2.4.Results Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
15. 3. Exchange Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
15.3.1.Reservoir Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

15.3.2.Reservoir Data Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
15.3.3.Gas lift allocation output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
15.3.4.Pipeline Data Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Chapter 16 - FieldFlo Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

16. 1. FieldFlo Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Chapter 17 - WellFlo - ESP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

17. 1. WellFlo - ESP: General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
17. 2. This Section of the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
17. 3. WellFlo - ESP Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
17.3.1.Designing an ESP Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
17.3.2.Analysis of an ESP Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
17. 4. Running ESP Design or Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
17.4.1.WellFlo-ESP Software Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
17.4.2.What Is Involved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
17.4.3.Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
17.4.4.Design and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
17.4.5.Outputting Your Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Chapter 18 - ESP Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

18. 1. ESP Data Entry Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
18. 2. Inserting an ESP in the Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
18.2.1.Moving an ESP in the Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
18. 3. ESP Design Mode Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
18.3.1.Pump Environment - Design Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
18.3.2.Pump Wear Factors and Efficiencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
18.3.3.Calculation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
18. 4. ESP Analysis Mode Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
18.4.1.Pump Environment - Analysis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
18.4.2.Choosing an ESP and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
18. 5. ESP Pump and Motor Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
18.5.1.Pump Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
18.5.2.Motor Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Chapter 19 - ESP Design and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
19. 1. Setting up the Calculations - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429

19. 2. ESP Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
19.2.1.Selecting the Range of Nodes and Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
19.2.2.Entering the Design Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
19.2.3.Designing setting depth with the Vary Depth Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
19.2.4.Adjusting the Recommended Pump Flow Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
19.2.5.ESP Design Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
19.2.6.Choosing Which ESP to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
19.2.7.ESP Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
19. 3. ESP Analysis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
19.3.1.Selecting the Range of Nodes and Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
19.3.2.Entering the Flowrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
19.3.3.ESP Analysis Sensitivity Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
19.3.4.ESP Analysis Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
19. 4. Methodology of Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
19.4.1.ESP Pressure Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
19.4.2.Motor Current and Power Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
19.4.3.Temperature Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
19.4.4.Viscosity Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
19.4.5.Gassiness Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Chapter 20 - Output from WellFlo-ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
20. 1. Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444

20. 2. General Results Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
20. 3. ESP Design Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
20.3.1.ESP Design Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
20.3.2.ESP Design Pressure-Depth Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
20. 4. ESP Analysis Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
20.4.1.ESP Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
20. 5. Output from ESP Pump & Motor Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Chapter 21 - ESP Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

21. 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
21.1.1.Entering New Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
21.1.2.Entering New Pump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Alphabetic Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Notice
FloSystem is produced and owned exclusively by:
Edinburgh Petroleum Services Ltd
Research Park
Riccarton
EDINBURGH EH14 4AP
Scotland, UK.
(C) Copyright EPS Ltd. 1991-2001. All rights reserved.
This manual and software is licensed under the terms of a software licence between Edinburgh
Petroleum Services (EPS) Ltd and the software user. Use of the software outside the terms of this
licence is illegal. Duplication of the software or of this manual, in part or in whole, is strictly
prohibited except as provided for under the terms of the licence, or with written authorisation
from EPS Ltd.
This manual describes a technical computer application package and instructions for data
preparation and use of the package. The software has been thoroughly tested and every effort has
been made to achieve accuracy and completeness in both the software and documentation. No
warranty, express or implied, is made in the application of the package. The FloSystem
techniques are inevitably drastic simplifications of complex oil field problems, and the User
must at all times take responsibility for the application of the techniques described herein to his
or her actual situation.
Gas Lift Valve Spacing and Sizing

The Gas Lift Design facility in WellFlo uses established techniques to estimate the spacings of
gas lift valves subject to the operational constraints specified by the user, and to estimate the
valve orifice sizes and dome pressures. These are recommended settings only, based on the
supplied data.
We strongly recommend that gas lift valve equipment suppliers be contacted before a final
decision is made about any valve.
WellFlo-ESP
We particularly draw the attention of users of WellFlo-ESP to the fact that the ESP Pump and
Motor Data supplied with WellFlo-ESP is obtained by EPS from the manufacturers of this
equipment. EPS cannot verify the accuracy of this data, nor can EPS guarantee that the data
supplied with this program is the most up-to-date available, nor can EPS guarantee that the list of
equipment is complete. Updates of the information will be supplied to customers using EPS'
maintenance contract from time to time, but equipment manufacturers are continually updating
and improving their products, and you should be aware that specification changes may have
taken place since EPS last updated the WellFlo-ESP data.
WellFlo-ESP is an ESP-production model working with WellFlo. It is NOT a comprehensive
database product for ESP equipment.
We strongly recommend that ESP equipment suppliers be contacted before a final decision is
made about any pump.
Acknowledgements
Reference is made to a number of trademarks throughout this manual:
Windows, Windows 95, 98, 2000, Windows NT, Word, and Excel are marks of Microsoft Corp.
Nodal is a mark of Schlumberger.
InstallSHIELD is a mark of The Stirling Group.
FlexLM is a mark of Globetrotter Inc.
How To Use This Documentation

To save yourself time, please read this before proceeding further!
Chapter No./Topic
1 Introduction to FloSystem
2 Installation
3 Working in Windows
4 FloSystem Interface
5 WellFlo Intro
6-10 WellFlo/Gas lift
11 Well Data Manager
12 FieldFlo Intro
13-16 FieldFlo
17 ESP Intro
Read the sections
18-21
ESP
For an overview...
Windows novice
To Install FloSystem
WellFlo-only user
FieldFlo user
ESP User
Experienced user
10
Introduction to FloSystem
Chapter 1- Introduction to FloSystem

1.1.
What Is FloSystem?
FloSystem is a suite of programs developed by Edinburgh Petroleum Services Limited to aid the
petroleum engineer in the optimisation, design and diagnosis of oil wells and production
systems.
This manual describes the software, which is comprised of four programs: WellFlo (including an
optional Gas-Lift section), WellFlo-ESP, Well Data Manager and FieldFlo. WellFlo is a single
well Nodal Analysis program which models natural producers, injectors and, optionally, gaslifted wells; WellFlo-ESP adds the option to model Electric Submersible Pump (ESP) lifted
wells. Well Data Manager is a spreadsheet application that allows quick and easy access to a
large number of well models stored in a given directory. FieldFlo is a network model specifically
written to optimise the allocation of gas to gas-lifted oil wells in complex networks.
WellFlo supports a range of PVT, IPR, Vertical Lift, Temperature and Choke correlations and
models. It can be used in two main modes:
(i) to find the operating point (i.e. production rate) of a well or system, or
(ii) to find the pressure drop along a well or pipeline.
In both modes of operation, a wide range of sensitivity variables can be used to study different
"what-if" cases. Graphs can be made of results of these calculations. A gas-lift option is available
which includes a design facility for the positioning of unloading and orifice valves.
Well Data Manager has three operational modes:
(ii) Layer Data Manager - as above, but performance parameter selection and update are
carried out on a layer basis.
(iii) VFP Table Generation - select well models from several directories and generate VFP
tables in Eclipse format for a specified range of production parameters.
FieldFlo takes as a starting point the individual well performance curves generated by WellFlo.
After the network of wells and manifolds is defined in FieldFlo, WellFlo is used to describe the
pipelines connecting them. A series of calculations can then be performed to calculate the
optimum lift gas distribution for the field and predict the production potential. These calculations
account for the pressure drop in the network and the range of wells involved (e.g. naturally
flowing, gas-lifted wells, electrically pumped wells, gas wells, etc.).
WellFlo, Well Data Manager and FieldFlo operate under the Microsoft Windows 95, 98, 2000,
Windows NT and UNIX environments, allowing you to set up and modify your well and field
design through highly interactive graphical editors. As FloSystem is a Windows-based product,
users who have the basic techniques and skills required to operate other Windows-based
applications will be working in a familiar environment.
11
Chapter 1 - Introduction to FloSystem
(i) Well Data Manager - select well models, display performance and optionally update
selected parameters in the well models.
1.2.
PC Hardware Requirements
To run the FloSystem on a PC, you require the following hardware:

Intel or compatible 80486 Pentium-based PC. (A maths co-processor is not strictly necessary,
but FloSystem's performance will be increased by a factor of 4 or 5 by the use of one. Note
that the 486DX has a built-in co-processor, but the 486SX will need a 487SX upgrade)
Windows 95, 98, 2000 or Windows NT, installed on your machine.
4MB Memory (RAM) above basic operating system requirements
A hard disk with at least 5 megabytes of disk space for the program files. (Additional space
will be needed for your own data files).
A valid software security licence (FlexLM supplied by EPS) enabled for the appropriate
options.
1.3.
Versions of the Software
Although you may be able to install and start up the older Windows 3.1 version of FloSystem on
a Windows 95, 98 or NT computer, some parts of the program will not function correctly (in
particular Export to Simulator and any call to WellFlo to FieldFlo). Ask your EPS representative
about a 32-bit upgrade. Note also that different PC operating systems require different drivers (or
the same drivers to be reinstalled as in a Windows 98 migration) for some parts of the program.
If you wish to change your operating system we suggest you contact EPS to check what will be
required.
1.4.
How To Use This Manual
1. 4. 1. Manual Structure
WellFlo (including gas lift)

Well Data Manager
FieldFlo
WellFlo-ESP
Basics
This section covers the items you need to know to get started with FloSystem:
This chapter is an introduction to the FloSystem package, including hardware requirements.
Chapter 2 covers the aspects of installation and starting the programs.
Chapter 3 briefly describes the commands and methods used to operate FloSystem including
the on-line Help available.
Chapter 4 covers common interface aspects of WellFlo, Well Data Manager and FieldFlo,
including the data structure, units system (oilfield or metric, etc.), printing and plotting.
12
1. 2. PC Hardware Requirements
FloSystem is a modular product. Some customers will only use WellFlo, whilst others may use
WellFlo along with Well Data Manager and/or the ESP module or FieldFlo. This manual is also
structured in a modular way, with five main sections:
Basics, which covers common aspects of the FloSystem programs.
WellFlo, Well Data Manager, FieldFlo and WellFlo/ESP
WellFlo (section 2), Well Data Manager (section 3), FieldFlo (section 4), and WellFlo/ESP
(section 5) are arranged in a similar manner as outlined below:
The program is introduced and described in terms of what it does for the engineer and how
basic functions can be performed.
How to prepare data and set up a model ready for calculations.
Running calculations and some background on the FloSystem calculations.
Data input (e.g. IPR data in WellFlo) and the main data output results of the computations
made within FloSystem applications.
1.5.
FloSystem Product Support
1. 5. 1. Help System
If a problem or question arises, the first place to try is the on-line Help system. This can be
accessed in FloSystem applications by a number of methods:
Use the Help option on the main menu bar. This is described in Using Help.
Hit the F1 key when a menu item is highlighted, or while operating in a dialog box (i.e.
context-sensitive).
Use SHIFT + F1 to get help on graphic screen regions by clicking the area of interest (e.g.
menu bar, toolbar, plot legend, axes, etc.). A large question mark appears beside the mouse
pointer when this is active.
1. 5. 2. The Manual
The next place to try is this manual. It contains a full index and annotated illustrations which
describe and/or show specific screens or windows to assist users with navigational or operational
problems. Many common problems may be addressed here, so please consult this manual before
calling EPS.
1. 5. 3. EPS Support
Internet
At http://www.e-petroleumservices.com you will find the EPS web-site. Select Support from the
main menu. As this manual goes to press the support area of our web-site provides Upgrades,
Fixes, Release Notes, Known Issues, a Users Forum and other information.
Support Desk
Provided you have a maintenance contract with us, you can call EPS (or your local agent) to get
help with problems with the software. Depending on the nature of the problem, one of the
following may happen:
We might be able to tell you verbally what you are doing wrong and address the problem
quickly.
If we suspect a program bug, we will try to repeat it at EPS. We may ask you to send us more
details or the actual data you are using, so that we can verify the problem. If the problem is
serious, we would consider issuing a fix, otherwise the problem will be logged in the bug/
enhancement database for attention in the next scheduled release.
13
1. 5. FloSystem Product Support
If the problem cannot be addressed by any of the previous methods, or there is a specific question
about the program which is not answered anywhere, then it is time to call for help.
Conversely, you might be calling to tell us a problem has been fixed (either by our advice, by
a bug fix, or by your doing things differently). This is still important, as we will know that we
can close the item in our support database, and will be able to concentrate on other program
improvements.
If the problem was in the documentation, we will put it right as soon as possible (new pages
are usually issued with each scheduled release).
It may be that you are asking the program to do something it cannot do, and was not designed
to do. In that case, we will offer any hints we can to work round the difficulty, and treat your
call as an enhancement request. It will be entered in the bug/enhancement database, and may
become part of a future version of the software, or indeed a new module in its own right.
We are sometimes asked for advice on modelling particular wells. Although we are happy to
discuss specific issues, you will appreciate that we do have to limit the time spent on looking
at data not in the context of a bug or enhancement.
We have a Support Database on our own network, and all calls received will be logged on this.
This will ensure that your query, bug or suggestion will not go unrecorded. We review all entries
for possible implementation in a forthcoming upgrade, and keep track of their status.
Windows, networks and peripherals: There is another possibility for your problem: it may be
caused by the set up of Windows on your machine, or the type of network or peripheral you are
using. We regret that we cannot always undertake to fix these problems, although we will offer
advice where we can. Windows is a complete operating system, and it contains all the device
drivers for screen, printers and networks, etc. FloSystem does not have control over these items,
and EPS is not usually in a position to fix them. In principle, if Windows itself can output to
certain devices and communicate with a network, then FloSystem should be able to do so too.
If the problem relates to the Windows' operating system on your machine, Microsoft can be
contacted on their own technical help line.
14
Contacts
You can always call our Head Office in Edinburgh for help or other enquiries. However, if you
have normally dealt with one of our branch offices, or one of our agents, we would prefer you to
call there first, as you will receive a more local service, and your regular EPS contact will be kept
fully aware of how you are finding the software.
Web-site
http://www.e-petroleumservices.com
Head Office:
Technical Support - FloSystem
EPS Ltd
Research Park
Riccarton
Edinburgh EH14 4AP
UK
Tel: (+44) 131 449 4536 Fax: (+44) 131 449 5123
e-mail: support@e-petroleumservices.com
Americas Office:
EPS Americas, Inc.
Tel: (+1) 281 599 1900 Fax: (+1) 281 599 1991
e-mail: epsa.support@e-petroleumservices.com
China Office:
EPS Beijing
Tel: (+86) 106 499 2942 Fax: (+86) 106 492 3567
e-mail: asia.support@e-petroleumservices.com
Far East Office:
EPS Malaysia
Tel: (+603) 7805 4932 Fax: (+603) 7804 2053
e-mail: asia.support@e-petroleumservices.com
Mexico Office:
Edinburgh Petroleum Services de Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Tel: (+52) 93 12 17 09 or (+52) 93 12 17 24 Fax: (+52) 93 12 17 27
Venezuala Office:
EPS Venezuela
Tel: (+58) 2 977 3196 Fax: (+58) 2 977 3196
15
Getting Started With FloSystem
Chapter 2- Getting Started With FloSystem

2.1.
Installation
FloSystem is a 32-bit application for Windows 95, 98, 2000 and NT. It will not run under
Windows 3.1 or 3.11.
If installing from floppy disk. After inserting the first FloSystem disk in your floppy drive, select
to run the SETUP.EXE file from this disk and follow the instructions.
If installing from the CD under NT, Windows 98 and 2000, the welcoming screen will
automatically open and you can continue through the installation options. If you have disabled
the auto-run feature on your system, or you are running Windows 95, 98 or 2000, you may open
this screen by running LAUNCH.EXE in the root directory of the CD.
Once the installation has commenced. you can observe the progress of your installation on the
two background graphics on the screen.
1
2
3
The Installation Status Bars provide you with information relating to the processing of the
installation in relation to the PC.
1.Percentage of space left on the drive that you want to install FloSystem onto.
2.Percentage of main memory available. This is almost always 100%.
3.Percentage of current installation copied from floppy.
4.If the percentage of free space available drops below 10% (bar 1), the Low indicator lights
up.
Figure : 2.1.0 - 2 Copying Files Status Box
The Copying Files Status Box shows you the current progress of files copied from the floppy
drive to the PC.
16
Chapter 2 - Getting Started With FloSystem
Figure : 2.1.0 - 1 Installation Status Bars

You may also create additional shortcuts to the relevant *.EXE file (e.g. WellFlo, FieldFlo, etc.)
by selecting this in Windows Explorer or My Computer and using the right mouse option for
Create Shortcut. After you have done this you may drag and drop the shortcut icon to your
Windows Desktop, or copy it to a place within your Start Menu.
2.2.
Licensing and Accessing Valve Data
A number of combinations of gas-lift valve types and port sizes are available in WellFlo. All
users have access by default to 12 combinations for generic (non-specific) 1.5" IPO, 1" IPO and
1" PPO valves, with 5, 4 and 3 different port sizes respectively, plus the orifice valve with all port
sizes. These require no licence and use public domain data and correlations.
The other listed combinations are for specific, commercially available, valves and use recent
performance data provided by the Valve Performance Clearing House, of which EPS is a
member. New valves and port sizes will be added as the data is made available to EPS. Access to
any of these particular valve types and port size combinations is by licence only, and is controlled
by the program security system (FlexLM). When a valve type and port size is selected for
modelling, the security system is interrogated and if the type and size is not licensed there is a
simple error message issued from the Valve Details dialog.
Although use is limited by licence, a list of all currently available valves and port size
combinations is maintained in the program under the Help page entitled Available Gas Valve
and Port Size Combinations, which may be viewed by opening Help with the F1 key from the
keyboard, selecting the Search tab and typing in Gas Valves.
2.3.
The Registry
The Registry has replaced all of the .ini files that were present in Windows 3.x applications. The
data from system.ini, win.ini, control.ini, etc. are now all contained within the Registry, along
with hundreds of other system settings. All Windows-specific programs now store their
initialization data within the Registry instead of within .ini files situated in the Windows folder.
The Registry cannot be viewed or edited with a normal editor - a Registry Editor program
included with Windows must be used:
regedit for Windows 95/98/2000.
regedit32 for Windows NT 4/5.
To run this program, click on the Start icon at the lower left of the Windows screen display, then
select Run to open a Run dialog box (see Figure 2.3.0 - 1, Windows Registry Run Dialog, on
page 18). Follow the instructions and type in regedit or regedit32 depending on your system. The
program can also be selected from the drop-down list on the right-hand side of the dialog input
field. This procedure will start the Registry Editor and if required, this can be added to the Start
Menu or to the Desktop for easier editing.
The Registry Editor is divided into two panes (see Figure 2.3.0 - 2, Windows Registry Editor
Dialog, on page 18). The left pane contains a hierarchical tree structure of keys (similar to
Windows Explorer) and the right pane shows the string values for the currently selected branch.
These string values contain the actual information stored in the Registry.
17
2. 2. Licensing and Accessing Valve Data
The Registry is a hierarchical database utilized by the 32-bit versions of Microsoft Windows
including Windows 95, 98, ME and NT/2000. It is used to store system settings and options and
also contains information and settings for all the hardware, software, users and preferences of the
PC. When a user applies changes to Control Panel settings, File Associations, System Policies or
installed software, these changes are reflected and stored in the Registry.
Figure : 2.3.0 - 1 Windows Registry Run Dialog
Figure : 2.3.0 - 2 Windows Registry Editor Dialog
There are a number of main branches and each contains a specific portion of the information
stored in the Registry. For users of FloSystem, the most important branches are:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER - This branch links to a section of HKEY_USERS appropriate
for the user currently logged onto the system.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE - This branch contains computer-specific information about
the type of hardware, software and other preferences on a given machine; this information is
used for everyone who logs onto the machine.
Figure : 2.3.0 - 3 Flosystem Hierarchy Within The Registry
Under normal operating circumstances, there will be no need to worry about the flosys3x.ini subfolder, since its contents are not varied by running FloSystem.
18
2. 3. The Registry
The FloSystem installation procedure automatically creates a sub-folder called flosys3x.ini

within the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE branch of the Registry (see Figure 2.3.0 - 3, Flosystem
Hierarchy Within The Registry, on page 18). This sub-folder contains details of the FloSystem
set-up, location of the executables, data file directories, units system locations, etc. The current
version number is included in the sub-folder name, to avoid confusion with the settings from
earlier versions.

Users may apply certain changes to their set-up that require changes to be applied in the Registry
sub-folders for WellFlo and FieldFlo.
String values that may need to be updated manually in WellFlo are listed below (also refer to
Figure 2.3.0 - 4, Registry Editor For String Values Under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE, on
page 19):
In the WellFlo sub-folder of the Registry under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE:
units-dbase
If users wish to move the installed units database files WFDBASE.UNT,

WFHEADER.UNT and WFUNITS.UNT to a different directory.
esp-path
If users wish to move the installed ESP data files ESPCABLE.DAT,

ESPPUMP.DAT and ESPMOTOR.DAT to a different directory.
glv-path
If users wish to move the installed gas-lift valve data file GASVALVE.DAT to a
different directory..
Figure : 2.3.0 - 4 Registry Editor For String Values Under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
In the FieldFlo sub-folder of the Registry under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE:

units-dbase
If users wish to move the installed units database files FFDBASE.UNT,

different directory.
FFHEADER.UNT and FFUNITS.UNT to a
2)
When the Registry is edited, all changes are saved instantly - there is no option to reload the Registry if something has been done incorrectly.
3)
Users will never know if they have done something wrong - there are no warning pop-up
dialogs to inform users of mistakes, errors, etc. The Registry Editor will allow users to
wipe everything clean without supplying a warning.
Windows 95, 98, 2000 and NT all have a simple Registry back-up mechanism that is quite
reliable, but users should never rely on this alone. Always remember to make a back-up of the
Registry. The back-up and restore methods will vary depending on the version of Windows that
is being used - consult your Registry Editor Help menu for version-specific details of these
methods.
For additional information relating to the Registry and the operations that can be performed in
19
2. 3. The Registry
Warning: The Registry Editor should always be used with great care and there are three
very important points to remember:
1) There is no undo option available in the Registry - if a key folder is deleted accidentally it
is permanently gone.

the Registry Editor, users should also refer to:
The Registry Editor Help menu.
The dedicated website guide for the Windows Registry accessed from the URLs http://
registry.winguides.com/ or http://www.regedit.com/.
Viewing and Editing the Registry

The following string value names may be viewed in the Registry Editor (refer to Figure 2.3.0 - 5,
Registry Editor For String Values Under HKEY_CURRENT_USER, on page 21) and can be
modified by selecting the Configure Registry menu option in WellFlo and entering the
appropriate information in the Edit User Registry dialog (See Section Configure Registry, on
page 62):
units-dbase: This is the path to the directory of the units database containing the files
WFHEADER.DAT, WFDBASE.DAT and WFUNITS.DAT.
esp-path: This is the path name for the ESP pump and motor database files ESPCABLE.DAT,
ESPPUMP.DAT and ESPMOTOR.DAT
user: This specifies a directory path to which the WellFlo report and log files will be written.
If this value is empty, they are saved to the current data directory.
browser:If this value is empty, Microsoft WordPad will be the default browser for the
WELLFLO.LOG, ANALYSYS.LOG and WELLFLO.RPT report files. Otherwise, specify the path
and executable for the desired browser* (e.g. c:\windows\winword.exe).
* Most editors or word processors capable of handling text files are suitable as browsers (e.g. Notepad, WordPad,
Word, Excel, etc.). DOS or Windows applications can be used.
Additionally, users may select a specific browser for any one of, or all of the following report/log
files. If these Value Names are empty, browser will be used:
report-browser: For the WellFlo report files (WELLFLO.RPT)
wellflo-log-browser: For the WELLFLO.LOG files
analysis-log-browser: For the ANALYSIS.LOG files
In terms of graphical output, most plots are initially drawn with the points on all the data sets. If
users wish to change this default setting, the Value Data setting (i.e. 0 = no points plotted, 1 = all
points plotted) can be altered for any or all of the five Value Names listed below:
in-outflow-plot: For the Inflow/Outflow Curves Plot (See Section Inflow & Outflow
Plots, on page 236).
performance-plot: For the Performance Analysis Plot (See Section Performance Analysis
Plots, on page 239).
esp-performance-plot: For the ESP Performance Plot (See Section ESP Performance
Plot, on page 450).
esp-gas-plot: For the ESP Gassiness Plot (See Section ESP Gassiness Plot, on page 450).
The default Value Data settings are 0 for pvd-plot and 1 for all the others.
20
2. 3. The Registry
pvd-plot: For the Pressure/Depth Plot and Gas Lift Diagnosis Plot (See Section Pressure Depth Plots, on page 240 and See Section Gas Lift Diagnosis Plot, on page 242).
Figure : 2.3.0 - 5 Registry Editor For String Values Under HKEY_CURRENT_USER
Note: The string type REG_SZ from Figure 2.3.0 - 5, Registry Editor For String Values Under
HKEY_CURRENT_USER, on page 21, is a standard string, used to represent readable text
values.
An optional Windows macro, supplied as a text file - WELLFLO.TXT - is supplied with the
installation disks, for use with the WellFlo report. Instructions on how to implement this are
provided at the end of this chapter (See Section 2. 5 Using the Word Macro for Reporting, on
page 23).
Some browsers do not pick up textual files unless they have a recognised extension. To change
the default RPT and LOG extensions, select the following three Value Name entries within the
WellFlo Configure Registry menu option (See Section Configure Registry, on page 62) and
specify appropriate extensions for text files (e.g. TXT, CSV, etc. without the dot):
report-extension
analysis-log-extension
If WellFlo is being used to import a large number of performance curves (e.g. for Well Data
Manager, FieldFlo, WellPCG, etc.), under some versions of Windows the Please Wait window
which is displayed, may be made the foreground window and tie-up the machine until the
importation process is completed. If this proves to be obstructive, the window can be suppressed
by selecting the following Value Name entry within the WellFlo Configure Registry menu option
(See Section Configure Registry, on page 62):
please-wait (Value Data = 0 suppresses the window, Value Data = 1 displays the window in
the background)
21
2. 3. The Registry
wellflo-log-extension

The thermal conductivities may be changed from their default values by a maximum factor of 10,
or in the case of insulation, by a factor of 100 (See Section Configure Registry, on page 62):
therm-cond-cement: Thermal conductivity in oilfield units, default value is 9.65 d-ft-degF
(users are allowed a range between 0.965 - 96.5 d-ft-degF).
therm-cond-earth: Thermal conductivity in oilfield units, default 33.6 d-ft-degF - value is
for rock (users are allowed a range between 3.36 - 336 d-ft-degF).
therm-cond-soil: Thermal conductivity in oilfield units, default 7.0 d-ft-degF (users are
allowed a range between 0.7 - 70 d-ft-degF).
therm-cond-liquid: Thermal conductivity in oilfield units, default 9.192 d-ft-degF (users are
allowed a range between 0.9192 - 91.92 d-ft-degF).
therm-cond-gas: Thermal conductivity in oilfield units, default 0.504 d-ft-degF (users are
alowed a range between 0.0504 - 5.04 d-ft-degF).
therm-cond-steel: Thermal conductivity in oilfield units, default 480.0 d-ft-degF (users are
allowed a range between 48 - 4800 d-ft-degF).
therm-cond-insulation: Thermal conductivity in oilfield units, default 1.0 d-ft-degF (users
are allowed a range between 0.01 - 100 d-ft-degF).
The following entry sets the fractional difference below which a set of curves, resulting from a
sensitivity, will be plotted as one curve, applying to all values, rather than a number of slightly
different curves. It applies to the inflow/outflow curves and to the temperature (or whichever
second collectable variable is selected) following a pressure drop calculation run:
all-values-precision: Default value 1.35e-6 (users are allowed a range between 1.2e-007 to
0.004).
For water-cuts above the following specified threshold, the ESP viscosity corrections will be
computed with the water viscosity (instead of with the averaged or emulsified liquid viscosities):
viscosity-inversion-threshold: Water-cut in percent, default 100 (users are allowed a range
between 0 - 100%).
max-esp-substages: When the Value Data entry for this Value Name is blank, the default
value is 10, so this will always apply when the number of stages exceeds 100 (See Section 19.
4. 1 ESP Pressure Calculations, on page 441).
Note: Other Registry entries that may be customized are described in this manual within the
context of their appropriate dialog setting (to find details on specific entries refer to the
Alphabetic Index for this manual under Registry Entries).
2.4.
Setting up File Association
A file association can be set up in Windows so that any .WFL file will automatically start
WellFlo if it is selected in File Manager or Windows Explorer.
To set up a file association, users should consult their Windows manuals or use the Windows online help.
22
2. 4. Setting up File Association
For ESP pressure calculations, the number of stages per group is increased by 1 from one group
to the next (i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4, ...), up to a maximum equal to one-tenth of the total. However, a lower
maximum can be used if specified by:
2.5.
Using the Word Macro for Reporting
The text for a Windows Word macro is supplied with the installation disks in the file
WELLFLO.TXT, for use with the main WellFlo report (it is not designed for other output files from
WellFlo).
You can achieve the same result more easily from v3.5 onwards by using the RTF option (See
Section 6. 2. 2 Configure Menu, on page 59). However, the following description of the Word
macro may be useful if you want to design your own macro.
After installation of the formatting macro, whenever you click the Report button in the WellFlo
Results section, Word will be invoked automatically and the formatting macro invoked.
The report will then be correctly paginated, with aligned columns and bold sub-headings, etc.
To set this up you must:
1) Go to the Configure menu, Preferences option, and select Macro format in the Report format
area (See Section 6. 2. 2 Configure Menu, on page 59). This is essential, as it inserts tabs into
the report for use by the macro.
2) Load Word and open the supplied text file, WELLFLO.TXT (with your current template being
is your default template) the macro will become part of this
NORMAL.DOT ( or whichever
template.) Proceed as follows:
Select the entire text of the macro (Edit Select All, Ctrl+click in the left-hand margin of the
Edit screen, or drag the mouse over the whole screen) and then click Edit Copy (or keyboard
Ctrl+C) to copy the macro contents to the ClipBoard (the text file).
Sub MAIN
End Sub
Select these contents with Ctrl+click in the left-hand margin of the Edit screen, and Edit
Paste (or Ctrl+V) the contents in from the ClipBoard.
Now File Exit, saying Yes to save the changes. You have now transferred the supplied
reporting macro into the NORMAL.DOT template.
The browser entry needs to be modified via the WellFlo Configure menu, Registry option by
selecting report-browser as the value name and entering the path to the Word executable, and
the macro name, as follows (using the appropriate path name in the Value Data field):
report-browser = c:\windows\winword.exe /mWellFloReportFormat
Note: The space between .exe and the forward slash, and the small m before the macro name.
From now on, Word will be invoked automatically by WellFlo and the formatting macro used for
your report.
Note: When you have finished viewing, editing or printing your report, shut the current Word
session down, do not just File Close the report or you will end up with multiple Word sessions as
you bring up successive reports.
23
2. 5. Using the Word Macro for Reporting
Call up Tools Macro and type in the macro name e.g. WellFloReportFormat into the Macro
Name edit box, and click the Create button. You will see a screen with the following text
displayed:
2.6.
Starting FloSystem
Both of the FloSystem programs can be started from the FloSystem group created by the
installation procedure.
Once you have started a work session, find the FloSystem options on the Start Menu. You may
now select WellFlo, Well Data Manager or FieldFlo.
2. 6. 1. Starting WellFlo
To start up WellFlo, simply click the WellFlo start menu option. WellFlo will run up and if you
have selected to do so, will load in the last well that you were working with. Now go to the
WellFlo section of the manual to find out what to do next.
2. 6. 2. Starting Well Data Manager

To start up Well Data Manager, simply click the Well Data Manager start menu option. Well Data
Manager will run up in conjunction with WellFlo and if you have selected to do so, will load in
the last set of data that you were working with. Now go to the Well Data Manager section of the
manual to find out what to do next.
2. 6. 3. Starting FieldFlo
To start up FieldFlo, simply click the FieldFlo start menu option. FieldFlo will run up and if you
have selected to do so, will load in the last field that you were working with. Now go to the
FieldFlo section of the manual to find out what to do next.
2.7.
Security Errors
FloSystem uses the Globetrotter Inc. FlexLM licence Manager to handle its security, and the
security of the supplied valve licence data. Should a licence exception occur FlexLM will
generate an error dialog box informing you of the problem.
Further details on FlexLM are given in the accompanying EPSFLEX.PDF manual, available on
the distribution CD.
2. 6. Starting FloSystem
For clients who have preferred to retain the previous FloSystem security options, e.g. dongles,
then coverage of these issues are available in previous version issues of this manual.
24
On-Line Help
Chapter 3- On-Line Help

3.1.
Using Help
If there is something that you do not understand, there are three levels of Help with the
FloSystem package. The most immediate is the on-line Help system, described here. The second
level is the user documentation, which you are now reading. The third level is to ask EPS, see
EPS Support.
3. 1. 1. FloSystem Help System

The FloSystem Help has help on all aspects of the FloSystem programs, from answering simple
queries on what each menu item means, to describing the procedures for performing such actions
as defining your own units system. The Help is an interactive document, featuring indices and
sub-indices to browse through, technical term glossary, and cross-references from one topic to
another. It operates through the standard Windows 3 Help utility, so it will be familiar to users
who have requested help from similar Windows 3 applications. The WellFlo, Well Data Manager
and FieldFlo programs have a Help option as the last item on their menu bars. With the exception
of Well Data Manager, these produce pull-down menus containing the following options:
Figure : 3.1.1 - 1 Help Menu - FieldFlo
Index
On selecting this option, you will get a full list of all the help topics available for FloSystem. This
answers questions like "What can I get help on?"
Keyboard
This option will give you a list of the various key combinations that may be used in FloSystem.
This answers questions like "What keys can I use to start up Gas Allocation?"
Commands
This will give an explanation of all the menu selections that FloSystem offers. This answers
questions like "What does the menu option File/Page Setup do?"
25
Chapter 3 - On-Line Help
The WellFlo Help menu is identical, except that the About FieldFlo... option becomes About
WellFlo... In Well Data Manager this option is simply labelled About... and is the only option
available.
On-Line Help
Procedures
This will give a list of various operations that can be performed using FloSystem, and how to
achieve them. This answers questions like "How would I calculate a Skin Factor?"
Screen Regions
This option will list all the various regions on the screen and explain what they are used for. This
answers questions like "What is the Toolbox for?"
Glossary
This option will list all the technical terms used in FloSystem. This answers questions like "What
does nodal analysis mean?"
Using Help
This option will show you how to use the Help system. This answers questions like "How does
the Help system work?"
About FieldFlo.../About WellFlo.../About...
In each case, this option will display the copyright notice for the relevant FloSystem programs.
To find out more details on how the Help system works, either select the Using Help menu option
and find out from there, or see Microsoft Windows User Guide, Chapter 2, Basic Skills, Using
Windows Help section.
3. 1. 2. Context Sensitive Help

The FloSystem programs feature context sensitive help, as well as the static menus described
above (i.e. for WellFlo and FieldFlo options). The F1 key can be pressed in any dialog box or
message box, to allow you to get a fuller explanation of the current dialog box. The F1 key can
also be used if you pull down a menu and highlight the menu option you want to find out about.
If the SHIFT key is held down and F1 is pressed, the mouse cursor turns into a query pointer like
this
. The cursor can now be placed over the screen region you want to learn about, and the
left mouse button clicked. This will present you with a description of the region.
3. 1. 2. Context Sensitive Help
The Help system for Well Data Manager is accessed by typing F1, while operating in any of the
Data Manager dialog windows; however, the SHIFT + F1 feature is not available.
26
Using the FloSystem Interface
Chapter 4- Using the FloSystem Interface

The FloSystem programs have been designed so that you can decide the way that you want to
work on a system, not the way we think you ought to. All the actions you may wish to perform
are available from the FloSystem menus at all times, as is the diagram of the model that you are
currently working on. For example, in FieldFlo you can mask out a well, re-build the model to
take account of the new setup, and view the new production curves for the main manifold in the
model, all from the same screen, without having a maze of menus to negotiate.
This chapter describes the most important overall FloSystem interface features. These are the use
of WellFlo within FieldFlo, WellFlo in conjunction with Well Data Manager, the Units system,
the output of hard copy, and the use of the graphing sub-system.
4.1.
Working With WellFlo and FieldFlo
4. 1. 1. FloSystem Program Structure

FieldFlo uses WellFlo in a number of places to provide services that FieldFlo needs and that
WellFlo has. Sometimes you will be able to see that link in operation, other times it will be done
behind the scenes for you.
The obvious places are in the WellFlo and Edit Surface Facilities modes. These two options
start up WellFlo's graphical editor with the current well or surface facilities data file, and allow
you to edit this data. On completion of this editing, you will return to where you left off in
FieldFlo.
4. 1. 2. FloSystem Data Structure

When you want to design a new well for inclusion into FieldFlo there are two ways of doing it.
Both methods result in a file being created with the extension .WFL containing the complete well
description.
You can first design it in WellFlo and save it to disk, and then add a well to your field
description in FieldFlo and rename its file to match the name you gave the file when you
saved it in WellFlo.
Alternatively, you can add a well to the field description in FieldFlo, name it as required, and
apply the WellFlo tool to the node. You can now use WellFlo to design the well.
4.2.
Working With WellFlo and Well Data Manager
4. 2. 1. FloSystem Program Structure

Well Data Manager operates in conjunction with WellFlo. Double-clicking on a well or layer
name in a spreadsheet transfers control to WellFlo, with the selected well loaded. If the well
model is then altered and saved, the changes are effective for all subsequent operations in the
Data Manager spreadsheet.
27
Chapter 4 - Using the FloSystem Interface
The behind-the-scenes work is done during the WellPcg, Build and Allocate stages of FieldFlo.
Here FieldFlo needs the services of WellFlo to calculate well and pipeline characteristics and
will use WellFlo automatically to get its results.
4.3.
FloSystem Units System
FloSystem Units is a system that allows the user to select or create their own units of
measurement. Standard sets of oilfield and SI units are supplied with FloSystem. The supplied
sets themselves cannot be altered. However, copies can be made and subsequently edited to
create a customised units systems.
The Units option, which exists in both FieldFlo and WellFlo on the Configure menu, invokes the
Units System dialog box. In both programs the systems are operationally identical. The units
data displayed are those relevant to either FieldFlo or WellFlo, as appropriate.
The Well Data Manager deals with units in a different manner. The unit system applied by the
Well and Layer Data Managers is determined by previous configuration of the data within
WellFlo (i.e. WellFlo unit system settings are applied). The VFP Table Generator operates in
Eclipse oilfield or SI units, according to the Units menu item (i.e. user-selected unit system
settings are applied).
The following description is in four parts. First, the terminology and rules of the units system are
explained. This is important for the understanding of what follows. Next, the facility to switch
unit systems is explained. This is followed by the unit customisation section. Lastly, an example
is provided.
4. 3. 1. Units System Terminology and Rules.

It is important that you understand the terminology and associated rules adopted within the Units
System prior to use.
Terms Used in Units System

Unit - a unit of measurement (e.g. ft).
Unit Class - a generic name describing the parameter type or class being measured (e.g.
Length).
Field Name - the data field identifier that is displayed next to each item of numerical data.
(e.g. Measured depth).
Standard Unit - one unit in each Unit Class that cannot be edited and comes supplied with
the system (e.g. ft in the length class, psia within the pressure class.
Rules of Units System
1. A field name can only be in one unit class (e.g. Measured depth is in the length class).
2. Only one unit in a unit class can be assigned to each data field name (e.g. Measured depth
can (obviously) not be in ft and m at the same time). However, different units can be assigned
to different data field names from the same unit class (e.g. Wellbore radius and Measured
depth both have units from the length class, but one could be assigned in inches, the other in
ft, or m, etc.
3. Each unit class contains one uneditable standard unit. Other units can be derived from this
and added to the class. The exception to this is the unit class None. This class contains
dimensionless units that not usually assigned a name (e.g. skin factors, penetration ratio, etc.).
28
4. 3. FloSystem Units System
A Units System - The complete set of units assigned, consisting of a unit for each field name
(e.g. the oilfield units system, the SI (Canada) system, etc.).

4. The Units Systems supplied with FloSystem are locked and cannot be altered. However, they
can be copied and altered under a new name. You can then build your own customised units
system by editing or defining new units.
4. 3. 2. Switching Units Systems

By choosing the Unit System option from the Configure menu (available in both FieldFlo and
WellFlo), the Units System dialog box, Figure 4.3.2 - 1, Units System Dialog Box (for
Selection), on page 29, is displayed.
Figure : 4.3.2 - 1 Units System Dialog Box (for Selection)
The initial Units System dialogue box contains a list of Units Systems currently available to
you. This list contains FloSystem-supplied and any user-defined units systems.
The units system highlighted is the one currently active. By highlighting another system and
choosing OK, the units of measurement assigned within the newly-selected system will be
used throughout FloSystem.
You can delete systems previously created by choosing the system you wish to delete from
those listed and clicking Delete. You cannot delete a supplied (locked) units system.
4. 3. 3. Creating or Editing a Units System

A Units System can be altered (customised) in three ways:
An alternative unit may be selected for association with a data field.
The definition of an existing unit can be changed.
A new unit can be created.
These customisations can be made to an existing non-supplied units system and saved under the
same name or can be made to any existing units system and saved under a new name.
Select Customise in the Units System dialog box Figure 4.3.2 - 1, Units System Dialog Box (for
Selection), on page 29). The dialog box expands to look like Figure 4.3.3 - 1, Units System
Dialog Box (for Customisation), on page 30.
29
4. 3. 2. Switching Units Systems
You can customise the units system selected by using Customise. See Section 4. 3. 3
Creating or Editing a Units System, on page 29.
Figure : 4.3.3 - 1 Units System Dialog Box (for Customisation)
Referring to Figure 4.3.3 - 1, Units System Dialog Box (for Customisation), on page 30, there
are now four main sections within the Units System dialog box.
1. The Units Systems area (top left) lists the existing Units Systems. By means of the control
buttons (to the right) you can select a different units system.
2. From the Unit Edit and Unit Creation area, bottom left, you can create/edit units and save
them to a new or existing units system.
4. The Unit Association area, bottom right contains information about the units, unit classes
and data fields in the selected unit system. From here you can choose the unit to be associated
with a data field.
These are explained in the following sections.
Units Systems Area
Highlight the units system that you want to work with or customise. If you start to customise a
system, then switch to another one, a warning is displayed, Figure 4.3.3 - 2, Units Save
Changes? Dialog Box, on page 30.
Figure : 4.3.3 - 2 Units Save Changes? Dialog Box
If you select Yes, then the Save unit system dialog box (see Figure 4.3.3 - 9, Save Units System
Dialog Box, on page 34) appears. If you select No, then any changes are lost. Choosing Cancel
will return you to the units system you were editing.
30
3. From the Text Description area, top right, you can enter or edit textual information about the
units systems you create.

Text Description
This allows you to enter text information relating to the selected Units System. The name of the
creator and three lines of comment can be input. These lines can be longer than the width of the
display box - they scroll along if you type more.
Unit Association Area
This area contains information about the units, unit classes and data fields in the selected unit
system. From here you can change the unit associated with any data field name, provided there is
a choice available (see Display field names).
The radio buttons give options on what information is displayed, and also the manner by which
associations are changed. There are two sets of options:
Display unit classes/Display field names.
Display description/Display symbol. This option is only meaningful if Display field names is
selected in the first option.
Display unit classes - if this is chosen, the other display options are redundant. Only Unit
Classes are listed (Figure 4.3.3 - 3, Display Unit Class, on page 31). Highlight a unit class to
see the corresponding unit displayed in the Associated unit box.
In this example, the Unit Class Temperature is selected. The Associated unit box shows that
Deg C is the unit currently associated with this class. You cannot change the associated unit in
this display mode - this is covered next.
Display field names - if this option is chosen, all the data field names used in FieldFlo or
WellFlo are listed alongside their unit class. In Figure 4.3.3 - 4, Display Field Names, on page
31. Highlight any line to see the corresponding unit displayed in the Associated unit box.
Note: This is where you can change the units of individual parameters.
Figure : 4.3.3 - 4 Display Field Names
31
Figure : 4.3.3 - 3 Display Unit Class

Figure 4.3.3 - 4, Display Field Names, on page 31, shows the screen with Display Field Names
selected, listing some of the field names and their unit classes. The highlighted data field name
Surface temperature is in degrees C. The other two field names listed in the temperature class
could be assigned the same unit or any other available unit of temperature.
Note: Provided the current system is not a locked one, you can assign an alternative unit by
toggling the available associated units (assuming a choice is available).
In Figure 4.3.3 - 5, Changing the unit assigned to a parameter, on page 32, the unit associated
with Surface temperature is being changed to degrees F.
Figure : 4.3.3 - 5 Changing the unit assigned to a parameter
Note: Initially, all parameters in a given unit class have the same associated unit (Figure 4.3.3 4, Display Field Names, on page 31: all temperatures are in degrees C). If you change the unit
associated with an individual data field name, it will override the blanket Unit Class
assignment for that parameter (e.g. you might assign degrees F to Surface temperature; the other
temperatures would still be in degrees C unless you changed them individually).
Display symbol is only available if Display Field Names has been chosen. Field names are listed
as symbols or abbreviations instead of full names. See Figure 4.3.3 - 6, Display Symbols, on
page 32.
Figure : 4.3.3 - 6 Display Symbols
Unit Edit and Creation area

From this area you can create and edit units, and save the new or modified units system.
If you only have the EPS-supplied (locked) units systems, you must make a copy of one of the
systems as a basis for modification. Highlight your base system in the Units systems area. Type
in any new text description, then select Save unit system and enter a new name (Figure 4.3.3 - 9,
Save Units System Dialog Box, on page 34). You have now created a new system which is not
locked, and can make modifications to this. Remember to save it again after you have made your
changes.
32
Display description is only available if Display Field Names has been chosen. Field names are
listed in full instead as symbols or abbreviations. See Figure 4.3.3 - 4, Display Field Names, on
page 31.

The following commands are available:
Create New Unit
This option allows you to add a new unit to any unit class selected with the highlighted bar in the
Unit association area. The new unit will be defined as a function of the internal unit of that
class ("internal units" are the units used in the equations in FloSystem).
The button brings up the Create new unit dialog box, Figure 4.3.3 - 7, Create New Unit Dialog
Box, on page 33.
Figure : 4.3.3 - 7 Create New Unit Dialog Box
In the Create New Unit dialog box you specify a name for the new unit and define it in relation
to the internal unit by means of a Shift and Multiplication factor. The internal unit name is
displayed for reference at top right (psia in the Figure).
For example, in Figure 4.3.3 - 7, Create New Unit Dialog Box, on page 33, a new unit pp is to
be created in the Pressure unit class, based on the internal unit psia. The relationship between pp
units and psia units has been defined as follows:
no. in pp units = (no. in psia units + 0.5) * 2.0
This new unit will now be available as a choice for all parameters belonging to the same unit
class. In the example, you do not need to define pp again for each pressure parameter.
Edit unit
This option allows you to alter the definition of an existing unit belonging to any unit class
highlighted in the Unit association area. The unit to be edited is selected in the Associated unit
edit box.
Note: You can only edit a unit that you have created - the supplied units are "locked" and
inviolable. For example, you cannot redefine the conversion for the supplied kPa pressure unit.
You would have to create a new unit with a (slightly) different name (e.g. KPa).
The button brings up the Edit existing unit dialog box, Figure 4.3.3 - 8, Edit Existing Unit
Dialog Box, on page 34.
You can change the unit name or the shift/multiplication factors in this dialog box.
33
so that, for instance, 201 pp is equivalent to 100 psia.
Figure : 4.3.3 - 8 Edit Existing Unit Dialog Box
Save unit system

This option allows you to save the customisations that have been made to a units system, either
under the same or a new system name. You cannot overwrite the EPS "locked" systems. If you
wish to base a new system on these, you must make a copy by saving it to a new name before you
will be allowed to customise.
The WellFlo database is stored in three files: WFDBASE, WFHEADER and WFUNITS, extension
.UNT. The three equivalent FieldFlo database file names are FFDBASE, FFHEADER and FFUNITS,
extension .UNT. They are normally found in the home directory, but can be located elsewhere
(See Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17).
Note: Installing a new version of FloSystem on top of an earlier version (i.e. into the same
directory) will overwrite any customised units that you may have created in the previous version.
You can back up the *.UNT files first and try reusing them, but they may no longer be compatible
if new units have been defined in the upgrade release.
Save defaults
The Save defaults option allows you to assign a set of default values, one for each parameter in
WellFlo or FieldFlo, with each Units System.
A standard set of default values comes supplied with FloSystem and user-created units systems
are automatically associated with this standard set until a new set of default values is configured
with this option.
By choosing the Save defaults option, the values currently entered in the data fields throughout
the program are saved as the default values associated with the current unit system.
Thus when creating a new well, for example, the values initially displayed in the data fields will
be those from the set of default values already assigned to the Unit System being used. You can
create a new set of defaults by placing new values in these data fields and then entering the Units
section and choosing this option.
There are local Defaults options within various parts of the product, e.g. in the PVT and IPR
sections. These options act to load the default values from the current units system into the
appropriate data fields.
34
Figure : 4.3.3 - 9 Save Units System Dialog Box

Exit units section
Exiting the Customise mode of the Units System dialog box using the OK button results in a
message box being displayed (Figure 4.3.3 - 10, Exit Units Section Message, on page 35). This
warns you that any changes you have made are only valid for the current FloSystem session
unless you save the units system. Hit Yes to go to the Save Units System Dialog Box (Figure 4.3.3
- 9, Save Units System Dialog Box, on page 34) to save the system, or press Cancel to return
to the dialog box to review the changes you have made to see if they need to be saved.
Figure : 4.3.3 - 10 Exit Units Section Message
4. 3. 4. Example Units Systems.
4. 3. 4. Example Units Systems.
The two figures in this section show the way in which Units can be customised. Figure 4.3.4 - 1,
Analysis Control Dialog Box - Oilfield Units, on page 35 shows the standard oilfield units
system in operation, for the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box. Figure 4.3.4 - 2, Analysis
Control Dialog Box - Customised Units, on page 36 shows the same data set but with a
customised units system. This illustrates how you can mix units within a unit class (the
temperatures being a mix of deg. F and deg. C), how you can set all fields to the same unit (the
six flowrates to cubic metres per day), and how you can define your own unit, (the pressure unit
pp).
Figure : 4.3.4 - 1 Analysis Control Dialog Box - Oilfield Units
35
Figure : 4.3.4 - 2 Analysis Control Dialog Box - Customised Units
4.4.
Getting Hard Copy
Printing from FloSystem is similar to printing out from most other Windows programs. The
device you print to can be any of the hundreds of printers and plotters that Windows supports. In
the following discussion, the word printer will be used to cover any hard copy device, whether it
is a dot-matrix printer, a laser printer, or a plotter, as FloSystem will use each device to its best
ability. All FloSystem products have the same three printer options (and the same as most other
Windows products) available under:
the main File menu - to print a hard copy of the system diagram (the well diagram or the field
network)
Figure : 4.4.0 - 1 FloSystem Printing Options
4. 4. 1. Installing a Printer
This first stage will already have been done by you when you initially installed Windows. If you
want to install further printers or plotters, this can be done through Settings, Printers option of the
Windows start menu.
36
4. 4. Getting Hard Copy
the plot File menus - to print hard copy of the plot or graph (e.g. inflow/outflow, pressure vs
depth, etc.)

Note: Always make sure you have the most recent version of your particular printer driver. The
manufacturers issue frequent upgrades, which can be easily downloaded from their web-sites. A
newly purchased printer may have been on the shelves for some time, and may not have the latest
driver. Please check this out before reporting printer problems.
4. 4. 2. Printer Setup
When you select this command from a File menu, this dialog box appears:
Figure : 4.4.2 - 1 Print Setup Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to change the default settings that are set up for a printer. The default
printer (or the last printer you selected if you have used this dialog box before) is highlighted.
You might want to print to the LaserJet in landscape mode instead of your default portrait
orientation. If so, change the setting in the Orientation area. Now you can press OK on the
FloSystem Print Setup dialog box, and these changes will be effected.
These changes are local to the particular FloSystem program you are currently using, and will
only last until the program is closed down: so if you set WellFlo to landscape, FieldFlo will still
print in portrait mode until you change it in FieldFlo. Your word processor, too, will still use the
page in portrait mode, unless you change the setting there.
4. 4. 3. Page Setup
The Page Setup facility differs slightly between the plot File menu (i.e. for graphs) and the main
File menu (i.e. for the system diagram).
37
4. 4. 2. Printer Setup
The Page Setup command allows you to control the size of the image that comes out on the
paper, and lets you set up headers and footers on the page.

Page Setup for the plots
Figure : 4.4.3 - 1 Page Setup Dialog Box for Plots
The Header and Footer edit boxes are where you enter the text that you wish to appear at the
top and bottom of the page. Choose the font to be used via the Edit Fonts option on the plot
menu (Figure 4.5.2 - 4, Graphing Edit Menu, on page 43). Note that the graph Header and
Footer edit boxes only recognise the &d and &t abbreviations for the date and time
respectively (see the notes below for the system diagram).
The Margin edit boxes allow you to specify the margin around the page.
The Size option buttons allow you to select the size that the system will appear on the paper:
Screen Size will print the screen at the actual window size, so if your plot window is only 1
inch square, you will only get a 1 inch square diagram.
Fit to Page (default) will print the current screen blown up (or blown down if you have a
large monitor!) to fit the page (within the margins), without distorting the aspect ratio.
Fill Page is similar, except that the page will be filled completely (within the margins)
without respecting the aspect ratio.
All these printing options print the image centred on the page.
Figure : 4.4.3 - 2 Page Setup Dialog Box for System Diagram (WellFlo Version)
Header and Footer: for the system diagram, the text you enter here always appears (centred)
as 12-point Times Roman (or the nearest equivalent font that your printer can find). You can
enter special codes to the text to allow you to enhance the output:
38
4. 4. 3. Page Setup
Page Setup for the system diagram

&vEnters the current viewing mode name into the header, e.g. "Total Oil Production".
&fEnters the current file name, e.g. "XYZ001.WFL".
&nEnters the current file description, e.g. "EPS Big Gusher Field".
&dEnters the current date in the format set up on the Control Panel International settings, e.g.
"27-04-1991".
&tEnters the current time in the format set up on the Control Panel International settings, e.g.
"17:34:22".
The Whole Well Diagram (WellFlo) or Whole Field Diagram (FieldFlo) options will fit the
entire well or field diagram (whether it is all on-screen or partly off-screen) into the page.
The remaining options have the same functions as for the plots (described above), except in this
case, Fit to Page is entitled Current Window and Fill Page is entitled Fill Page with Window. In
WellFlo, the Fill Page option is disabled unless the well diagram is displayed in icon form and
within FieldFlo, this option is always disabled.
4. 4. 4. Printing
To get your hard copy on your selected device with the desired page setup, select the Print
option.
Note: A useful tip if you use a package like CorelDraw! or Word for Windows that allows you to
read in HPGL files is to configure an HP Plotter attached to a file (Figure 4.4.3 - 1, Page Setup
Dialog Box for Plots, on page 38) as your current printer. You can then print the current
FloSystem diagram to a file (the Windows printer driver will ask you for a name for this file), and
once FloSystem completes its printing, you can start up your other package and use its import
facilities to read in the file you just printed.
4.5.
FloSystem Graphs
4. 4. 4. Printing
All FloSystem programs use the same graphing package for the plotting of their output. A sample
graph is illustrated in Figure 4.5.0 - 1, FloSystem Sample Graph, on page 39:
Figure : 4.5.0 - 1 FloSystem Sample Graph
39

4. 5. 1. Graphing Window Screen Regions
The regions marked on the above graph are as follows:
1 - Graph Y-Axis
This is the Y-axis. It can be turned off or have other attributes altered by double-clicking on the
axis or selecting the Edit Y-Axis menu option. See Section Edit Y-Axis, on page 44, for a
description of this option. The character fonts can be selected via the Edit Fonts option.
Note: Axis attributes for the X-, Y- and T- axes can optionally be retained between successive plots
(to avoid having to reset the scaling each time, for example), by enabling the Save graph axis
changes switch in the Preferences option on the main Configure menu. Also See Section Graph
Templates, on page 42.
2 - Graph Title
These lines display the title of the graph. The title can be turned off or have other attributes
altered by double-clicking on the title or selecting the Edit Title menu option. See Section Edit
X-Axis, on page 43, for a description of this option. The character fonts can be selected via the
Edit Fonts option.
3 - Graph Legend
The legend describes the lines on the graph. The legend can be turned off or have other attributes
altered by double-clicking on the legend or selecting the Edit Legend menu option, to be
described later. It can be repositioned by positioning the mouse over it and dragging it around.
See Section Edit Legend, on page 44, for a description of this option. The character fonts can
be selected via the Edit Fonts option.
5 - Graph Co-ordinates
This is the co-ordinate display. It can be turned off or have other attributes altered by doubleclicking on the coordinates or selecting the Edit Co-ordinates menu option. See Section Edit
Co-ordinates, on page 45 for a description of this option.
6 - Graph Description
This is the description box. It contains detailed information on the lines and the graph. In this
example, is displays the Production Index and AOF of the three curves. It can be turned off or
have other attributes altered by double-clicking on the description or selecting the Edit
Description menu option. See Section Edit Description, on page 45, for a description of this
option. The character fonts are the same as those for the legend, and can be selected via the Edit
Fonts option.
7 - Graph Zoom Region Example
Figure 4.5.0 - 1, FloSystem Sample Graph, on page 39 is what the graphing window looks like
when a Zoom Region is in progress. See Section Zoom Region, on page 48, for a description
of this command.
8 - Graph T-Axis
40
4. 5. 1. Graphing Window Screen Regions
4 - Graph X-Axis
This is the X-axis. It can be turned off or have other attributes altered by double-clicking on the
axis or selecting the Edit X-Axis menu option. See Section Edit X-Axis, on page 43, for a

This is the T-axis. It can be turned off or have other attributes altered by double-clicking on the
axis or selecting the Edit T-Axis menu option. See Section Edit T-Axis, on page 44, for a
4. 5. 2. Graphing Menu Bar

The Graphing Window's menu bar has four options (including Help), as illustrated in Figure
4.5.0 - 1, FloSystem Sample Graph, on page 39. Each option is described as follows:
File Menu
This menu option displays the following pull-down menu:
Figure : 4.5.2 - 1 Graphing File Menu
The Page Setup..., Print... and Printer Setup... options have already been described in Getting
Hard Copy.
Copy and Export
The Copy option copies the current FloSystem graph/plot to the Windows clipboard, from where
it can be pasted into other applications (e.g. Word document).
Selecting the Export option generates the Graphic Viewer and Compression Utility dialog
window, where graphic files can be captured for export to other applications in a range of
formats. Refer to Figure 4.5.2 - 2, Graphic Viewer and Compression Utility, on page 41.
Figure : 4.5.2 - 2 Graphic Viewer and Compression Utility
41

The following options are available from the Graphic Viewer short menu:
File/Load: Load and view any previously saved GIF (*.gif), JPEG (*.jpg), DIB (*.bmp) or
TIFF (*.tif) file in the Graphic Viewer. This is accomplished via a standard Windows Look In
and Open file dialog.
File/Save As: Save any currently loaded or captured image in the Graphic Viewer as a GIF
(*.gif), JPEG (*.jpg), DIB (*.bmp) or TIFF (*.tif) file as required. This is accomplished via a
standard Windows Save In and Save file dialog, with drop-down menu options for each File
Type.
File/Exit: Close the Graphic Viewing and Compression Utility and return to the current
graph/plot.
Edit/Capture: This option copies the current plot window in FloSystem (e.g. WellFlo
Pressure versus Depth plot) into the Graphic Viewer.
Help/Graphic Viewer Help: This opens the Graphic Viewer and Compression Utility
dedicated Help file.
Help About: This shows the version and copyright data of the utility.
Graph Templates
The Save Template option displays a standard Windows dialog to Save files, with the default file
extension (*.gtp). Entering a file name and selecting OK will save the current graph settings to
that file.
Figure : 4.5.2 - 3 Graph template selection dialog box
From this list, check the graphing features saved in the template that are to be applied to the
current graph.
Note: The Page Margins option includes headers and footers.
42
The Load Template option displays a standard Windows dialog to Open files. On selecting a
template (*.gtp) file the dialog box shown in Figure 4.5.2 - 3, Graph template selection dialog
box, on page 42 is generated.

Edit Menu
This menu option displays the following pull down menu:
Figure : 4.5.2 - 4 Graphing Edit Menu
Edit X-Axis
Selecting this option from the menu, or double-clicking the X-axis on the graph, creates this
dialog box where the appearance of the X-axis (i.e. lower horizontal axis) can be altered:
Figure : 4.5.2 - 5 Edit X Axis Dialog Box
The Min Value and Max Value edit boxes allow you to set up the two ends of the scale.
The Label edit box allows you to change the label underneath the axis.
The Ticks edit box allows you to specify how many ticks marks there will be along the Xaxis.
The Round check box turns on and off cosmetic rounding. This alters the Min Value and
Max Value by rounding them to values that will give neater axis labels. For example, ticking
this option for the pictured graph may change the range of the axis to be 0 to 200,000 in steps
of 50,000.
The Grid check box controls whether or not vertical grid lines are drawn up from the X-axis.
The Log Scale check box turns on and off log scaling on the X-axis.
The Show Label check box controls whether or not the label is displayed below the X-axis. It
will be displayed and printed in 8 point Helvetica font, or the nearest approximation that your
screen, printer or plotter will allow.
The Show Ticks check box controls whether the tick marks are drawn below the axis.
43
The Colour drop- down list box allows you to select what colour the axis and its associated
text will be drawn in.

When you are happy with your changes, press OK to apply them to the graph, or Cancel to abort.
Note: X- , Y- and T-axis attributes can, optionally, be retained between successive plots of the
same type (to avoid having to reset the scaling each time, for example), by enabling the Save
graph axis changes switch in the Preferences option on the main Configure menu.
This facility is currently available for inflow/outflow, depth, and performance analysis plots.
Edit Y-Axis
This brings up a dialog box identical to the one for Edit X-Axis, except that any changes applied
here will affect the Y-axis display (i.e. left-hand vertical axis).
Edit T-Axis
This also brings up a dialog box identical to the one for Edit X-Axis and Edit Y-Axis, except that
any changes applied here will affect the T-axis display (i.e. Top axis).
Edit Legend
Selecting this option from the menu, or double-clicking the legend on the graph, creates this
dialog box for altering the appearance of the legend:
Figure : 4.5.2 - 6 Edit Legend Dialog Box
The Colour drop-down list box allows you to select what colour the box around the legend
and its associated text will be drawn in.
The Show Legend check box turns the legend display on and off. It will be displayed and
printed in 8 point Helvetica font, or the nearest approximation that your screen, printer or
plotter will allow.
Figure : 4.5.2 - 7 Edit Title Dialog Box
The Show Title check box turns the title display on and off. It will be displayed and printed in
18 point Helvetica font, or the nearest approximation that your screen, printer or plotter will
allow.
44
Edit Title
Selecting this option from the menu, or double-clicking the title above the graph, creates this
dialog box for altering the appearance of the title:

The Colour drop-down list box allows you to select what colour the title text will be drawn
in.
The Title multi-line edit box allows you to change the title displayed above the graph.
Edit Description
Selecting this option from the menu, or double-clicking the description box below the graph,
creates this dialog box for altering the appearance of the description box:
Figure : 4.5.2 - 8 Edit Description Dialog Box
The Show Description check box turns the description display on and off. It will be
displayed and printed in 8 point Helvetica font, or the nearest approximation that your screen,
printer or plotter will allow.
The Colour drop-down list box allows you to select what colour the description text will be
drawn in.
The Description multi-line edit box allows you to change the description displayed below the
graph.
Figure : 4.5.2 - 9 Edit Coordinates Dialog Box
The Colour drop-down list box allows you to select what colour the coordinates will be
drawn in.
The Show Co-ordinates check box turns the coordinate display on and off. It will be
displayed and printed in 8 point Helvetica font, or the nearest approximation that your screen,
printer or plotter will allow.
45
Edit Co-ordinates
Selecting this option from the menu, or double-clicking the legend on the graph, creates this
dialog box for altering the appearance of the coordinates:

Edit Plot
Selecting this option allows you to alter various features of the plot, such as the background
colour, and the Registry options for line width, axis rounding and co-ordinate display on a new
graph as illustrated in Figure 4.5.2 - 10, Edit Plot Options Dialog Box, on page 46.
Figure : 4.5.2 - 10 Edit Plot Options Dialog Box
The data entry fields are as follows:

The Background drop-down list box allows users to select a white or pastel background
from a list of available colors. The selected color is applied to the current graph and is also
made the default option for new graphs.
The Line Width field is used to set the width of the solid dataset lines on a new graph (and
also those with an unaltered width on the current graph), from 1 (default) up to 5 pixels .
The Axis Rounding check box is used to select whether the values used to generate the axes
on the current graph and new graphs are rounded by default.
The Co-ordinates check box is used to select whether or not the co-ordinates window on a
the curent graph and new graphs is initially shown.
Edit Fonts
You can select the character fonts to be used for the various textual and numerical parts of the
plot. They will appear on the screen plot and hard copy. Reasonable defaults are provided, but the
appearance of the hard copy plot often varies considerably with the printer (and driver) in use.
The font selection is written to the FLOSYS3X.INI file and is therefore permanent until changed.
Figure : 4.5.2 - 11 Edit Fonts Menu
You can select a different font for each of the parts of the plot listed. Most word processing and
graphics packages install their own font sets. Your font list may therefore contain a far bigger
selection of fonts than is catered for by the printer you are using. If you select a font that the
printer does not have, it will (in principle) select the closest matching one from its library. This
sometimes produces surprising results on hard copy, even though it looks OK on screen!
46
The Fonts option leads to another menu:

If you have problems with a selected font here are a few suggestions:
Select a different one (e.g. something modest like Arial or Times Roman).
Enable the True Type option in Printer Setup (if it has one). For instance, the Laserjet 4 has
a Print TrueType as Graphics switch on the Print Setup Options dialog box. The printer
will then reproduce the character as if it was part of the plot graphic instead of a separate
character entity.
Edit Dataset
As you can see from Figure 4.5.2 - 4, Graphing Edit Menu, on page 43, there is one entry in
this menu for each of the lines on the curve. Dataset 1 corresponds to the first curve in the menu,
(the Vogel Curve in this example), Dataset 2 to the second, and so on. To alter the appearance of
a particular dataset, you may double click on a Dataset line in the Graph Legend box (see Figure
4.5.0 - 1, FloSystem Sample Graph, on page 39), or the Edit Dataset option from the menu.
Either action brings up the Edit Data set dialog box:
The Title edit box allows you to change the title displayed in the legend box on the graph.
The Point Colour drop-down list box allows you to select what colour the points on the
graph will be drawn in, if you have checked the Show Points check box.
The Point Shape drop-down list allows you to select what shape will be used to indicate the
points on the graph, if you have checked the Show Points check box.
The Line Colour drop-down list box allows you to select what colour the lines on the graph
will be drawn in, if you have checked the Show Lines check box.
The Line Style drop-down list allows you to select what style will be used to join up the
points on the graph, if you have checked the Show Lines check box.
The Fill Colour drop-down list box allows you to select what colour the area under the graph
will be drawn in, if you have checked the Fill Area check box.
The Fill Hatch drop-down list allows you to select what hatching fill style will be used to
colour the area under the graph, if you have checked the Fill Area check box.
Line width enables you to vary the thickness of the line representing the selected data set (if
Show lines is on). Thickness 1 is normal. Thicker lines usually look too thick on the screen
plot, but may be just right on hard copy. It is worth experimenting, particularly for faxes and
overhead transparencies.
The Show Set check box can be used to turn on and off the display of a curve on the graph.
The Show Lines check box turns on and off the lines joining up the points on the curve.
47
Figure : 4.5.2 - 12 Edit Dataset Dialog Box

The Show Points check box turns on and off the drawing of the points in the current dataset.
The Fill Area check box turns on and off the filling of the area under the graph.
Zoom Menu
This menu option displays the following pull down menu:
Figure : 4.5.2 - 13 Graphing Zoom Menu
Zoom In/Zoom Out

These menu options zooms in or out respectively, on the centre of the graph by a factor of two.
Zoom Region
This option turns the mouse cursor into a cross-hair cursor. You can now select a region of the
graph to zoom into by placing the cursor at one corner of the rectangle that you want to zoom in
on, pressing and holding the left mouse button down, and dragging out a rectangle to cover the
area you want to zoom in on. See Figure 4.5.0 - 1, FloSystem Sample Graph, on page 39 for an
example of what the screen looks like during a Zoom Region.
Please note that these three zooming options will not zoom to the exact size you wanted if you
have checked the Round or Log Scale check boxes in the Edit X, Y or T Axis dialog boxes
(refer to Figure 4.5.2 - 5, Edit X Axis Dialog Box, on page 43), as your new axes sizes will be
altered to suit the rounded or logarithmic scales.
Zoom Normal
If you have got lost with all your zooming in and out, Zoom Normal will take you back to the size
the axes were when the graph was initially created.
48
Introduction to WellFlo
Chapter 5- Introduction to WellFlo

5.1.
WellFlo - General Introduction
WellFlo is a Nodal Analysis program. Its function is to analyse the behaviour of petroleum fluids
in wells. This behaviour is modelled in terms of the pressure and temperature of the fluids, as a
function of flowrate and fluid properties. The program takes as its input a description of the
reservoir, of the well completion (i.e. the hardware within the well), and of the surface hardware
(i.e. pipelines etc.). This is combined with fluid properties data. The program then performs
calculations to determine the pressure and temperature of the fluids. Different modes of operation
can be employed to either solve for flowrate given controlling pressures (typically done for
deliverability calculations), or solving for pressure drops given measured flowrates (typically
done for diagnostic calculations).
5.2.
This Section Of The Manual
The WellFlo section of the manual consists of five chapters, from Chapter 5 Introduction to
WellFlo, on page 49 to Chapter 9 WellFlo Examples, on page 267:
Chapter 5 Introduction to WellFlo, on page 49 introduces the program, in terms of what it
does for the engineer and broadly how to do it.
Chapter 6 WellFlo System Description, on page 53 covers data preparation: how to set up a
model for the well/field ready for calculations.
Chapter 7 WellFlo Analysis Section, on page 177 explains how to actually run calculations,
and gives the background to the calculations.
Chapter 8 Output of WellFlo Results, on page 234 covers output of data: data which was
input (e.g. IPR data in WellFlo), and the results of the computations made.
Chapter 9 WellFlo Examples, on page 267 takes you through three examples of WellFlo.
5.3.
WellFlo Applications
WellFlo calculations are based on Nodal Analysis. There are two main types of Nodal Analysis.
The first is the determination of flowrates from pressures, and the second the determination of
pressures from flowrates. Both use the same type of calculations. The determination of flowrates
is concerned with deliverability calculations, whilst the determination of pressures is concerned
with monitoring or diagnostic applications.
5. 3. 1. Deliverability Applications
1. Calculating the flow potential (or deliverability) of a well. This requires a particular form
of Nodal Analysis. The calculation cannot be made directly, so a technique for determining
the operating point is used, whereby the pressures at a point (node) in the system are
calculated for a range of flowrates, by calculating down from the top of the system, and up
from the bottom. Only one flowrate will give the same pressure at the solution node
calculated in both directions - this is obtained from an intersection of curves.
This flowrate and the corresponding pressure determine the operating point of the system.
49
Chapter 5 - Introduction to WellFlo
An overview of the whole of WellFlo is provided in Setting Up and Running a Well Model, on
page 50.
2. Designing the completion of a well. This is an extension of (1), where the engineer can
calculate deliverability as a function of different sizes of tubing, different perforations, etc.
This allows the optimum completion to be chosen, given that a more expensive completion
must justify itself in terms of higher production. Design facilities also include valve
positioning (for unloading and gas-lift), valve sizing and setting, and ESP selection.
3. Modelling the sensitivity of a well design to different factors which may affect it in the
longer term, such as increasing water production or decreasing reservoir pressure. This may
refine the design work in (2). Such sensitivities may pertain to the reservoir, the well itself,
the surface configuration, or the operating conditions such as wellhead pressure or gas lift
injection rate, which can be controlled. This forms the basis of the FieldFlo calculations.
5. 3. 2. Diagnostic Applications
This alternative mode of calculation is simpler: this is where the flowrate is known, and we
require the pressure at one point given the pressure at another. This is useful for the following
reasons:
1. For comparing measured data with calculated data. This could be for one of several
purposes, such as evaluating the best flow correlation within WellFlo, evaluating "match
parameters" which are impossible to measure, such as pipe roughness, or determining if a
well is behaving the way it is expected to (i.e. to detect faulty components).
2. For monitoring work, such as predicting reservoir pressure from measured surface pressure
and flowrate. This will enable the engineer to see if the system is behaving as predicted, even
though they may not be able to measure all parameters at one time. This contrasts with (1),
where diagnostics are done by comparing real and calculated data.
3. For design work, where it is required to calculate the pressure drop in a system. For example,
to determine whether a given system will be able to flow to surface and still leave enough
pressure to operate surface equipment. Optional facilities are also available to select ESPs
and motors appropriate to the conditions specified, or to space out and size gas lift valves.
5.4.
Setting Up and Running a Well Model
5. 4. 1. What is Involved?
WellFlo requires the setting up of a well and reservoir description, for which reservoir (or
production test) data, well completion, surface facility, and fluid property data are needed. You
also need to make some choices about the model used for PVT, IPR, vertical lift, temperature and
choke calculations. Data is presented on a "need to know" basis, so that if you have chosen a
particular model, you will not be confused by seeing information about alternative models - you
will just see information relating to the chosen one.
You have control over the type of analysis you do, and over the sensitivity variables to be
studied. At the end of calculations, you can store the results as a file which can be recalled later,
and you can also view the results on graphs and make hard copies.
50
5. 3. 2. Diagnostic Applications
This section is to provide a brief overview of what is required to run WellFlo. It is essentially a
highly condensed version of each of the four chapters in this section of the manual.
5. 4. 2. Data Preparation
The following categories of data must be entered:
System data preparation can be done via the Graphical Editor, which allows you to choose
well and surface components from a menu, and build up a pictorial representation of the
model; or via tabular data entry, where you build up the model in tabular form. It is easy to
switch between the two presentation modes. You also set up depth references here.
You must also select a reservoir model for the computation of the IPR. This may consist of up
to 36 separate layers or units. Data entry can be made using either the simple Test Point
model based on production test data; the more complex Layer Parameters model, which uses
the theoretical semi-steady state inflow equation and includes the effects of the various skin
factors; or the direct entry of the productivity indices.
Reservoir fluid PVT data must be entered. There is a choice of:
- Black Oil (with Water Cut (WC) and Gas/Oil Ratio (GOR))
- dry gas (with Water/Gas Ratio (WGR))
- condensate (with WGR and Condensate/Gas Ratio (CGR))
- volatile oil (with WC and GOR).
Correlations are used for the first two fluid types, while condensate and volatile oil systems
are handled by an equation of state. Computed fluid properties can be tuned to measured data,
if you have such data available.
Gas Lift or ESP data can be entered if appropriate (please refer to the WellFlo-ESP section of
the User Guide for operation with pumps).
General Text Data can be added.
When the data model has been set up, you can save the whole data set in one file, with extension
.WFL. WellFlo will prompt you to save before exiting. On start-up, you can also have WellFlo
reload the last file you were working on, if you want to.
5. 4. 3. Analysis
The analysis section consists of a series of windows (or dialog boxes) in which you set up
options for the type of analysis you require. The main options are as follows:
There is a choice of pressure drop calculations (end to end pressure drop, knowing one end
pressure and a flowrate), or of operating point determination (flowrate and pressure at a
given node, knowing both end pressures).
You can run a single base case, or up to two sensitivities, i.e. study the effect on the results of
two independent sets of variables (10 values per set). The choice of variable is limited to
those appropriate to the models you have chosen.
There is a choice of flow correlations (well and flowline), choke correlations and temperature
models, with calibration options.
Gas Lift can be modelled by letting the program predict gas entry depths (either from among
the valves you have specified, or at the deepest possible entry point) according to casing and
tubing pressures, or by "forcing" gas entry at a certain valve regardless of casing and tubing
pressures.
The positioning and sizing of unloading and gas lift valves can be optimised using the Gas
Lift Design option.
51
The range of nodes included in the calculation can be set.
The selection of the most suitable electrical pump can be optimised using the ESP Design
option, as can the setting depth of the ESP, (please refer to the WellFlo-ESP section of this
User Guide).
When the model is set up for calculation, you can again save the setup in the same .WFL file.
You can then calculate the results.
5. 4. 4. Outputting Your Work

The output section allows you to save a complete record of the calculated results and input data
to a file, extension .CLC.
You may also produce a summary of the results in graphical and report listing format, which can
be viewed on screen, and output as hard copy.
The report listing can be saved to disk as a file, extension .RPT, if required.
Since the .CLC file contains all relevant information associated with a set of calculations, the
facility to recall a previous .CLC file means you can review an earlier run on screen or make hard
copy at any time, without having to rerun the calculations.
An option is also provided for the program to write two log files of the calculations (extension
.LOG). These provide more detail than is normally required for a report, and would be useful if
you wished to look more closely at the calculations, either in a text editor or in a spreadsheet.
Otherwise the .LOG option should not be invoked.
Information in both the report and log files is designed to be viewed or printed out with the
Windows text editors Write or WordPad (included with Windows), although many other text
editors can be used. The report can also be generated in a format suitable for import into
spreadsheets or word processors.
Report and .LOG files (if enabled) are written by default to the current well data directory, unless
different paths have been nominated (as described in Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17).
52
WellFlo System Description
Chapter 6- WellFlo System Description

6.1.
Overview Of System Description
This chapter deals with the subject of setting up and storing the WellFlo model you wish to
analyse, and this section serves as an introduction to the types of data involved and the files that
are used to store data and results.
The WellFlo system you wish to analyse consists of several parts. These are:
General data, including the depth reference data that all other well descriptions will be based
on.
The description of the well and surface components.
The fluid properties data.
The reservoir data (Inflow Performance).
The gas lift or ESP data.
The whole of the system description as outlined above, together with the analysis control data
(e.g. choice of sensitivity variable - see Chapter 1), is stored in a single file, which is given the
extension .WFL (binary format) or .WFX (ASCII format). The ASCII format files are only
designed to be used if transferring files between Windows and UNIX applications. Results from
an analysis can be stored in files with the name .CLC. There are also two optional computational
log files for each run, called WELLFLO.LOG and ANALYSIS.LOG. For details on output, see
Chapter 2.
WellFlo Data Files
WellFlo data for each well is stored in a binary file with extension .WFL. This file contains all
the information needed to make a run of WellFlo. An alternative ASCII format, with extension
.WFX, is also available. The .WFX file is compatible with Windows 3, 95, 98, 2000, NT and
UNIX versions of WellFlo. The binary files are not compatible between Windows and UNIX
environments.
You could view or edit the ASCII file with a text editor, but for safety, any changes should be
made from within WellFlo itself. A modified file can be written over the original file, or saved
under a new name.
Keyworded .KWF well definition files are also available for the output of data in the ASCII
format. This format contains the instruction set as shown in Figure 6.2.0 - 1, A section of data
from a .KWF file, on page 54.
53
Chapter 6 - WellFlo System Description
6.2.

[well]
origin=GLDESIGN.WFL
date=27 May 1997
time=09:46
num-nodes=41
num-layers=1
[fluid]
type=oil
oil-gravity=0.848
gas-gravity=0.92
water-gravity=1.021628
oil-corr-gas=glaso 1 0 1 0 1 0
oil-corr-visc=beal+chew 1 0
gas-corr-visc=carr 1 0
[fluid-00]
gas-oil-ratio=1702
water-cut=0.107
[node-00]
type=Separator
name=Outlet Node
length-from-wellhead=698
elevation=88.6
[node-01]
type=Flow Line
name=Flow Line
internal-diameter=0.835
external-diameter=0.896
insulation-diameter=1.2544
6. 2. WellFlo Data Files
Figure : 6.2.0 - 1 A section of data from a .KWF file
54

6. 2. 1. File Menu
All file handling tasks are performed under the File menu option, which is the left-hand most
option on the WellFlo menu bar, as is standard for Windows applications. Like other Windows
applications, this menu contains the set-up options for the program, such as printer defaults. See
Figure 6.2.1 - 1, WellFlo File Menu.
Figure : 6.2.1 - 1 WellFlo File Menu
File New
A new file means that you wish to start a new system. File New will initialise WellFlo to a
minimum initial system description, consisting of four nodes (Figure 6.3.4 - 8, Default Well
System, on page 98), onto which you can build your own system.
If you have been editing a system already - either one you recalled from a file or one you built up
with the editor, then you will be asked if you wish to save the current system. The File Save
dialog box (Figure 6.2.1 - 5, File Save On Exit?, on page 57) will appear. You may answer:
No, in which case the system is lost, or
Cancel, in which case you return to editing, or
If you answer Yes and the file was previously saved, the file will be re-saved (the old one will
be over-written).
If you answer Yes and the system was not previously saved, then the Save As dialog box
appears (Figure 6.2.1 - 4, File Save As Dialog Box, on page 57), so you can choose a name
for the file.
You can see the name of the current file at any time on the WellFlo Title Bar. It will read
WellFlo - (untitled) (as in Figure 6.3.1 - 1, WellFlo Node Editor, on page 66) if you have not
saved this system previously.
This option allows you to open a previously saved file. The File Open dialog box appears (Figure
6.2.1 - 3, File Open Dialog Box, on page 56). Note this is the standard Windows File Open
dialog box, so it will operate just like those in most of your other Windows applications. In this
you see the files available (in the main window), in the currently selected folder (next to Look
in).
Select the file format (.WFL (binary), .WFX (ASCII), or .KWF (ASCII - see WellFlo Data
Files, on page 53)) from the List Files of Type menu at bottom left.
55
6. 2. 1. File Menu
File Open
Figure : 6.2.1 - 2 Selecting File Types
Figure : 6.2.1 - 3 File Open Dialog Box
As with File New, if you have changed the current system and not saved it, you will be prompted
to save before opening the file.
You can change the default directory (the one WellFlo looks in first) by using the Configure
Preferences dialog box.
Note: You will also notice by the WellFlo icons in the above dialog that the .WFL files have been
associated to Open with WellFlo.exe. This can be done under the Options option of the View
menu of Windows Explorer or My Computer. Microsoft Windows help will guide you through
this process.
File Save/Save As
File Save As is used to save data under a specified file name. If you have opened a file, it will not
be over-written unless you specify the same name. The dialog box (Figure 6.2.1 - 4, File Save
As Dialog Box, on page 57) allows you to enter a name for the new file (it is not mandatory to
specify the extension).
This is the standard Windows File Save As dialog box. The other controls operate in a similar
fashion to that described for File Open.
56
6. 2. 1. File Menu
File Save is used to write the current data to disk using the current file name (i.e. to save changes
you have made to the file you opened). This overwrites the data originally in the file - there is no
warning of the overwrite, and you will not be able to change the name. If you are creating a new
file from nothing (i.e. you did not open an existing file), the first File Save will act like a File
Save As.... to enable you to give it a name.
Figure : 6.2.1 - 4 File Save As Dialog Box
Note: You can select the file format (.WFL (binary), .WFX (ASCII), or .KWF (ASCII - see
WellFlo Data Files, on page 53)) from the Save File as Type drop-down menu.
File Exit
When you choose File Exit, or close WellFlo by the Application Control Menu, or try and open a
new file with current work unsaved, the Save File dialog box (Figure 6.2.1 - 5, File Save On
Exit?, on page 57) appears.
Figure : 6.2.1 - 5 File Save On Exit?
Load Measured Data

This option allows you to import data for plotting on any pressure-versus-depth or pressureversus-flowrate graph, so that you can compare the WellFlo-generated values graphically with
any measured data you may have. The Load Measured Data menu option expands to give the
options shown in Figure 6.2.1 - 6, Load Measured Data Sub-Menu.
These options will display the standard File Open dialog box, identical to the one pictured in
Figure 6.2.1 - 3, File Open Dialog Box, on page 56, except that for Depth versus Pressure (and
Temperature) the file extension is .DVP, and Flowrate versus Pressure uses .RVP.
These must be ASCII files, prepared in a text editor (Windows NotePad is suitable).
Title/legend: You can enter a text title on the first line of the file (optional); this will appear as a
legend when the data are plotted. If no title line is entered, the default legend will be Measured
data.
57
6. 2. 1. File Menu
Figure : 6.2.1 - 6 Load Measured Data Sub-Menu

Comment lines: You can also enter comments between rows of data. Put a hash (#) at the start of
a comment line to be certain the program will skip it. Do not put a hash in front of the title line
unless you want it to be ignored.
Data:
- For Depth versus Pressure (and Temperature), the first column is Depth (MD or TVD - be
sure to select the appropriate menu option), the second is Pressure, and the third, optional,
column is Temperature.
Gradient stops: 20-March-96
1003
758.327
98.50
1995
988.423
102.54
2876
1325.439
108.28
The depths will be converted automatically between MD and TVD for plotting purposes,
depending on what you select for the plot.
It is permissible to leave gaps in the temperature column where data is not available.
If max and min values are recorded at each station, you may enter two rows of data with the same
depth (e.g. first row = max values, 2nd row = min values).
- For Flowrate versus Pressure, the first column is Flowrate, and the second is Pressure. This
data format is suitable for inclusion in IPR plots and inflow/outflow plots.
See Plot Layer IPR in Layer IPR Calculation, on page 141 and Graphical Output, on page
236, for examples of the measured data being plotted.
- For the Variable options, the first column of data is an arbitrary variable, and the second is a
liquid flow rate, a gas flow rate, or a pressure. These may be plotted on a suitable performance
analysis plot.
File Page Setup, Print and Printer Setup
These options are described in Chapter 4 Using The FloSystem Interface, in the Basics section of
the manual.
The Print command from the main File menu produces a graphic of the well diagram (e.g.
Figure 6.3.4 - 8, Default Well System, on page 98).
Each results plot also has its own File menu with similar Print and Page options.
At the foot of the File menu the most recently opened four WellFlo files are listed. If you wish to
open any of these files, click on their name.
58
6. 2. 1. File Menu
Previously Opened Files

6. 2. 2. Configure Menu
The Configure menu contains a number of setup options concerned with running the various
facilities in WellFlo (Figure 6.2.2 - 1, WellFlo Configure Menu, on page 59).
Figure : 6.2.2 - 1 WellFlo Configure Menu
Configure Units
Use this option to switch between the supplied oilfield and SI units systems, or to customise your
own system, including defining your own units for selected parameters.
Any changes you make will be permanent until further changes are made.
Please refer to FloSystem Units System, on page 28, behind the Basics tab for a detailed
description.
Configure ESP Pump Data

This option is only active if WellFlo-ESP has been installed and you have an enabled licence.
The option allows you to view, edit and plot data from the supplied ESP pump database,
including adding new pumps.
Please refer to Pump Database, on page 421, behind the WellFlo-ESP tab for more details.
Configure ESP Motor Data

This option is only active if WellFlo-ESP has been installed and you have a licence key enabled
for this.
It allows you to view, edit and plot data from the supplied ESP pump motor database, including
adding new motors.
Please refer to Motor Database, on page 426, behind the WellFlo-ESP tab for more details.
Configure Preferences
This option brings up a dialog box for setting the preferences you have for running WellFlo:
59
Figure : 6.2.2 - 2 Configure Preferences Dialog Box
Two calculation log outputs are available. The log files are written to the Current Directory, as
selected in the list on the left, unless you have specified a different directory as described in The
Registry, on page 17. They are intended for diagnostic purposes, and you would not normally
select them, as the file writing slows down the calculations noticeably. Proper post-calculation
reporting facilities are provided as part of the results output (See Section 8. 2. 2 Report Output,
on page 243).
- Output to WELLFLO.LOG allows you to invoke the automatic writing of a detailed log
of the calculations, in ASCII format. It can be viewed with a text editor. From within WellFlo
you can use the browser via the View WellFlo Log option on the Analysis menu. (See Section
8. 2. 3 Calculation Log Output, on page 246.)
Successive runs are appended to the existing WELLFLO.LOG, unless the Clear LOG every
run option is ticked.
- Output to ANALYSIS.LOG allows you to invoke the automatic writing of a more detailed
log of the calculations. ANALYSIS.LOG contains the values of over 20 different variables at
each calculation point in a Nodal Analysis.
The file is tab-separated, and is best viewed with a spreadsheet such as Excel, or printed out.
It can also be viewed (although not so conveniently) with a text editor. From within WellFlo
you can use the browser via the View Analysis Log option on the Analysis menu. (See Section
8. 2. 3 Calculation Log Output, on page 246.)
- If Clear LOG every run is checked, the previous .LOG files are erased at the start of every
new calculation. If not checked, the new calculation appends data to the end of the existing
file or files.
The Current Directory area allows you to select the directory you wish to have as the
default for data files (.WFL, .wfx, .CLC, and .LOG (.LOG files can be saved to a different
directory as described in The Registry, on page 17)). This choice will be saved for the
nextWellFlo session if the Save setup on exit option has been checked.
60
Logging level:

Startup preferences: Auto load file, if checked, will reload the file you were last working
on each time you load WellFlo. Save setup on exit will load WellFlo with the same sized
window and in the same position on the screen, each time you load the program.
Include in text display: These check boxes control what descriptive information is shown in
each node on the system diagram when you select Display as Text (See Section 6. 3. 4
Graphical Editor Usage, on page 94).
- Component type displays the node type - "Flow Line", "Choke", or whatever.
- Component name displays a user-defined text string associated with the node - "HT Steel
no 3", "GLV damaged", etc.
- Component MD displays the measured depth of the well component nodes (upstream
ends) from the reference point, or length from wellhead for surface nodes (downstream
ends).
- Component TVD displays the true vertical depth of well component nodes (upstream
ends) from the reference point, or elevation from wellhead for surface nodes (downstream
ends).
- Component data displays key information about each node - the AOF of the reservoir,
tubing or choke IDs, gas lift valve on/off status, etc.
Allow graphic node edit: This allows you to edit the system description with the mouse and
the graphical Edit menu (See Section 6. 3. 1 Using The Tabular and Graphical Editors, on
page 65).
This is useful when you are working repeatedly with the same file, or files requiring similar
plot scalings.
If a new file or set of calculations require different scaling on one or more plots, either switch
off the Save graph axis changes button so that auto-scaling is enabled, or leave it switched
on and change the scales yourself. (In the latter case, these new scales will then be retained.)
Scalings and other plot settings can also be set by saving and recalling plot template files,
described under FloSystem Graphs, on page 39.
Report format: This controls how the report from Nodal Analysis are presented. This is
described more fully in Report Output, on page 243.
By default, the report will be formatted and displayed automatically using WordPad, unless
you nominate an alternative report browser (as described in The Registry, on page 17).
61
The tabular editor described in the Tabular Well Deviation Data Entry, on page 70,
Tabular Well Equipment Data Entry, on page 72, etc. provides an alternative and often
easier way of entering this information.
With the Allow graphic node edit box checked, both editors are accessible, otherwise only
tabular edit is allowed.
Save graph axis changes: Switch this on to retain graph axis settings (scaling, ticks, gridding
and rounding). When you exit any plot, its axis settings will then be written to the Registry,
and will be re-invoked next time you enter that plot.

- Tabbed text format: this is a simple tabbed format.
- Macro format: the report is output in a special tabbed and marked format suitable for
importing into a spreadsheet or word processor. Report Output, on page 243 describes
the use of Microsoft Word for this purpose, using a report template (which we supply
with FloSystem) to format the report.
- RTF: the rich text format option will produce a properly formatted report file with
headings, correct column alignment, etc., to any compatible word processor (WordPad,
Word, Word Perfect, Ami Pro, etc.) capable of reading .RTF files. The RTF format
largely supersedes the Macro format above.
Automatic save after n minutes: When this option is checked, the current file will be autosaved as RECOVER~.WFL, every n minutes as specified, provided you have made (and
OK'd) changes since the previous auto-save.
The file will be saved to your home directory unless you have specified a different directory
in the Registry setting (user =), as described in The Registry, on page 17. This autosaved
copy will not interfere with your original file.
The autosaved file will disappear when you shut down WellFlo normally. If WellFlo or
Windows crashes, WellFlo will automatically recall the latest copy of the autosaved file when
the program is restarted.
ESP manufacturers: Clicking on this button you will open up the ESP data dialog box. The
displayed options allow you to select manufacturers. Non-selected manufacturers pumps and
motors will not be listed in ESP design or analysis.
Figure : 6.2.2 - 3 Allowed ESP Manufacturers
Configure Registry
This menu option opens the dialog box shown in Figure 6.2.2 - 4, Edit User Registry Dialog
Box, on page 62.
Figure : 6.2.2 - 4 Edit User Registry Dialog Box
62
The available manufacturers which are available with Wellflo-ESP are:

Reda
ODI
Centrilift
Alnas
ESP Ind

This dialog allows users to edit the data associated with WellFlo string values in the
HKEY_CURRENT_USER folder of the Windows Registry.
Select the Value Name from the drop-down menu field and edit the Value Data field using the
Browse and Update features described below. The adjacent Value Data field will either display
the current path to the associated data files or it can be used to enter a numeric value or text entry.
Note: The function of the data associated with each Value Name is described earlier in this
manual. See Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17. After changing any data, WellFlo should
be closed and restarted to make use of the new data.
Functional buttons are described below:
The Browse button is available when the current Value Name represents a directory or one of
the browsers. When selected it generates a system File Find and Open dialog, allowing the
required directory or browser to be found, selected and entered into FloSystem.
The Update button is available when the current Value Name is units-dbase, esp-path, glvpath, user or user-correlations. It copies the standard release data files from their
installation directory into the selected user directory, where they may be edited or
customized. The installation directory, which is used by default for input, is the one
associated with this Value Name in the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE folder of the Registry,
but neither the directory nor the Registry folder should be expected to have permission for
user editing.
Configure Select Plot Axes

The default pressure/depth plot (see Figure 8.2.1 - 4, Plot Options: Performance Analysis, on
page 239) consists of depth on the Y-axis, calculated pressure on the bottom X-axis, and
calculated temperature on the top T-axis.
You can choose any two of a large number of alternative computed output parameters for this
plot. Having selected what you want, you must (re)run the pressure drop mode calculation so that
WellFlo can "collect" the new data instead of pressure and temperature.
If you wish to plot different computed parameters against depth, use the Select Plot Axes option
on the Configure menu. The dialog box shown in Figure 6.2.2 - 5, Configure Select Plot Axes
dialog box, on page 64 appears.
Click the Choose axes for plot button. Check the box for the bottom X-axis and/or the top T-axis
as required, then select the parameter(s) to be plotted. In the Figure, the bottom X-axis will be
labelled for In-situ oil rate, and the top T-axis for Flow regime number. Values will also be listed
versus depth in the report output (See Section 8. 2. 2 Report Output, on page 243).
63

If you leave one of the axes unchecked, nothing will be plotted for that axis.
Figure : 6.2.2 - 5 Configure Select Plot Axes dialog box
Apart from pressure and temperature, there are many other useful variables including:
Hydrostatic, friction, acceleration and total pressure gradient
Flow regime numbers (for bubble, slug, etc.)
Gas and liquid velocity numbers (for flow regime map)
Phase superficial velocities and erosional velocity
In situ phase velocities and flowrates (useful for layer offtakes)
In-situ mixture density and velocity
No-slip and in-situ holdups
Turner critical unloading velocity
Deviation angle, cumulative lateral displacement from vertical.
Some of these are also available in list form via the ANALYSIS.LOG file (refer to Calculation
Log Output, on page 246), regardless of whether you select them here.
If you wish to pick up computed data from WellFlo for use in a spreadsheet, you may be able to
get it from the ANALYSIS.LOG. Failing that, select the data you require in the Select plot axes
facility, perform a pressure drop mode calculation, and retrieve the data from the report listing.
You can then plot and report these variables vs depth in the usual way via the Results button in
Nodal Analysis Control.
Figure 6.2.2 - 6, Use of Configure Select Plot Axes to display in-situ oil flowrate and flow
regime versus depth, on page 65, is an example of the plot following on from Figure 6.2.2 - 5,
Configure Select Plot Axes dialog box, on page 64, with In-situ oil rate and Flow regime
64
Having made your selection, return to the Analysis menu and run the Pressure drop calculation.
This is necessary because WellFlo cannot store all possible output variables for possible plotting,
only the two selected. (ANALYSIS.LOG, on the other hand, is written on the fly.)

number plotted against depth in a well on gas lift.
Figure : 6.2.2 - 6 Use of Configure Select Plot Axes to display in-situ oil flowrate and flow regime
versus depth
6.3.
Well Description
6. 3. 1. Using The Tabular and Graphical Editors

Introduction To the Tabular and Graphical Editors
The whole of WellFlo is based around the node description, shown in Figure 6.3.1 - 1, WellFlo
Node Editor, on page 66 in the two different viewing modes available on the View menu:
Display as Text and Display as Icons. This section of the manual relates to the actions associated
with setting up a well system and editing it, using mainly the tabular editors, but also covering
the graphical editing facilities. This includes four menu items: Edit, View, and Data Preparation,
plus the actions which can be performed on the Drawing Window itself.
For most of these specific components there will only be one occurence in a given well system
and they are used to demarcate the other categories of component (i.e "well" components
between casing and wellhead, and "surface" components between wellhead and outlet). Extra
components are added using the Data Preparation Equipment Data menu tabular option and/or
the graphical options under the Edit menu.
The tabular data entry options on the Data Preparation menu: Deviation Data and Equipment
Data, are explained in Well Components Description, on page 67, and Surface Components
Description, on page 82.
65
6. 3. Well Description
The Drawing Window contains either text describing each component or 3-Dimensional icons
to represent the different components in the well system. You start with a minimum set of 4
components, the reservoir, casing (at perforation level), wellhead and outlet. This is the Default
System Description - see Figure 6.3.4 - 8, Default Well System, on page 98.

The graphical data entry options on the Edit menu can be used to build up the components of the
well system if you have selected the Allow graphic node edit option as described in Configure
Preferences, on page 59. This method of editing is explained in Graphical Editor Usage, on
page 94.
The Node Editor itself is based on the idea that clicking on an object selects the object, and
double clicking brings up a dialog box giving editable information about the object. The dialog
boxes and objects (i.e. well components) themselves are explained in Well Components
Description, on page 67 andSurface Components Description, on page 82.
Display as Text
6. 3. 1. Using The Tabular and Graphical Editors
Display as Icons
Figure : 6.3.1 - 1 WellFlo Node Editor
66

To select an object, the cursor must be a normal Windows-type arrow:
and not the system
component tool:
. The latter is used when you have selected a component type from the Edit
menu, and will add a component of the chosen type. To switch to the arrow cursor (called the
Select Tool) from the component tool, click on Select in the Edit menu.
When you select a particular object's 3D icon, it appears to depress into the screen (as do
Windows 3.x buttons generally). The Item Name Window will show the object's type and depth
and TVD for well components, or cumulative length from the wellhead and elevation for surface
components. (See Figure 6.3.2 - 2, Schematic of Well Component Depths, on page 69 and
Figure 6.3.3 - 2, Schematic Of Flowline Elevations And Lengths, on page 84).
You can perform multiple selection by holding down CTRL and clicking on more than one object
in succession. This selects multiple components for deletion (Graphical Editor Menu Items, on
page 94).
To edit the actual component data, double-click its icon. This brings up the dialog box for the
component. See Section 6. 3. 2 Well Components Description, on page 67 and See Section 6.
3. 3 Surface Components Description, on page 82.
If you have chosen to Allow graphic node edit, you can move components around the well
system by holding down the mouse button over the component icon and dragging its outline to
the new position. The Graphical Editor will place the component in the nearest valid position. We
suggest you exercise caution until you are familiar with the system, since it is easy to lose track
of where the components are! You can always change the system by deleting components and reentering them in the new position - this is an easier method for the beginner.
6. 3. 2. Well Components Description
Note: "Well components" are those which are upstream* of the wellhead. The "node" depths refer
to the upstream* ends (i.e. bottoms) of each component. This is equivalent to *"Downstream" in
an injector (i.e. still at the bottom end).
When you start from File New, the well diagram consists of four default components - reservoir,
casing, wellhead and outlet node. You may modify this as desired, adding components
according to your description. There can only be one instance of a wellhead or outlet node in
each well. The classes of component which can be added are: casing node, tubing, restrictions
and sub-sea safety valves (SSSVs). Any number of these can be added (Use Of The Edit Menu
In The Graphical Editor, on page 96). If the Gas Lift option is enabled in the software key, gas
lift valves can be added. If the WellFlo/ESP option is enabled, an electrical pump can be
included (Moving an ESP in the Well, on page 414 in the WellFlo/ESP part of this User
Guide). Gas-lift valves and pumps are of course mutually exclusive in the same well.
Note: A more flexible treatment of the casing component has been introduced from v3.5 on.
You may now have any number of them, or none at all if this is replaced by a tubing component.
67
This section of the manual covers first the way in which depths and deviations are handled in the
well, and then covers the two ways to enter and edit the data: through the tabular editors (typing
data into tables), and using the graphical editor (working with well component icons), with a
description of the associated data.

There are two types of components in the well system: real nodes, for which a pressure drop is
calculated, and virtual nodes. The latter are nodes which have a role to play in marking a point in
the system, but do not have any pressure drop calculation associated with them (they are assigned
zero length) - e.g. a gas-lift valve, which represents an entry point for injection gas; the wellhead,
which is a reference point for depth measurement; a manifold, representing a junction in a
flowline.
Depth and Deviation

This section covers the way in which the positions of well components are specified, in terms of
measured depths, TVDs and deviation angles. The data for this is entered in three places:
In the dialog box for the wellhead (depth reference data). This data should be entered first,
In the Well Deviation Data table.
In the dialog box for each component (where appropriate). This graphical edit facility is an
alternative to the tabular edit
A component dialog box contains the measured and vertical length of the component, the
measured depth and TVD to the node at the bottom of the component, and the average deviation
angle of the component. Depths are measured from an arbitrary reference, such as the original
RKB.
This depth reference is defined as part of the wellhead information in the wellhead dialog box
(Figure 6.3.2 - 17, Wellhead Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 81).
These dialog boxes are described in the paragraphs covering Casing Component through to
wellhead in this section.
The depth conventions are explained next, with reference to Figure 6.3.2 - 1, Schematic Of Well
Depth Conventions, on page 69, Figure 6.3.2 - 2, Schematic of Well Component Depths, on
page 69 and Figure 6.3.2 - 3, Schematic of Well Component Deviation, on page 69.
Referring to Figure 6.3.2 - 1, Schematic Of Well Depth Conventions, the depth to the bottom of
a completion component might be defined as measurement 1, from the drilling report. Obviously,
the pressure drop should only be calculated over length 3, since that is the physical length of pipe
below the wellhead. The depth 2 represents the depth of the wellhead below the well's original
depth reference.
In WellFlo, if this the case, you can specify the elevation of the depth reference above permanent
datum and the elevation of the wellhead above permanent datum in the Wellhead dialog box.
From these quantities, the length 2 in Figure 6.3.2 - 1, Schematic Of Well Depth Conventions is
determined. All well components with a length attribute can now have their depth specified in
terms of 1, the depth below well reference.
68
The first point is the depth reference. Frequently, you will have deviation or completion data in
terms of the drilling depth, e.g. below RKB. However, the producing well now has a wellhead
that is physically at a different depth.

Depth
Reference (eg,
original RKB)
Elevation of
Depth
Reference
above perm.
datum
2
Elevation of
Wellhead
above perm.
datum
Wellhead
Permament Datum
3
Bottom of
Component
Depth of
Component
Below Well
Reference
Figure : 6.3.2 - 1 Schematic Of Well Depth Conventions
Figure 6.3.2 - 2, Schematic of Well Component Depths, on page 69 extends this logic to the
whole well system. In the dialog boxes for each component (e.g. Figure 6.3.2 - 10, Casing Data
Editor Dialog Box, on page 75), the length increment is the measured length of the component,
while the TVD increment is the vertical length of the component. The measured depth and
TVD refer to the depth to the component node (bottom) from the depth reference (e.g. RKB).
Well Depth Ref.
Wellhead
Wellhead depth
Component
TVDs
length
to
increments
nodes
Component
TVD
increments
Measured
depths to
Figure : 6.3.2 - 2 Schematic of Well Component Depths
The incremental component attributes are explained in Figure 6.3.2 - 3, Schematic of Well
Component Deviation.
Component
Component
Component
incremental
incremental
length
TVD
deviation
angle
FLOW
Figure : 6.3.2 - 3 Schematic of Well Component Deviation
69
nodes

When you are entering a well component description and wish to specify depths below well
depth reference, incremental lengths will be calculated automatically. Alternatively, you can, if
you prefer, enter the incremental lengths and have WellFlo calculate the total depths and
deviation angle. The alternative method of data entry are the tabular editors.
Tabular Well Deviation Data Entry

If you select the menu option Deviation Data, Well Data from the Data Preparation menu, you
will see the following dialog box. If this option is selected before the wellhead data has been
initialised (See Section Wellhead, on page 80), there is an option to initialise the wellhead data
first.
Figure : 6.3.2 - 4 Well Deviation Data Dialog Box
To navigate through the spreadsheet, the cursor can be moved with the arrow, TAB, PAGE-UP,
PAGE-DOWN , HOME, END, keys, or the mouse can be clicked on the desired field, using the scroll
bar when necessary.
The selected field now has a thick border, and new data can be typed in. When you have finished
editing a field, press TAB to confirm your edit and move to the next field to edit, or click directly
on this next field. Press the ESC key to abort an edit.
Importing data from a spreadsheet
Ensure that the deviation data in the spreadsheet are in the correct column and depth order, and
copy them to the ClipBoard. Then paste into WellFlo using the Paste button.
To export from WellFlo, use the Copy button to copy the data, tab-separated, to the ClipBoard.
Typing new rows of data
You will normally be entering measured and true vertical depths, or depths and angles, from a
deviation survey. The following description applies to entering a new row of data. If you are
editing an existing row in a table, please refer to the section after this one.
70
The main deviation data three-column spreadsheet allows you to type in the data from the
deviation survey, or paste it in from a spreadsheet. The data must be entered in ascending order
of measured depths. The Angle is the component deviation angle as shown in Figure 6.3.2 - 3,
Schematic of Well Component Deviation, on page 69, not the average angle from the wellhead
to this point.

Enter MD and TVD:
- Click on the first MD field. Enter the MD.
- TAB to the TVD field. A TVD is immediately calculated assuming a default angle of 0
degrees (or the current angle if there is one). Ignore this value and type in the correct TVD.
- TAB to the Angle field. The correct angle will be calculated from the MD (increment) and
TVD (increment):
Cosine (Angle) = TVD (increment) MD (increment)
- TAB to or click on the next MD field and type in the MD, and so on.
Enter MD and Deviation Angle:
- Click on the first TVD field. Enter the TVD.

- TAB to the Angle field. An angle is immediately calculated assuming a default MD of 5000
ft (or the existing MD if there is one). Ignore this value for the moment.
- In the Angle field, type in the correct deviation angle.
- TAB to the next TVD field. As you do this, the MD in the row you just edited will be
correctly updated from the TVD and angle, using:
MD (increment) = TVD (Increment) / Cosine(Angle)
- TAB to or click on the next TVD field and type in the TVD, and so on.
If Angle is entered first, the TVD is calculated from the MD Increment Cosine(Angle). A
default MD Increment (5000 ft) is used, so the TVD will initially be meaningless. Type in
the MD and the TVD will be updated as you tab out of the MD field. You will normally find
it advisable not to start with the Angle field.
Editing existing rows of data
When you have set up the table, you may need to edit one of the rows. It would be well worth
reading the following description before doing this.
Suppose you want to correct an Angle entry, keep the same MD, and get WellFlo to update the
TVD:
- Double-click the MD field. Now TAB to, or double-click on, the Angle field, change the
value, and tab out. The TVD will be updated.
The program always remembers the last two fields you edited (or put in edit mode (MD and
angle in this example), and recalculates the third one.
So, if you had double-clicked the TVD field then edited the Angle, the MD would have been
updated, and so on .....
71
- Click on the first MD field. Enter the MD.

- TAB to the Angle field. As you cross the TVD field, a TVD is immediately calculated
assuming a default angle of 0 degrees. Ignore this value for the moment.
- In the Angle field, type in the deviation angle.
- TAB to the next MD field. As you do this, the TVD in the row you just edited will be
correctly updated from the MD and angle, using:
TVD (increment) = MD (increment) Cosine(Angle)
- TAB to or click on the next MD field and type in the MD, and so on.
Enter TVD and Deviation Angle:

The Insert Row and Delete Row buttons open up or delete the row of data the cursor is currently
on ("Insert" therefore means "Insert above").
On OK, the program will then translate your tabular deviation data into an equivalent string of
nodes in the graphical display, ready for you to fill out the nodes with the equipment data, as
described in the following section Tabular Well Equipment Data Entry, on page 72.
If the deepest measured depth that you have typed is less than the value when you entered the
dialog box, then you will see the warning in Figure 6.3.2 - 5, Tabular Deviation Editor Shortened Well Warning, on page 72. If you answer No to this question, you will have the
opportunity to re-edit the depths, in case you have made a mistake. If you answer Yes, all tubing
and virtual nodes with a depth greater than the maximum measured depth you entered will be
lost.
Figure : 6.3.2 - 5 Tabular Deviation Editor - Shortened Well Warning
Tabular Well Equipment Data Entry
Figure : 6.3.2 - 6 Well Equipment Data Dialog Box
Note: The data section of this dialog box may be longer than the dialog box, and you may have
to use the bottom scroll bar to view the left most data.
If this option is selected before the wellhead data has been initialised (See Section Wellhead,
on page 80), there is an option to initialise the wellhead data first.
In this dialog box, you can specify the tubing, casing, SSS valves and restrictions in the
completion. Each of these components will be described in more detail further on in the current
section. The entry of gas lift valve information is covered in Gas Lift Description, on page 174.
72
If you select the menu option Equipment Data, Well Data from the Data Preparation menu, you
will see a dialog box similar to the following:

For well components, all depths refer to the bottom end of the component.
To edit data in the dialog box, use the same keys (TAB, etc.) or the mouse as described in Tabular
Well Deviation Data Entry, on page 70. The drop-down list box for equipment Type can be
accessed by clicking or tabbing to the field and using the UP or DOWN ARROW to change the
selection, or, alternatively, the mouse can be used just like any other drop-down list box. Use the
Name field to enter an identifier for each component.
Rows of equipment may be entered in any order, and the type selected from the drop-down list
box in the Type column.
The value in the Temperature column is used by the Manual Temperature Model during Nodal
Analysis only (Temperature Calculations, on page 187 and Manual Temperature Model, on
page 187). If you intend to use it, enter the appropriate temperature for the MD specified. If you
are going to use one of the calculated temperature models, you can leave this field at its default
value.
The Casing ID column is for the ID of the casing outside the tubing. This is needed for the heat
loss computations (unless Manual Temperature Model is to be used).
The best way to describe how the data you enter here correspond to the graphical display is to
describe first the tubing nodes, then the virtual nodes, as follows:
The Weight column combines with the OD column to calculate the ID for each tubing node.
Thus when values are entered for both OD and Weight, and you tab from the Weight field, the
ID of the equipment is calculated. This calculation uses a constant steel density of 500lbs/ft3.
Calculated IDs may not match catalogue values exactly. You may use your own steel density
between 450lbs/ft 3 and 550lbs/ft3 by opening the Edit User Registry dialog (See Section
Configure Registry, on page 62), selecting density-steel from the Value Name drop-down
menu and entering the appropriate number in the Value Data field as follows:
density-steel = n (Where n is a number between 450 and 550)
The OD is also used in the heat transfer calculations, and for nodal analysis if there is flow in the
annulus.
For the tubular node information, the data entered at a specified MD apply to that pipe up to the
next tubing MD above (or up to the wellhead, in the case of the first row). So, for example, in
Figure 6.3.2 - 6, Well Equipment Data Dialog Box, on page 72, the 7" casing runs from an MD
of 15,413 ft to 15,004 ft. (For the casing component, only the section that is involved in fluid
flow (from mid-perfs to tubing shoe) has been specified - the actual 7" casing string will of
course extend deeper and higher.)
A 3.5" tubing runs from 15,004 ft (shoe) to 14,695 ft (crossover to 4.5"), and there is a 2.25"
restriction (144/64") at 15,000 ft. A 5.5" tubing runs from 1000 ft to the wellhead, with an SSSV
at 574 ft.
For the virtual nodes, there may be any number of each type, but each node of a given type must
be at least a minimum distance (0.1 ft) from the next-nearest node of the same type. An error
message will warn you of this. If this occurs, you must delete one of the nodes or place it further
away from its neighbour.
73
Wall Roughness is used in the frictional pressure drop calculations for most of the flow
correlations.

When a Restriction or SSS Valve is selected, OD, Weight and Roughness columns are disabled,
and the ID column displays the orifice ID, in 64ths of an inch for Oilfield units.
Use the Fill Down button as a quick way of entering the same value of a component parameter
over a selected depth range. For instance, to set the ID of several tubings to the same value, enter
the desired ID in the topmost of the tubings, click on it and drag the pointer down to the bottommost tubing in the group to be updated. The selected fields will be highlighted. Now click Fill
Down, and the new ID will appear in the highlighted block. If there are any components of a
different type (restrictions, etc.) within the block, they will not be updated.
When you finally OK from the screen, WellFlo will check for data consistency. If you then return
to the screen, you will find it has updated automatically where necessary to make the well
description compatible with the nodal analysis logic. For example, following on from the initial
data entry in Figure 6.3.2 - 6, Well Equipment Data Dialog Box, on page 72:
Figure : 6.3.2 - 7 Well Equipment Data Self-Updated
A 5.5" tubing has been inserted between the SSSV at 574 ft and the wellhead, and a 3.5" tubing
between the restriction at 15000 ft and the crossover at 14695 ft. The table has simply been
updated from the initial as typed in from completion record format, to a format consistent with
the requirements of WellFlo.
The default layer in the initial well diagram is a Reservoir node type, called Layer 1. Any
layers you may add will be Entry point node types, called Layer 2 etc.. You may change their
names if you wish. The Reservoir node type is identical in nature to the Entry point node
type.
or
Figure : 6.3.2 - 8 Reservoir Graphic
In WellFlo's Graphical Editor, selecting a layer node with a mouse shows (in the Item Name
window) the depth to the fluid entry point (nominally mid-perf depth). Double-clicking it
brings up the Reservoir Control dialog box, Figure 6.6.0 - 1, Reservoir Control Dialog Box,
on page 100. This is a short-cut for the Data Preparation/Reservoir Control menu selection.
You may configure up to 36 layers (See Section 6. 7. 1 Layer control, on page 127), and assign
each layer its own properties and mid-perf depth An example is shown in Figure 6.7.2 - 24, Well
Diagram: Multi-layered Reservoir with Different Mid-Perf Depths per Layer, on page 141.
If you assign each layer the same mid-perf depth, only one layer icon will appear in the well
diagram. However, each layer can be edited separately.
Casing Component
74
Layer

From v3.5, it is no longer mandatory to have a single casing node. You may have one, none, or
any number. You can mix casings and tubings in any order, should the need arise. The only
difference between a casing and a tubing is that the latter is considered to have an external
casing. This detail is significant for heat transfer modelling and for the annular flow option.
Otherwise, for nodal analysis calculations, both component types are just tubulars as far as
multiphase flow is concerned.
To model an open hole completion, or a slotted liner, choose casing components, and give
them an appropriate name.
The casing graphic is shown overleaf.
or
Figure : 6.3.2 - 9 Casing Graphic
If you configure more than one layer (See Section 6. 7. 1 Layer control, on page 127), and
assign a different mid-perf depth to each layer, a length of casing will automatically be added to
the well description between each pair of layers. An example is shown in Figure 6.7.2 - 24, Well
Diagram: Multi-layered Reservoir with Different Mid-Perf Depths per Layer, on page 141.
You may replace the casings by tubing components where required.
Double-clicking the casing icon brings up the Casing Data dialog box, Figure 6.3.2 - 10,
Casing Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 75. Data are only editable in this dialog box if you
have enabled graphic node editing (See Section Configure Preferences, on page 59). It is
generally easier to use the tabular depth data entry as described in the earlier Section Tabular
Well Deviation Data Entry, on page 70.
Figure : 6.3.2 - 10 Casing Data Editor Dialog Box
75

This dialog box contains four classes of editable data:
Pipe characteristics
Depth data
Temperature and heat transfer data
Node name
The pipe characteristics are: roughness and inside diameter of the component (used in the
pressure drop calculations); outside diameter (used in the calculated, calibrated and coupled
temperature model calculations); weight (used with outside diameter to calculate inside diameter
if desired). The ID of casing field is greyed out - this input is only enabled for tubing
components, where it refers to the casing outside the tubing.
The depth data have already been introduced in an earlier section, Depth and Deviation, on
page 68. Please refer to Figure 6.3.2 - 2, Schematic of Well Component Depths, on page 69
and Figure 6.3.2 - 3, Schematic of Well Component Deviation, on page 69.
The length increment is the measured length of the component, while the TVD increment is the
vertical length of the component. They are related via the cosine of the deviation angle.
The measured depth and TVD refer to the total depth down to the node: at the bottom of the
component (tubing or casing) or at the deepest fluid entry point (bottom-most component nominally the middle of the perforations). All depths are measured from the depth reference (e.g.
below RKB) specified in the Wellhead data (Figure 6.3.2 - 17, Wellhead Data Editor Dialog
Box, on page 81).
These lengths and depths (displayed in blue) are interdependent, and certain consistency checks
are made by the program while you are editing a dialog box.
The actual entry and updating of the depth data is done with a hierarchy, described as follows for
the five fields which it possible to update (field name in bold):
The Length increment is updated as the new measured depth minus that of the
component above it.
The TVD increment is recalculated as the Length increment Cosine Deviation angle.
The TVD is recalculated as the TVD to the bottom of the component above, plus the TVD
increment.
Thus the set of fields forms a self-consistent set.
If you subsequently alter the TVD:
The TVD increment is updated as the new TVD minus TVD of component above.
If the new TVD increment is less than the current depth increment, the deviation angle
is updated.
If the new TVD increment is longer than the depth increment, the deviation angle is set
to zero and the depth increment is reset to the value of the TVD increment.
76
If you enter measured depth (relative to the well reference), then when you leave this field
(either with the TAB key, by selecting another field with the cursor, or by clicking the OK
button), the other depth fields are updated:

If you change the length increment, then:
The measured depth is updated to be the new length increment plus measured depth to
the component above.
The TVD increment is updated to be the length increment Cosine deviation angle.
The TVD is updated to be the new TVD increment plus the TVD of the component
above.
If you change the TVD increment then:
if the new TVD increment is less than the current depth increment,
The deviation angle is recalculated according to the new TVD increment and current
length increment.
above.
if the new TVD increment is longer than the current depth increment,
The deviation angle is set to zero and the depth increment is reset to the value of the
TVD increment.
above.
The measured depth is updated to be the new length increment plus measured depth to
the component above.
If you change the Deviation, then:
The TVD increment is updated to be the length increment Cosine deviation angle.
The TVD is updated as the new TVD increment plus the TVD of the component above.
Since the program will adjust the deviation angle if it finds TVD greater than measured depth, or
TVD increment greater than length increment, you should alter these parameters with caution.
For instance, if you want to increase the depth of a component, increase the measured depth
before the TVD.
Figure : 6.3.2 - 11 TVD - Measured Depth Warning
The temperature entered here is only used in the Manual temperature model (Temperature
Calculations, on page 187 and Manual Temperature Model, on page 187). If you are not going
to use the manual model, then you can leave this field at its default value. If you require fixed
temperatures at each node, then enter the temperature for the bottom of the component in this
field. (Just as depths refer to the bottom of the component, so do temperatures).
The Heat transfer coefficient is required for the Calculated, Calibrated and Coupled pressuretemperature model options (See Section 7. 3 Temperature Calculations, on page 187). It
describes the heat transfer to or from the fluid column through the tubing wall (if present),
annulus fluid, casing wall and cement, to the surrounding rock.
77
If you set a component depth to a value less than the depth of the node above it, the error message
shown in Figure 6.3.2 - 11, TVD - Measured Depth Warning, on page 77 will appear.

You can type in your own value for each component by unchecking Use calculated heat loss.
Alternatively, check Use calculated heat loss and let WellFlo calculate a value from the
diameters specified in the dialog box when you OK out.
This takes into account the annulus fluid specified in the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box (See
Section 7. 3 Temperature Calculations, on page 187), and assumes the following default
thermal conductivities (in BTU/ft.DF):
steel: 480 cement: 9.65 annulus (water): 9.192
annulus (gas): 0.504.
Heat transfer to/from the rock is modelled at run time if the Calculated, Calibrated or Coupled
temperature model is selected, using geothermal gradient and a default rock thermal conductivity
of 33.6 BTU/ft.DF.
You can specify your own values for the thermal conductivities cited above by means of entries
in the Registry. Please refer to The Registry, on page 17 and See Section Configure
Registry, on page 62.
.
The node name can be any text to label the node. This name will be used to identify the
component throughout the program, plots and reports. It defaults to Casing.
Tubing Component
Tubing components are similar in almost all respects to casing components, described in the
previous section. Please refer to this for a detailed description. The graphic is shown in Figure
6.3.2 - 12, Tubing Graphic, on page 78.
or
The dialog box is similar to the one for casing (see Figure 6.3.2 - 10, Casing Data Editor Dialog
Box, on page 75), except for the presence of the I.D. of casing field. This refers to the Internal
Diameter of the casing outside the tubing. If the outside casing ID changes, you should represent
the tubing as two sections, one for each outer casing ID.
The outer casing ID is needed for the computation of the Heat transfer coefficient in the
calculated temperature models. It is also used in flow calculations if annular flow has been
specified, and for the passage of injection gas.
Note: As for all well components, "Tubing" depth data refers to the bottom of each tubing
component.
Gas Lift Valves

This component is only available if WellFlo/Gas Lift is enabled via the software key.
Gas lift valves define where lift gas enters the system. They are virtual nodes in that they are not
assigned a finite length, and do not have a pressure drop (along the well) associated with them.
They cannot be specified if there is an ESP present in the system, or in a gas or condensate well.
They can be edited as described below, or you can use the tabular gas lift valve editor described
in Section Gas Lift Description, on page 174.
78
Figure : 6.3.2 - 12 Tubing Graphic
or
Figure : 6.3.2 - 13 Gas Lift Valve Graphic
The dialog box (Figure 6.3.2 - 14, Gas Lift Valve Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 79) has two
fields: temperature and node name. See the remarks on temperature and node name in Section
Casing Component, on page 74. The depth of the valve corresponds to the depth you enter for
the bottom of the next tubing component up the well, and does not therefore feature in the dialog
box.
There is a check box marked Valve Active. This is defaulted to checked (as in Figure 6.3.2 - 14,
Gas Lift Valve Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 79), which means that the valve is able to be
opened to pass lift gas. If you un-check this box, the valve ceases to be available in calculations.
This is so that you can mask valves from the system temporarily (e.g. to simulate a
malfunctioning valve), without deleting it from your well description.
Figure : 6.3.2 - 14 Gas Lift Valve Data Editor Dialog Box
For more details on Gas Lift, See Section 6. 8 Gas Lift Description, on page 174 and See
Section 7. 4 Gas Lift Calculations, on page 192.
This component is only available if WellFlo/ESP is enabled via the software key. Please refer to
Moving an ESP in the Well, on page 414 in the WellFlo/ESP part of this user Guide. An ESP
can only be inserted if the fluid system is Black Oil, and if there are no gas-lift valves already
configured.
Sub-Surface Safety Valve

If you insert a Sub-Surface Safety Valve (SSSV) into the system, it is treated as a restriction.
Please refer to the next Section Restrictions for details.
Restrictions
A restriction is a component of reduced diameter in the completion. It has zero length, and its
pressure drop is treated in the same way as a surface choke. WellFlo therefore needs the internal
diameter (I.D.) of the restriction in order to calculate a pressure drop. See Figure 6.3.2 - 15,
Restriction Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 80.
79
Electrical Submersible Pump

The other data items are temperature (optional) and node name.
Figure : 6.3.2 - 15 Restriction Data Editor Dialog Box
The switch to Use critical flow equation is only important for black oil systems, or gas /
condensate / volatile oils with low GLRs (<10,000 scf/STB). It enables you to force either a
critical (on) or sub-critical (off) pressure drop calculation. For critical flow, you can select the
correlation to use for the computation of upstream pressure at the restriction in the Nodal
Analysis Control dialog box (See Section 7. 2. 4 Choice Of Flow Correlations, on page 182).
For high GLR gas / condensate / volatile oil systems (>10,000 scf/STB), the switch is ignored,
and a general critical/sub-critical single phase gas equation will be used.
The choke computation logic is outlined under Pressure drop through restrictions in
Calculation Background Information, on page 219.
Note that, regardless of the situation, WellFlo always checks whether flow is critical or not
(applying a sonic velocity criterion), and reports this as a Flow Regime Number (1=critical,
0=sub-critical) in ANALYSIS.LOG, as described in Section Calculation Log Output, on page
246.
Wellhead
or
Figure : 6.3.2 - 16 Wellhead Graphic
The Wellhead dialog box (Figure 6.3.2 - 17, Wellhead Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 81),
contains the information necessary to link the downhole and surface components to a common
depth reference.
This has already been introduced in the Section Depth and Deviation, on page 68. Please refer
to Figure 6.3.2 - 1, Schematic Of Well Depth Conventions, on page 69 for a schematic of the
wellhead depth conversion.
80
The wellhead is a virtual node, with no pressure drop. Its function is only to mark the top of the
well and start of the surface system. For heat loss calculations the geothermal gradient is
assumed to be anchored at the well head node depth.
Figure : 6.3.2 - 17 Wellhead Data Editor Dialog Box
Type in the identity of the well depth reference (e.g. RKB) in the Well depths measured
from ... field. Enter the elevation of this reference above MSL. Note that the reference name
also appears automatically at the end of the wellhead depth line when you type it in.
Enter the Wellhead elevation above MSL. WellFlo will then calculate the Wellhead depth
below the reference (see 2 in Figure 6.3.2 - 1, Schematic Of Well Depth Conventions, on
page 69).
A positive wellhead depth indicates the wellhead is now below the well reference (e.g. for a
land rig, the current wellhead is below the original RKB). A negative wellhead depth means
the wellhead is now above the well reference level (e.g. an offshore platform higher than a
mobile rig RKB).
If you change the Wellhead depth, the Wellhead elevation will be recalculated to retain the
consistency of the data set.
Figure : 6.3.2 - 18 Wellhead Elevation Warning
If you do not wish WellFlo to make this change then you will be reminded that you will need
to check all component depth data by the following message.
Figure : 6.3.2 - 19 Wellhead Depth Warning
The Heat transfer coefficients are for air and sea are required for the Calculated, Calibrated
and Coupled pressure-temperature model options (See Section 7. 3 Temperature Calculations,
on page 187), if pipeline heat loss calculations are to be made. A pipeline component will be
considered to be in air where its elevation is above MSL, and in water where below MSL. Should
a pipeline section be below MSL at one end and above it at the other (or vice versa), the heat loss
coefficient of the surrounding medium will be switched automatically at MSL - you do not need
to split it into two components.
81
Since a change to the wellhead depth will affect the depths and lengths of well and surface
components. You will be presented with a message warning you of this change, and asking if
you wish WellFlo to adjust the topmost tubing length to accommodate this change.

The default coefficients displayed in the dialog box represent reasonable values for forced
convection in light wind speeds (around 10 mph (16 kph)) and tidal currents (around 0.5 mph
(0.8 kph)). A value of, say, 25-50 BTU/ft2/d/degF for air would be better for sheltered
equipment.
Note that for surface piping in air, you can specify partial burial (e.g. in sand) in each flowline
dialog box in the Equipment Editor (Figure 6.3.3 - 7, Flowline Data Editor Dialog Box, on
page 87). The value used for the air/soil surrounding medium will be weighted according to
burial depth.
6. 3. 3. Surface Components Description

This section of the manual covers first the way in which lengths and elevation are handled in the
surface system, and then covers each of the surface components possible, with a description of
the associated data.
Note: The "Surface components" are those which are downstream* of the wellhead. The "nodes"
refer to the downstream* ends of each component (i.e. farthest from the wellhead). This is
equivalent to *"Upstream" in an injector (i.e. still farthest from the wellhead).
There are two default components in this section of the well system: wellhead and outlet. There
can only be one of each of these components. The other classes of component which can be
added are: Manifold, Choke, Surface ESP, Flow Line, Bend, Riser, Downcomer Gas
Injector, Wellhead Gauge. Any number of these can be added Use Of The Edit Menu In The
Graphical Editor, on page 96), with the exception of Choke, of which there can only be one.
A single ESP can be added (to represent a surface pump) if the WellFlo/ESP option has been
enabled in the software key, and provided there is not already a pump in the downhole string.
This section covers the way in which the positions of surface components are specified, in terms
of measured depths, elevations and deviation angles. The data for this are contained in two
places:
In the dialog box for the wellhead (depth reference data).
In the dialog box for each component
The wellhead elevation is defined in the wellhead dialog box (Figure 6.3.2 - 17, Wellhead Data
Editor Dialog Box, on page 81).
A component dialog box contains the length of the component, its total (measured) length from
the wellhead to the node point at the downstream end, the elevation above MSL, and the average
angle of inclination of the component from vertical.
These dialog boxes are described in the paragraphs covering Flowlines through to outlet in this
section.
The elevation convention is explained next, with reference to Figure 6.3.3 - 1, Schematic Of
Elevation Convention, on page 83, Figure 6.3.3 - 2, Schematic Of Flowline Elevations And
Lengths, on page 84 and Figure 6.3.3 - 3, Surface Pipeline Deviation Convention, on page 85.
82
Elevation and Deviation

The convention for surface component measurement is different from the well components.
Instead of depth, WellFlo deals here with the more useful concept of elevation. Elevations are
measured above permanent datum (MSL).
Referring to Figure 6.3.3 - 1, Schematic Of Elevation Convention, on page 83, the elevation of
a component is the vertical elevation above MSL of the end of the pipe furthest away from the
wellhead. The elevation increment is the change in elevation over the component itself.
The first flowline will have an elevation increment (labelled 1 in the diagram) equal to the
component elevation minus the wellhead elevation. From then on, the elevation increments will
be the differences between ends.
Figure : 6.3.3 - 1 Schematic Of Elevation Convention
83

Figure 6.3.3 - 2, Schematic Of Flowline Elevations And Lengths, on page 84 shows the
conventions for Total length from wellhead and Elevation. Referring to this figure and the
dialog box for flowlines in Figure 6.3.3 - 7, Flowline Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 87, you
will see that the equivalent of TVD in the well is Elevation (above MSL). The equivalent of
Measured depth in the well is Total length, measured from the wellhead, and the equivalent of
Depth increment is Length increment.
In the upper part of Figure 6.3.3 - 2, Schematic Of Flowline Elevations And Lengths, on page
84, four flowline nodes are shown. The numbers on the right, aligned with the broken lines, show
the Elevation (MSL) of each node, measured at the downstream end in each case.
The Elevation increment of each node is measured from the previous node. These would be:
positive for nodes 1 and 2, zero for 3 (horizontal) and negative for 4 (downhill). The Length
increments are the actual pipe lengths.
In the lower part of the figure, the same nodes are shown but this time with Total lengths. These
are always measured from the wellhead.
Figure : 6.3.3 - 2 Schematic Of Flowline Elevations And Lengths
84

Figure 6.3.3 - 3, Surface Pipeline Deviation Convention shows the convention for specifying
the angle of inclination from vertical for surface pipes. Since downward flow is possible, care
must be taken in assigning a value.
A deviation of 0o means
vertical upward flow; 0o-90o means inclined
upward flow; 90o means
o
o
o
horizontal flow; 90 -180 means inclined downward flow, and 180 means vertical downward
flow.
FLOW
FLOW
Component
Deviation
Angle (90)
Component
Deviation
Angle (0-90)
Component
Deviation Angle
(90 - 180)
FLOW
Figure : 6.3.3 - 3 Surface Pipeline Deviation Convention
Tabular Surface Deviation Data Entry
Figure : 6.3.3 - 4 Surface Deviation Data Dialog Box
This operates in a similar manner to that described in the Section When you are entering a .......
under Figure 6.3.2 - 4, Well Deviation Data Dialog Box, on page 70. Where that section
mentions Measured Depth and True Vertical Depth, in this case read Length from Wellhead (the
Lwh column) and Elevation above MSL (the Elev column) respectively. The Angle is measured
from the vertical.
The same Copy (to ClipBoard) and Paste (from ClipBoard) buttons are provided for data transfer
with a spreadsheet.
On OK, the entered data is translated into an equivalent set of nodes to represent the surface
deviations entered.
85
When you select the menu option Deviation Data, Surface Data from the Data Preparation
menu, you see the following dialog box:

Tabular Surface Equipment Data Entry
When you select the menu option Equipment Data, Surface Data from the Data Preparation
menu, you see the following dialog box.
Figure : 6.3.3 - 5 Surface Equipment Data Dialog Box
This operates in a similar manner to that described in the Section on Tabular Well Equipment
Data Entry under Figure 6.3.2 - 6, Well Equipment Data Dialog Box, on page 72. Where that
section mentions Measured Depth, read Length from Wellhead in this case.
As with the tubing and casing nodes in the well description, the data entered for flow line, riser
and downcomer applies from the previous flow line, riser or downcomer row, or from the
wellhead, to the specified length from wellhead. In the example below, Flowline 2 extends from
1000 ft to 2000 ft from the wellhead, and has a manifold in the middle. When you OK from the
tabular editor, Flowline 2 will therefore be represented in the system diagram as two flowline
components with the same characteristics, from 1000 to 1500 ft, and from 1500 ft to 2000 ft. Do
not be surprised to see the extra section of Flowline 2 appear in the above table when you re-enter
it. Flowline 3 will, likewise, be split by the bend node.
The Manifold node type is a virtual node, and has only temperature and a name associated with
it - no pressure drop is computed.
Flowline Component
Flowlines are pipelines along the surface. You can have any number of them in the system
(Figure 6.3.3 - 6, Flowline Graphic, on page 86). For steeply inclined flowlines please refer to
the ensuing sections on risers (upflow) and downcomers (downflow).
or
Figure : 6.3.3 - 6 Flowline Graphic
86
Remember that, for surface equipment, the "node" refer to the end of the component farthest
from the wellhead.

Flowlines have a dialog box very similar to that for casing and tubing. The main difference is the
use of Elevation (above MSL) in place of TVD (below depth reference) and Length from
wellhead instead of Measured depth (below depth reference) (see the previous Section on
Elevation and Deviation, on page 82). The hierarchy of calculations around the linked (blue)
length/elevation fields is the same as for casing and tubing (See Section Casing Component,
on page 74). The other component attributes (roughness, etc.) are also the same.
Figure : 6.3.3 - 7 Flowline Data Editor Dialog Box
The Heat transfer coefficient is required for the Calculated, Calibrated and Coupled pressuretemperature model options (refer to Casing Component, on page 74). It can be entered directly
(Use calculated... box not checked), or calculated by WellFlo (Use calculated... box checked)
from the specified pipe inside and outside diameters and the Diameter of Insulation. The
calculation is performed when you tab out of a diameter field, or OK out of the dialog box. If
there is no insulation jacket, enter zero for its diameter.
The heat transfer coefficient displayed takes into account the transfer of heat through the pipe
wall and insulation. It assumes the following default thermal conductivities (in BTU/ft.DF):
steel: 480 insulation: 1.0
These can be customised via entries by means of entries in the Registry. Please refer to The
Registry, on page 17 and See Section Configure Registry, on page 62. These global values
will be used for all surface components if the Standard Heat loss model has been selected (see
below).
Heat loss to the medium surrounding the flowline - water (subsea) or air/soil (surface) - is
modelled at run time if the Calculated, Calibrated or Coupled2 temperature model is selected,
using the following default heat transfer coefficients (in BTU/ft .DF):
surroundings (water, forced convection): 1100
surroundings (air, forced convection): 130
87
Flowlines can have any angle of deviation from 0 to 180 from vertical.

They can be altered in the Wellhead Data Editor Dialog Box shown in Figure 6.3.2 - 17,
Wellhead Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 81. These global values will be used throughout the
surface system if the Standard Heat loss model has been selected (see below).
A flowline is assumed to be subsea (surrounded by water) where its elevation is below MSL;
where it is above MSL, it is assumed to be on land (or above-sea).
Burial depth: Flowlines above MSL can be modelled as completely in air (enter 0), partially
buried (enter a value greater than zero), or buried. For the heat loss calculation, soil is given a
default thermal conductivity of 7 BTU/ft.DF. It can be customised via an entry in the Registry.
Please refer to The Registry, on page 17 and See Section Configure Registry, on page 62.
The Replication factor allows you to model several identical parallel flowlines, while only
entering parameters for one. For example, a value of 2 will split the flowstream into two halves,
with corresponding adjustments to flow regimes, frictional losses, heat transfer, etc. because of
the reduced fluid velocities and increased flow surface area associated with two flowlines.
Heat loss model
You also have the option of selecting Advanced or Standard for the Heat loss model.
Standard: global values are used for the thermal properties of the components and their
surrounding media, as described above.
Advanced: thermal properties can be specified for each individual component and its
surrounding medium.
When first selecting the advanced option (standard model is the default) the Advanced Heat Loss
Model dialog will be shown automatically, Figure 6.3.3 - 8, Advanced Heat Loss Model dialog
box, on page 89. If you wish to edit this data at a later date you will need to bring this dialog up
by selecting the Heat loss button on Figure 6.3.3 - 7, Flowline Data Editor Dialog Box, on
page 87.
Conductivities: (Steel and Insulation) allows you to edit the thermal conductivities of the steel
and insulation of which the component is constructed. Steel refers to the material between the
inside and outside diameters, and Insulation to that between the outside diameter and the
insulation diameter. The value entered for steel can represent manufacturers data for a multilayered line, for instance.
Air conditions: (Temperature and Wind speed) Local values for air temperature and average
wind speed can be defined in these options.
Sea conditions: (Temperature and Tide speed) Enter the local values of sea temperature and
average tidal speed.
Calculate: Press this button to see the effect of wind or tide speed on the coefficient of forced
convective heat transfer for the medium surrounding the component.
88
The values entered here will be used by this component only, and will override any
conductivities set in the Registry, the surface temperatures set in Nodal Analysis, and/or air and
water heat transfer coefficients set in the Xmas Tree dialog.
Figure : 6.3.3 - 8 Advanced Heat Loss Model dialog box
If you alter the steel or insulation conductivities, the component heat transfer coefficient can be
updated by returning to the System Editor dialog box (Figure 6.3.3 - 7, Flowline Data Editor
Dialog Box, on page 87), and either tabbing out of one of the diameter fields, or Okaying out of
the dialog and then re-opening it. (The Calculate button in Figure 6.3.3 - 8, Advanced Heat Loss
Model dialog box, on page 89 does not update the coefficient of the component itself).
Riser Component
The difference lies in the fact that, because it is usually (near) vertical, a riser uses the selected
Well Flow Correlation and Calibration Factor (Choice Of Flow Correlations, on page 182) for
pressure drop calculation, not the Pipeline Flow Correlation. Flow is assumed to be upwards - for
downflow in a riser, use the downcomer component described next. For horizontal and more
gently inclined flowlines, use the flowline component.
Note: In an offshore well, the temperature loss in the section between the sea-bed and the surface
is water-dominated (with convection) rather than earth geothermal-dominated. In WellFlo, the
switch from well temperature model (heat transfer to/from earth geothermal) to surface
temperature model (heat transfer to/from water) occurs at the wellhead node.
If it is a sub-sea wellhead, the model will perform correctly with the wellhead node at the seabed. But if the wellhead is actually on a platform, to get the heat loss model to switch correctly at
the sea-floor, put the wellhead node on the sea bed, and call it sea bed. Insert a riser between
it and the platform. The selected well flow correlation will still be used along the riser to surface,
and heat will be exchanged with the sea. The actual wellhead can be represented by a manifold
node named Wellhead.
89
Data entry is the same as for the flowline component described earlier.

Downcomer Component
Data entry is the same as for the flowline component described earlier.
The downcomer component is intended to model a section of flowline in which the flow is
downwards, and where the flow correlation and calibration factor assigned to flowline
components are not considered suitable (e.g. steep or vertical downflow). The downcomer can be
assigned its own flow correlation and calibration L-factor (See Section 7. 2. 4 Choice Of Flow
Correlations, on page 182).
For steep upwards flow use the riser component. For horizontal and more gently inclined
flowlines, use the flowline component.
Since the pressure gradient is largely hydrostatic, the application of an L-factor to the total
pressure gradient is equivalent in principle to the Palmer correction (Evaluation of Inclined
Liquid Holdup and Pressure-Loss Correlations Using Experimental Data. Payne, Palmer, Brill
and Beggs; JPT, Sept 79).
Choke
You can only have one choke in WellFlo's surface system (Figure 6.3.3 - 9, Choke Graphic, on
page 90). This is because of the logic used in pressure drop calculations.
or
Figure : 6.3.3 - 9 Choke Graphic
Figure : 6.3.3 - 10 Choke Data Editor Dialog Box
The switch to Use critical flow equation is only important for black oil systems, or gas /
condensate / volatile oils with low GLRs (<10,000 scf/STB). It enables you to force either a
critical (on) or sub-critical (off) pressure drop calculation. For critical flow, you can select the
correlation to use for the computation of upstream pressure at the choke in the Nodal Analysis
Control dialog box (See Section 7. 2. 4 Choice Of Flow Correlations, on page 182).
For high GLR gas / condensate / volatile oil systems (>10,000scf/STB), the switch is ignored,
and a general critical/sub-critical single phase gas equation will be used.
The choke computation logic is outlined under Pressure drop through restrictions in
SectionCalculation Background Information, on page 219.
90
The actual data required for a choke are the same as for a restriction or SSSV in a well: I.D. and
(optionally) Upstream temperature and Node name. See Figure 6.3.3 - 10, Choke Data Editor
Dialog Box, on page 90.

Note: Regardless of the situation, WellFlo always checks whether flow is critical or not (applying
a sonic velocity criterion), and reports this as a Flow Regime Number (1=critical, 0=sub-critical)
in ANALYSIS.LOG, as described in Section Calculation Log Output, on page 246.
Manifold
A manifold is a virtual node like the wellhead or outlet, in that it does not have a pressure drop.
It is merely used to mark points along the system. WellFlo does not model mixing of fluid
streams at a manifold; this is handled in FieldFlo.
or
Figure : 6.3.3 - 11 Manifold Graphic
The dialog box merely needs temperature if manual modelling is to be done (Temperature
Calculations, on page 187 and Manual Temperature Model, on page 187, plus of course the
node name.
Figure : 6.3.3 - 12 Manifold Data Editor Dialog Box
It is intended eventually to incorporate flowline booster pump modelling (e.g. sub-sea SMUBS).
As a first step, we have allowed the inclusion of an ESP component in the flowline. This is
currently hooked up to the supplied ESP performance tables, so it would be necessary to
customise a pump database table to replicate the booster pumps performance. Please refer to
Moving an ESP in the Well, on page 414 in the WellFlo/ESP part of this user Guide.
A pump can only be inserted if the fluid system is Black Oil, and if there are no gas-lift valves,
or another, subsurface, ESP, configured in the well string.
This component is only available if WellFlo/ESP is enabled via the software licence key.
91
Electrical Pump

Gauge
The Wellhead Gauge is a virtual node, and only one of them is allowed. It will be useful in
offshore well models where the wellhead node has been placed on the sea-bed. This node
provides the flexability to use measured pressure and/or temperature at the surface rather than at
the sub-sea wellhead for L-factor and or temperature calculations.
or
Figure : 6.3.3 - 13 Gauge Graphic
Figure : 6.3.3 - 14 Gauge Data Editor dialog box
Bend
From FloSystem v3.4 onwards, the bend component (Figure 6.3.3 - 15, Bend Graphic, on page
92) ceased to be a virtual node, and was assigned a pressure drop computation.
or
Figure : 6.3.3 - 15 Bend Graphic
Pressure losses are computed for the bend resistance assuming a smooth continuous radius (not a
sharp mitre bend).
Figure : 6.3.3 - 16 Bend Data Editor dialog box
92
If a Gauge node is present, it replaces the wellhead for:

L factor calibration to observed wellhead pressures in FieldFlo (see Section 13. 6. 3
Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351, Section 13. 7 Calibrating Well Data in
Batch Mode, on page 360 and Section 13. 8 Batch Control File for Updating L-Factors, on
page 361);
Intermediate temperature for the Calibrated temperature model (see Section 7. 3. 3
Calibrated Temperature Model, on page 189);
Tubinghead pressure point for the generation of vertical lift tables (see Section 7. 3. 3
Calibrated Temperature Model, on page 189).

An equivalent length is derived from the Bend radius, Inside diameter and Total bend angle
using the method described by Crane (most easily found in The Technology of Artificial Lift
Methods, Vol.1: Kermit E Brown, p.464). This is used to compute the pressure loss caused by the
curvature of the bend.
To facilitate insertion into the system diagram, the bend component itself does not have any finite
size. The physical length of the bend should be incorporated into the upstream or downstream
flowline component. This will keep the lengths from wellhead correct, and will account for the
frictional pressure drop over the real length of the bend.
Outlet
The outlet is a virtual node, like the manifold. It can be neither duplicated, deleted nor dragged.
or
Figure : 6.3.3 - 17 Outlet Graphic
Gas Injector
This component is only available if WellFlo/Gas Lift is enabled via the software key.
A gas injector defines a point where lift gas enters the system above the Xmas Tree (such as at
the foot of a riser). It is a virtual node in that it is not assigned a finite length, and does not have
a pressure drop (along the well) associated with it. It cannot be specified if there is an ESP
present in the system, or in a gas or condensate well.
Figure : 6.3.3 - 18 Gas Injector Graphic
The dialog box (Figure 6.3.3 - 19, Gas Injector Data Editor dialog box, on page 93) has four
fields: Upstream temperature, Injection gas gravity, Gas injection rate and Node name. (See
the remarks on temperature and node name in Section Casing Component, on page 74).
The input of the gas is not modelled in the same way as with downhole gas lift valves. Here it is
assumed that the specified gas rate can be injected at that point, regardless of gas injection
pressure.
Figure : 6.3.3 - 19 Gas Injector Data Editor dialog box
The values which you enter for Injection gas gravity and Gas injection rate are handled
separately in Wellflo from the calculations for sub-surface gas lift valves, to allow you to specify
a different injection gas gravity for these nodes.
93
or

If you wish to disable these nodes without removing them from your model, you may enter a zero
gas injection rate.
6. 3. 4. Graphical Editor Usage

The graphical editor can be used as an alternative to, or in conjunction with, the tabular data entry
facility to build the well and surface system. It is also a useful means of modifying individual
components in the system after it has been set up.
Tabular data entry was described in the Sections Tabular Well Deviation Data Entry, on page
70 and Tabular Well Equipment Data Entry, on page 72, and Tabular Surface Deviation Data
Entry, on page 85 and Tabular Surface Equipment Data Entry, on page 86.
Graphical Editor Menu Items

The menu items associated with the graphical node editor are View, Data Preparation and Edit.
The View menu (Figure 6.3.4 - 1, WellFlo View Menu, on page 94) controls the
presentation of the Graphical Editor. Its function is to control the way in which the system is
displayed.
Figure : 6.3.4 - 1 WellFlo View Menu
Figure : 6.3.4 - 2 Tabular Display of Node Data
The Tabular Display is an alternative view of the system. It acts in a similar way to the graphical
editor, except that it lists all the nodes in a table, together with their measured depth, TVD and
specified temperature.
94
Zoom In and Zoom Out do as their name states on the well system picture. You can jump
back to normal scale quickly by choosing Normal. Note the accelerator keys in this menu
also.
Display as Icons and Display as Text switch between the two possible views illustrated in
Figure 6.3.1 - 1, WellFlo Node Editor, on page 66.
The Tabular Display is a non-editable list of the components in the current well system
(Figure 6.3.4 - 2, Tabular Display of Node Data, on page 94).

Although the depths relating to well and surface components are tied to different reference
points, the same column headers MD and TVD have been used for convenience. The depth
convention used here is the same as for the graphical editor:
- well components (below wellhead): MD and TVD are depths below the depth reference
point (e.g. RKB) as specified in the Xmas Tree component dialog box (Figure 6.3.2 - 17,
Wellhead Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 81).
- surface components (beyond wellhead): MD means length from the wellhead, TVD
means elevation above MSL.
You cannot edit the tabular display, but you can select a component for edit by double-clicking it,
which brings up the component's dialog box.
There is only one menu item: Filter (Figure 6.3.4 - 3, Tabular Display Filter Menu, on page
95). This menu is self explanatory: it enables you to selectively view certain classes of node in
the tabular display. This might be useful in a large system.
Data Preparation: The Data Preparation menu (Figure 6.3.4 - 4, WellFlo Data Preparation
Menu, on page 95) is here to access four non-graphical sections of data:
General - See Section 6. 4 General Data, on page 98.
Well and Flow Type - See Section 6. 5 Well and Flow Type, on page 99.
Reservoir Control - See Section 6. 6 Reservoir Control - Fluid Properties, on page 100
and See Section 6. 7 Reservoir Control - Inflow Performance, on page 126.
Gas Lift - See Section 6. 8 Gas Lift Description, on page 174.
Also refer to the two tabular data entry options for well and flowline components:
Deviation Data
Equipment Data
These two options are described in the Sections Tabular Well Deviation Data Entry, on page
70, Tabular Well Equipment Data Entry, on page 72 (Figure 6.3.2 - 4, Well Deviation Data
Dialog Box, on page 70 and Figure 6.3.2 - 6, Well Equipment Data Dialog Box, on page 72),
Tabular Surface Deviation Data Entry, on page 85, Tabular Surface Equipment Data Entry,
on page 86 (Figure 6.3.3 - 4, Surface Deviation Data Dialog Box, on page 85 and Figure 6.3.3
- 5, Surface Equipment Data Dialog Box, on page 86).
Figure : 6.3.4 - 4 WellFlo Data Preparation Menu
95
Figure : 6.3.4 - 3 Tabular Display Filter Menu

The two ESP options are only available if WellFlo-ESP has been licensed (refer to the section
behind the WellFlo-ESP tab).
There is also an option, Transfer Reservoir Data, to load and save layer and fluid parameters to
facilitate transfer between well files:
Figure : 6.3.4 - 5 Import/Export of Layer and Fluid Properties
Layer parameters are saved as a binary file with extension .IPR, which contains all data related to
the Edit Layer facility in Reservoir Control See Section 6. 7 Reservoir Control - Inflow
Performance, on page 126).
Fluid parameters are saved as a binary file with extension .PVT, which contains all data related
to the Fluid Parameters facility in Reservoir Control (See Section 6. 6 Reservoir Control - Fluid
Properties, on page 100).
The two options for Load Fluid Properties allow you to select which properties you wish to use.
Using the Fluid Properties Only option loads the fluid properties from a .PVT file but will
preserve the fluid ratios (GOR and WC, or WGR) already entered in the current well model.
However, the Properties and Ratios option will replace any entered fluid ratios in the current
model with those from the .PVT File, in addition to replacing the fluid properties.
Edit: The Edit menu (Figure 6.3.4 - 7, WellFlo Edit Menu, on page 97) is to allow you to
enter new components and to do some manipulations with selected existing components.
Figure : 6.3.4 - 6 Part of the WellFlo Edit Menu
This option can be used to build up a well description quickly in cases where you require a
sequence of similar components. For example, suppose you want to build a 10,000 foot
deviated well with ten tubing segments, using the graphical editor. Rather than having to add
10 tubing nodes, one at a time and then edit roughness and diameter on each, you can add one
correctly-sized tubing and then use Duplicate to copy it 9 more times. Finally, enter the TVD
values for each component, as everything else will be ready.
Duplicate also works on groups of items, so you can duplicate more than one component at a
time.
Clear deletes the selected component(s). (Note that you can use this with multiple selections
as well.) You may also use the DEL key for this.
Use Of The Edit Menu In The Graphical Editor

The rest of the Edit menu (Figure 6.3.4 - 7, WellFlo Edit Menu, on page 97) is used to select
the mode of operation of the Graphical Editor and to add new components.
96
Duplicate is used to copy a selected node next to itself in the well system. You will probably
find it quicker to use the ALT+E-ALT+D keyboard option than the mouse, especially for
repeated duplications.

There are two operating modes:
Select Nodes, this selects objects for information, editing, moving or action (as described
previously)
Add Components mode (invoked by clicking any of the Add... options on the menu), which
adds a component to the system.
In Select mode, the cursor is the normal Windows arrow:
In Add Component mode, the cursor is the Spanner:
.
.
Figure : 6.3.4 - 7 WellFlo Edit Menu
The Select Nodes option on the menu restores the mode to Select, and the cursor will change
accordingly. You then operate as described in Sections Using The Tabular and Graphical
Editors, on page 65 and Graphical Editor Menu Items, on page 94.
After selecting a component to add, the cursor becomes the spanner icon, and a single click in
any valid site in the system drawing window will insert a component of the class selected.
The dialog box of the component class will appear, and you can edit its characteristics. (See,
for example, Figure 6.3.2 - 14, Gas Lift Valve Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 79.)
In any of these dialog boxes, clicking Cancel will remove the component. Clicking OK will
confirm it. You can always edit the actual data later, and you may find the easiest way to set
up a well system is to use Add Component mode to build up the system, without bothering
with the component details, and then to use Select mode to edit each component individually
and to enter depths, deviation, etc.
The last option is Default Description. This restores the system to its default setting of 4 basic
components (Figure 6.3.4 - 8, Default Well System, on page 98). Before this happens, you
will be warned that you will lose the current system from memory.
97
The Add Components options are divided into two parts: Surface Components (downstream
of the wellhead) and Well Components (upstream of the wellhead).
Figure : 6.3.4 - 8 Default Well System
6.4.
General Data
The General data... option is accessed from the Data Preparation menu.
The General Data screen contains text information for recording important facts about the
analysis, including well name, date and objectives.
Figure : 6.4.0 - 1 General Data Section Dialog Box
There are nine optional text fields in the window (Figure 6.4.0 - 1, General Data Section Dialog
Box, on page 98). They can be extended beyond the width of the fields in the window: just keep
typing. The Notes section will accommodate up to 8191 characters. Line breaks will be inserted
automatically, or can be forced with Ctrl+Enter.
6. 4. General Data
Copying and Pasting text: Note that the standard Windows keyboard commands for Copy
(Ctrl+C), Cut (Ctrl+X) and Paste (Ctrl+V) can be used to edit and transfer text to or from a word
processor (or another WellFlo file) via the ClipBoard.
98
6.5.
Well and Flow Type
The Well and Flow Type options are accessed from the Data Preparation menu.
Figure : 6.5.0 - 1 Well and Flow Type Dialog Box
You can nominate the Well Type as production or injection, and specify flow in either the tubing
or the annulus, or both. Pipeline mode will display only surface components in the system
diagram, with a few appropriate modifications to terminology. The Flow Type settings become
irrelevant in this case.
6. 5. Well and Flow Type
With certain well configurations, some buttons will be disabled. Injection mode is not allowed,
for instance, if you have a condensate fluid type, or an ESP or gas lift valve (even if not active)
in the completion. Fluid type is only allowed to be dry gas or water for injection mode. These are
selected in Section Reservoir Control - Fluid Properties, on page 100.
99
6.6.
Reservoir Control - Fluid Properties
The Reservoir Control.... dialog box is accessed from the Data Preparation menu, or by doubleclicking the reservoir icon on the system editor screen. Figure 6.6.0 - 1, Reservoir Control
Dialog Box, on page 100 will appear.
The Reservoir Control section deals with the entry and manipulation of Fluid and Inflow
Performance data; both in individual layers and their subsequent combined effect in a composite
multi-layered reservoir.
The fluid properties modelling of WellFlo, accessed via the Fluid Parameters button, is
described in this section. Inflow Performance modelling, accessed via the Edit Layer button, is
described in Section Reservoir Control - Inflow Performance, on page 126.
Fluid and Layer property data can be saved to and imported from file, to facilitate easy transfer
of common properties between well files. This is achieved via the Data Preparation menu
option Transfer Reservoir Data, described under Figure 6.3.4 - 5, Import/Export of Layer and
Fluid Properties, on page 96.
Fluid parameters are saved as a file with extension .PVT, which contains all data related to the
Fluid Parameters facility in Reservoir Control.
Figure : 6.6.0 - 1 Reservoir Control Dialog Box
There is a choice Fluid Type in the upper left area of the dialog box:
Black Oil (producing well) or Water (injection well)
Dry Gas (producing or injection well)
Gas Condensate (producing well only)
Volatile Oil (producing well only)
If you have selected Injection for the Flow Direction in the Well Type dialog box (Figure 6.5.0 1, Well and Flow Type Dialog Box, on page 99), the Fluid Type area will appear as follows:
100
6. 6. Reservoir Control - Fluid Properties
The Fluid Type (see below) must be set correctly before you import a .PVT file.
Figure : 6.6.0 - 2 Fluid Type Area for an Injection Well
Black Oil, Water and Dry Gas properties are all modelled using correlations. The black oil
option is available for GORs up to 200,000 scf/STB*. For GORs greater than 2,000 scf/STB
you might consider using the volatile oil option. For black oil/water systems, there is a
facility for modelling emulsion viscosities (end of Section Black Oil PVT Model, on page
101).
[*See comments in Section 6. 6. 1 Black Oil PVT Model, on page 101 about modelling
gas layers commingling with oil.]
Condensate and Volatile Oil properties are modelled using a four-component Equation of
State (EoS) derived by EPS8.
The "condensate" option accommodates CGRs down to 5 STB/MMscf/day.
A "volatile oil" is defined as having a GOR greater than 2,000 scf/STB (equivalent to a CGR
less than 500 STB/MMscf). However, either option will model both systems - the volatile oil
option simply allows you to specify a GOR instead of a CGR.
Note: since the Inflow Performance depends on the fluid properties, you should always define the
fluid properties first. Then when you enter IPR data, you will see results which reflect the actual
PVT properties of the system.
There are facilities for checking and calibrating computed fluid properties against measured data.
Most of the PVT fluid parameters can be tuned individually. The tuning coefficients are stored as
part of the WellFlo data file and will be applied in any subsequent calculation made here or in
any other part of the program.
Fluid parameters are accessed through the Reservoir Control dialog box by clicking the Fluid
Parameters button. The following sections deal with the fluid models in the order listed above.
The "black oil" category in WellFlo accepts a producing GOR as high as 200,000 scf/STB. None
of the black oil correlations were validated much above 2,000 - 2,500 scf/STB, and for more
accurate modelling of oil properties for GORs greater than 2000 scf/STB, you might consider
using the volatile oil option.
We have allowed a high GOR limit simply to provide a means of including a gas layer or layers
commingling with the oil layer(s). The gas layer can be represented as a very high GOR oil
layer.
Oil Fluid Parameters Dialog Box

If you have selected Black Oil in the Fluid Type part of Figure 6.6.0 - 1, Reservoir Control
Dialog Box, on page 100, then clicking Fluid Parameters will lead to the Oil Fluid Parameters
dialog box (Figure 6.6.1 - 1, Oil Fluid Parameters Dialog Box, on page 102).
101
6. 6. 1. Black Oil PVT Model
Figure : 6.6.1 - 1 Oil Fluid Parameters Dialog Box
Three areas of this dialog box are for data entry:

Produced Fluid Data
Layer Data
Correlations
The 5 fields in Produced Fluid Data area are used to enter the basic production data. The
first two, Oil specific gravity and Oil API gravity, and the last two, Water salinity (NaCl
equivalent) and Water specific gravity, are blue-coloured, indicating that they are linked
pairs of fields. Changing one automatically updates the other of the pair, so that data remain
consistent. The other field is for the separator Gas specific gravity at standard conditions.
The Copy Previous Data button has been provided as a quick way of copying the Prod GOR and
Water Cut values from one layer into another. It will copy values into the currently selected
layer from the previous layer that was displayed.
Note: that the Produced GOR (Rsp) is the instantaneous (not cumulative) producing gas/oil ratio
(excluding lift gas) at standard conditions. It can be greater than or equal to the solution GOR
(Rs) of the reservoir oil.
If you set Rsp > Rs, you will be modelling additional, non-associated, gas in the flow stream (e.g.
from a gas cap or a communicating gas zone). A maximum of 200,000 scf/STB is currently
allowed.
It is essential to set the Produced GOR correctly to take account of all the non-injected gas being
produced to surface, otherwise the nodal analysis pressure drop calculations will be wrong.
Use the Correlations area to select the following Black Oil correlations (Figure 6.6.1 - 2,
Choosing The Black Oil Correlations, on page 103):
For Bubble pt pressure (Pb), Solution GOR (Rs) and Oil Formation Volume Factor (Bo):
9
10
26
Glas, Lasater, Standing, Vazquez-Beggs , Petrosky-Farshad and Macary correlations.
102
In the Layer Data area, the produced fluid ratios can be entered. They can vary layer by
layer. If you are using the Tabulated IPR option to enter IPR data (See Section 6. 7. 3 Layer
IPR Calculation, on page 141), these fluid ratio fields will not be editable - they will simply
display the values specified at the top of the table for reference.
For o (Oil Viscosity), from Beal + Chew and Connally9, Beggs and Robinson9, ASTM +
Chew and Connally, or ASTM + Beggs and Robinson correlations. (The ASTM method is
a 2-point calibration of dead oil viscosity at different temperatures.)
The ASTM correlation defines that the variation with temperature of the dead oil viscosity
is of the form (T1)/(T2) = (T2/T1)^k, where T1 and T2 are in degrees Fahrenheit, and k
depends on observed data. After selection of this correlation, therefore, the Match screen
should be used to enter two or more observed dead oil viscosities at different temperatures,
followed by a Best Fit.
When the ASTM correlation is selected from the Uo list box in the Correlations group of the
Fluid Properties dialog, it must be combined with either the Chew and Connally formula, or
the Beggs and Robinson one, to correct it for live oil. After fitting the dead oil observations as
above, any observed live oil viscosities should then be compared with the calculated values
on the Check screen, to guide the choice of live oil correction.
The ASTM formula does not actually give the dead oil viscosity as a function of its gravity
and temperature. As this is incompatible with the other oil viscosity correlations in WellFlo,
constants have been added to the implementation to let it be used without observed data,
although this is not recommended.
For g (Gas Viscosity), from Carr, Kobayashi and Burrows11 or Lee, Gonzalez and Eakin12
correlations.
- For the surface tension of water, there is a choice of Basic and Advanced.
- The basic option retains the simplistic correlation with no dependence on pressure and
salinity, used prior to Version 3.4. It also invokes a linear interfacial tension mixing rule for
the multiphase flow calculations.
- The advanced option (Version 3.4 onwards) provides a correlation incorporating
pressure30 and salinity31 effects. It also invokes a fourth-root mixing rule for the
multiphase flow calculations.
Interfacial tension is important in determining flow regimes.
Clicking Check takes you to the property-checking dialog box (See Section Checking Black Oil
Properties, on page 103), and clicking Match takes you to the property matching dialog box
(See Section Matching Correlations to Measured Data, on page 115).
An asterisk (*) will appear against the name of any correlation which has been tuned.
Checking Black Oil Properties

You can use this section to look at the results of the selected correlations (see Figure 6.6.1 - 3,
Oil Properties Check Dialog Box, on page 104). The input and computed parameters on this
screen are for the purpose of checking data, and will not be used elsewhere in the program.
103
Figure : 6.6.1 - 2 Choosing The Black Oil Correlations
Click the Check button in the Oil Fluid Parameters dialog box.
Enter the values of Pressure, Temperature and Produced GOR at which you want to check
the fluid properties.
If you press the Calculate button the correlations you have selected will be used at these
conditions to give (top to bottom): volume factor, viscosity, and density of (left to right) oil,
gas and water, and the surface tension of oil and water (relative to air). The Bubble point
pressure and Solution GOR are also calculated.
Figure : 6.6.1 - 3 Oil Properties Check Dialog Box
With the exception of Vazquez-Beggs, these correlations assume a single stage flash to standard
conditions. (The published Vazquez-Beggs correlation assumed the first stage separator pressure
to be 100 psig, and provided for a pressure (and temperature) correction to gas gravity if
different. To simplify the data input, WellFlo assumes 100 psig and applies no correction).
If you are comparing with multi-stage flash experimental data, be sure to total up the GORs from
all stages, and to enter a gas gravity which is the GOR-weighted sum of the gravities from each
stage. The screen is not suited to comparison with differential liberation data.
The Bubble point pressure is calculated at the check temperature for the specified Produced
GOR. To check against laboratory PVT data, you would normally enter the measured GOR of
the reservoir oil here. Calculations will be performed for 0 GOR 200,000 scf/STB, although
these correlations were rarely validated above 2000-2500 scf/STB9.
Note: Entering a high producing GOR because of excess gas production from, say, another layer,
will not affect the computation of oil properties in the oil layer. The bubble point calculated in
this situation is the bubble point of the total system (associated + excess gas), and it will probably
be well above the expected bubble point for the reservoir. But, as you can verify, at Check
pressures below the bubble point, the calculated oil properties will be the same, regardless of the
value entered for Produced GOR. This is because, when below the bubble point, the specified
check pressure is effectively a saturation pressure - the oil cannot contain any more gas at that
pressure, no matter how much is available.
The calculations made on this screen are not carried through to any other part of the program they are for reference only. All fluid properties are for nodal analysis are calculated at prevailing
conditions wherever necessary, based on the data on the Oil Fluid Parameters dialog box.
104
The Solution GOR is calculated at the check pressure and temperature. If the check pressure is
below the calculated bubble point, the solution GOR will, of course, be less than the specified
Produced GOR.
It is possible to tune the oil properties to match a particular measured result. If you have a
matching requirement, you should click the Match button on the Oil Fluid Properties dialog
box (see the next Section Matching Correlations To Measured Data).
Matching Correlations To Measured Data
Selecting the Match option from the Oil Fluid Parameters dialog box takes you to the Match
oil properties dialog box (Figure 6.6.1 - 4, PVT Correlation Matching Dialog Box (1), on
page 105). This is to allow you to tune any of the Black Oil correlations against measured data
using a minimisation routine.
Tuning the PVT model is very important, as the influence of fluid properties, particularly gas/oil
ratio, on pressure drop can be dramatic.
You may now use the Copy button on any of the Match dialog boxes to transfer your data to any
compatible database, word processor, or spreadsheet, such as Excel.
Figure : 6.6.1 - 4 PVT Correlation Matching Dialog Box (1)
The control area, top left. Under Match Property you can choose the PVT property you wish
to tune from a drop-down list.
Figure : 6.6.1 - 5 Black Oil Model Properties for Tuning
105
Referring to Figure 6.6.1 - 4, PVT Correlation Matching Dialog Box (1), there are six main
sections within the dialog window. These are described as follows:
The correlation used has already been chosen in the PVT Black Oil Entry Model dialog box
(see Figure 6.6.1 - 2, Choosing The Black Oil Correlations, on page 103), and is simply
displayed for information on the tuning screen. (This avoids possible inconsistencies in
parameter tuning, such as using one correlation for tuning bubble-point, and another for
solution GOR.). An asterisk (*) by the name of the correlation indicates that a fluid parameter
has already been tuned using this correlation.
The Observed Values area, top right. This is where you enter the measured PVT data to
which you wish to match.
The tuning results area, left and bottom left. This shows the Tuning Parameters (shift and
multiplier) and Match quality.
The Calculated Values area, bottom right. This shows the values that the correlation
calculates for the pressures and temperatures of the data points entered in the Observed
Values area. Once a parameter has been tuned, all subsequent calculations of that parameter,
and any others that depend on it, will include the effects of the tuning, in any part of the
program.
The top left data display/entry field and buttons:
at produced GOR field allows you to enter the measured GOR at which all the tuning will
take place.
Zero values button clears any Observed Values you might have typed in (see the next
section).
Reset tuning button sets the selected correlation back to a no-tune condition (multiplier = 1,
shift = 0).
The six functional buttons along the bottom of the dialog.
The use of this section will be illustrated by reference to Figure 6.6.1 - 4, PVT Correlation
Matching Dialog Box (1), on page 105, Figure 6.6.1 - 6, PVT Correlation Matching Dialog
Box (2), on page 107 and Figure 6.6.1 - 7, PVT Correlation Matching Dialog Box (3), on
page 107.
The steps involved are:
Enter the Pressure column and Temperature row values (e.g. we have entered 1000, 2000,
3000 and 4000 psia at 230F in Figure 6.6.1 - 6, PVT Correlation Matching Dialog Box (2),
on page 107).
Then enter the Observed Values corresponding to the observed pressure and temperature.
Select the Calculate button to see the results at the specified points.
Note: This button includes the effect of any previous tuning. This can be cancelled by clicking the
Reset tuning button first.
For each value in the Observed Values fields, corresponding Calculated Values will be
displayed in the lower panel. This is the result illustrated in Figure 6.6.1 - 6, PVT
Correlation Matching Dialog Box (2), on page 107. Nothing in the calculated values area
can be edited.
Note: This is also a useful way of generating a table of PVT results. In Figure 6.6.1 - 4, PVT
Correlation Matching Dialog Box (1), on page 105, four 1.0 values have been entered in the
observed values section to trigger four corresponding calculated values.
106
Select the required Match Parameter. In Figure 6.6.1 - 6, PVT Correlation Matching
Dialog Box (2), on page 107, this is Bo, with the Glas correlation (selected previously).
Note: Once you have selected OK from Match, the tuning which you perform here will be used
throughout the WellFlo data set unless you reset the tuning parameters.
If you tune the bubble point, you will not be able to tune the solution GOR. This is necessary for
consistency.
107
When the Calculated Values have been displayed, select the Best Fit button. This starts the
matching routine, which displays the best fit Calculated Values, and the resultant Tuning
parameters, as shown in Figure 6.6.1 - 7, PVT Correlation Matching Dialog Box (3), on page
107. The Match field is a quality-of-fit indicator, 1.000 being a perfect match.
Simultaneous tuning of solution GOR and bubble point

You may, however, specify a measured bubble point, and use this to weight the tuning of the
GOR. Proceed as follows:
- select Bubble Point and enter the desired observed value at the appropriate temperature and
GOR. Do not tune (cancel any prior tuning).
- select Solution GOR, enter observed value(s) at the appropriate pressure(s) and temperature
in the normal way
- select the Best Fit button. Answer Yes at the first prompt...
Figure : 6.6.1 - 8 Solution GOR Tuning with Bubble Point Weighting
.... then enter a bubble point weighting factor between 0.01 and 1000. 0.01 means almost no
weighting at all (i.e. the GOR will be tuned without paying much attention to the specified
bubble point). 1000 will force the GOR algorithm to respect the specified bubble point as closely
as possible. The weighting has a roughly logarithmic dependence on the value entered, and a
factor of 10 is a midway compromise weighting.
If tuning Solution GOR with multiple Observed Value entries, but without bubble point
weighting (i.e. you answered No at the prompt), do not enter any values at pressures higher than
the bubble point, as this will unfairly bias the matching process. You may of course enter any
number of values of Rs < Rsb at P < Pb, but do not enter anything higher than Rs = Rsb at P = Pb.
If there is only one line of multiple values in the matrix, further use of Plot is allowed, to
compare the results of successive calculations. For example, these might be performed with/
without Best-Fit, or with the Best-Fit Anchored and Free (when permitted), or with different
property correlations (i.e. selected by returning to the Oil Fluid Parameters (Multi-Phase PseudoPressures) sub-dialog). If there are several lines of multiple values in the matrix, the Plot button
presents a PVT Match Plot Selection sub-dialog from which to select the vertical or horizontal
line of values to be plotted. This multiple choice of values excludes the option, described above,
to plot the results of multiple calculations for a single line of values.
Anchored and Free tuning
For the Bubble Point and Solution GOR, the Tuning parameters area contains a choice of
Anchored and Free tuning.
With the Anchored option switched on for GOR tuning, Rs is forced to equal 0 at standard
pressure and temperature. For the bubble point tuning, Pb is forced to equal standard pressure at
standard temperature.
108
Select the Plot button to plot the Observed Values and Calculated Values of the current Match
Property, provided there is at least one line in the table matrix with multiple values.
Figure : 6.6.1 - 9 Solution GOR Tuning Anchored at Standard Pressure
Figure : 6.6.1 - 10 Solution GOR Tuning Free (no Standard Pressure Constraint)
The default choice can be set to Free in the Edit User Registry dialog by selecting and setting
the following Value Name and Value Data:
anchor-PbRs-tuning = 0
Replace the 0 by 1 to get Anchored as the default. Refer to The Registry, on page 17 and See
Section Configure Registry, on page 62, for further details of this process.
109
With the Free option switched on, no such constraint is applied: this results in a better match for
oils whose GORs are higher than those predicted by the untuned correlation below bubble point.
In the figure above, for instance, the observed GOR at 1000 psia is 180. With the anchoring
constraint on, the best fit value is 173.599. With no anchoring (below), the best fit is 182.780.
Once a parameter has been tuned, all subsequent calculations of that parameter, and any others
that depend on it, will include the effects of the tuning.
Oil Viscosity with ASTM correlations
Where you wish to model a heavy oil with a low viscosity the ASTM methods in Figure 6.6.1 1, Oil Fluid Parameters Dialog Box, on page 102 will provide a more accurate resolution to
match.
The ASTM part of the correlation is resolved at atmospheric pressure (14.6psi), allowing the
additional (+) part of the selected ASTM correlation to correct for the liberated gas. Thus you
may enter a range of temperatures to calculate your match.
Emulsion Viscosity Correction

The Emulsion button is only enabled for the black oil fluid type (Oil Fluid Parameters dialog
box, Figure 6.6.1 - 1, Oil Fluid Parameters Dialog Box, on page 102). You can enter a table of
viscosity multipliers as a function of water cut which will operate on the raw oil/water mixture
viscosities that are normally computed by the PVT section. During nodal analysis, the viscosity
used for emulsion will be a multiple of the raw mixture viscosity, appropriate for the prevailing
water cut.
The Emulsion button brings up the following dialog box:
Figure : 6.6.1 - 11 Emulsion Viscosity Correction Dialog Box
Use emulsion corrections: Switch the correction logic on or off with the tick box.
- In all tubulars: i.e. the viscosity corrections will be applied from the casing node to the
outlet (excluding the pump itself if present)
or:
- Above ESP or Gas Lift Valve only: i.e. the viscosity corrections will be applied from just
above the ESP or GLV (if present) to the outlet, and the uncorrected oil and water viscosities
will be used below.
Inside ESP: switch this on to model emulsion effects in the pump itself (if one is present).
This can be in addition to, or without, viscosity corrections in the tubulars.
In Figure 6.6.1 - 11, Emulsion Viscosity Correction Dialog Box, the corrections would be
applied in the tubing above the pump, but not in the pump itself.
Table: you can specify a separate set of viscosity multipliers for the tubular flow and for the
flow through the pump. Click the appropriate Table button:
110
In well components: switch this on to model emulsion effects either:
Figure : 6.6.1 - 12 Emulsion Viscosity Correction Table
The objective of this table is to set up a list of water cuts (left column) and the corresponding
viscosity multipliers (right column). These multipliers will be used in the nodal calculations - at
any water cut fw:
Emulsion viscosity (fw ,p,T) = Mixture viscosity (fw ,p,T) x Multiplier (fw)
When you first enter the table, a default set of values will appear, consisting of in-situ water cuts
between 0 and 100%, mixture viscosities computed at the default pressure, temperature and
GOR, and a set of reasonable multipliers (obtained from a real dataset), with the corresponding
emulsion viscosities.
The table can be edited directly by overtyping a cell. In addition there are buttons on the right of
the dialog box.
Insert Row: This allows you to insert a row above a selected cell. You need only enter the
values for Water cut and either Emulsion Viscosity or Multiplier, as moving to another cell
will calculate the other value.
Delete Row: This will delete the row containing a selected cell.
Sort Table: This will reorder the rows in the table on the basis of Water-cut, with the lowest
value at the top of the table.
Copy: Selects the entire table for pasting into another application or WellFlo table.
Paste: This option allows you to copy data from another tab delimited text based application,
or WellFlo table, into the table. The delimited file will only import the first four columns of
data. If there are less than four columns, the it will presume that these are the first rows of
data unless extra tab spaces make up any empty columns.
Water-cut (in-situ): either use the default set of values (0 to 100% in 5% steps) or type in your
own (max 50 values).
111
The multipliers can be entered into the table directly if you know them, or computed from known
emulsion viscosities. Viscosity inversion in an ESP above a certain water cut can be imposed via
the Edit User Registry dialog as explained after Figure 6.6.1 - 14, Emulsion Viscosity vs Water
Cut Plot, on page 113. Also refer to The Registry, on page 17 and See Section Configure
Registry, on page 62.
Multiplier: use the defaults or, if you already know the viscosity multipliers for each water cut,
type them in. You will then be able to calculate the emulsion viscosities from the mixture
viscosities and multipliers at the specified conditions and plot the relationship.
If you do not yet know the multipliers, type in values for the emulsion viscosity.
Emulsion viscosity: As an alternative to entering the multipliers, type emulsion viscosity
values in here at each water cut. You will then be able to calculate the multipliers from the
mixture and emulsion viscosities.
Mixture viscosity: this is a mixture viscosity calculated using the water cuts listed in column 1,
and the oil and water viscosities computed by the PVT section, at the pressure, temperature and
GOR specified in the Use viscosities at... area, and including any tuning you may have done
previously. A simple mixing law is applied:
Mixture viscosity (fw , p,T) = fww + [1fw]o
where fw is the water cut.
You cannot edit this column - all values are computed via the Calculate button.
Compute Oil and Water viscosities at area: enter the pressure, temperature and GOR you wish
to use to calculate the oil and water viscosities. The single-phase viscosities will be used to
estimate the mixture viscosity at each water cut (see Mixture viscosity above).
Computed Oil and Water viscosities at area: these are the single-phase oil and water
viscosities computed at the conditions specified in the Compute Oil and Water viscosities at
area above. If you did any tuning via the Match option on the Fluid Parameters screen, this will
be included.
Calculate: this button will calculate either:
Figure : 6.6.1 - 13 Emulsion Viscosity Calculate Options
Plot: this will give you a graph of oil/water mixture viscosity and emulsion viscosity vs water
cut.
112
- the multipliers from the computed mixture viscosities and specified emulsion viscosities
- the emulsion viscosities from the computed mixture viscosities and specified multipliers.
Figure : 6.6.1 - 14 Emulsion Viscosity vs Water Cut Plot
Viscosity inversion for ESP viscosity corrections: You can force the emulsion viscosity to
revert to water viscosity for the ESP capacity, head and efficiency viscosity corrections (See
Section 19. 4. 4 Viscosity Effects, on page 443) above a specified in situ water-cut by means of
an entry in the Registry via the Edit User Registry dialog:
viscosity-inversion-threshold = xx (where xx = value between 0 and 100%)
Select viscosity-inversion-threshold from the Value Name drop-down menu and enter a suitable
number in the Value Data field. Also refer to The Registry, on page 17 and See Section
Configure Registry, on page 62. Entries in the Emulsion Viscosity Table for water-cuts higher
than this threshold will then be ignored and replaced by the water viscosity, but only for the
purposes of the ESP viscosity corrections.
When Use emulsion corrections is switched off, the inversion threshold switch in the INI file
will still force the mixture viscosity to equal that of water for the ESP viscosity corrections.
A Dry gas is taken to be a reservoir fluid which produces a surface condensate oil volume of less
than 5 stock tank barrels per million cubic feet of gas, i.e. CGR < 5 STB/MMscf. The PVT model
for a dry gas uses the same set of correlations as is used for the gas part of the black oil PVT
model (See Section 6. 6. 1 Black Oil PVT Model, on page 101).
As with the black oil model, a separate water phase can be specified by means of the WGR, in
which case two-phase flow will be modelled.
The Dry gas model also allows for inorganic impurities such as H2S, CO2 and N2 to be taken
account of in calculations.
Dry Gas Fluid Parameters Dialog Box

If you have selected Dry Gas in the Fluid Type area of Figure 6.6.0 - 1, Reservoir Control
Dialog Box, on page 100, then clicking Fluid Parameters will lead to the Gas fluid parameters
dialog box (Figure 6.6.2 - 1, Gas fluid parameters dialog box, on page 114).
113
6. 6. 2. Dry Gas PVT Model
Figure : 6.6.2 - 1 Gas fluid parameters dialog box
There are three parts of this dialog box for data entry:
Produced Fluid Data
Layer Data
Correlations
You need only specify the Gas specific gravity (at standard conditions), which has a default
value of 0.65. If water is present, the Water salinity or Water specific gravity, and Water/
gas ratio should be specified. The Water salinity (NaCl equivalent) and Water specific
gravity are blue coloured, indicating that they are linked fields. Changing one automatically
updates the other, so that data remain consistent.
In the Layer Data area, different WGRs may be entered for each layer.
The Copy Previous Data button has been provided as a quick way of copying the WGR value
from one layer into another. It will copy values into the currently selected layer from the previous
layer that was displayed.
The Correlation area offers:
The z-factor is computed (internally) using the Dranchuk, Purvis and Robinson13 correlation,
and critical pressures and temperatures use Standing's14 correlations.
- Surface tension of water, there is a choice of Basic and Advanced:
salinity, used prior to Version 3.4.
- The advanced option provides a correlation incorporating pressure30 and salinity31
effects.
Inorganics
You may add mole fractions of inorganic gas impurities to your Dry gas model by clicking on the
Inorganics button on Figure 6.6.2 - 1, Gas fluid parameters dialog box, on page 114. This will
open the Inorganics in Dry Gas dialog box.
114
11
12
- Gas viscosity (Ug): Carr, Kobayashi and Burrows or Lee, Gonzalez and Eakin .
Figure : 6.6.2 - 2 Inorganics in Dry Gas
The three fields in this dialog box allow you to enter Mole fractions of the main inorganic
components found in Dry gas: H 2S, CO 2 and N 2. These values will then be available for
subsequent calculations.
The Wichert-Aziz corrections to z-factor and viscosity will be applied (ref.: 14).
Checking Dry Gas Properties

Selecting the Check button on the Gas fluid parameters screen takes you to the Gas properties
check screen, Figure 6.6.2 - 3, Gas properties check, on page 115.
Figure : 6.6.2 - 3 Gas properties check
The input parameters on this screen, and the calculations made, are for the purpose of checking
data, and will not be used elsewhere in the program. All fluid properties are recalculated at
prevailing conditions wherever necessary using the input data specified in the Gas Fluid
Parameters dialog box.
Matching Correlations to Measured Data

Selecting the Match button on the Gas fluid parameters screen (Figure 6.6.2 - 1, Gas fluid
parameters dialog box, on page 114) takes you to the Match gas properties dialog box shown
in Figure 6.6.2 - 4, Gas properties match, on page 116. The dialog is comprised of five areas
(including the set of six function buttons along the base of the dialog). These are described as
follows:
115
This screen allows you to calculate the properties of the gas and water (even if a WGR of zero
has been specified) at any specified Temperature and Pressure. Set the pressure and
temperature as required and click Calculate. Sigma w is the surface tension of water relative to
air.
Figure : 6.6.2 - 4 Gas properties match
Match Property area: two properties are available for tuning:
Figure : 6.6.2 - 5 Dry Gas Model Parameters for Tuning
By selecting the Calculate button, the corresponding values are calculated in the Calculated
Values area. The pressure and temperature values in this panel are updated automatically and
nothing in the calculated data area can be edited. Provided no tuning has yet been performed,
all calculated values will correspond to the untuned correlation.
Selecting the Best Fit button activates the tuning process, in which case the multiply and shift
values (initially 1.0 and 0.0) in the Tuning parameters area are adjusted to minimise the
overall error, and the optimised parameter values will be displayed. The quality of the match
is given by the value under Match - this will tend to 1.0 as the match improves. Once a
parameter has been tuned, all subsequent calculations of that parameter, and any others that
depend on it, will include the effects of the tuning. Any tuned parameter can be detuned by
activating the Reset Tuning button and all Observed Values can be cleared via the Zero
Values button.
The Plot button is used to plot the Observed Values and Calculated Values of the current
Match Property, provided there is at least one line in the table matrix with multiple values.
If there is only one line of multiple values in the matrix, further use of Plot is allowed, to
compare the results of successive calculations (see PVT Match Plot Selection, page 108).
116
If gas viscosity is chosen, the correlation selected on the fluid parameters input screen (Figure
6.6.2 - 1, Gas fluid parameters dialog box, on page 114) will be displayed. An asterisk (*)
by the name of the correlation indicates that the fluid parameter has already been tuned using
this correlation.
The Match Property can be optimised on a grid of Pressures and Temperatures by
entering data in the appropriate boxes in the Observed Values area, i.e. pressure(s),
temperature(s) and measured value(s).
6. 6. 3. Condensate PVT Model

Condensate Fluid Parameters Dialog Box
The condensate Fluid Type option is identical to the volatile oil option except that the produced
condensate/gas ratio (CGR) is entered instead of the produced gas/oil ratio (GOR).
If you are not sure whether your hydrocarbon system qualifies as a "condensate" or a "volatile"
oil, use either classification - the results will be identical.
The gas condensate (and volatile oil) PVT section is similar in appearance to the black oil and
dry gas PVT models already discussed. However, it is very different in its internal workings.
In particular, it uses a computationally intense calculation procedure to generate accurate PVT
properties, using an internal Equation of State (EoS) and a four-component approximation.
Consequently, the execution time of a condensate Nodal run will be much longer than the
equivalent black oil or dry gas run.
If you have selected Condensate in the Fluid Type area of Figure 6.6.0 - 1, Reservoir Control
Dialog Box, on page 100, then clicking Fluid Parameters will lead to the Condensate Fluid
Parameters dialog box (Figure 6.6.3 - 1, Condensate Fluid Parameters Dialog Box, on page
117).
This window is used to define the PVT data for Gas Condensate systems. There are two parts to
the window:
Figure : 6.6.3 - 1 Condensate Fluid Parameters Dialog Box
Produced fluid data area: The EoS model for gas condensates has been configured to
require only black oil-type input: the gravities of the produced oil and gas at standard
conditions, and the produced CGR (in the Layer data area). Oil gravity can be entered as an
API or a Specific gravity. These are linked fields (blue-coloured): changing either one
automatically updates the other. Similarly, Water gravity can be entered directly or the
corresponding Salinity may be used.
Layer data area: The CGR must lie between 5 and 500 STB/MMscf, giving some overlap
with the dry gas and black oil systems. Water production can be specified via the WGR field.
If more than one layer has been configured, the CGR and WGR for each layer must be entered.
The Copy Previous Data button has been provided as a quick way of copying the CGR and WGR
values from one layer into another. It will copy values into the currently selected layer from the
previous layer that was displayed.
117
Produced fluid data and Layer data
Correlation area:
- EPS internal equation of state (Four-Component model)8: No general correlations are
available to model the PVT behaviour of gas condensates or, for that matter, volatile oils,
which are referred to collectively as "near-critical fluids". Traditionally, an EoS is used to
model such fluids, and this requires a detailed compositional analysis to be performed by a
laboratory on samples of live fluid. Invariably, the equivalent EoS model then has to be tuned
to measured property variations on the fluid samples before being used in predictive mode.
In WellFlo, the gas and oil gravities and the layer CGR are used as constraints in the
determination of the fluid composition for each layer in terms of four pseudo-components.
The four-component model is a balance between accuracy of fluid property prediction ideally performed using a full and detailed compositional analysis - and speed of calculation
and ease of use - achieved by reducing the number of components.
The use of four "pseudo-components", with the additional capability of tuning the computed
results, has been found to be highly effective in modelling a wide range of condensate fluid
systems.
The reduced user input requirement of two stock tank gravities and a CGR also makes
problem initialisation very easy.
- Surface tension of water, there is a choice of Basic and Advanced:
salinity, used prior to Version 3.4. It also invokes a linear interfacial tension mixing rule for
the multiphase flow calculations.
- The advanced option (Version 3.4 onwards) provides a correlation incorporating
pressure30 and salinity31 effects. It also invokes a fourth-root mixing rule for the
multiphase flow calculations.
Selecting the Check option from Figure 6.6.3 - 1, Condensate Fluid Parameters Dialog Box, on
page 117 takes you to the Condensate properties check box, Figure 6.6.3 - 2, Condensate
Properties Check Dialog Box, on page 118. This allows you to view the phase properties and
phase split at any specified pressure, temperature and CGR.). The input and computed
parameters on this screen are for the purpose of checking data, and will not be used elsewhere in
the program. Fluid properties are always recalculated at prevailing conditions wherever
necessary.
Figure : 6.6.3 - 2 Condensate Properties Check Dialog Box
118
Checking Condensate Properties
On first entry to this screen, the Condensate/gas ratio will be set to the CGR of the layer
selected on the Condensate Fluid Parameters screen (see Figure 6.6.3 - 1, Condensate Fluid
Parameters Dialog Box, on page 117).
Enter the desired check point Pressure and Temperature, and the CGR if different from the
displayed value. (Changing these values here has no effect outside this screen). Click Calculate
to compute the various fluid properties at these test conditions. You will probably need to tune
the EoS (see next topic) in order to match measured data.
The Relative volume is defined as the total volume (at check pressure) divided by the volume at
dew point. It therefore equals 1.0 at pressure = dew point.
Vo and Vg are the volumetric fractions of each phase at the check pressure. Vo = 0.0 at the dew
point. The retrograde liquid dropout (not displayed on this screen) is simply Vo x relative volume.
Note that at pressures above dew point, viscosity and density displayed for oil are set equal to
those for gas for convenience.
Sigma o and Sigma w are the surface tensions of oil and water relative to air.
Dew-point/Bubble-point systems: Depending on the gas and oil gravities specified, increasing
the CGR will tend to take the fluid type from gas condensate towards volatile oil. Eventually, the
saturation pressure will change from a dew point to a bubble point as it passes through the
critical pressure. Since this fluid model is primarily designed for modelling gas condensate
systems, a warning message will be issued if a bubble point system is detected.
Figure : 6.6.3 - 3 Volatile Oil (bubble-point system) Warning

Selecting the Match button on the Condensate Fluid Parameters screen takes you to the Match
Condensate Properties dialog box, (see Figure 6.6.3 - 4, Match Condensate Properties Dialog
Box, on page 120).
119
You can, however, continue to work with the condensate system you have defined. Alternatively,
switch the Fluid Type to volatile oil - the results will be the same.
Figure : 6.6.3 - 4 Match Condensate Properties Dialog Box
Choose the desired match property by clicking on the arrow in the Match Property area, and
selecting from the pull-down menu. You can tune any or all of the listed parameters. You should
at least tune the Dew Point and Liquid Dropout if possible, as they strongly affect the pressure
loss calculations along the wellbore.
The default Test Temperature corresponds to the temperature specified for the first layer in
Layer Control (Figure 6.7.0 - 1, Reservoir Control Dialog Box, on page 126) - change this if
you wish to perform the matching at a different temperature.
Now enter appropriate measured data in the Observed Values data area.
For all Match Properties (apart from Dew Point Pressure), a grid of observed values can be
entered. Each row corresponds to a CGR (entered down the side of the grid), and each column to
a Pressure (entered across the top of the grid). The initial default CGR/s correspond to those
specified for the layer/s in the Fluid Parameters dialog box (see Figure 6.6.3 - 1, Condensate
Fluid Parameters Dialog Box, on page 117) - change or delete as required.
To tune a parameter, enter at least one Pressure/CGR pair with its observed value.
Note: since each row in the table is for a constant CGR, it is only suited to CCE (constant
composition expansion) experiments. In the alternative CVD (constant volume depletion)
experiments, the CGR changes at each step, as liquid is removed. The API gravity of the
condensate liquid will also change.
120
Figure : 6.6.3 - 5 Condensate Model Parameters for Tuning
Keep this in mind when matching, for instance, to liquid dropout data at a spread of pressures
from a PVT report. Use CCE data when available. If it is CVD data, only the first pressure below
dew point can be used for tuning at the original CGR.
If Dew Point Pressure is selected, the Pressure fields across the top of the grid are irrelevant
and are greyed out, and only one observed value can be entered per specified CGR.
Untuned Calculations
Select the Calculate button, and any Pressure/CGR cell containing a non-zero value will cause
a corresponding field in the lower Calculated Values area to be computed. The Pressure and
CGR values in this area are updated automatically for reference, and nothing in the calculated
data area can be edited. Provided no tuning has yet been performed, all calculated values will
correspond to the untuned EoS.
Figure : 6.6.3 - 6 Calculated Dew Point Before Tuning
Tuned calculations
With suitable observed values specified for a particular match property, select the Best Fit button
to start the non-linear minimisation. Up to three internal EoS coefficients will be adjusted,
depending on the match property selected and the number of observed values specified. The
deviation of these coefficients from their initial values will be indicated by the values displayed
in the Tuning area.
The quality of the fit is presented in the Match area. It should be larger after tuning than before,
with a maximum value of 1.0.
121
Activating the Zero Values button causes any parameters entered in the Observed Values area
to be cleared.
Figure : 6.6.3 - 7 Tuned Dew Point
The initial untuned status of the selected match property can be restored at any stage by
activating the Reset Tuning button in this area.
Principle of Tuning
The EoS tuning takes particular EoS intrinsic parameters such as critical temperatures, critical
volumes or volume shift coefficients (depending on the required property) and adjusts them
according to a non-linear least squares minimisation to obtain a best fit.
The properties available for tuning on the pull-down menu in the Match Property area, Figure
6.6.3 - 5, Condensate Model Parameters for Tuning, on page 120, are treated in categories,
according to a hierarchical approach which requires a three-stage adjustment:
1.Dew point and liquid dropout
2.Volumetrics
3.Viscosities, Surface tension of oil (relative to air)
The advantage of this method is that the tuning used at stage 3 has no effect on the properties
evaluated at stage 2 and stage 1, etc.
1
Dew Point (or Bubble Point) and Liquid Dropout are generally most sensitive to the
proportions and characteristics of the heaviest components, in particular, their critical
temperatures.
Volumetric properties such as Relative Volume and Z-Factor (of the vapour phase) both
depend on the gas Z-Factor. The Peneloux volume correction used in the three-parameter
Peng-Robinson EoS (PR3), is calculated after dew point pressure and liquid dropout have
been evaluated. Therefore, the volume correction coefficients can safely be adjusted to
match these volumetric quantities without changing the phase determination.
122
The appropriate intrinsic parameters will be selected automatically, depending on the property to
be matched and number of observed values entered.
Viscosities are calculated from the two reference component Corresponding States method presented by Aasberg-Petersen and Stenby (Ind. Eng. Chem. Res. 30 (1991) pps 248254).
Surface Tension (oil) uses the MacLeod-Sugden correlation.
Figure : 6.6.3 - 8 Tuned Liquid Dropout
6. 6. 4. Volatile Oil PVT Model

A "volatile oil" is defined as having a GOR greater than 2000 scf/STB (equivalent to a CGR of
less than 500 STB/MMscf).
The volatile oil Fluid Type option is identical to the condensate option except that the produced
gas/oil ratio (GOR) is entered instead of the condensate/gas ratio (CGR).
123
The need for tuning

As mentioned above, an EoS using 20 or more components (corresponding to very detailed
compositional analysis) rarely predicts measured fluid properties such as dew point pressure and
liquid dropout accurately without some degree of tuning. With a four-component "reduced"
model, it is therefore to be expected that tuning will be essential, particularly where the dew
point and liquid dropout are concerned.
Dew Point
The dew point is the highest pressure at which a drop of retrograde liquid can exist. The
calculated dew point pressure is most sensitive to the heaviest pseudo-component, its mole
fraction and properties. Invariably, the four-component EoS will calculate a dew point
pressure, which is too low and therefore tuning is strongly recommended.
Liquid Dropout
You should only tune to constant composition (CCE) or constant mass (CME) dropout data.
Liquid dropout, defined as the volume of retrograde liquid at a specified pressure the
volume of vapour at dew point, is probably the most difficult quantity to calculate (and to
measure!) being a phase discriminant, i.e. liquid/vapour fraction. Tuning is almost always
required for liquid dropout, after tuning the dew point pressure which is used as an anchor
point.
If you have difficulty tuning to a dropout profile that contains low values some way below
dew point before they increase, try retuning the dew point to a lower false value closer to
where the dropout starts to become significant. This will often result in a better overall match
to the dropout data at the expense of the relatively insignificant tail of low values.
If you are not sure whether your hydrocarbon system qualifies as a "condensate" or a "volatile"
oil, use either classification - the results will be identical.
Volatile Oil Fluid Parameters Dialog Box
Figure : 6.6.4 - 1 Volatile Oil Fluid Parameters Dialog Box
The Volatile Oil Fluid Parameters dialog box is identical to the one for black oil except that, in
the Correlation area, only the EoS is available for volatile oil systems. Please refer to Section
Black Oil PVT Model, on page 101 for a description of the input parameters.
Note that, as for a black oil, the GOR is the total produced GOR (excluding injection gas).
Checking Volatile Oil Properties
This dialog box operates in the same way as for the condensate fluid type (Figure 6.6.3 - 2,
Condensate Properties Check Dialog Box, on page 118). The only differences are that for a
volatile oil, a Produced GOR is specified instead of a CGR, and in the calculations Bubble
Point Pressure is listed rather than Dew Point Pressure.
Calculations will be performed for: 1500 GOR 200,000 scf/STB.
The calculations made on this screen are not carried through to any other part of the program.
They are for reference only. Fluid properties are always recalculated at prevailing conditions
wherever necessary.
Dew Point/Bubble Point systems: Depending on the gas and oil gravities specified, increasing
the GOR will tend to take the fluid type from "volatile oil" towards "gas condensate". Eventually,
the saturation pressure will change from a bubble point to a dew point as it passes through the
critical pressure.
124
Figure : 6.6.4 - 2 Volatile Oil Properties Check Dialog Box
The following warning will appear in this case:
Figure : 6.6.4 - 3 Condensate (dew point system) Warning
You can, however, continue to work with the volatile oil system you have defined. Alternatively,
switch the Fluid Type to condensate - the results will be the same.

The parameter tuning facility for a volatile oil is the same as for a condensate system (Figure
6.6.3 - 4, Match Condensate Properties Dialog Box, on page 120) except that the GOR is
entered instead of the CGR. Please refer to Section Condensate PVT Model, on page 117 for a
description.
Figure : 6.6.4 - 4 Match Volatile Oil Properties Dialog Box
125
If you wish to tune against bubble point data, select Bub pt. pressure as the Match Property.
Enter your measured data in the Bub pt. column of the Observed Values area. When you
Calculate or Best fit, a second column headed Dew. pt. will list the computed pressure(s) (this
has been done in Figure 6.6.4 - 4, Match Volatile Oil Properties Dialog Box, on page 125).
6.7.
Reservoir Control - Inflow Performance
The Reservoir Control section deals with the entry and manipulation of Fluid and Inflow
Performance data; both in individual layers and in their subsequent combined effect in a
composite multi-layered reservoir. "Inflow performance" covers production (IPR, all fluids) and
injection (IIR, water or gas) flow characteristics.
The term "layer" used throughout this section also refers to a "unit" in the context of a horizontal
well, or, more generally, to a "drainage area".
Like fluid data, Layer Property data can be saved to and imported from file, to facilitate easy
transfer of common properties between well files. This is achieved via the Data Preparation
menu option Transfer Reservoir Data, described under Figure 6.3.4 - 5, Import/Export of Layer
and Fluid Properties, on page 96.
Layer parameters are saved as a file with extension .IPR, which contains all data related to the
Edit Layer facility in Reservoir Control. This included relative permeability and Skin Analyser
data.
Figure : 6.7.0 - 1 Reservoir Control Dialog Box
Reservoir Control is the common interface into the fluid and IPR/IIR subsystems; this reflects
the fact that they are related, as any changes in fluid properties will automatically cause IPR
recalculation.
The Fluid Type selection has been described in Section Reservoir Control - Fluid Properties,
on page 100. The one selection is applied to all layers in the reservoir (i.e. all oil, or all gas, etc.).
The Entry Model (refer to Entry models, on page 128) and Well Orientation (refer to Well
orientation, on page 149) selection also applies to all layers in the reservoir.
Access to the fluid subsystem is made via the Fluid Parameters push-button (See Section 6. 6
Reservoir Control - Fluid Properties, on page 100); all other buttons relate to Inflow
Performance
The Edit Layer push-button routes the user into the IPR/IIR of the layer highlighted in the
Reservoir Control list box.
126
6. 7. Reservoir Control - Inflow Performance
The Reservoir Control facility is accessed from the Data Preparation menu, or by doubleclicking the reservoir icon on the system editor screen. Figure 6.7.0 - 1, Reservoir Control
Dialog Box, on page 126 will appear.
6. 7. 1. Layer control
The term "layer" used throughout this section also refers to a "unit" in the context of a horizontal
well. All layers or units are connected in series by the wellbore and are isolated from one another
(by real or virtual no-flow boundaries), and only communicate in the wellbore. You may
discretise a large unit into virtual sub-units along a horizontal well, so as to model inflow more
accurately. For a multilateral horizontal well, each branch is considered to drain a different unit.
Comments about layer or unit "IPR" also apply to the IIR if the well is an injector.
This area within Reservoir Control has two main purposes: it is used to specify the layers or
units contributing to the composite reservoir IPR/IIR, and to access the IPR or IIR configuration
of a selected layer or unit.
A maximum of 36 layers or units can be specified, each with a user-supplied name and an
Active/Inactive status.
Figure 6.7.1 - 1, Layer Control Area in the Reservoir Control Dialog Box, on page 127
displays a four-layer reservoir with all layers active and layer Ergal currently high-lighted in
the list box:
Figure : 6.7.1 - 1 Layer Control Area in the Reservoir Control Dialog Box
To edit the properties of any particular layer, highlight it and click Edit Layer (or Fluid
Parameters).
Figure : 6.7.1 - 2 Add New Layer dialog box
The default identification is Layer 1 to Layer 36. Layer names can be altered at any time by
clicking a layer name in the list box (Figure 6.7.1 - 1, Layer Control Area in the Reservoir
Control Dialog Box, on page 127) and changing it in the edit box.
Edit Layer
This push-button provides access to the IPR configuration for the layer currently selected in the
list box (see next section).
127
6. 7. 1. Layer control
Add Layer
This button adds a layer to the reservoir configuration, up to a total maximum of 36. Type in a
layer name (Figure 6.7.1 - 2, Add New Layer dialog box, on page 127).
Copy Layer
To create a new layer with the same associated parameters as an existing layer, highlight the
existing layer in the list box and press the Copy key. The Copy of Layer ... dialog box will
appear. This operates to the same conventions as the Add New Layer dialog box above. Type in
a new name or accept the default.
The new layer will be given the layer and fluid parameters of the other layer (including Skin
Analyser settings, IPR model, etc.), but is otherwise totally independent of it, and can be edited
separately.
Delete Layer
To delete a layer, highlight it in the list box and click the Delete button. You will be prompted to
confirm deletion. All parameters associated with that layer will be deleted too. If you simply
want to exclude the layer from the picture temporarily, there is no need to delete it: make it
inactive, as described next.
Active/Inactive
Layer status can be changed by selecting a layer and clicking the Active or Inactive radio buttons.
If a layer is inactive, it is excluded from the computation of the composite reservoir IPR, and
from the Nodal analysis. An inactive layer's parameters are retained and its configuration can
still be edited as normal.
6. 7. 2. Entry models
This section explains the various Entry Model options that are available in the calculation of
IPR. Note that the choice of Entry Model is made in Reservoir Control, so the choice made
applies to all layers. However, different parameters can be specified for each layer. The Entry
Model chosen affects the method by which J and F (for oil and water) or B and F (for gas and
condensate) are calculated, and hence the IPR or IIR.
J - the Productivity Index or Injectivity Index - represents Darcy (or laminar) flow, incorporating
Darcy Skin (S), for oil production or water injection. B - the Darcy Flow Coefficient - represents
Darcy flow, incorporating Darcy Skin (S), for a gas or condensate production, or gas injection. F
is the Non-Darcy (turbulent) Flow Coefficient, incorporating the Non-Darcy Skin term (D) (also
known as the Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient).
Non-Darcy effects can be switched on or off (See Section 6. 7. 5 Skin analysis, on page 153 for
details on how to do this).
Layer parameters, where rock and completion data are used to compute performance from
the theoretical semi-steady state inflow equation. For oil wells, an additional option has been
provided to specify the IPR as a table of values.
Test point(s), where one or more measured bottom-hole flowing or injection pressures and
flowrates are used in conjunction with layer pressure to compute performance.
Manual, where J (for oil or water) or B (for gas and condensate) and F are specified directly,
and are used to compute performance.
Note: IPR calculations and tabular entry are described in Section 6. 7. 3 Layer IPR
Calculation, on page 141.
128
There are three Entry Model choices:
Inflow Performance by Layer Parameters

Figure 6.7.2 - 1, Layer Parameters Entry Model Dialog Box, on page 129 illustrates layer
parameter entry for Layer 1 where a Black Oil fluid type has been specified. The Choose IPR
button provides access to the IPR Calculation Models (See Section 6. 7. 3 Layer IPR
Calculation, on page 141) and the Relative Perm button to the relative permeability data set-up
(See Section 6. 7. 6 Relative Permeabilities, on page 167). These buttons are common to all
Entry Model dialog boxes.
Skin Analysis (See Section 6. 7. 5 Skin analysis, on page 153) is only available for the Layer
Parameters option, and can be used to estimate total skin factors from their components.
Figure : 6.7.2 - 1 Layer Parameters Entry Model Dialog Box
Layer Parameters area:

Rock and completion data are used to compute inflow or injection performance from the
theoretical inflow equations:
- vertical wells: semi-steady state, pseudo-radial flow
- horizontal wells: semi-steady state and steady state pseudo-radial flow, semi-steady state
pseudo-linear flow and constant pressure boundary.
Layer pressure: the shut-in pressure (average pressure) of the layer.
Relative Injectivity: a default value of 0 indicates that at a wellbore pressure more than the
layer pressure, the layer simply shuts off, as it did in the previous version of WellFlo. Other
values indicate that at a wellbore pressure above the layer pressure, the fluid produced from
other layers now flows into this layer. A straight line IIR model applies, with an injectivity
index which in principle is the specified multiple of the productivity index. Multipliers of
around 0.6 are common in practice. Note that this fraction if mass based, rather than
volumetric.
The analogue of crossflow is not modelled for injection wells. At a wellbore pressure below
the layer pressure, the injection layer simply shuts off.
129
Layer temperature: the average temperature of the layer (away from the wellbore).
(injection wells only): the pressure at which the formation breaks down under injection. In
WellFlo, the IIR curve will be assigned a very large injectivity index at injection rates higher
than the rate corresponding to the parting pressure. This provides a simplistic representation
of formation fracturing at high rates.
Effective permeability: conventionally the horizontal permeability to the hydrocarbon phase
at irreducible water saturation; not the absolute rock permeability. It is assumed to be the
same in the x- and y-directions - in the event of areal anisotropy, use:
kxky
Layer thickness: the layer net thickness (normal to dip).
Mid-perf depth: the measured depth to the fluid entry point (conventionally the middle of
the perforations). See Figure 6.7.2 - 24, Well Diagram: Multi-layered Reservoir with
Different Mid-Perf Depths per Layer, on page 141 below for comments on multi-layered
reservoirs.
Wellbore radius: the open hole wellbore radius (not the casing ID).
Drainage Area Geometry area:
Figure : 6.7.2 - 2 Drainage Area Geometry
This currently offers three geometry types. The availability of a particular geometry option
depends on the Well Orientation (Figure 6.7.0 - 1, Reservoir Control Dialog Box, on page 126)
and Completion Type (See Section 6. 7. 5 Skin analysis, on page 153).
Click the Configure button to enter the necessary details.
When returning from one of these options to the Inflow Performance dialog box, remember to
recalculate the inflow performance parameters if you have changed anything to do with the
drainage area.
Pseudo-radial flow implies that the well is a vertical line source, but it can be used for fractured
and/or horizontal wells provided the drainage radius (or equivalent radius if the area has an
irregular shape) is at least, say, 2 times as large as the length of the fracture or horizontal
producing interval. The Joshi model for horizontal wells puts no such constraint on well length
and can be used more generally.
130
Pseudo-radial flow: this option assumes a pseudo-radial flow pattern towards the well. For a
vertical well, the semi-steady state radial inflow equation is used to compute the productivity/
injectivity index J or the Darcy flow coefficient B. For a horizontal well, there is a choice of semisteady state radial inflow (derived from P.A. Goode and D.J. Wilkinson, JPT Aug 91 / SPE 19341
& 23546 for a single open interval) or steady state (S.D. Joshi, JPT June 88 / SPE 15375).
Figure : 6.7.2 - 3 Pseudo-Radial Flow Drainage Area Options for a Vertical Well
Figure : 6.7.2 - 4 Pseudo-Radial Flow Drainage Area Options for a Horizontal Well
There are four options in the pseudo-radial category:

Semi-steady state - Circular: Use this for (approximately) circular drainage areas. The
Dietz shape factor is entered manually.
External radius: the external radius of the equivalent circular drainage area, automatically
linked to the drainage area field.
Drainage area: the drainage area, linked to the external radius field.
Dietz shape factor: factor for the shape of the well's drainage area and the well's position
within it. The default value is for a well in the centre. You can get an estimate of CA for a
rectangular geometry via the Rectangular geometry option.
Return to the Inflow Performance dialog box and recalculate the inflow performance parameters
if you have changed anything to do with the drainage area.
Semi-steady state - Rectangular: Apart from the name, the only difference between this
option and circular is that it will compute the Dietz shape factor CA for any well position in a
rectangular drainage area (Ref: L.M. Yaxley, SPE 17082), whereas circular requires CA to be
input. (For a horizontal well, the shape factor refers to an equivalent vertical well at its midpoint.) Both options then use the pseudo-radial inflow equation to compute J or B.
131
Figure : 6.7.2 - 5 Circular Drainage Area Dialog Box for a Vertical Well
Use this option if the drainage area is (more-or-less) rectangular or you dont know CA. In the
case of fractured or horizontal wells, for a pseudo-radial flow pattern to exist, the reservoir
dimensions should be several times larger than the length of the fracture or horizontal
producing interval
It is not, therefore, suited to modelling a horizontal well draining a unit (e.g. a dune) whose
length in the well direction is roughly the same as the open or perforated interval. Nor is it
suited to modelling a long hydraulic fracture (in a relatively small drainage area), or a fracture
close to a boundary. Use the pseudo-linear flow configuration (described shortly) for these.
Figure : 6.7.2 - 6 Rectangular Drainage Area Dialog Box for a Vertical Well
- Enter the Length L1 and Breadth L2 of the rectangular area.

- Enter the well position via its length offset (i.e. distance from boundary in the L1 direction)
and breadth offset (distance from boundary in the L2 direction) (see Figure 6.7.2 - 7,
Drainage Area with Rectangular Geometry, on page 132)
- Click Calculate to get the Area and Dietz shape factor.

Semi-steady state - Wedge-shaped: This is available for horizontal and vertical wells and
can be used when the drainage area is approximately the shape of a pie-slice. This might
apply to the case of multi-lateral horizontal wells draining different segments of the same unit
or a circular cluster of vertical wells. This option calculates the Dietz shape factor, and uses
the pseudo-radial inflow approximation to compute J or B.
132
Figure : 6.7.2 - 7 Drainage Area with Rectangular Geometry
Figure : 6.7.2 - 8 Wedge-Shaped Drainage Area Dialog Box
- Enter the angles and radii as described in the following Figure. A horizontal well section is
assumed to lie along a radius of the wedge, and the Radius to mid-Well is measured to the
middle of the producing interval. For a vertical well, this distance is simply the Radius toWell
(i.e. radius to the wellbore axis).
Figure : 6.7.2 - 9 Drainage Area with Wedge-Shaped Geometry
- Click Calculate to get the Drainage area and Dietz shape factor. The shape factor
computation for horizontal wells (L.M. Yaxley, SPE 17082) is valid when the Radius to midWell is less than about 40% of the wedge radius. The value is clipped at its theoretical
maximum of 31.62 beyond this.
Figure : 6.7.2 - 10 Drainage Area Dialog Box for a Horizontal Well (Joshi's Steady State Inflow
Model)
133
Steady state - Circular: - this option uses the Joshi model for steady state horizontal well
inflow. The geometry would be better described as elliptical, because it constructs an
ellipse of the same area around the well, based on the specified external radius.
Because the drainage area is modelled internally as an ellipse of the same area as the circle, it is
possible to specify a well length greater than twice the drainage radius (this would be treated as
a long, narrow ellipse).
The Nearest measured formation distance is the distance to the formation top and bottom,
whichever is the closer.
Pseudo-linear flow: this option should be used in the following situations. Each will bring up a
slightly different dialog box when you click the Configure button:
hydraulically fractured vertical well where the drainage area is small relative to the fracture
length, such that the flow pattern is pseudo-linear rather than pseudo-radial. The option will,
however, also work for a large drainage area.
Figure : 6.7.2 - 11 Rectangular Geometry Configuration Dialog Box for a Fractured Vertical Well
Figure : 6.7.2 - 12 Pseudo-Linear Flow To A Fractured Vertical Well
if you have changed anything to do with the drainage area geometry.
If the drainage area is large, you may either use this pseudo-linear option or the pseudo-radial
flow geometry - the results should be similar.
horizontal well where the drainage area is small relative to the length of the producing
interval, such that flow is pseudo-linear rather than pseudo-radial. Three such scenarios are:
- well penetrating a small sand lens,
134
- Enter the Length L1 and Breadth L2 of the rectangular area. Pseudo-linear flow is modelled
assuming the fracture to be aligned with the length side of the drainage area (see Figure
6.7.2 - 12, Pseudo-Linear Flow To A Fractured Vertical Well, on page 134). There is no
need for the length to be greater than the breadth.
- Enter the well position via its length offset (i.e. distance from boundary in the L1 direction)
and breadth offset (distance from boundary in the L2 direction).
Enter the Fracture half-length (i.e. half the total length of the fracture).
- well completed with several perforated intervals, each interval draining a section of the
reservoir separated from the next by a real or virtual no-flow boundary. In this case, each
section should be modelled as a separate unit (unit = layer in WellFlo terminology).
- well with several vertical fractures, each fracture draining a section of the reservoir
separated from the next by a real or virtual no-flow boundary. In this case, each section
should be modelled again as a separate unit.
Figure : 6.7.2 - 13 Rectangular Geometry Configuration Dialog Box for a Horizontal Well
- Enter the Length L1 and Breadth L2 of the rectangular area. Pseudo-linear flow is modelled
assuming the well to be aligned with the length side of the drainage area, as shown in
Figure 6.7.2 - 14, Pseudo-Linear Flow to a Horizontal Well, on page 135. There is no need
for the length to be greater than the breadth.
- Enter the well position via its length offset (i.e. distance from boundary in the L1 direction
to the nearest end of the horizontal producing interval - heel or toe), and breadth offset
(distance of the well axis from the boundary in the L2 direction). See Figure 6.7.2 - 14,
Pseudo-Linear Flow to a Horizontal Well, on page 135.
- Enter the design length or effective length of the open interval (the text appearing here
depends on a selection made in the Skin Analyser).
if you have changed anything to do with the drainage area geometry.
If the drainage area is large, you may either use this pseudo-linear option or the pseudo-radial
flow geometry - the results should be similar.
In a horizontal well that has been hydraulically fractured, the geometrical configuration follows
that of Figure 6.7.2 - 12, Pseudo-Linear Flow To A Fractured Vertical Well, on page 134, since
the fracture is considered to dominate the flow pattern. If the fracture is perpendicular to the well,
the well trajectory would in fact be parallel to the breadth rather than the length of the
rectangle.
135
Figure : 6.7.2 - 14 Pseudo-Linear Flow to a Horizontal Well
Constant pressure boundary: This option is currently only available for a horizontal well. The
actual shape of the drainage area becomes irrelevant provided the constant pressure boundary is
reasonably close - the constant pressure effects mask any boundary effects. The boundary
normally represents an overlying gas cap, but could represent an underlying aquifer in a heavy
(low compressibility) oil reservoir, if communication was good.
Figure : 6.7.2 - 15 Constant Pressure Boundary Configuration Dialog Box for a Horizontal Well
- Enter the layer vertical permeability, and the distance from the well axis to the constant
pressure boundary.
- Enter the design length or effective length of the open interval (the text appearing here
depends on a selection made in the Skin Analyser).
Return to the Inflow Performance dialog box and recalculate the inflow performance
parameters if you have changed anything to do with the constant pressure boundary.
Completion Skin Factors area:
Figure : 6.7.2 - 16 Completion Skin Factors area
The skin factors can be entered directly, or computed, via the Skin Analysis button. This is
described in Section Skin analysis, on page 153. S is used in the Darcy (laminar) J or B terms
of the deliverability equation, D is used in the non-darcy (turbulent) F term. D will be ignored
(and greyed out) if the Include non-darcy effects option is switched off in the Skin Analysis
dialog box, accessed via the Skin Analysis button.
- pseudo-radial flow (vertical wells, and horizontal wells excluding Joshis model): S and D
are pseudo-radial skin factors
- pseudo-radial flow (horizontal wells with Joshis model only): S and D are true
(mechanical) skin factors.
- pseudo-linear flow (fractured vertical wells, horizontal wells): S and D are pseudo-linear
skin factors.
If you use the Skin Analyser to calculate skin factors, there is no need to worry about these
definitions. It is only if you are typing in the values that you will have to be careful.
136
The significance of the S and D values appearing here depends on the drainage area
configurations used:
IPR Model area:
Figure : 6.7.2 - 17 IPR Model area
For the various fluid types, the IPR (or IIR) can be calculated from the specified layer parameters
by a number of different methods, described in Section Layer IPR Calculation, on page 141:
- Straight line (oil or water)
- Vogel (oil)
- Fetkovich (oil) / back pressure method (gas with no water, WGR = 0)
- Pressure-squared approximation (gas).
- Normalised pseudo-pressure (all fluid types)
- Tabulated (all fluid types) - user-defined IPR.
These are accessed via the Choose IPR button (Figure 6.7.2 - 1, Layer Parameters Entry Model
Dialog Box, on page 129).
Note: For all models there is an option to define the IPR by means of a table of pressure-flowrate
data.
Calculated Values area:
Figure : 6.7.2 - 18 Calculated Values Area for an Oil Producer
Figure : 6.7.2 - 19 Calculated Values Area for a Gas Producer
The current total skin factors (S, and F if non-Darcy effects are enabled) are displayed. S is used
together with the layer rock parameters and the layer fluid parameters to calculate the
productivity indices J (liquid) or B (gas or condensate). J and F (liquid) or B and F (gas,
condensate) are used to compute the AOF.
For the Oil Fluid type option, J and AOF are expressed in terms of total liquid, i.e. oil and water
(if any). AOF's are computed at atmospheric pressure for producing wells. For injectors, the
reported "AOF" value corresponds to the injection rate at the formation parting pressure.
137
- For all IPR models except Tabulated, Fetkovich and Back Pressure (see below), the effect of
layer parameter changes can be viewed in the Calculated values area by use of the Calculate
button.
Note: When using the Layer Parameters entry mode, the IPR/IIR has been calculated using the
current set of fluid, rock and production parameters. If you now alter any of these (properties,
water cut, GOR, etc.), the IPR will be recalculated. This applies also to sensitising them in nodal
analysis - for example, for different water cuts you will see different IPRs.
- If an IPR has been specified using the tabulated option, the reported J is calculated using the
first flowing pressure point below layer pressure in the table. The AOF is read directly from the
table.
- For the Fetkovich IPR model (available for oil), and the Back Pressure model (available for
gas with no water cut, WGR = 0), the C and n coefficients are entered in the Choose IPR section
(See Section 6. 7. 3 Layer IPR Calculation, on page 141).
Inflow performance from test data

Figure 6.7.2 - 20, Test Point Entry Model dialog box, on page 138 demonstrates Test Point
Data entry for Layer Alpha 1" in a gas field.
The Layer Parameters area and push-button options (Calculate, Relative Perm... and Choose
IPR...) are identical in definition and function to those in the Layer Parameter Entry Model
dialog box (described under Figure 6.7.2 - 1, Layer Parameters Entry Model Dialog Box, on
page 129).
A second Test point data pair (flowing pressure and rate) can be entered if the Include nonDarcy effects box is checked on, as in the figure. The test points, together with the Layer
pressure, are used to calculate the Productivity or Injectivity Index (J) or Darcy Flow
Coefficient (B), and the Non-Darcy flow coefficient (F). These in turn update the AOF.
If there are two test points, values are found for J or B, and F, to fit the points and pass through
the layer pressure. If only one test point pair is entered, or if the Include non-Darcy effects box is
not checked on, then F is assumed to be zero.
For the Fetkovich IPR model (available for oil), and the Back Pressure model (available for gas
with no water cut, WGR = 0), a C and n coefficient will be fitted to the test data (Choose IPR
button, see Section Layer IPR Calculation, on page 141). These coefficients are displayed in
the description box under the IPR plot.
138
Figure : 6.7.2 - 20 Test Point Entry Model dialog box
Consistency checks are made between test point pairs and the layer pressure prior to calculation,
and a warning will be given if anything is wrong. In a producing well, for instance, if the higher
of two test rates is coupled with the higher flowing pressure, or if a flowing pressure is specified
that is higher than the layer pressure:
Figure : 6.7.2 - 21 Inconsistent Test Point Data Warning
If it is not possible to fit an IPR curve through the layer pressure and test point(s) in such a way
as to satisfy certain criteria (in a producer, the resulting fit must intersect the X-axis, for
instance), the following error message will appear:
Figure : 6.7.2 - 22 Unsolvable Test Point Data Warning
If there is no obvious error in the test data, you should consider possible measurement errors
(particularly on the flowrate) and experiment with (slightly) different values until a fit is
obtained. The commonest problem in gas wells is a concave IPR curve (implying a negative F).
Inflow performance by manual entry

Figure 6.7.2 - 23, Manual Entry Model Dialog Box, on page 140 demonstrates Manual Data
entry for Layer 2" in a condensate reservoir.
The Layer Parameters area and push-button options (Calculate, Relative Perm... and Choose
IPR...) are identical in definition and function to those in the Layer Parameter Entry Model
dialog box (described under Figure 6.7.2 - 1, Layer Parameters Entry Model Dialog Box, on
page 129).
139
Figure : 6.7.2 - 23 Manual Entry Model Dialog Box
The manually entered Productivity or Injectivity Index (J) or Darcy (B), and Non-Darcy (F)
flow coefficients are used directly for the AOF calculation.
Non-Darcy effects can be turned on or off at the Include non-Darcy effects check box.
For the Fetkovich IPR model (available for oil), and the Back Pressure model (available for gas
with no water cut, WGR = 0), the C and n coefficients are entered in the Choose IPR section
(See Section 6. 7. 3 Layer IPR Calculation, on page 141).
Mid-Perf Depths in a Multi-Layered Reservoir
For any of the entry models described above, if you are configuring several layers and you enter
different mid-perf depths for each layer, a length of casing will automatically be added to the
well description between each pair of depths. You can see this by returning to the well diagram
screen:
140
Figure : 6.7.2 - 24 Well Diagram: Multi-layered Reservoir with Different Mid-Perf Depths per
Layer
In this way, during nodal analysis, the pressure losses along the completion between fluid entries
will be computed.
If, on the other hand, you give all layers the same mid-perf depth, the well diagram will show
only one reservoir box or icon. The properties of the individual layers will, however, still be
taken into account in the composite IPR, but there will be no pressure losses between fluid entry
points.
6. 7. 3. Layer IPR Calculation
IPR Calculation Models (Producers)

Together with a choice of industry-standard calculation models, and a tabular entry option, we
have implemented the EPS normalised pseudo-pressure method. This theoretically rigorous
method can be used for all fluid types (oil, gas or condensate).
The classical calculation models assume single phase flow or treat multi-phase flow
simplistically, and, in the case of liquids, assume constant fluid properties at all pressures. The
normalised pseudo-pressure ((p)), by contrast, takes into account at all pressures: up to 3
flowing phases (oil, gas, water); the corresponding pressure-dependent fluid properties (volume
factors, viscosities and densities); and the relative permeability of each flowing phase at
changing saturations. Therefore, if the IPR is calculated using (p), fluid behaviour is modelled
more accurately, including liquid dropout in condensate systems.
141
The Choose IPR option on all Entry Model dialog boxes allows the user access to a choice of
IPR calculation models. Also from here, layer IPRs can be displayed and printed. Different
calculation models can be chosen for each layer in the reservoir.
Note: that IPR uses the fluid properties subsystem (See Section 6. 6 Reservoir Control - Fluid
Properties, on page 100) dynamically to obtain fluid properties. For instance, in a condensate
reservoir, the EoS will be called at each pressure while computing the IPR curve.
The absolute open flow potential is, in all cases, computed at a pressure of 14.65 psia or
equivalent.
The choice of IPR calculation models allowed depends on the declared fluid type of the
reservoir, as follows:
Black Oil
Figure 6.7.3 - 1, IPR Calculation Model dialog box (black oil), on page 142 shows the choice
of calculation models available for a Black Oil reservoir, with Vogel currently selected. The
selection can be changed by clicking the mouse on a new model and its effect observed by
pressing Calculate.
Figure : 6.7.3 - 1 IPR Calculation Model dialog box (black oil)
The Plot and Include measured data on plot options are explained in the Plot Layer IPR
heading in the current section.
Straight Line: This uses a constant productivity index (J), assuming inflow is directly
proportional to drawdown at all pressures.
The published form of the Vogel equation uses coefficients 0.2 and 0.8. You may force a different
coefficient by entering a value for the Coefficient of P in Vogel equation to replace the default
0.2. The second coefficient in the equation will automatically be taken as 1 minus this value.
In both straight line and Vogel models, when the Layer Parameters option is used to compute a
theoretical J, the required fluid properties are calculated at the layer pressure, and the relative
permeability data are invoked: if the specified water-cut is zero, J is calculated using end-point
kro(Swi) (= 1.0 conventionally); for a non-zero water-cut, it uses kro(Sw) and krw(Sw).
Fetkovich: The empirical C-and-n method, available for oil. This requires either:
- manual input of a C-coefficient and an n-exponent (see Figure 6.7.3 - 2, Fetkovich Data
Entry dialog box (black oil), on page 143) when you click the Calculate or Plot buttons
(Figure 6.7.3 - 1, IPR Calculation Model dialog box (black oil), on page 142) or,
142
Vogel: This uses a straight line (J) above the bubble point and the Vogel relationship below
(where interstitial gas has evolved).
- in Test Point entry mode, you can enter 2 flowing test points (in Figure 6.7.2 - 20, Test
Point Entry Model dialog box, on page 138, switch Include non-Darcy effects on).
The coefficients are displayed in the description box under the IPR plot.
Figure : 6.7.3 - 2 Fetkovich Data Entry dialog box (black oil)
Normalised Pseudo-pressure: This incorporates the fluid properties of each flowing phase oil, gas (below Pb) and water (if a non-zero water cut has been specified for the layer) - and
the relative permeabilities (kro, krg , krw) of each phase at the appropriate saturation, across the
range of pressures from atmospheric up to layer pressure. The declared value of J is computed
at layer pressure.
Tabulated: This option allows you to define your own IPR as a table of up to 21 pressure/
flowrate values.
Read this before selecting the Tabulated option: The table will initially contain 21 default
values between atmospheric and layer pressure. These initial values are unimportant if you
are going to type in a new set. However, you may want to use them as a starting point for your
IPR. The values represent the currently calculated IPR model (or the default straight line
model if you did not change to another model). If you wish to start from one of the other
models, select the model now, before selecting Tabulated, and click the Calculate button.
Then double-click on Tabulated (Figure 6.7.3 - 1, IPR Calculation Model dialog box (black
oil), on page 142) to access the table. (Once you have entered the Tabulated screen, the table
values are locked in, and you will not be able to digitise any of the other models.)
You can now edit the table.
Figure : 6.7.3 - 3 Tabulated IPR dialog box
143
Either modify the existing data (including Insert Row and Delete Row), or clear it (Clear All) and
start entering new data.
Alternatively, Paste a table in from a spreadsheet, or Copy the table to a spreadsheet, via the
Windows ClipBoard.
Fill Down will copy the value in a selected field into all fields below it in the same column (e.g.
to set the entire Water Cut column to 10%, type 10 into the top field, then click Fill Down).
Fill In will insert interpolated values into a block of blank fields. For example, if you have a water
cut of 10% in row 4, and 30% in row 9, and rows 5 - 8 are blank, click the mouse in one of the
empty fields, then click Fill In - values of 14, 18, 22 and 26 will be inserted. The interpolation
will also account for uneven pressure spacings.
Pressures must be in increasing order, and flowrates (total liquid) in decreasing order. If the layer
pressure is not entered (with a zero flowrate), it will be assumed (from the Layer Parameters data).
If atmospheric pressure is not entered (14.7 psia) and an AOF, it will be extrapolated from the
next two pressures and rates. WellFlo will interpolate linearly between points where necessary in
any subsequent calculations. A maximum GOR of 200,000 scf/STB is allowed.
The productivity index J is calculated from layer pressure and the next pressure and flowrate in
the table.
Figure : 6.7.3 - 4 IPR Calculation Model dialog box (dry gas)
The Plot and Include measured data on plot options are explained in the Plot Layer IPR
heading in the current section.
Normalised pseudo-pressure: This incorporates fluid properties of each flowing phase gas, and water if a non-zero WGR has been specified for the layer - and the relative
permeabilities (krg , krw) of each phase at the appropriate saturation, across the range of
pressures from atmospheric up to layer pressure. The declared value of B is computed at layer
pressure.
p2-form: This provides a direct method for computing single phase gas deliverability curves.
It is available for single phase gas only (WGR = 0). The p2 approximation is best suited to
pressures below about 2000 psia.
144
Dry Gas
Figure 6.7.3 - 4, IPR Calculation Model dialog box (dry gas), on page 144 shows the choice of
calculation models available for a layer in a dry gas reservoir, with Normalised pseudopressure as the current selection. Note that p2-form and Back Pressure (C and n) will not be
offered if a non-zero WGR has been specified in the Fluid Parameters for the layer.
Back pressure: This is the empirical Fetkovich C-and-n model and is available for single
phase gas only (WGR = 0).
Tabulated: As described earlier in the Black Oil section (page 143), this option allows you to
define your own IPR as a table of up to 21 pressure/flowrate values.
Condensate
Normalised pseudo-pressure and Tabulated options are available for the condensate IPR
calculation, in view of the complex behaviour of this hydrocarbon system. This incorporates
the fluid properties of each flowing phase - gas, oil if below dew point, and water if a nonzero WGR has been specified for the layer - and the relative permeabilities (krg , kro, krw) of
each phase at the appropriate saturation, across the range of pressures from atmospheric up to
layer pressure.
The declared value of B is computed at layer pressure. The Plot and Include measured data
on plot options are explained in the Plot Layer IPR heading within this section.
Volatile Oil
Like Condensate, Normalised pseudo-pressure and Tabulated options are available for the
volatile oil IPR calculation.
IIR Calculation Models (Injectors)

The description of the IPR calculation models applies to the calculation of the IIR for injection
wells, with the following differences:
Water
Only the straight line and pseudo-pressure options are available.
Gas
Only the pseudo-pressure option is available.
IIR curve
The IIR is computed over pressures above layer pressure, using J and F (water), or B and F (gas),
up as far as the specified formation parting pressure. At higher injection rates, the curve is
flattened (effectively a very large J or very small B), to approximate the effect of formation
breakdown.
Plot Layer IPR (Producers)

The Plot option on the Choose IPR Model dialog box displays the currently calculated IPR.
Hard copy prints can be made from these displays by use of the File Print option in the Graphing
Window.
Figure 6.7.3 - 5, Plotting the layer IPR (producing well), on page 146 shows the layer IPR
displayed for a condensate with a dew point at just over 4000 psia (the dashed line). Darcy (B)
and non-Darcy (F) coefficients have been calculated using the Layer Parameter Entry Model and
the IPR has been generated using these and Normalised Pseudo-Pressure, giving an AOF of
79.737 MMSCF/day. A series of points representing measured flow rates from the reservoir has
been read in as described in Section Load Measured Data, on page 57 (See Section 6. 2. 1 File
Menu, on page 55) and the Include measured data on plot option has been checked, so the
match between the calculated IPR and the actual well performance can be checked.
145
The value displayed under AOF is the critical injection rate for formation breakdown, and
corresponds to the formation parting pressure.
Figure : 6.7.3 - 5 Plotting the layer IPR (producing well)
If you have configured several layers or units, you can plot their composite IPR, as explained in
Section Composite IPR, on page 171.
Figure : 6.7.3 - 6 Comparing different IPR models
To get several IPR curves on one plot, like Figure 6.7.3 - 6, Comparing different IPR models,
on page 146, you do the following:
146
Adding to plots
Figure 6.7.3 - 6, Comparing different IPR models, on page 146 demonstrates how to compare
different IPR Calculation Models for a black oil system (the dashed line is the bubble point
pressure). This method could be used to compare any data or methods within the layer IPR
section, for example different completions or skins.
Calculate and plot one model using the Plot option, as described in the previous sections. The
plot screen will look something like Figure 6.7.3 - 5, Plotting the layer IPR (producing
well), on page 146, with only one curve.
Minimise the plot window (click ). (If you prefer, click the IPR window behind it to bring it
to the foreground, or drag the plot window out of the way.) Do not exit the plot by clicking
the close box (top left) if you intend to add to this plot - the idea is to keep the graphing
window active while you calculate another IPR.
Select the new IPR Model, and Calculate. Now click the Plot button again.
If you used one of the alternative methods, bring the graphing window to the foreground from
behind the IPR dialog box (drag the IPR dialog box out of the way, or use Task Manager), or
drag it back into full view. You will see the new IPR displayed with the first one.
This procedure can be repeated as often as desired. (Remember - do not exit the plot by
clicking the close box (top left), or you will clear the graphing window and have to start the
plots again.). Figure 6.7.3 - 6, Comparing different IPR models, on page 146 has IPRs
calculated by three of the models available for a black oil system.
Note: The changes you can make between successive Plots are not restricted to different models.
You can also change the layer IPR and fluid input parameters themselves, and compare the
results. The plot legend only shows the model, so you have to keep track of which case is which!
This could be useful though, in connection with the Show co-ordinates option, so you could see
which model fitted test data best.
Plot Layer IIR (Injectors)
The procedure for plotting injection well IIR curves is the same as for producers. The curves
themselves are, of course, inverted relative to IPRs, and are discontinuous at the formation
parting pressure. (The plotted curve is in fact terminated here - in inflow/outflow analysis, it will
be treated as flat above the critical injection rate).
Figure : 6.7.3 - 7 Plotting the Layer IIR (water injector)
147
Figure : 6.7.3 - 8 Plotting the Layer IIR (gas injector)
Note that for a gas injector, only the pseudo-pressure option is enabled.
Export pseudo-pressures
The Export button in the Choose Layer IPR dialog box (Figure 6.7.3 - 1, IPR Calculation
Model dialog box (black oil), on page 142 and Figure 6.7.3 - 4, IPR Calculation Model dialog
box (dry gas), on page 144) allows you to write a table of multiphase pseudo-pressures versus
pressure to a file, extension PSP. The table covers the range 14.7 psia to layer pressure.
Figure : 6.7.3 - 9 Export Layer Pseudo-Pressure File Save as....
Enter the path and file name and click OK. Unless there is a problem, the following message will
appear:
Figure : 6.7.3 - 10 PSP File Export Successful
148
The PSP file is in ASCII format. The file structure and contents are described in detail in Section
Pseudo-Pressure File Export, on page 264.
6. 7. 4. Well orientation
Figure : 6.7.4 - 1 Well orientation in the Reservoir Control dialog box
The choice of well orientation is made within the Reservoir Control dialog box and is therefore
the same for all layers. The vertical category includes slant wells. At angles above about 75,
the horizontal category might be more appropriate. It is actually the well orientation relative to
the layer that is significant for IPR calculations. Thus a well inclined at 60 from vertical in a
layer dipping at 30 would effectively be horizontal for inflow purposes.
The difference in the calculation of IPR/IIR between a Vertical Well and a Horizontal Well is
accounted for in the definition of some of the skin components. This is explained in Skin
analysis, on page 153. The well orientation setting chosen here has no implications beyond the
skin computation, and does not impose any constraint on the well description (casing angle of
deviation) for nodal analysis.
Segmented horizontal well

If the frictional losses in the horizontal section are negligible when compared to the drawdown
into the well, there is no real need to model the horizontal section in great detail. When this is the
case you can model it with just one fluid entry point, half way along the horizontal section.
If you are interested in the flow profile, or the frictional losses are significant relative to the
drawdown, it would be better to define the horizontal section as a series of fluid entry points, so
that the frictional losses can be modelled between them. These multiple entry points can be set up
manually by defining up to 36 sections. You can achieve the same result automatically by using
the Segmented button.
Each segment will correspond to a section of the drain-hole, with a fluid entry at its mid-point,
and a rectangular drainage area.
The following description demonstrates the process of automatic subdivision of a 1000 ft long
horizontal well in a drainage area 14000 ft x 5000 ft, into 5 segments. A schematic is shown
below. The heel of the well is 7000 ft from one end:
149
Figure : 6.7.4 - 2 Schematic of a horizontal well in a rectangular drainage area (not to scale)
On clicking the Segmented button (Figure 6.7.4 - 1, Well orientation in the Reservoir Control
dialog box, on page 149), you will get the Segmented IPR Model dialog box:
Figure : 6.7.4 - 3 Segmented IPR Model dialog box
Please refer to Figure 6.7.2 - 14, Pseudo-Linear Flow to a Horizontal Well, on page 135 for an
explanation of the terms.
After defining the overall depth and length data and the number of segments you require, you
may click on the Segmented Parameters button to open the Heel segment and common dialog
box.
150
Figure : 6.7.4 - 4 Heel segment and common dialog box
Enter the Wellbore radius and the data in the Layer Parameters area. These will be applied to
all the segments initially. You will be able to edit each segment later and assign different values
if you wish. There is no need to enter any other data at this stage.
Figure : 6.7.4 - 5 Reservoir Control dialog box showing newly-created segments.
In this example, the well has been subdivided into five equal sections (200 ft long), each with a
fluid entry at its mid-point (mid-perf depth). The first segment represents the heel, the last
segment is the toe, and the others are identical intermediate segments.
You may inspect or edit each segment in the usual way, by selecting from the list and clicking the
Edit Layer button. This will take you to the following dialog box.
151
Click OK to return to the main screen where five segments are displayed. In the Reservoir
Control dialog box, these five segments will now be listed in the Layer Control area.
Figure : 6.7.4 - 6 Inflow Performance dialog box for Segment 1 (the Heel)
Click the Configure button to inspect the geometry. You will see that the drainage areas of the
Heel, Toe and intermediate segments are assigned pseudo-linear flow geometries, these being
best suited to the rectangular shapes involved. You may edit the data here, but it should not be
necessary unless you wish to offset the well from the centre line of the rectangle by altering the
breadth offsets. The next two figures show the geometry for the Heel segment and one of the
intermediate segments. Check these against Figure 6.7.4 - 2, Schematic of a horizontal well in a
rectangular drainage area (not to scale), on page 150.
Figure : 6.7.4 - 8 Pseudo-linear Configuration dialog box for Segment 2 (intermediate).
This approach is useful for estimating the flow profile along the wellbore when frictional losses
are appreciable. It can also be applied to the study of multiple open intervals. However, since it
depends on the placement of a series of virtual no-flow boundaries to define the segments, its
accuracy in determining the PI will depend on how representative these boundaries are of the
true flow pattern.
152
Figure : 6.7.4 - 7 Pseudo-linear Configuration dialog box for Segment 1 (the Heel).
A comparison with the results of Goode and Wilkinson in SPE 19341 Inflow Performance of
Partially Open Horizontal Wells suggests that the automatic segmented model will predict a
higher PI as the total open length approaches the length of the reservoir in the well direction.
6. 7. 5. Skin analysis
Figure : 6.7.5 - 1 Skin analysis option button
The Skin Analyser is only available when the Layer Parameters entry model has been selected
on the Reservoir Control window. It can then be accessed via the Skin Analysis button on the
Layer Parameters Entry Model dialog box (Figure 6.7.5 - 1, Skin analysis option button, on
page 153). This self-contained subsystem allows you to study the effects of different completion
designs on layer or unit performance, using total skins either measured from welltest analysis or
calculated from their constituent parts.
For the black oil fluids model, the total Darcy skin (S) and, optionally, the total rate-dependent
skin coefficient (D) can be calculated or input. S will be incorporated in the semi-steady state
productivity index J, and D in the non-Darcy flow coefficient F, to compute the layer IPR.
For gas or condensate reservoir fluids, both the total Darcy (S) and the total non-Darcy (D) skin
components are computed or input by default. S will be incorporated in the Darcy flow
coefficient B, and D in the non-Darcy flow coefficient F, to compute the layer IPR.
Completion types
On entry to Skin Analysis you are presented with a choice of seven Completion options (Figure
6.7.5 - 2, Completion Options Dialog Box, on page 153): Open hole with or without Gravel
Pack, Cased hole with or without Gravel Pack, hydraulically fractured, and Frac-and-Pack
(open or cased hole)
Figure : 6.7.5 - 2 Completion Options Dialog Box
153
By selecting a completion type, and clicking on the Model... button on the right, access is made
to the appropriate Completion Data Entry dialog box of the Skin Analyser. The Model... button is
only available when the Use calculated skins check box is selected (Figure 6.7.5 - 2,
Completion Options Dialog Box, on page 153). The dialog box that follows is dependent on
the type of completion chosen (Figure 6.7.5 - 2, Completion Options Dialog Box, on page 153)
and the well orientation (Figure 6.7.4 - 1, Well orientation in the Reservoir Control dialog box,
on page 149).
Calculated Total Skin Factors
If you click the Use calculated skins check box on, the Calculated Total Skin Factors will be
used in the IPR computation. The area is greyed out if the check box is off.
This area displays the calculated total skins for the current completion model. By setting up the
parameters for different completion models in the Skin Analyser and using the Calculate button
at right, you can compare the resulting skin factor values (i.e. select a completion and click
Calculate to display its associated skin terms).
See the following Sections Calculated Total Skin Factors (Vertical Wells), on page 157,
Calculated Total Skin Factors (Horizontal Wells), on page 160 and Calculated Total Skin
Factors (Fractured Wells), on page 166 for details on how the total skins are calculated for the
different models.
Use the Plot IPR button on the right to plot the deliverability curve (Figure 6.7.3 - 5, Plotting the
layer IPR (producing well), on page 146) corresponding to the current set of completion data.
Welltest Results
If you click the Use calculated skins check box to off, you can type your own skin factor values
in the Well Test Results area. This area allows you to ignore any skin calculations (even if they
have been made), and to impose known Darcy (S) and non-Darcy (D) skin factors in the IPR
computation.
Use the Plot IPR button on the right to plot the deliverability curve (Figure 6.7.3 - 5, Plotting the
layer IPR (producing well), on page 146) corresponding to the current set of skin factors.
Completion Models (Vertical Wells)

Figure 6.7.5 - 3, Skin Analysis dialog box for a vertical/slant well, on page 155 is the Skin
Analysis dialog box for a cased hole with gravel pack completion in a vertical (or slant) well in
a gas or condensate reservoir.
The format of this screen is used for open and cased hole completions, with or without gravel
pack - the redundant areas are simply disabled and appear greyed out. The screens for oil and gas
wells differ only with respect to some of the units.
154
Figure : 6.7.5 - 3 Skin Analysis dialog box for a vertical/slant well
Component Skins
Damage Skin
The effect of formation damage on deliverability is calculated using the following data:
Damage permeability ka: the damaged zone permeability.
To exclude formation damage effects, set k a equal to the rock permeability, or disable the
Damage option in the Contributory Effects area.
Perforation Skin
This only applies to cased hole completions. It includes the combined effect of the perforations
and formation damage if a damaged zone has been defined and the Damage effect is ticked on in
the Contributory Effects area. The following perforation data are required:
Perf. diameter: the perforation entry hole diameter (in the casing wall).
Crushed zone skin: the skin attributable to the crushed zone around the perforation tunnel.
This skin may be negligible if perforating underbalanced, owing to efficient clean-up.
If a value is known or is to be assumed, leave the Use calculated skin box checked off and
type the value into the Crushed skin, meas. box.
To compute a theoretical value, check the Use calculated skin box on and enter values for the
crushed zone permeability (reckoned to be of the order of 10% of the rock permeability)
and crushed zone thickness.
Shot penetration: the shot penetration length measured from the sandface (not the casing
wall) to the tip of the perforation tunnel.
Shot density: the number of shots per unit length.
Shot phasing: the angle between the perforation tunnels projected on a horizontal plane.
Flow Shape Factor: the correlation used to calculate the Darcy Flow Shape factor (selected
from a drop-down list). (Locke: JPT Dec 81 and SPE 8804 (Jan 80), Egan: MSc Thesis,
University College, Cork (1984), Tariq & Karakas: SPEPE (Feb 91) and SPE 18247, Muskat
& McDowell: Trans. AIME (1950) 189 pp 309-312.)
155
Damage zone thickness ta: the thickness of the damaged zone, measured from the sand-face.
Deviation Skin
The skin due to the deviation of the well relative to the layer (only applicable in the Vertical
(i.e. slant) well category) Ref: Cinco, Miller and Ramey, SPE 5131, Oct 74. The skin
computation is only recommended for deviations less than 75. In anisotropic reservoirs, this
limit is higher and a prompt in WellFlo will warn you. Although computations up to 90 can still
be made, you should consider horizontal well orientation as a more suitable alternative.
Well deviation: the average deviation angle of the well as it traverses the layer. For the
purposes of skin analysis, this angle is measured relative to formation dip-normal rather than
the vertical. The angle is also used in the calculations for Limited Entry Skin and Total
Skin.
Note: This deviation angle is not used in the nodal pressure analysis: well component deviations
are defined in Section Well Components Description, on page 67.
Vertical permeability: the vertical (dip-normal) permeability of the rock. The skin factor
displayed assumes a fully completed interval. The effect of partial completion is taken into
account in the total skin factor (See Section Calculated Total Skin Factors (Fractured
Wells), on page 166).
Limited Entry Skin
The skin due to the length and position of the open interval within the formation (only applicable
to the Vertical well category). Ref: Streltsova-Adams, SPE 7486, Oct 78. The following data
are required:
Nearest measured formation distance: the shortest measured distance from one end of the
open interval (barefoot or perforated) to the top or bottom of the layer.
Vertical permeability: the vertical (dip-normal) permeability of the rock.
Open interval (MD): open hole completion - the measured barefoot section length; cased
hole completion - the measured length of perforated casing or liner. These are measured
lengths, and should refer to the interval actually contributing to production, rather than the
nominal open interval. The interval open to flow (measured along the well) is displayed
alongside as a percentage of the layer thickness as measured along the well (click the
Calculate button to update this).
Note: For example, suppose the layer thickness (vertical) entered in the Layer Parameters dialog
box is 100 ft. With the angle of deviation set to 0, an open interval of 40 ft represents 40% of the
total possible (100 ft). If you change the angle to 60, the layer thickness as measured along the
well becomes 200 ft (100 Cos 60), so the same 40 ft open interval now represents only 20%.
Gravel Pack Skin

This is the skin due to the addition of a gravel pack. The same data are entered for both internal
(cased completion) and external (open hole) gravel pack. In a cased completion, of course, the
perforation data are also used in the computation.
Pack inner radius: the inner radius of the gravel pack (slotted liner OD2).
Gravel permeability (kgp): average permeability of the gravel.
Gravel efficiency: the ratio of the theoretical to observed gravel pack pressure drop. The
pressure drop across the pack will double if the efficiency is 0.5. This parameter provides a
means on modelling degradation of gravel permeability.
156
The combined effects of partial completion and well deviation are accounted for in the total skin
factor (See Section Calculated Total Skin Factors (Fractured Wells), on page 166).
For cased hole, linear flow is assumed along the perforation tunnel to the screen. A correction
is made, according to the contrast between the gravel and rock permeability, to reflect the fact
that while flow may be predominately to the perforation tip when kgp>>k, it will tend towards
the perforation base for smaller values of kgp, or for decreasing gravel efficiency. This
correction on smaller values of kgp, or for decreasing gravel efficiency. This correction (an
effective perforation length) was proposed by Pucknell and Mason in SPE 24984 (Nov 92)
and is applied to both Darcy and non-Darcy gravel pack skin contributions.
Contributory Effects
Figure : 6.7.5 - 4 The Contributory Effects Area of the Skin Analyser
This area allows you to control which component effects are to contribute to the Total Skin. All
the consequences of disabling a given effect will be taken into account. Note that this area
enables or disables the effects in addition to setting the specific skin to zero.
- Deviation Effect off: all effects of well deviation will be removed and all skin factors will
be recalculated as if the well were vertical, using the data currently on screen. In addition to
the obvious result that deviation skin goes to zero therefore, the limited entry skin will also
change because of the change in geometry as explained above.
- Damage Effect off: no damaged zone exists. Damage permeability is set internally to be
equal to the effective permeability of the layer. This affects the calculation of the Damage
skin ( 0), Perforation + Damage skin ( perforation component only), and Gravel Pack
turbulent skin.
- Limited Entry Effect off: the well is assumed to be open across the entire layer. This
affects the Limited Entry skin ( 0), and the relative contributions of each of the other skins
to the total.
- Perforation Effect off (cased hole): perforations are removed. The gravel pack is also
disabled.
Calculated Total Skin Factors (Vertical Wells)
This area displays the calculated total skins: Darcy (S) and non-Darcy (D) for all fluid types
(non-Darcy skin is optional for oil).
The Calculate button can be used to show what effects the changes to the various parameters
have on the contributory skins, and the total skin factors.
The Plot IPR.... button will lead you to the IPR Calculation Model dialog box in Figure 6.7.3 - 1,
IPR Calculation Model dialog box (black oil), on page 142, allowing you to see quickly the
effect of parameter changes on the IPR curve.
For the vertical well category, the calculations take the following form:
Total Darcy skin S:
Equation : 6.7.5 - V :
S
d + p + S gp
S = -------------------------------- + { S dev PPSF } + S lim
b
where (as appropriate):
157
The total skin values will go through to the layer IPR computation.
Sd+p is the combined Perforation and Damaged skin (cased hole) or the Damage skin (open hole),
Sgp is the Gravel Pack skin,
b is the penetration ratio (= measured open interval / layer thickness as measured along well).
Sdev is the deviation skin, for 100% penetration (b = 1).
PPSF is the partial penetration scaling factor (Ref: R. Burton and C. Parker: Dubai Petroleum
Company Acidizing Manual, 1989).
Slim is the Limited Entry skin, for zero deviation.
Total non-Darcy D:
Equation : 6.7.5 - VI :
D=
(D
d+ p
+ Dgp )
b2
where (if appropriate):

b is defined above, under Total Darcy skin.
Dd+p is the non-Darcy completion skin component (perforations and/or damaged zone) computed
using
an inertial coefficient:
a = (2.6E+10) / ka
1.2
ft-1
(O.H. MacLeod, Jr., JPT, Jan 1983, pp 31-39).

Dgp is the non-Darcy Gravel Pack component skin, computed using an inertial coefficient:
gp = (2.239E+09) / kgp
0.95
ft-1
(from experimental data, Pet. Eng. Dept., Heriot-Watt University).
Dgp is zero if there is no gravel pack.
158
Completion Models (Horizontal Wells)

Figure 6.7.5 - 7, Skin Analysis dialog box for a horizontal well, on page 159 is the Skin
Analysis dialog box for a cased hole with gravel pack completion in a horizontal well in an oil
reservoir.
Figure : 6.7.5 - 7 Skin Analysis dialog box for a horizontal well
The format of this screen is used for open and cased hole completions, with or without gravel
pack - the redundant areas are simply disabled and appear greyed out. The screens for oil and gas
wells differ only with respect to some of the units.
Component Skins
The differences between IPR calculation for horizontal and vertical well completions are
accounted for in the types of Darcy skins (S) computed (non-Darcy skin (D) calculations are
identical in vertical and horizontal wells), and the way they are combined in the total skin terms.
There is no deviation skin. Limited entry skin is replaced by the Convergence Skin. Damage,
Perforation and Gravel Pack skin calculations are identical to those for a vertical completion,
except that, where appropriate, calculations are performed using a mean effective permeability
( k ) in the vertical plane, modified to include the vertical permeability component kv:
k = k eff k v
kv is defined below under Convergence Skin.
k eff is the (horizontal) layer permeability to the hydrocarbon phase at irreducible water
saturation.
It is assumed to be the same in the x- and y-directions - in the event of areal
anisotropy use,
keff = kxky
159
Equation : 6.7.5 - VIII :
Convergence Skin
This is the skin due to the convergence of flow towards the wellbore in the vertical plane. It is a
function of the rock vertical permeability (kv) and the position of the well between the upper and
lower layer boundaries (Goode and Kuchuk
SPE 18300, June 90). The following data are
required:
Nearest Measured Formation Distance: the average distance from the well axis (in the
producing interval) to the top or bottom of the layer, whichever is closer.
Vertical Permeability kv: the vertical (or dip-normal) permeability of the rock at irreducible
water saturation. The rock anisotropy will be defined by the ratio of the specified vertical
and effective permeabilities.
Note that because Convergence Skin is fundamental to the characterisation of a horizontal
completion it is not offered as a Contributory effect option.
Length Selection
This area allows the user to specify the length (Lw) of the open horizontal section of the well.
This is analogous to the Open Interval in a vertical or slant well. There are two input options:
Design length: the intended open interval length (slotted liner, perforations or barefoot).
Effective length: the actual (producing) open interval (best estimated from production
logging or well testing).
By clicking the Use effective length box on or off (Figure 6.7.5 - 7, Skin Analysis dialog box
for a horizontal well, on page 159 lower left), the actual and designed well performance can be
compared.
Calculated Total Skin Factors (Horizontal Wells)
This area displays the calculated total skins terms: Darcy (S) and non-Darcy (D) for all fluid
types.
Note: The following comments apply to the pseudo-linear inflow model, and to the Goode and
Wilkinson pseudo-radial inflow model, described under Drainage Area Geometry in Section
Entry models, on page 128. Because the Joshi model for steady state inflow defines some of the
component skins differently, only the mechanical skin components are displayed in the Skin
Analyser for that model.
For a horizontal well, the total Darcy skin calculation takes the following form:
160
Total Darcy skin S (pseudo-radial inflow option, excl. Joshi model):

Equation : 6.7.5 - IX :
h
r
S = ln 4.4817 w + {S cnv + S p + d + S gp }
0.5
Lw
Lw A
where:
Scnv is the convergence skin from full layer thickness into the wellbore,
Sp+d is the Perforation + Damaged skin (cased hole) or Damaged skin (open hole),
Sgp is the Gravel Pack skin,
Lw is the effective or design length of the producing interval,
A is the vertical anisotropy coefficient,
kv
------k eff
h is the layer true (net) thickness (dip-normal).
The term containing the 4.4817 is an effective wellbore radius term representing the beneficial
effect of an extended horizontal open interval (after Goode and Wilkinson, JPT Aug 91 and SPE
19314, Oct 89; and Goode and Kuchuk, SPERE Aug 91and SPE 18300, June 90).
Total Darcy skin S (Joshi steady state flow option):

Equation : 6.7.5 - X :
S = S p + d + S gp
Total Darcy skin S (pseudo-linear flow option):

Equation : 6.7.5 - XI :
where the terms are as defined above for pseudo-radial flow, and S lf c is the areal flow
convergence pseudo-skin defined by Goode and Thambynayagam (SPEFE Dec 87). L1 is the
length of the rectangular reservoir in the direction of the well (see Figure 6.7.2 - 14, PseudoLinear Flow to a Horizontal Well, on page 135).
Total non-Darcy skin (pseudo-radial flow option, incl. Joshi model):

Equation : 6.7.5 - XII :
D=
h
0.5
A Lw
(D
p+d
+ Dgp )
161
L1
L
S = (S cnv + S p + d + S gp )
+ S lfc 1
0.5
2h
2Lw A
where A is the vertical anisotrophy coefficient:

kv
------k eff
D p+d is the Perforation + Damage (cased hole) or Damage (open hole) non-Darcy skin
coefficient,
Dgp is the Gravel Pack non-Darcy skin coefficient.
Total non-Darcy skin (pseudo-linear flow option):
Equation : 6.7.5 - XIII :
D=
h
0.5
A Lw
(D
p+d
+ Dgp )
Completion Models (Fractured Wells)

Figure 6.7.5 - 14, Skin Analysis dialog box for a frac-and-pack well, on page 162 is the Skin
Analysis dialog box for a fractured well in a gas or condensate reservoir. The format for fractured
wells with or without gravel pack is basically the same for vertical and horizontal well types, and
they have many of the component skin options in common. The screens for oil and gas wells
differ only with respect to some of the units.
The various component skin effects contributing to the total are listed in the Contributory
effects area at top left. Each of these has its own set of input parameters, which will appear in the
input area at top right for the particular component skin you have selected. Each contribution can
be switched on or off for inclusion in or exclusion from the Calculated total skin factors
displayed at bottom left.
Fracture Dimensions
The fracture plane is assumed to be vertical, and the fracture consists of two equal wings
propagated in opposite directions.
Fractured interval (hf): the height of the fracture in the reservoir (not at the wellbore).
162
Figure : 6.7.5 - 14 Skin Analysis dialog box for a frac-and-pack well
Fracture width (wf):

plane).
the (average) width of the fracture (perpendicular to the fracture
Fracture half-length (xf): length of one wing of the fracture.

Intersection angle (): average deviation of the well from vertical over the fractured
interval. This angle determines how much of the fracture intersects with the wellbore. (In the
extreme case of a horizontal well ( = 90), very little of the fracture height will actually
intersect the well, especially if the fracture has propagated perpendicular to the well.)
The angle should be measured from the projection of the well trajectory onto a vertical plane
perpendicular to the fracture. It may be less than the true deviation from the drilling survey
(for instance, if the well trajectory is along the fracture plane, the intersection angle is zero; if
it is perpendicular to the fracture plane, the intersection angle is equal to the well deviation).
Proppant Darcy properties
The parameters in this area are used to compute the effect of the resistance to Darcy flow along
the fracture caused by the finite conductivity of the proppant material (Wilkinson, SPE 18950,
Denver, March 89).
The effect of fracture connection on Darcy flow is also computed. This is determined by how
much of the fracture actually intersects the wellbore (for example, in the extreme case of a
horizontal well and a vertical fracture, very little of the fractured interval height will actually
intersect and there will be a strong flow convergence into the well.)
Figure : 6.7.5 - 15 Data Input for Proppant Darcy Properties
Enter a value for either:

Proppant permeability (kf):
or
Dimensionless fracture conductivity (Fcd):
Click the Calculate button to compute the finite conductivity skin factor.
If you do not want the finite conductivity Darcy skin contribution to be included in the total,
switch off Use finite conductivity damage skin.
The fracture connection skin is determined by the Well deviation entry in the Fracture
Dimensions area, (introduced just before Figure 6.7.5 - 15, Data Input for Proppant Darcy
Properties, on page 163).
If you do not want the fracture connection skin contribution to be included in the total, switch off
Use fracture connection skin.
163
These two (blue) fields are linked by: Fcd = kfwf / xf keff . When one is altered, the other will be
updated automatically.
Proppant non-Darcy properties

The parameters in this area are used to compute the effect of the inertial resistance to flow along
the fracture caused by the finite conductivity of the proppant material (non-Darcy skin).
The effect of fracture connection on non-Darcy flow is also computed. This is determined by
how much of the fracture actually intersects the wellbore (for example, in the extreme case of a
horizontal well and a vertical fracture, very little of the fractured interval height will actually
intersect and there will be a strong flow convergence into the well.)
Figure : 6.7.5 - 16 Data Input for Proppant Non-Darcy Properties
The non-Darcy skin coefficient D for a finite conductivity fracture depends on the inertial
resistance p of the proppant.
Tick the Use calculated inertial resistance coeff box, enter the constant and exponent terms
and click the Calculate button to compute:
Equation : 6.7.5 - XVII :
p =
C
k pn
Typical values for a 16/20 proppant are: C = 6.75E+10, n = 1.02 (D.M. Walsh and K.H. Leung,
SPEFE, Sept 1991, pp 393-400).
Alternatively, with the Use calculated inertial resistance coeff box not ticked, type in a value
for the Measured inertial resistance coefficient and click Calculate to get the Non-Darcy finite
conductivity skin coefficient.
The Non-Darcy fracture connection skin (described just before Figure 6.7.5 - 16, Data Input
for Proppant Non-Darcy Properties, on page 164) is determined by the Well deviation entry in
the Fracture Dimensions area (described in the notes on that area). This contribution can be
switched off in the Proppant Darcy properties contributory effect area (Figure 6.7.5 - 15, Data
Input for Proppant Darcy Properties, on page 163).
Fracture face damage
This models the effects of reduction in permeability over the face of the fracture caused by fluid
loss damage. It can also model an improvement in permeability.
164
The Non-Darcy finite conductivity skin coefficient D will be calculated simultaneously. k is

the proppant permeability, entered under the Proppant Darcy Properties contributory effect. p
Figure : 6.7.5 - 18 Input Data for Fracture Face Damage Skin
In this area, switch Use calculated fracture face skin off if you want to enter a measured (or
assumed) value for the fracture face damage skin (Sf). Alternatively, switch Use calculated
fracture face skin on and click the Calculate button to calculate it from the damaged zone
parameters:
Damage permeability - the permeability of the fracture face damaged zone
Damaged zone thickness.
If you do not want the damage skin contribution to be included in the total, switch off Use
fracture face damage skin.
Choked fracture skin
This allows for the choking effect of a reduction in fracture width and/or proppant permeability
at the mouth of the fracture (e.g. change of proppant sizing).
Figure : 6.7.5 - 19 Data Input for a Choked Fracture
Choked half-length: the length of the choked section along one fracture wing.
Choked width: the width of the choked section.
Choked permeability: the permeability of the proppant or other material in the choked
section.
If you do not want the choked fracture skin contribution to be included in the total, switch off Use
choked fracture skin.
Limited height
This option models the convergence of Darcy flow from full layer thickness into a fracture of
limited height. The fracture height is specified as Fractured interval in the Fracture
Dimensions area (Figure 6.7.5 - 14, Skin Analysis dialog box for a frac-and-pack well, on
page 162). The layer thickness is in the Layer Parameters dialog box (Figure 6.7.2 - 1, Layer
Parameters Entry Model Dialog Box, on page 129). For consistency, both are true (or dipnormal) heights.
165
Click the Calculate button to get the Choked fracture Darcy and non-Darcy skin components.
For the non-Darcy coefficient, the inertial resistance of the choked region is computed from the
choked region permeability using the same C and n values as the proppant, entered under the
Proppant non-Darcy properties contributory effect.
Figure : 6.7.5 - 20 Data Input for a Fracture of Limited Height
Enter a value for the vertical permeability of the layer. Click Calculate to get the Limited
height Darcy skin factor.
If you do not want the limited fracture height skin contribution to be included in the total, switch
off Use limited height skin.
Frac-and-Pack
This option is only available if you have selected Frac-and-Pack as a completion type (Figure
6.7.5 - 2, Completion Options Dialog Box, on page 153). It models Darcy and turbulent flow
through a combined gravel pack and propped fracture, and includes convergence to the
perforations in a cased completion. The proppant is described under the two proppant properties
options at the top of the Contributory effects list.
Figure : 6.7.5 - 21 Data Entry for a Cased Hole Frac-and-Pack Completion
The gravel pack parameters are the same as for the external and internal packs described earlier
(Figure 6.7.5 - 3, Skin Analysis dialog box for a vertical/slant well, on page 155 and Figure
6.7.5 - 7, Skin Analysis dialog box for a horizontal well, on page 159).
Effective shot density (cased completion): this refers to the number of perforations per ft (m)
that are actually connected to the two fracture wings. It may be less than the gun shot density
and will depend on the shot phasing and geometry of the fracture propagation.
Calculated Total Skin Factors (Fractured Wells)

The calculated Infinite conductivity skin (the pseudo-radial Darcy skin factor assuming infinite
fracture conductivity - i.e. based purely on the fracture half-length, and ignoring the effect of any
pressure losses in the fracture caused by finite conductivity) is displayed at the bottom of the
Fracture dimensions area. Click the Calculate button to update.
The Total Darcy skin (non-turbulent flow) and Total Non-Darcy skin (turbulent flow) are
displayed in the Calculated Total Skin Factors area, and are updated when you click Calculate.
They include all the contributory effects you have ticked on.
166
Click the Calculate button to get the Darcy and non-Darcy skin contributions.
Total Darcy skin S is the sum of all the selected Darcy skin components:
Equation : 6.7.5 - XXII :
S = Sinfcon + S fincon + S face + S choke + Sconnect + S limht + S gp
Total Non-Darcy skin coefficient D is the sum of all the selected non-Darcy skin components:
Equation : 6.7.5 - XXIII :
D = D fincon + Dchoke + Dconnect + Dgp
6. 7. 6. Relative Permeabilities
The Relative Permeabilities of individual phases in multi-phase flow have an obvious impact on
Inflow Performance.
Rigorous use of relative permeabilities in multiphase flow is made by the Normalised PseudoPressure calculation model (See Section 6. 7. 3 Layer IPR Calculation, on page 141). The
relative permeabilities are calculated for each phase over a range of flowing pressures between
atmospheric and layer pressure. The in situ flowrates (and, therefore, phase saturations and
relative permeabilities) will vary with flowing pressure.
For the black oil fluid system, alternative IPR calculation models are available for multi-phase
flow (Vogel and Straight Line options). In these cases, the productivity index (J) is computed at
layer pressure using the relative permeabilities appropriate for the in situ water-cut and GOR.
Relative Permeability Data

On choosing the Rel Perm.. button on an Entry Model dialog box such as Figure 6.7.2 - 1,
Layer Parameters Entry Model Dialog Box, on page 129, you are presented with a choice of
relative permeability data set-up options (Figure 6.7.6 - 1, Relative Permeability Data Setup
Format, on page 167):
Figure : 6.7.6 - 1 Relative Permeability Data Setup Format
167
The Fetkovich, Back pressure, Pressure-squared and Tabulated IPR options do not use the
relative permeabilities.
The Edit Data.. button routes you to the chosen data input screen where, in both cases, three sets
of relative permeability data can be set up - Oil/Water, Oil/Gas and Gas/Water.
Note: The data for both format options are retained by WellFlo, so comparisons and cross-checks
can be made between them.
Parametric Relative Permeability Data
This option can be used if Corey coefficients15 are available. End point relative permeabilities
and saturations are specified together with the curve exponents so that actual relative
permeabilities can be calculated at any saturation.
A Corey coefficient of 1.0 gives a straight line; real curves are concave, with m and n > 1.
Figure 6.7.6 - 2, Parametric Format Relative Permeability Dialog Box, on page 168 shows
some typical values for the Gas/Water, Gas/Oil and Oil/Water curves. The oil/water figures are
averages based on work by Tjolsen, Scheie and Damsleth (1991) in a range of depositional
environments. The gas/oil figures are from Honarpour, Koederitz and Harvey (1986).
Figure : 6.7.6 - 2 Parametric Format Relative Permeability Dialog Box
Swi
the irreducible water saturation
Sgr
the residual gas saturation
the gas relative permeability curve Corey exponent
the water relative permeability curve Corey exponent
Gas/Oil
Kro the oil end point relative permeability at critical gas saturation Sgc (and irreducible water
saturation Swi as specified in the oil/water area)
Krg
the gas end point relative permeability at residual oil saturation Sorg (and irreducible
water saturation Swi as specified in the oil/water area)
168
Gas/Water
Krg the gas end point relative permeability at irreducible water saturation Swi. (For a gas
reservoir, this would conventionally be 1.0 if you have entered the effective permeability
to gas at Swi in the Layer Parameters dialog box - Figure 6.7.2 - 1, Layer Parameters
Entry Model Dialog Box, on page 129)
Krw the water end point relative permeability at residual gas saturation Sgr
Sgc
the critical gas saturation (fraction of total pore volume)
Sorg the residual oil saturation (fraction of total pore volume)

m
the oil relative permeability curve Corey exponent
the gas relative permeability curve Corey exponent
Note that [Sgc + Sorg + Swi] must be < 1.0

Oil/Water
Kro the oil end point relative permeability at irreducible water saturation Swi. (For an oil
reservoir, this would be conventionally 1.0 if you have entered the effective permeability
to oil at Swi in the Layer Parameters dialog box - Figure 6.7.2 - 1, Layer Parameters
Entry Model Dialog Box, on page 129)
Krw
the water end point relative permeability at residual oil saturation Sor
Swi
the irreducible water saturation
Sor
the residual oil saturation
the oil relative permeability curve Corey exponent
the water relative permeability curve Corey exponent.
The Figure above shows the oil/water curves for the Corey coefficients and end-points of Figure
6.7.6 - 2, Parametric Format Relative Permeability Dialog Box, on page 168. The straight lines
are the corresponding curves for m=n=1.
Tabular Relative Permeability Data
This option allows entry of measured relative permeability data. At least two points
(corresponding to the parametric end-point relative permeabilities and saturations) must be
entered. Figure 6.7.6 - 4, Tabular format relative permeability dialog box (gas/oil), on page
170, shows a Gas/Oil table with six points entered.
169
Figure : 6.7.6 - 3 Plot (from Excel) of relative permeability curves defined by Corey coefficients
Figure : 6.7.6 - 4 Tabular format relative permeability dialog box (gas/oil)
Saturation data must be entered in ascending order.

The Next Table button provides access to the other tables.
An error message will appear when you exit from a table if the in situ fractional flow computed
from your surface production data (water cut, GLR, CGR, etc.) could not be realised with the rel
perm data you have entered. (The in situ rate of each phase is proportional to its kr/)
Gas Saturation: Enter Sg values between Sgc (critical gas saturation, where Krg=0) and (1Sorg-Swi) (where Kro=0) inclusive for an oil/gas table (Figure 6.7.6 - 4, Tabular format
relative permeability dialog box (gas/oil), on page 170). All saturations are fractions of total
pore volume.
Water Saturation: Enter Sw values between Swi (irreducible water saturation, where
Krw=0) and (1-Sor) (where Kro=0) inclusive for an Oil/Water table, or (1-Sgr) (where
Krg=0) inclusive for a Gas/Water table.
Water Rel. Perm: Enter Krw values corresponding to the water or gas saturations entered.
Oil Rel. Perm: Enter Kro values corresponding to the water or gas saturations entered.
Relative Permeability Data Usage
Relative permeability data are used in the computation of the productivity index, J, in the Layer
Parameters entry mode (See Section 6. 7. 2 Entry models, on page 128).
For a reservoir above the bubble point, the Vogel and Straight line IPR models for oil fluid
type use kro(Sw) and krw(Sw) from the oil/water rel perm data to compute J. For a reservoir
below bubble point, they use kro(Sw, Sg) and krw(Sw,Sg) from the oil/water and oil/gas rel
perm data. (Sw is determined from the in situ water cut, and Sg from the in situ gas fractional
flowrate, both at p = player.) In the absence of water or free gas, kro(Sw, Sg) becomes the endpoint kro in the oil/water rel perm data, and krw(Sw,Sg) becomes zero.
A single value of J is computed (at layer pressure) and is applied in the Vogel or straight line
equation. If you change the water cut or GOR, J will change.
170
Gas Rel. Perm: Enter Krg values corresponding to the water or gas saturations entered.
The Normalised Pseudo-Pressure IPR calculation model requires the relative permeabilities
to be calculated for each flowing phase, over a range of pressures between atmospheric and
layer pressure. J therefore varies with flowing pressure, even above bubble point - it does not
have a single value.
The relative permeability data sets are used as follows, according to which phases are flowing:
3-phase flow
Black oil system below the bubble point with a non-zero water cut (and GOR), or/
Condensate system below the dew point with non-zero WGR (and CGR):
Relative permeabilities (kro, krg , krw) derived from Oil/Gas and Oil/Water tables at Sw, Sg
(by Stone's method).
2-phase flow
Black oil system above the bubble point with a non-zero water cut:
Relative permeabilities (kro , krw) calculated from the Oil/Water table at Sw.
Black oil system below the bubble point with zero water cut:
Relative permeabilities (kro , krg ) calculated from the Oil/Gas table at Sg.
Condensate above the dew point with non-zero WGR:

Relative permeabilities (krg, krw) calculated from the Gas/Water table at Sw.
Condensate below the dew point with a zero WGR:
Relative permeabilities (kro, krg) calculated from the Oil/Gas table at Sg.
Dry Gas with a non-zero WGR:
Relative permeabilities (krg , krw) calculated from the Gas/Water table at Sw.
Single-phase flow
Black oil above the bubble point with zero water cut:
End point relative permeability kro (normally set to 1.0) taken from the Oil/Water table at
Swi.
Gas with zero WGR or/
Condensate above the dew point with zero WGR:
End point relative permeability krg (normally set to 1.0) from the Gas/Water table at Swi.
By clicking on the Display Composite IPR button within Reservoir Control, all the active layer
IPRs are combined into a composite IPR, including the effects of pressure losses between any
layers at different depths, and the effects of crossflow if allowed. This is displayed as the
Composite Performance at Layer 5", or whatever is the name of the shallowest active layer,
except when all the layers are at the same depth, when it is simply displayed as the Reservoir
Performance.
On clicking Display Composite IPR, Figure 6.7.7 - 1, Display Composite IPR dialog box, on
page 172 is displayed. This offers you the option of adding a fluid ratio curve (WC, WGR, etc.)
to the subsequent plot, and of plotting measured data along with the calculated values to check
the calculated values versus your observed readings:
171
6. 7. 7. Composite IPR
Figure : 6.7.7 - 1 Display Composite IPR dialog box
Additional curves
The fluid ratio curves offered depend on the declared reservoir fluid type - for Black Oil: Water
Cut or Gas Oil Ratio; for Dry Gas: Water Gas Ratio; and for Condensate: Water Gas Ratio or
Condensate Gas Ratio. The selected parameter is then plotted against production on the plot.
Plot Phase Components
This option is only available for a single layer black oil model and causes the water and oil phase
IPRs to be plotted in addition to the total liquid IPR. Figure 6.7.7 - 2, Composite Reservoir IPR
Plot for a single layer, with individual phase IPRs, on page 172 is an example:
Include measured data

This option will plot measured data on the graph along with the calculated curves. See Figure
6.7.3 - 5, Plotting the layer IPR (producing well), on page 146 for an example of viewing
measured and calculated values on the same graph.
Composite Reservoir IPR Plot (black oil)

Figure 6.7.7 - 3, Composite Reservoir IPR Plot for black oil (all layers at same depth), on page
173 shows a plot of a Composite IPR (pressure versus total liquid production) for a multi-layer
black oil reservoir with four layers active. Water cut versus total liquid production is plotted as
the optional additional curve.
172
Figure : 6.7.7 - 2 Composite Reservoir IPR Plot for a single layer, with individual phase IPRs
Figure : 6.7.7 - 3 Composite Reservoir IPR Plot for black oil (all layers at same depth)
The Figure demonstrates how, at different flowing pressures, the relative contributions from each
layer to total reservoir production are different, and the produced water-cut varies. At a downhole
pressure over 4600 psia, only "Layer 5" is contributing and the produced water cut is 0%.
Composite Reservoir IPR Plot (dry gas)

This is similar to the plot for condensate fluid described next, except that only the water/gas ratio
is available as an Additional Curve.
Composite Reservoir IPR plot (condensate)
Figure : 6.7.7 - 4 Composite Reservoir IPR Plot (condensate - all layers at same depth)
6. 7. 8. Nodal analysis reservoir sensitivities

The Sensitivities and Sensitivity Groups offered when the reservoir is included in a Nodal
Analysis run (See Section 7. 2. 2 Selecting The Range Of Nodes, on page 180) are dependent
on the current reservoir configuration: i.e. there is no point in offering a sensitivity option whose
values would not be used in subsequent IPR recalculations.
173
6. 7. 8. Nodal analysis reservoir sensitivities
Figure 6.7.7 - 4, Composite Reservoir IPR Plot (condensate - all layers at same depth), on page
173 shows a 3-layer Composite Reservoir Plot for a condensate fluid system. Either water/gas
ratio or condensate gas ratio are available as Additional Curves.
Sensitivities offered are determined by the following reservoir configuration options (and
combinations thereof):
Fluid Type
Entry Model
Well Orientation
Completion Model
Calculation Model.
6.8.
Gas Lift Description
All options pertaining to gas lift will be disabled if your software licence is not configured for
WellFlo/Gas Lift.
6. 8. 1. Gas Lift Models

Gas lift is modelled in WellFlo by inserting one or more valves in the well system. The valves are
positioned at the bottom of the tubing components (i.e. at tubing nodes). Valves can be declared
as active or inactive - See Section 7. 6. 1 Input data, on page 198. At least one active valve
must be in the string for any gas lift calculations to occur. See Section 7. 4 Gas Lift
Calculations, on page 192 for more details.
Gas Injection into a flowline or riser is described separately and is not part of gas lift design or
analysis.
6. 8. 2. Gas Lift Data Entry
Figure : 6.8.2 - 1 Gas Lift Data Dialog Box
In the valve data area, the depth (measured (MD) or true vertical (TVD)) of each valve, its
temperature (Temp) (optional), Manufacturer, Valve Model, Name and Status can be entered.
When you specify a Valve, values are inserted in the Port size, R = Apt/Ab and TRO pressure
fields which you may edit to more accurately reflect your model specifications if required.
R = Apt/Ab: R is the ratio of the area acted on by the tubing pressure to the area of the bellows,
but Apt is the port area. The column header shows the formula R = Apt/Ab for casing controlled
valves or R = 1 - Apt/Ab for fluid controlled valves.
174
6. 8. Gas Lift Description
The Gas Lift Data dialog box (Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas Lift Data Dialog Box, on page 174) is
accessed from the Data Preparation menu (see Figure 6.3.4 - 4, WellFlo Data Preparation
Menu, on page 95).
TRO pressure is the test rack opening pressure for gas charged and spring loaded valves only.
This is a spreadsheet, with the same keyboard and mouse interface as described in Tabular Well
Deviation Data Entry, on page 70 and Tabular Well Equipment Data Entry, on page 72. If you
have already set up the well diagram using the graphical editor, the gas lift valve information will
be transferred from there. Any alterations or additions you make in the spreadsheet will appear in
the well diagram.
When a measured depth is entered, the corresponding TVD will appear when you exit the MD
field, and vice versa. All valve depths must be above the tubing shoe. The Active/Inactive combo
box can be used to enable and disable gas lift valves.
Gas Lift Parameters area
The five variables that may be set are:
Casing head pressure. This is important in determining which valves will open. If the forced
gas entry mode is used and only one gas-lift valve has been specified, (See Section 7. 4 Gas
Lift Calculations, on page 192), the value is irrelevant since the entry point is fixed otherwise it must be given the correct value.
Injection Gas gravity. This need not be the same as the produced (solution) gas gravity.
Valve differential pressure. This is the quantity by which casing pressure must exceed
tubing pressure in order for a valve to open. (It models a differential gas valve assuming a
fixed differential.) In case several valves could be open by this criterion, only the deepest is
assumed to be open.
Qgi (gas injection rate). This is only enabled if the Use Qgi button is on. The value entered
here will be the 'base case' gas injection rate. If you later select Qgi as a sensitivity variable
(See Section 7. 5 Sensitivity Analysis, on page 193), the injection rate(s) you enter there
will override this value.
GLRi (injection gas/liquid ratio). This is only enabled if the Use GLRi button is on. The
value entered here will be the 'base case' injection GLR. If you later select GLRi as a
sensitivity variable (See Section 7. 5 Sensitivity Analysis, on page 193), the GLR(s) you
enter there will override this value.
Deepest Point of Gas Injection area

Select Tubing shoe or enter a Max MD of injection. This data is only used if your Analysis
mode is Deepest injection point or Gas Lift Design (See Section 7. 2. 1 Calculation Modes, on
page 179), where WellFlo is computing gas lift valve depths rather than using specified depths.
The setting is ignored in Analysis Operating Point and Pressure Drop modes.
In Deepest injection point and Gas Lift Design modes, Analysis is only allowed to position
valves above the depth specified. It follows that the default Use tubing shoe option allows
complete freedom, while Max. MD of injection will apply a depth constraint.
This process re-initialises certain items of the Advanced Gas Valve Modelling data, and once this
operation is performed it cannot readily be undone. To remind users of this the following
message is displayed:
175
Obviously, if Use Qgi is on, then Use GLRi is off, and vice versa, so no value needs to be entered
for the unused field. This data is only used if at least one gas-lift valve is specified in the system.
Figure : 6.8.2 - 2 Re-Initialisation warning
The only Advanced Gas Valve Modelling data lost will be Step Profile (i.e. if it was selected), the
choice of Advanced Gas Valve Modelling Correlation, the Dome Size and Fluid Volume (i.e. if
they were altered from the default settings).
176
WellFlo Analysis Section
Chapter 7- WellFlo Analysis Section

7.1.
Setting Up Calculations
The analysis section of WellFlo is accessed through the Analysis menu on the main system
menu.
The ESP Design option will be disabled if your software licence is not configured for WellFlo/
ESP. The Deepest Injection Point and Gas Lift Design options will be disabled if your software
licence is not configured for WellFlo/Gas Lift. The current section deals with non-ESP
completions only - for details about the ESP option: See Section 17 WellFlo - ESP Overview,
on page 408.
Figure : 7.1.0 - 1 Analysis Menu Options
The Operating Point... and Pressure Drop... options bring up the Nodal Analysis Control dialog
boxes, Figure 7.1.0 - 2, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Operating Point Mode, on page
178 and Figure 7.1.0 - 3, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Pressure Drop Mode, on page
178 respectively. The two only differ in the upper panel.
Chapter 7 - WellFlo Analysis Section
This is the window around which all the analysis variables are set. It spawns four other windows
for extra data, and is divided into several sections. This chapter is arranged to cover each section
of the analysis control as a separate topic. These are:
Pressure gradient calculation control.
Temperature models.
Gas Lift control.
Sensitivity variables.
Methodology (for information).
177
Figure : 7.1.0 - 2 Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Operating Point Mode
Figure : 7.1.0 - 3 Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Pressure Drop Mode
Pressure Calculations
7. 2. Pressure Calculations
7.2.
There are five aspects to the control of the pressure calculations:

Which mode of operation?
Which components to include?
Which flowrates?
Which flow correlations and tuning factors?
Which sensitivities?
Which temperature model?
Each is dealt with in a sub-section that follows.
178

7. 2. 1. Calculation Modes
There are several modes of operation of WellFlo for pressure calculations. They are set by
selecting one of the menu options in Figure 7.1.0 - 1, Analysis Menu Options, on page 177.
Notice that the title bar of the dialog box indicates which mode you are in. The options are:
Operating Point Calculation: (Figure 7.1.0 - 2, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for
Operating Point Mode, on page 178) this means running pressure drop calculations at a
range of flowrates, starting from opposite end nodes and calculating inflow and outflow
pressure curves at an intermediate point called the solution node. The intersection of the
inflow and the outflow curves gives the operating point (pressure and flowrate at solution
node) for the well subject to the constraints applied (end node pressures and system
description). An iteration option can be used to converge on an exact solution if desired.
Figure 8.2.1 - 2, Inflow/Outflow Plot, on page 238 is an example of inflow and outflow
curves - in this case, over a range of sensitivity values.
Pressure Drop Calculation: (Figure 7.1.0 - 3, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for
Pressure Drop Mode, on page 178) this is a simpler analysis, involving a pressure drop
calculation along the well/flowline system in one direction or the other at a specified
flowrate, starting at a specified end node pressure. The result is the pressure at the other end
of the system and, of course, the profile in between.
Figure 8.2.1 - 7, Plot of tubing and casing pressures and temperature vs TVD, on page 241
is a plot of computed pressure and temperature vs depth. Other computed parameters,
selected via Configure Select plot axes, can also be plotted versus depth (See Section 8. 2. 1
Graphical Output, on page 236).
Deepest Injection Point Calculation: This option will be disabled if your software licence is
not configured for WellFlo/Gas Lift. It has two sub-options, which are only enabled when the
fluid type is oil:
These are identical to the two main analysis options of the same name described above
(Figure 7.1.0 - 2, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Operating Point Mode, on page
178 and Figure 7.1.0 - 3, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Pressure Drop Mode, on
page 178), except that any specified gas lift valve depths are ignored.
WellFlo computes the deepest depth at which a valve could be positioned at each flowrate,
subject to the constraints in the Gas Lift Data dialog box (Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas Lift Data
Dialog Box, on page 174). By contrast, the main analysis options always respect the
specified positions of the active gas lift valves in the completion diagram.
This calculation mode would normally be the prelude to a gas lift design exercise. It would
establish the range of valve depths that would need to be envisaged to allow for changing
producing conditions. Sensitivity to declining reservoir pressure, increasing water cut, etc.
would be studied.
ESP Design: See Section 17 WellFlo - ESP Overview, on page 408. This option will be
disabled if your software licence is not configured for WellFlo-ESP.
179
7. 2. 1. Calculation Modes
Figure : 7.2.1 - 1 Deepest Injection Point Options

Gas Lift Design: This option will be disabled if your software licence is not configured for
WellFlo/Gas Lift. This mode determines the positions of the unloading valve(s) and operating
valve to produce the well at a prescribed flowrate for a specified set of casing and gas lift
conditions, initial static wellbore fluid, etc. Any specified gas lift valve depths are ignored in
a design run. This is described in Section Gas Lift Design, on page 197.
Intermittent Gas Lift: This option will be disabled if your software licence is not configured
for WellFlo/Gas Lift. This option designs the positions of gas valves for intermittent lift. This
is described in Section Intermittent Gas Lift Design, on page 214.
Advanced Gas Valve Modelling: This option will be disabled if your software licence is not
configured for WellFlo/Gas Lift. This facility introduces true valve performance into the
computation of operating points, and provides a means of selecting a valve design (port size,
etc.) that is compatible with well performance. This is described in Section Advanced Gas
Valve Modelling, on page 227.
7. 2. 2. Selecting The Range Of Nodes

Depending on the mode of pressure calculation selected, a different number of control nodes
must be defined.
In Operating point calculation mode, there are two end nodes and a solution node. These are
selected as shown in Figure 7.2.2 - 1, Operating Point Calculation Node Range, on page 180.
Logic is used to keep the node selection consistent - Top node must be above Bottom node, and
Solution node must be between the two.
Note: The outflow part of the calculation will run from the top of the component selected as Top
node, down to the Solution node. The inflow part of the calculation will run from the bottom of
the component selected as Bottom node, up to the Solution node. The bottom of the component
selected as the Solution node is used as the end point for both calculations.
In Figure 7.2.2 - 1, Operating Point Calculation Node Range, on page 180, the outflow
calculation will run from the wellhead to the bottom of the casing component, and the inflow
calculation will run through the reservoir and completion to the bottom of casing component.
Remember that in WellFlo, the bottom of the casing component is the mid-perf depth.
In Pressure drop mode calculations, the logic is simpler. The combo boxes change as in Figure
7.2.2 - 2, Pressure Drop Calculation Node Range, on page 180.
Figure : 7.2.2 - 2 Pressure Drop Calculation Node Range
You only need to set the Start node, and the Solution node at the other end. The calculation
direction can be reversed by swapping the nodes round.
Note: Top-down calculations start from the top of the component selected as Start node, and end
at the bottom of the component selected as Solution node.
180
7. 2. 2. Selecting The Range Of Nodes
Figure : 7.2.2 - 1 Operating Point Calculation Node Range

Note: Bottom-up calculations start from the bottom of the component selected as Start node, and
end at the top of the component selected as Solution node.
Figure 7.2.2 - 2, Pressure Drop Calculation Node Range, on page 180 has been set for a topdown calculation. It will run from the top of the last tubing upstream of the Outlet Node to the
bottom of the last casing downstream of the Reservoir.
The following solution node positions are not allowed for computational reasons:
- It is not possible to put the solution node in the middle of a series of gas lift valves: it must
be above or below all the valves.
- Bottom-up calculations are not possible across a choke/restriction in critical flow (the
downstream pressure is undefined), so the solution node must be on the upstream side of a
choke if present, for inflow/outflow and bottom-up calculations.
- With an ESP present in the well string, if it has a gas separator, then the solution node must
be above the ESP.
- In multi-layered reservoirs, with different mid-perf depths, the solution node must be above
the top layer for inflow/outflow and top-down pressure-depth calculations. For bottom-up
pressure-depth calculations, it can be anywhere.
7. 2. 3. Selecting The Flowrates For Calculation
Figure : 7.2.3 - 1 Flowrates for Calculation
In an Operating Point Calculation, these will be arbitrary rates that (hopefully) span the
actual operating point(s). The rates used should ensure that the intersection (if any) of inflow
and outflow curves will be seen. You need at least two rates for an inflow/outflow analysis.
There is more information on intersection methods in Section Methodology of Analysis, on
page 217.
In a Pressure Drop Calculation, there will be no intersection points, as the calculations will
be in one direction only (top-down or bottom-up). If you are calculating bottom-up and
specify a rate so large that the calculated pressure reaches zero before the top node is reached,
that particular calculation will terminate. A warning of this calculation "failure" will be
given.
To enter the flowrates for analysis, click Edit Rates on the main dialog box (Figure 7.1.0 - 2,
Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Operating Point Mode, on page 178). This leads you to
the Edit Flow Rates dialog box (Figure 7.2.3 - 2, Editing Flowrates Using the Fill Option, on
page 182).
181
7. 2. 3. Selecting The Flowrates For Calculation
With the span of the calculation and its type defined, you must enter the flowrates you wish to
calculate at. They are displayed - up to a maximum of 21 rates - in the Flow rates section of the
dialog box (Figure 7.2.3 - 1, Flowrates for Calculation, on page 181), and altered either via the
Edit Rates... dialog box (Figure 7.2.3 - 2, Editing Flowrates Using the Fill Option, on page
182) or by means of the Auto-Range button.
There are three ways of entering data:

- the flowrates can be typed directly into the flow rates edit boxes. The Clear Rates button
will erase any existing flow rates so that you can type in new values. Rates can be entered in
any order and in any boxes.
- an evenly-spaced range of flowrates can be created by clicking the Rate radio button, and
entering a lower and upper bound, and the number of steps in between. The Fill button is then
used to generate the values. Note that, as in the example above, n steps give n+1 flow rates.
You can add or remove rates manually if you wish. Data will be sorted and gaps removed on
exit.
- an evenly-spaced range of flow rates can be created based on percentages of the current
AOF. Click the % of AOF button. Note that the upper limit may be greater than 100%, so
that if you have a reservoir sensitivity that will increase the AOF during nodal analysis, an
upper limit of 150%, say, should ensure that the operating point is spanned during the higher
AOF runs.
Note: The AOF in this case represents reservoir productivity. Well productivity at the wellhead
may be very different (on the lower side) depending on the system pressure dropout at different
nodes.
On return to the main dialog box, any duplicate flow rates and gaps are removed and the rates are
sorted by value.
The Auto-Range button in Figure 7.2.3 - 1, Flowrates for Calculation, on page 181 can be used
to recalculate the flow rates based on the Fill settings entered in the Rate or % of AOF sections of
the Edit Flow Rates dialog box.
7. 2. 4. Choice Of Flow Correlations

For any mode of calculation involving line pressure drop, the flow correlations must be chosen.
This is done by clicking Correlations. This brings up the Nodal Analysis Correlations dialog
box, Figure 7.2.4 - 1, Nodal Analysis Correlations Dialog Box, on page 183. Here you can
select five categories of correlation:
Well and Riser flow correlation.
Deep well flow correlation.
Pipeline flow correlation.
The Downcomer flow correlation.
The Choke correlation.
182
Figure : 7.2.3 - 2 Editing Flowrates Using the Fill Option
Figure : 7.2.4 - 1 Nodal Analysis Correlations Dialog Box
Flow Correlations
The well/riser, pipeline and downcomer flow correlations are functionally the same. The Well
and Riser and Deep well categories are used in "well components" below the wellhead (i.e.
tubing and casing components), and cover vertical, slant and horizontal wells. The riser,
although a "surface component", is assigned the same flow correlation as the upper part of the
well.
The Pipeline category is used in components beyond the wellhead (i.e. flowlines, but not risers
or downcomers).
Downcomers are risers with downflow. They can be assigned their own flow correlation and
calibration factor, because the characteristics of downflow are radically different.
Further details of the correlations are provided in Section Methodology of Analysis, on page
217.
The Choke Correlation (in bold) is for critical (underlined) flow with black oil systems or low
GLR (< 10,000 scf/STB) gas/condensate/volatile oil systems. It will be applied only if the Use
Critical Flow Equation option is switched on in the component's dialog box. If the Use Critical
Flow Equation option is switched off, the sub-critical equation will be used for these systems.
See Section Pressure Drop Through Restrictions, on page 222.
If the system has a high GLR (>10,000 scf/STB), a single, continuous equation is used to model
both critical and sub-critical flow.
183
You may wish to apply different flow correlations in the upper and lower parts of your well
model. To do this you may click on the Change correlation at MD check box, and enter the
Measured Depth at which you wish the correlation change to apply. This being done you may
then select a Deep well flow correlation to apply below the Measured Depth you have specified.
This would enable you to model for instance, the horizontal part of a well with a different
correlation from the vertical/slant part. Change depths should correspond to node depths. If you
enter a depth within a component, WellFlo will use the top or bottom of the component,
depending on which is nearer.
Figure : 7.2.4 - 2 Critical Flow Choke Options
The default coefficients used for the various critical flow correlations are listed in Section
Calculation Background Information, on page 219.
You may specify your own coefficients by selecting the Customised option. Enter values for A,
B and C, to be used in an equation of the form:
Pup = (B * Qliq * GLRC) / (dchokeA)
These coefficients can be selected as sensitivity variables to assist with identifying the best
values. (B is directly equivalent to the L-factor described next).
L-factors
The L-factors can be used to calibrate or adjust the pressure drop computations in the well,
pipeline and sub-critical choke sections. During nodal analysis, the total pressure gradient in
each computation increment (nominally 250 ft) will be multiplied by the value specified for
appropriate L-factor. For an L < 1, therefore, the computed pressure drops will be reduced, for an
L > 1 they will be increased. The automatic calibration of L-factors is discussed in Automatic Lfactor calibration, on page 195.
Note: L is applied within each computation increment. This is not quite the same as scaling the
overall pressure drop after it has been computed.)
The sub-critical choke L-factor simply rescales the pressure drop computed across the choke in
sub-critical flow.
FieldFlo users have the opportunity to derive a suitable L-factor for the well components through
a statistical analysis of production data, using the flow correlation calibration facility. This is
described in section 13. 6. 3 Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351 and section 13. 7
Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode, on page 360, behind the FieldFlo tab.
Correlation Tuning Tables

File Format
Correlation tuning files are ASCII files with the file extension .CTF. They tabulate a pressure
drop multiplier factor as a function of flow rate and phase ratio. The multiplier is applied to the
pressure drop computed by the selected basic flow correlation (see section Flow Correlations,
on page 183), so it has similarities to an L-factor. The distinction is that the L-factor is a uniform
compensation for some unidentified discrepancy in the well model or the selected flow
correlations, while the tuning multipliers compensate for flow correlation discrepancies which
are systematic with the flow rate and/or with the phase ratios.
The tables of multipliers are laid out in a similar way to the vertical lift performance tables, or
bottomhole pressure tables, as exported to reservoir simulators (see section 8. 2. 4 File export in
VFP, BHP and other formats, on page 249). For a black oil or volatile oil well, one of the
allowed formats of the tuning file is as follows.
184
The L-factors can be selected as sensitivity variables to assist with identifying the best values.

GLR = R1 R2 ... Rr
WCT = W1 W2 ... Ww
QLIQ = Q1 Q2 ... Qq
INTERP = LIN LIN LIN
1 1 F1 F2 ... Fn
1 2 ...
...
1 w ...
2 1 ...
...
r w ...
The above example gives a tuning factor Fn for all combinations of r gas-liquid ratios (including
lift gas if any), w water cuts and q flow rates. The header lines give a list of (GLR) gas-liquid
ratios R1 to Rr in SCF/STB, (WCT) water cuts W1 to Ww as fractions, and (QLIQ) flow rates Q1
to Qq in STB/day. Each of these may take from 1 to 10 values. The INTERP line specifies linear
interpolation between the listed values for the actual flow parameters in each nodal analysis case.
LOG may replace LIN to specify logarithmic interpolation for the flow parameter in the
corresponding position, for example INTERP = LIN LIN LOG to interpolate logarithmically
with flow rate. Each line of tuning factors I J F1 F2 ... Fq specifies that, for the GLR value in
position I of R, and the WCT value in position J of W, the tuning factors are F1 F2 ... Fq for the
flow rates Q1 Q2 ... Qq respectively. The indices I and J must cycle through their values as
shown.
GLR = 100 500 1000

WCT = 0.1 1.0
QLIQ = 5000 100000
INTERP = LIN LIN LIN
1 1 0.8 1.0
1 2 0.86 0.96
2 1 0.81 0.91
2 2 0.85 0.96
3 1 0.82 0.92
3 2 0.90 1.02
And we can compare this to the structure of a VFP flowing pressure file for Eclipse.
(1 1) At GLR=100, WCT=0.1, the tuning factor will be 0.8 at QLIQ=5000, and 1.0 at
QLIQ=10000.
QLIQ=10000.
QLIQ=10000.
...and so on.
185
Therefore, a file with three Gas Liquid Ratios, WCTs of 0.1 and 1.0, QLIQs of 5000 and 100000
and linear interpolation may be represented as:

The interpolations are linear between these GLR, WCT and QLIQ values. If it has to go below a
minimum or above a maximum value, it uses the tuning factor assigned to the min or max value.
For example, if QLIQ =7500 and WCT=0.1, at GLR=100 the tuning factor will be 0.9. If GLR =
50 it will still be 0.9.
The other allowed format is for the table header lines to list values of the flow parameters gas-oil
ratio, water cut, and oil flow rate:
GOR = G1 G2 ... Gg
WCT = W1 W2 ... Ww
QOIL = Q1 Q2 ... Qq
INTERP = ...
For a condensate or gas well, the format of the table header lines is:
CGR = R1 R2 ... Rr
WGR = W1 W2 ... Ww
QGAS = Q1 Q2 ... Qq
INTERP = ...
File Selection
In the WellFlo folder of the Registry (refer to The Registry, on page 17 and Registry Editor
For String Values Under HKEY_CURRENT_USER, on page 21) a directory must be specified
under Value Data for the Value Name user-correlations. This process is carried out using the
Configure Registry menu command to generate the Edit User Registry dialog (refer to
Configure Registry, on page 62). The corrlist.ctf file will be stored in this directory for use by
WellFlo, and this process will also activate the Tuning Tables... button on the dialog box
illustrated in Figure 7.2.4 - 1, Nodal Analysis Correlations Dialog Box, on page 183. The
button takes the user to a Tuning Tables dialog. The dialog shows the four flow correlations
selected for use in each scope of the nodal analysis (well and riser, deep well, pipeline, and
downcomer), and a list of the available tuning files for each. On selecting OK, any tuning files
selected are validated, and associated with the correlation, which is then marked with an asterisk
in the correlation list box. The association is specific to each scope, so the same basic correlation
could be used with one tuning file in the well, and with another in the pipelines.
File Pre-selection and Customised Correlations
The user correlations directory is also allowed to contain a custom correlation specification file,
which must be called CORRLIST.CCS. This lets you create new flow correlations which are
tuned versions of the supplied correlations. Each line in CORRLIST.CCS is in the format:
N, correlation-name, B, filename.ctf
where all the values of N are from 1 to 100 and distinct. This defines a user correlation
correlation-name to consist of basic correlation no. B (where 1 = Duns and Ros (std), etc. - as
listed below) and the specified tuning file. The user correlations defined by this file can be
selected directly in the Nodal Analysis Correlations dialog. The Tuning Tables dialog will show,
for such a user correlation, its basic correlation and its tuning file.
For example, the file CORRLIST.CCS might consist of:
1,
MYCORR#1, 1, test4.ctf
2,
MYCORR#2, 4, test6.ctf
186
where the condensate-gas ratio and water-gas ratio are in STB/MMSCF, and the gas flow rate is
in MSCF/day. A file to be used only with a gas well may have a single CGR value of zero.

This specifies a correlation you have called MYCORR#1 which is made up of the Duns & Ros
(std) flow correlation combined with a tuning table called test4.ctf, and a correlation called
MYCORR#2 which consists of the Beggs & Brill (mod) flow correlation combined with a
tuning table called test6.ctf.
Provided that the directory in which you have placed CORRLIST.CCS and the associated .CTF
files has been correctly entered in the Registry as explained earlier, these two tuned correlations
will be available with the others for nodal analysis, etc.
Flow Correlation Numbers
1 = Duns & Ros (std)
2 = Duns & Ros (mod)
3 = Beggs & Brill (std)
4 = Beggs & Brill (mod)
5 = Beggs & Brill (n-slip)
6 = Hagedorn & Brown (std)
7 = Hagedorn & Brown (mod)
8 = Fancher & Brown
9 = Orkiszewsky
10 = Gray
11 = Dukler-Eaton-Flanigan
12 = EPS Mechanistic (std)
Multiplier Selection
For each nodal analysis case, and within the scope of each tuned correlation, the flow rate and
total phase ratios at standard conditions will determine by interpolation in the specified table the
pressure drop multiplier to be used. If an L-factor is specified for the same scope, both
multipliers are applied.
7.3.
Temperature Calculations
7. 3. 1. Manual Temperature Model

This is the simplest model - it simply takes the temperatures specified at nodes and interpolates
between them. Thus the temperature used half way along a length of tubing is half-way between
the temperature at its lower end (the value entered for that tubing node) and its upper end (the
value entered for the next node up the well).
This is a static temperature description, and the same profile will be used for any flowrate, and
would normally depend on your having measured temperatures available.
Every node must have a temperature entered in its component dialog box. No further input is
required in the Temperature model area (Figure 7.3.1 - 1, Manual Temperature Model Entry,
on page 188), all other fields being greyed out.
187
7. 3. Temperature Calculations
There are four temperature models available. They are selected by the option buttons in the
Temperature Model area of the Nodal Analysis Control window (Figure 7.1.0 - 2, Nodal
Analysis Control Dialog Box for Operating Point Mode, on page 178 and Figure 7.1.0 - 3,
Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Pressure Drop Mode, on page 178).
Figure : 7.3.1 - 1 Manual Temperature Model Entry
7. 3. 2. Calculated Temperature Model

This option models a temperature profile based on a simplistic heat loss model4,5. The model
includes the flowrate, and should therefore be more accurate over a range of flowrates. If a
measured wellhead flowing temperature is available, the Calibrated button provides a tunable
version of this model. A more rigorous heat loss model that includes the effects of pressure
changes in the fluid column can be accessed via the Coupled button (See Section 7. 3. 4
Coupled Pressure-Temperature Model, on page 190).
Figure : 7.3.2 - 1 Calculated Temperature Model Entry
Heat loss from the flowline components will be computed using the appropriate temperature for
the surrounding medium.
The geothermal temperature gradient is interpolated between surface temperature T atmosphere
or T seawater (depending on whether the wellhead is above or below MSL) and the layer
temperature (Layer Parameters, Figure 6.7.2 - 1, Layer Parameters Entry Model Dialog Box,
on page 129). If there are several layers, the temperature of the uppermost layer is used for the
geothermal, and a second geothermal is interpolated between the uppermost and lowermost layer
to cover the producing section.
188
7. 3. 2. Calculated Temperature Model
The inputs to the Calculated option are (Figure 7.3.2 - 1, Calculated Temperature Model
Entry, on page 188):
- the seawater temperature (T seawater)
- the ambient surface temperature (T atmosphere)
Note: These global values will be ignored at any surface component where Advanced heat loss
modelling has been selected (See Section Flowline Component, on page 86). Here, ambient
temperatures can be specified for the component, allowing for variations with depth or
geographical position to be taken into account.
- the Annulus fluid type - gas or not gas (= liquid). The default thermal conductivity for gas is
0.504 BTU/ft.D.F, and for water 9.192 BTU/ft.D.F. These values can be modified in the
Registry (See Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17), by selecting the Configure Registry
menu option to generate the Edit User Registry dialog, then entering appropriate Value Data
conductivity values for the therm-cond-gas and/or therm-cond-liquid Value Names (refer to
Configure Registry, on page 62). The additional option Gas to MD becomes available if the
Gas in Annulus check box is marked, allowing you to define a measured depth for gas in the
annulus.

Surface temperature is assumed to apply at the depth of the wellhead node.
For deep sea platforms, position the wellhead node at the sea-floor depth and call it sea bed.
Use a riser component from sea-floor to the true wellhead on the platform, which you can
represent by a manifold node named wellhead.
Fluid is assumed to enter the wellbore at layer temperature, and heat transfer is modelled
between the moving wellbore fluid column and the external geothermal, taking into account the
heat loss coefficients of the intervening media. These thermal conductivity values can be
modified in the Registry (See Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17), by selecting the
Configure Registry menu option to generate the Edit User Registry dialog, then entering
appropriate thermal conductivity values in the Value Data field for each therm-cond- Value
Name that is required (the range of thermal conductivity Value Names in the Registry are
discussed on page 22 - also refer to Configure Registry, on page 62).
The subsurface model will assume water in the tubing-casing annulus unless the Gas in Annulus
option is clicked on. When Gas in Annulus is clicked on and Gas to MD is not clicked, WellFlo
will assumes that all the annulus below the wellhead is filled with gas. Where Gas in Annulus is
clicked on and a measured depth is entered, WellFlo will assume that there is gas in the annulus
for well components above this depth, and water for the components below it.
Downstream of the wellhead, heat transfer is modelled between the moving flowline fluid and
external ambient temperature. This is assumed to be constant at T atmosphere or T seawater, or
at the values specified in the Advanced heat loss modelling section of each component if used,
depending on whether it is above or below MSL, taking into account the heat loss coefficients of
the intervening media (steel, insulation). Partial burial of flowlines can also be modelled (Figure
6.3.3 - 7, Flowline Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 87).
Further technical details of the models are provided in Section Methodology of Analysis, on
page 217.
This model is a tunable version of the Calculated option described above. It is a better choice if
you have a measured wellhead and/or separator temperature to calibrate against at a known
flowrate.
In this case, you have to enter three further items of data (Figure 7.3.3 - 1, Calibrated
Temperature Model Entry, on page 190). These are:
- measured wellhead temperature, T wellhead
- the temperature of fluid entering the separator (or at the end of the flowline), T outlet node
- the flowrate Q liquid (or Q gas for a gas or condensate system) at which these temperatures
were measured. In the case of oil wells, this is the total liquid rate, with the water cut taken to
be the same as in the Fluid Parameters dialog box (Figure 6.6.1 - 1, Oil Fluid Parameters
Dialog Box, on page 102).
189
7. 3. 3. Calibrated Temperature Model
7. 3. 3. Calibrated Temperature Model
Figure : 7.3.3 - 1 Calibrated Temperature Model Entry
Please refer to the previous notes on the Calculated model for comments on geothermal
gradient, and the medium surrounding the flowline. The subsurface model will assume liquid in
the tubing-casing annulus unless the Gas in Annulus option is clicked on.
Fluid is assumed to enter the wellbore at layer temperature. A relaxation distance multiplier is
computed up the well so as to match the specified T wellhead. A second multiplier is computed
along the flowlines so as to match T outlet node. These multipliers are not reported externally.
Refer to Section Methodology of Analysis, on page 217 for more details.
Figure : 7.3.4 - 1 Coupled Pressure-Temperature Model Entry (Operating Point calculation

mode)
This model computes pressures and temperatures simultaneously. The temperature profile
includes the effects of pressure changes in the fluid column, and vice versa.
The coupled pressure-temperature model requires:
- the ambient surface temperatures (T atmosphere and T seawater). See Section 7. 3. 2
Calculated Temperature Model, on page 188 for comments about ambient temperatures for
individual surface components.
- in Operating Point mode, the temperature of the top and bottom nodes that have been
selected in the Calculation nodes area.
- in Pressure Drop mode, the temperature of the Start node selected in the Calculation
nodes area.
The Relaxation distance factor is a multiplier (default 1.0) which scales the computed Ramey4
relaxation distances, and can be used to calibrate against measured temperatures.
Please refer to the previous notes on the Calculated model (See Section 7. 3. 2 Calculated
190
7. 3. 4. Coupled Pressure-Temperature Model

Temperature Model, on page 188) for comments on geothermal gradient, and the medium
surrounding the flowline. The subsurface model will assume liquid in the tubing-casing annulus
unless the Gas in Annulus option is clicked on.
Refer to Section Methodology of Analysis, on page 217 for more details.
191
7.4.
Gas Lift Calculations
The comments in this section do not apply to the surface Gas Injector component described
under Gas Injector, on page 93.
Meaningful gas lift calculations can only be performed under the following conditions (and
assuming you have a security licence enabled for WellFlo/Gas Lift):
1. There is at least one active gas lift valve in the well system (see Figure 6.3.2 - 13, Gas Lift
Valve Graphic, on page 79)
or
you are running the analysis in Deepest Injection Point mode (see Figure 7.2.1 - 1, Deepest
Injection Point Options, on page 179).
2.
The lift gas injection rate (Qgi) or the injection gas/liquid ratio (GLRi) has been set to a
non-zero base case value in the Gas Lift Data dialog box (See Section 6. 8. 2 Gas Lift Data
Entry, on page 174)
or
either Qgi or GLRi is set up as a sensitivity variable for gas injection. (See Section 7. 5
Sensitivity Analysis, on page 193).
If you have specified one or several gas lift valves in the completion, you have control over
whether you wish WellFlo to force gas entry, or to let WellFlo check if gas entry is possible with
the set-up you have (i.e. if gas could not enter, it will not do so in the model). Referring to the
Nodal Analysis Control window (Figure 7.1.0 - 2, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for
Operating Point Mode, on page 178 and Figure 7.1.0 - 3, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box
for Pressure Drop Mode, on page 178):
Figure : 7.4.0 - 1 How To Force Gas Entry and/or Use Sensitivity Analysis
If Forced gas entry is checked on (see Figure 7.4.0 - 1, How To Force Gas Entry and/or Use
Sensitivity Analysis, on page 192):
- if there is only one active valve, it will automatically be defined as open, regardless of
whether or not there is enough casing pressure.
- if there is a number of active valves, but not enough casing pressure to open any of them,
entry will be forced at the shallowest valve (the one likely to open first if casing head pressure
was to be increased).
- if there is a number of active valves and enough casing pressure for any of several to be
open, the deepest of them will be defined as open. This case is therefore treated the same
whether Forced gas entry is on or off.
192
7. 4. Gas Lift Calculations
If Forced gas entry is not checked, WellFlo will test each valve according to the calculated
casing pressure and valve differential pressure, and will only allow a valve to open if there is
sufficient casing pressure. If several could be open, only the deepest of them will be declared
open.

The force option is not relevant to the Deepest Injection Point analysis mode, since WellFlo
ignores any existing valves in this mode of calculation.
7.5.
Sensitivity Analysis
To run sensitivity analyses, you need to check one or both of the boxes shown in Figure 7.4.0 - 1,
How To Force Gas Entry and/or Use Sensitivity Analysis, on page 192, in the bottom right of
the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box (Figure 7.1.0 - 2, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box
for Operating Point Mode, on page 178 and Figure 7.1.0 - 3, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog
Box for Pressure Drop Mode, on page 178). If neither of these boxes is checked, only the base
case values you entered in the various input windows (via Data Preparation and Graphical Edit)
will be used, even if you have initialised values for sensitivity variables.
To set up the sensitivity cases, click Sensitivities on the main window. This leads you to the
Nodal Analysis - Sensitivity Variables dialog box (Figure 7.5.0 - 1, Sensitivity Variables
Selection Dialog Box, on page 193).
Figure : 7.5.0 - 1 Sensitivity Variables Selection Dialog Box
Several groups of variables are available for sensitivity studies. The allowed Sensitivity groups
are listed in the upper right half of the dialog box. The Group variables making up a highlighted
group are listed in the lower half. You select the group, then the variable.
In the Figure, the IPR Perforation Skin group has been chosen. The six variables in this group are
listed and Shot penetration has been highlighted. This is going to be assigned as the Case 1
variable.
Below this is the Case preparation box, where you select which of the two Sensitivity cases
you wish to prepare or modify. In the Figure, Case 2 has just been set up for the variable Layer
Pressure. Case 1 is about to be configured for Shot penetration.
To assign values to a new variable, choose the Sensitivity group you require (e.g. IPR
Perforation Skin), the Group variable (e.g. Shot penetration), and the Sensitivity case number
(e.g. 1), then click Select. Doing so will bring up the Sensitivity Values dialog box, Figure 7.5.0
- 2, Sensitivity Values Dialog Box, on page 194. You can enter up to 10 values here.
193
7. 5. Sensitivity Analysis
Up to two sensitivity cases can be run. The current choice of variable (if any) for each case is
shown at top left against Case 1 variable (about to be set to Shot penetration in the Figure), and
Case 2 variable (already set to Layer Pressure in the Figure).

If the selection is Well and riser L-factor, there is a check whether automatic L-factor matching
would be feasible (if the analysis mode is pressure drop at a single flow rate, if some measured
pressure/depth data has been loaded including at least one depth in the range of analysis, and if
pressure is selected as one of the axis variables to be collected for plotting on the pressure/depth
plot). If feasible, the option of automatic matching is offered (see section 7. 5. 1 Automatic Lfactor calibration, on page 195).
If you want to assign a different variable to this sensitivity case, remove the existing choice with
the Delete button, then Select the new variable.
You can use Edit to change the values of a variable you have already assigned to a sensitivity
case, by selecting the Sensitivity case number and then clicking the Edit button. This leads you
to the Sensitivity Values window again, where you can alter the values.
To remove the assigned variable from a sensitivity case, select the Sensitivity case number and
click Delete.
Figure : 7.5.0 - 2 Sensitivity Values Dialog Box
The sensitivity values you have selected will be run for each of the flowrates, in a double-nested
loop. For example, 21 flowrates with 2 sensitivity cases, each with 10 values, will lead to
21*10*10 (=2100) runs, and 10*10 operating point determinations.
Some sensitivity variables can be applied to a selected component, or to all components of that
type. The next Figure shows how the Layer pressure variable in the Layer IPR Group could,
in the case of a multi-layered reservoir, be applied to Every layer listed, or to a selected layer, by
clicking in the Sensitised layer drop-down menu. Only active layers are listed.
When applied to every layer, all the base case layer pressures specified in the Layer Parameters
section will be overridden by the sensitivity values. When applied to a selected layer, all the base
case values will be respected except in that layer.
194
7. 5. Sensitivity Analysis
This dialog box, like the Edit Flow Rates dialog box (Figure 7.2.3 - 2, Editing Flowrates Using
the Fill Option, on page 182), can have a range of sensitivities entered quickly via a Fill option.
In the dialog box pictured above, 9 water cut percentages have been entered by specifying a
range from 2 to 18, with 8 steps, and then pressing the Fill button. You may also erase the listed
values by using the Clear option.

For tubular components, you may sensitise all the well nodes (e.g. to a common ID), or sensitise
one sub-group of a well node. In this case, the nodes to be sensitised are selected by their name.
For instance, if your well description contains several tubing components called 3.5in tubing,
you can select these as a group. Tubing components called, say, 4.5in tubing would not be
sensitised.
Figure : 7.5.0 - 3 Layer IPR Group Sensitivity Values Dialog Box
7. 5. 1. Automatic L-factor calibration

This option is available if all of the following conditions are met:
Measured pressure/depth data has been loaded (see section 6. 2. 1 File Menu, on page 55).
The selected calculation mode is pressure drop, at only one flow rate (this rate is assumed to
be the rate at which the loaded data was measured).
Either the default plot axes are selected (see section 6. 2. 2 Configure Menu, on page 59),
or pressure has been selected for plotting on the X-axis.
Then, if Well and riser L-factor is selected as a sensitivity variable, the message in Figure 7.5.1
- 1, Auto-regression message, presents the option to vary the L-factor until it gives the best
match between the calculated pressure profile and the measured data.
Figure : 7.5.1 - 1 Auto-regression message
Press No to simply enter your own values of the vertical L-factor in the Sensitivity Values
dialog box as usual (Figure 7.5.0 - 2, Sensitivity Values Dialog Box, on page 194). Press Yes
to proceed to the dialog box in Figure 7.5.1 - 2, Regression on L-factor dialog box, to set up the
automatic calibration.
195
7. 5. 1. Automatic L-factor calibration
The selected range of analysis includes at least one of the measured data points.
Figure : 7.5.1 - 2 Regression on L-factor dialog box
Enter the lower and upper values between which to vary the vertical L-factor, and specify
whether to match the calculated pressure profile to all the measured points between the start and
solution nodes, or to the single measured point farthest from the start node but not farther than
the solution node. Please note that if the analysis nodes are altered after selecting this sensitivity,
the pressure profile may then be matched to a different measured point or points.
Another sensitivity variable may be selected in the normal way, for example start node pressure,
or vertical flow correlation. The pressure drop analysis calibrates the L-factor at each value of the
other sensitivity variable. When the analysis results are plotted or reported, the best value of the
L-factor and the quality of the match are reported for each case.
7. 5. 2. Stability check
Figure : 7.5.2 - 1 Stability check check box
If Stability check is switched on, intersections detected on the inflow/outflow curves will be
tested for stability according to the criterion that the gradient of the inflow curve must be
less than the gradient of the outflow curve. Operating rates and pressures will only be reported
for intersections tested as stable.
If Stability check is switched off, the stability criterion will not be applied, and intersections will
be considered stable regardless of gradients. Where a curve has two intersections, the one
corresponding to the higher flowrate will be used as the operating point. Operating pressures and
rates thus defined will be reported for all valid intersections.
7. 5. 3. Iteration to exact operating point
Figure : 7.5.3 - 1 Iterate to exact operating point button
This option is available in Operating Point calculation mode. It allows an automatic refinement
of an operating point estimate by regressing on the precise inflow/outflow intersection.
Subsequently, a pressure-depth plot can be made for this exact flowrate without running a
separate pressure drop calculation. This applies to each sensitivity case.
196
7. 5. 2. Stability check
The status of the Stability check option will also apply when WellFlo is invoked by WellPCG in
FieldFlo.

In the normal course of events, an initial operating point estimate is obtained by interpolating the
inflow/outflow curves between the specified trial flowrates (or, if necessary, extrapolating some
way beyond them) to find an intersection. You will find that a slightly different intersection point
can be obtained if a different set of flowrates is used, because the interpolation (or extrapolation)
will not be exactly the same.
With the Iterate... option switched off, this first estimate will be presented as the operating point.
If the option is switched on, WellFlo will iterate about this initial estimate, trying flowrates on
either side, until it converges to an exact solution. The counter will show the number of
iterations.
You should therefore arrive at the same operating point whether you used two widely spaced
flowrates in the initial nodal analysis (followed by a lengthy iteration process), or a number of
more closely spaced flowrates (followed by a shorter iteration).
Note that you must not specify more than 20 flowrates to use this option - you need to leave one
blank in the flowrate table for the iteration. An error message will remind you of this.
7.6.
Gas Lift Design
The Gas Lift Design facility has a Design option that will compute the positions of unloading
valves (for the U-tubing of kill fluid) and the operating valve for a specified set of conditions.
Any GLVs that you may already have placed in your tubing string in the system editor will be
ignored. The approach is based on the method described in Gas Lift: Book 6 of the Vocational
Training Series, from the Production Department, American Petroleum Institute.
Normally you will have made a reasonable estimate of the operating conditions from an inflow/
outflow analysis, using the Deepest Injection Point option (See Section 7. 2. 1 Calculation
Modes, on page 179) to identify the optimum operating valve depth and operating rate. You
should also have an idea of the range of valve depths (bracketing envelope) that might be
required to allow for changing operating conditions (declining reservoir pressure, increasing
water cut, well stimulation, etc.). This can be achieved by a careful sensitivity analysis of all
relevant variables (See Section 7. 5 Sensitivity Analysis, on page 193).
7. 6. Gas Lift Design
Set up the input data as described below, and run the Design option. The valve depths will be
computed, and the design analysis plotted.
197

7. 6. 1. Input data
Figure : 7.6.1 - 1 Gas Lift Design Dialog Box
Lift gas injection rate: This is the desired operating injection rate. The field is only enabled
if the Use Qgi button is on. The default value is transferred from the Gas Lift Parameters
area of the Gas Lift Data dialog box (Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas Lift Data Dialog Box, on page
174).
Lift gas/liquid ratio: This is the desired operating injection gas liquid ratio. It is only enabled
if the Use GLRi button is on. The default value is transferred from the Gas Lift Parameters
area of the Gas Lift Data dialog box (Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas Lift Data Dialog Box, on page
174).
198
7. 6. 1. Input data
Gas Lift Input Parameters area:

Casing head pressure: This value will be computed once the operating valve position has
been calculated - its initial value is unimportant. It defaults initially to the value (if any)
entered in Data Preparation Gas Lift Data (Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas Lift Data Dialog Box, on
page 174), otherwise enter any value greater than 10 psia. You will be given the opportunity
to update the Gas Lift Data value with the new design value so you can use it for nodal
analysis.
Maximum CH pressure: this is the casing head pressure you expect to be available at the
wellhead for gas lift operations, and is required for the unloading valve computations. For the
topmost unloading valve, it will be superseded by the Kick-off pressure value (see below) if
this is greater.
Injection gas gravity: This need not be the same as the produced gas gravity.
Valve diff pressure: This is the quantity by which casing pressure must exceed tubing
pressure in order for the operating valve to pass the required volume of gas. (It models a
differential gas valve.)
Min valve spacing: Enter the minimum spacing (vertical depth) you wish to allow between
gas lift valves. (Too close a spacing will in practice lead to unstable lift.)
Max MD of injection: Enter the maximum measured depth that you expect the operating
valve to be set at during the life of the well. The default value (nominally tubing shoe depth)
is transferred from the Deepest Point of Gas Injection area of the Gas Lift Data dialog box
(Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas Lift Data Dialog Box, on page 174).

Liquid rate: Enter the total liquid operating production rate to be used in the design study.
This can be determined during a deepest point of injection study (See Section 7. 2. 1
Calculation Modes, on page 179), and should be consistent with the lift gas figure entered
above.
Static fluid spec gravity: Specific gravity of the kill fluid (water = 1.0).
Static fluid gradient: Pressure gradient of the kill fluid.
These two static fluid fields (blue) are linked for consistency.
Start node/Start Node Pressure
You have the choice of starting the design computation at the wellhead or the outlet. The default
node is the one used for the last Pressure drop mode calculation (if any) (See Section 7. 2. 2
Selecting The Range Of Nodes, on page 180).
Select the start node and enter the flowing pressure at which the top-down computations are to
start.
Valve depths table
The default values initially appearing in the central panel correspond to the valves you specified
in the system editor (if any). If you have not yet specified any valves, this section will be blank.
Valve depths will be recomputed when you do a gas lift design run.
Valve Type
You have a choice of Casing-Controlled or Fluid-Controlled gas lift valves. You will probably
want to set different design margins according to the type of valve chosen, in the Design Margins
facility (described below).
The choice of valve type does not affect the valve spacing methodology, (described later), but
does affect the valve sizing calculations (See Section 7. 6. 4 Sizing option, on page 209).
Calculation of closing and transfer pressures
A drop-down list offers three alternative approaches for entering design safety margins which
can be used to modify the nominal casing and tubing gradients for the valve spacing calculations.
Figure : 7.6.1 - 2 Gas Lift Design Closing and Transfer Pressures
The two depth options apply corrections as a function of depth (measured or true vertical) rather
than valve number.
These are described more fully in the following notes on design margins.
199
7. 6. 1. Input data
The Valve number option applies incremental corrections to the objective tubing pressure on a
valve-by-valve basis.

Design Margins
A number of optional design "safety factors" can be specified via the Design Margins button to
modify the nominal casing and tubing gradients for the valve spacing calculations. A different
dialog box will appear for each valve type and transfer pressure calculation mode (described
above).
With all the gas lift design margins you have the option to select Use exact maximum MD of
injection. This option will honour the maximum measured depth by inserting an additional gas
lift valve at the maximum depth if the calculations have placed the bottom-most valve above this
point by relaxing the Design Margin criteria to accommodate the extra valve. This will result in
a general reduction in the spacing of the unloading valves, but the Minimum Valve Spacing will
still be respected.
If this option is left unchecked, the gas lift design calculations will honour the Minimum Valve
Spacing and the other Design Margins. This might result in the bottom-most valve being placed
above the maximum measured depth of injection which may, or may not, be considered to be a
problem.
Casing-controlled valves
Transfer pressure margins can be applied by valve number or depth.
Calculate by Valve number:
Figure : 7.6.1 - 3 Gas Lift Design Margins, Casing-Controlled Valve
Calculation by True vertical depth is the same as by measured depth, except that Reference
depth (TVD) replaces Reference depth (MD).
200
7. 6. 1. Input data
Calculate by Measured depth or True vertical depth:

Kick-off pressure (optional): If it is greater than the Maximum CH pressure (Figure 7.6.1 1, Gas Lift Design Dialog Box, on page 198), the value entered here is used for the
computation of the topmost unloading valve position. Otherwise it is ignored.
Depth of static fluid level: If you switch this on, you can set the depth (vertical, below
reference depth) at which you want the static fluid gradient to start for the unloading
sequence.
The setting above will start the gradient at atmospheric pressure, 105.4 ft below the reference.
The setting above will start the gradient at atmospheric pressure at the reference (unloading to
the atmosphere).
The above two examples presume that the wellhead depth is the same as the reference depth.
If for example the wellhead depth was 80ft from the reference depth, a static level of 180ft
would be 100ft below the wellhead.
You can represent unloading against a back-pressure (flowlines) by entering a negative depth
here (so the pressure at the wellhead is greater than zero).
If you switch the option off, the depth will be ignored, and the gradient will start at the
producing wellhead pressure.
This will be the specified Start node pressure if you assigned the wellhead as the Start node
in the main dialog box (Figure 7.6.1 - 1, Gas Lift Design Dialog Box, on page 198). If the
outlet is to be the start node, WellFlo will use a computed wellhead pressure.
Casing closing pressure margin (optional): This correction reduces the casing pressure
required to open each valve successively down the hole. This helps ensure that the valve
above will close when the next valve below opens. This design margin is usually applied to
casing-controlled valve designs, where an appropriate step (e.g. 20-50 psi) should be entered.
It is usually left at zero for fluid-controlled valves.
Transfer pressure margins (optional): The tubing transfer pressure is calculated by
correcting the objective tubing gradient. The shift can be specified as a function of the valve
number, or as a function of depth.
(Corrected tbg pressure) = (original tbg pressure) + (transfer pressure margin)
- Increment per valve (optional): The corrected tbg pressure (defined above) is given an
extra shift by this increment, at each successive valve, starting at valve #2. The increment can
be positive or negative.
The total corrected transfer pressure at the n-th valve is therefore:
(transfer pressure) = (original tbg pressure) + (transfer pressure margin) + (n1) x (transfer pressure increment).
201
7. 6. 1. Input data
a) By valve number: (Figure 7.6.1 - 2, Gas Lift Design Closing and Transfer Pressures, on
page 199) If the calculate by Valve number option has been selected, the following two
entries are required (Figure 7.6.1 - 3, Gas Lift Design Margins, Casing-Controlled Valve,
on page 200, top diagram):
- Margin at valve 1 (optional): This is a constant pressure shift applied to the original tubing
pressure curve at all valves, starting at the first unloading valve. A value between 0 and 50
psi is usual.

b) Transfer pressures relative to (Pcasing - Ptubing): (Figure 7.6.1 - 2, Gas Lift Design
Closing and Transfer Pressures, on page 199) If either of the calculate by depth options has
been selected, the following entries are required (Figure 7.6.1 - 3, Gas Lift Design Margins,
Casing-Controlled Valve, on page 200, bottom diagram):
Fraction at Xmas tree
Reference depth (nominally the tubing shoe or max valve depth)
Fraction at reference depth (MD or TVD)
The transfer pressure at a valve is calculated by shifting the tubing pressure by a fraction of
the prevailing casing-tubing pressure differential at that depth. The fraction to be applied at
each depth is interpolated between the wellhead and the reference depth. At a valve depth (z):
(transfer pressure) = (original tubing pressure) + f(z) x P(z)
where P(z) = Pcsg - Ptbg at depth z
and the fraction f(z) is defined as:
z z wellhead
f ( z ) = f well he ad + ------------------------------------- ( fr e f f wel lhead )
z ref z well he ad
For the settings shown in Figure 7.6.1 - 3, Gas Lift Design Margins, Casing-Controlled
Valve, on page 200 (bottom diagram), at a valve situated halfway between the wellhead and
the reference depth the shift applied would be 35% (halfway between 20% and 50%) of the
casing-tubing pressure differential P(z) at that depth, and so on for other valves.
Fluid-controlled valves
Transfer pressure margins can be applied by valve number or depth.
Calculate by Valve number:
7. 6. 1. Input data
Calculate by Measured depth:
Figure : 7.6.1 - 4 Gas Lift Design Margins, Fluid-Controlled Valve
202

Calculation by True vertical depth is the same as by Measured depth, except that Reference
depth (TVD) replaces Reference depth (MD).
Kick-off pressure (optional): See casing- controlled valves (above).

Depth of static fluid level: See casing- controlled valves (above).
Casing closing pressure margin (optional): See casing-controlled valves (above) - normally
set to zero.
Transfer pressure margin: Unloading valves will be spaced so that transfer to the next
valve will only occur when the tubing pressure at the open valve exceeds its closing pressure
by the transfer pressure margin. In other words, the static fluid gradient in each step of the
unloading sequence is drawn from a point defined by: tubing closing pressure + transfer
pressure margin to find the position of the next valve.
Fluid closing pressure margins: The closing pressure is calculated by correcting the
objective tubing gradient. The shift applied normally decreases with depth, and can be
specified as a function of the valve number, or as a function of depth.
a) By valve number: (Figure 7.6.1 - 2, Gas Lift Design Closing and Transfer Pressures, on
page 199) If the Calculate by valve number option has been selected, the following two
entries are required (Figure 7.6.1 - 4, Gas Lift Design Margins, Fluid-Controlled Valve, on
page 202, top diagram):
- Margin at valve 1 (optional): This is a constant pressure shift applied to the objective
tubing pressure curve at each valve, starting at the first unloading valve.
(Corrected tbg pressure) = (objective tbg pressure) + (margin at valve 1)
- Increment per valve (optional): The corrected tbg pressure (defined above) is given an
extra shift by this increment, at each successive valve, starting at valve #2. The increment is
usually negative for a fluid-controlled valve, so the closing pressure profile converges
towards the objective tubing pressure, going downwards from valve to valve.
The closing pressure at the n-th valve is therefore:
(closing pressure) = (objective tbg pressure) + (margin at valve 1) + (n1) x (increment per valve).
The closing pressure at a valve is calculated by shifting the objective tubing pressure by a
fraction of the prevailing casing-tubing pressure differential at that depth. The fraction to be
applied at each depth is interpolated between the wellhead and the reference depth. So, at a
valve depth z:
(closing pressure) = (objective tubing pressure) + f(z) x P(z)
where P(z) = (Pcsg - Ptbg) at depth z
and f(z) = [(z-zwellhead)/(zref -zwellhead)] x (fref - fwellhead).
203
7. 6. 1. Input data
b) Transfer pressures relative to (Pcasing - Ptubing): (Figure 7.6.1 - 2, Gas Lift Design
Closing and Transfer Pressures, on page 199) If either of the calculate by depth options has
been selected, the following entries are required (Figure 7.6.1 - 4, Gas Lift Design Margins,
Fluid-Controlled Valve, on page 202, bottom diagram):
Fraction at Xmas tree
Reference depth (nominally the tubing shoe or max valve depth)
Fraction at reference depth (MD or TVD)

For the settings shown in Figure 7.6.1 - 4, Gas Lift Design Margins, Fluid-Controlled
Valve, on page 202 (bottom diagram), at a valve situated halfway between the wellhead and
the reference depth the shift applied would be 40% (halfway between 60 and 20) of the
casing-tubing pressure differential P(z) at that depth, and so on for other valves.
7. 6. 2. Design option
When you click the Design button, the following computations are made:
The temperature profile is calculated according to the model selected in the Nodal Analysis
Control dialog box (Figure 7.1.0 - 2, Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Operating
Point Mode, on page 178).
The objective tubing flowing gradient is computed top-down from the specified start node
and pressure using the flowrate and gas lift data in the Gas Lift Input Parameters area. For
this purpose, gas injection is assumed to be "forced" at the specified maximum MD of
injection.
The depth of the first unloading valve is computed from the casing pressure gradient
(Injection gas gravity) and the kill fluid gradient (Static fluid). Casing pressure is calculated
starting from the surface Kick-off pressure (or the Max CH pressure if greater), and includes
the effects of frictional losses down the annulus (or tubing if it is annular production). Kill
fluid pressure is calculated starting from the specified Start node pressure (corrected to the
wellhead if the start node is the outlet), or from atmospheric pressure at the depth of static
fluid level if this option has been enabled.
The depths of the second and subsequent unloading valves are calculated in a similar manner,
except that:
1.The position of the next unloading valve would be closer than the Min valve spacing
criterion, or:
2. The casing pressure at a projected valve depth fails to exceed the Valve differential
pressure criterion (relative to the uncorrected objective tubing pressure), and therefore
could not pass the required volume of gas, or:
3. The position of the next valve would be below the Max MD of injection.
Case (1): the last valve depth satisfying both the spacing and the differential pressure criteria is
marked as the Operating valve (with all design margins). This means that all the declared
design margins have been taken into account, and the valve depth will probably be pessimistic.
204
- the casing pressure is calculated starting from the specified Maximum CH pressure
instead of the Kick-off pressure, regardless of which is greater;
- for each valve calculation, the Casing closing pressure margin is subtracted from the
casing pressure at the valve above;
- Casing-controlled valves: the appropriate transfer pressure margin, as defined in the
Gas Lift Design Margins dialog (Figure 7.6.1 - 3, Gas Lift Design Margins, CasingControlled Valve, on page 200), is added to the objective tubing gradient at each valve.
- Fluid controlled valves: the appropriate fluid closing pressure margin, as defined in the
Gas Lift Design Margins dialog (Figure 7.6.1 - 4, Gas Lift Design Margins, FluidControlled Valve, on page 202), is added to the objective tubing gradient at each valve.
The transfer pressure margin is then added, to determine the transfer pressure.
This is continued until WellFlo finds that either:

WellFlo then continues down hole placing unloading valves at the Min valve spacing down to the
Max MD of injection. The Design operating valve is marked at the last depth that has enough
differential pressure (relative to the uncorrected tubing pressure). Please read about the Use exact
maximum MD of injection option in the paragraph preceding Figure 7.6.1 - 3, Gas Lift Design
Margins, Casing-Controlled Valve, on page 200.
Case (2): WellFlo will move up from the projected position until it reaches a depth where the
differential pressure criterion is just met (relative to the uncorrected tubing pressure).
- Provided this position is still more than the Min valve spacing from the valve above, it will
be the location of the Design operating valve.
- If the position is less than the Min valve spacing from the valve above, the Design
operating valve is marked at the valve above. (i.e. as at the deepest valve that is transferred.)
If the Design operating valve is above the Max MD of injection, spare valves will be spaced at
intervals equal to the Min valve spacing, down to this maximum depth. Please read about the Use
exact maximum MD of injection option in the paragraph preceding Figure 7.6.1 - 3, Gas Lift
Design Margins, Casing-Controlled Valve, on page 200.
Case (3): WellFlo will place the Design operating valve at the Max MD of injection, provided
this satisfies the criteria of differential pressure and Min valve spacing from the valve above.
- If the differential pressure criterion is not met here, it will move up until it reaches a depth
where the criterion is just met. Provided this position is still more than the Min valve spacing
from the valve above, this will be the location of the Design operating valve. WellFlo then
continues down hole placing spare valves at the Min valve spacing down to the maximum
depth.
- If the position is less than the Min valve spacing from the valve above, the Design
operating valve is marked at the valve above. Please read about the Use exact maximum MD
of injection option in the paragraph preceding Figure 7.6.1 - 3, Gas Lift Design Margins,
Casing-Controlled Valve, on page 200.
On completion of the design computation, a Pressure vs TVD plot will be displayed showing
the main features of the analysis. TVD is used to facilitate plotting fluid gradients.
Figure 7.6.2 - 1, Gas Lift Design Plot: Pressure vs TVD, on page 206 is an example of the Gas
Lift Design Plot (and Figure 7.6.2 - 2, Detail of Previous Gas Lift Design Plot, on page 206 is
a detail from this), created with the example file GLDESIGN.WFL , using the design input
parameters shown in Figure 7.6.1 - 1, Gas Lift Design Dialog Box, on page 198 and Figure
7.6.1 - 3, Gas Lift Design Margins, Casing-Controlled Valve, on page 200 (top diagram) for a
casing-controlled valve.
Switch the Description box off to get a full-screen plot (Edit, Description).
205
Figure : 7.6.2 - 1 Gas Lift Design Plot: Pressure vs TVD
The zig-zag lines show the continuous flow unloading sequence, working between the corrected
transfer pressures (left-most circles) and the corrected valve closing pressures (right-most
circles).
The Operating valve (with all safety factors) is positioned at 7,907 ft TVD (9,692 ft MD)
(horizontal dashed line). This is because of the situation described as Case (1) above - the next
valve would, if computed in the same way, lie too close (within 450 ft) to the valve above it.
Below this, valves are located using the minimum spacing. The lowest valve at which the
corrected casing pressure is still greater than the tubing pressure by at least 100 psi (the specified
differential pressure) is at 8,807 ft TVD (10,869 ft MD) (horizontal solid line). This is the Design
operating valve.
Figure : 7.6.2 - 2 Detail of Previous Gas Lift Design Plot
206

The Operating casing pressure gradient curve (dashed line) is calculated from the Design
operating valve depth to surface, allowing for the appropriate valve differential pressure (100 psi
in this case) at the injection point. The casing pressure at valve depth is 1,043 psia in the
example.
On exiting from this plot, you will return to the Gas Lift Design screen (Figure 7.6.2 - 3, Gas
Lift Design Dialog Box after Design Computation for Casing-Controlled Valves, on page 207).
Figure : 7.6.2 - 3 Gas Lift Design Dialog Box after Design Computation for Casing-Controlled
Valves
Figure : 7.6.2 - 4 Update with Computed Casing Head Pressure?
The new value will be carried through to the Gas Lift Data dialog box (Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas
Lift Data Dialog Box, on page 174).
207
All valve depths down to the Max MD of injection will be listed in the central panel, along with
casing closing pressures, objective tubing pressures and temperatures at each valve. The new
valve depths will be transferred to the Gas Lift Data dialog box (Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas Lift Data
Dialog Box, on page 174) if you OK from this Gas Lift Design screen.
he Design Operating valve is the deepest valve marked "Active" in the list. The Design
Operating valve casing and tubing pressures are listed alongside.
Gas lift valve positions are recomputed each time you click the Design button.
When you exit the dialog box with OK , you will be prompted to update the Casing head
pressure field in the Gas Lift Input Parameters area with the new value computed from the
Operating casing pressure curve (919 psia in this example).

7. 6. 3. Re-calculate option
Figure : 7.6.3 - 1 Pressure vs TVD Plot after Re-calculate
The plot shows that the production valve would need to be moved up to the mandrel at 7,390ft
TVD (8,965ft MD). However, if all design safety factors are taken into account, the well will not
unload with the current valve spacings, the valve (dashed line) being at 2,655ft TVD. If initial
water cut was expected to be 50%, the design would have to be redone to ensure unloading.
The two short-dashed horizontal lines mark the top and bottom of the interval where minimum
spacing (450ft TVD) is being applied. The upper line did not appear in Figure 7.6.2 - 1, Gas Lift
Design Plot: Pressure vs TVD, on page 206, because it coincided with the dashed line of the
operating valve (with all safety factors).
208
7. 6. 3. Re-calculate option
The Re-calculate button performs a top-down continuous flow unloading and injection
calculation using the flowrate and gas lift data from the Gas Lift Input Parameters area, and the
valve positions displayed in the central panel. It does not recompute valve positions.
This enables you to perform "what if..." studies using the valve positions obtained with the
Design facility (or the default positions specified in the system editor if they have not yet been
overwritten with the design results, or a set of depths you wish to type in) and varying other
parameters such as flowrate or Maximum CH pressure.
To edit a field in the central gas lift valve table, double-click, or click once and press F 2 or
ENTER to switch to edit mode.
Use the Insert row (it inserts above) and Delete row buttons as necessary. To exclude a valve
from the calculation, either make it inactive or delete the row.
If you are typing in new data, only the valve depths (MD or TVD), and valve status (Active or
Inactive) need to be initialised. TVD is immediately updated from MD, and vice versa (using the
deviation data entered in the system editor) as you leave each field. The other fields will be
calculated.
Figure 7.6.3 - 1, Pressure vs TVD Plot after Re-calculate, on page 208 was calculated using the
design data in Figure 7.6.2 - 3, Gas Lift Design Dialog Box after Design Computation for
Casing-Controlled Valves, on page 207, to investigate the effect of increasing the water cut
from 10% to 50%

7. 6. 4. Sizing option
After running the design calculations to determine valve spacings, use the Sizing facility to:
- determine the recommended orifice sizes,
- compute opening and closing pressures for each valve,
- select either Gas Charged, Spring or Orifice valves,
- compute the required dome pressure and test rack opening pressure for each valve.
Once the design spreadsheet has been initialised with valve depths and tubing and casing
pressures (using the Design or Re-calculate functions), the Sizing button leads to the following
screen, shown in Figure 7.6.4 - 1, Gas Lift Valve Sizing Screen (Casing-Controlled), on page
209 for casing-controlled valves, and in Figure 7.6.4 - 6, Gas Lift Valve Sizing Screen (FluidControlled), on page 212 for fluid-controlled valves.
The common features of both types of design are covered here first, followed by the differences
for each.
The spreadsheet is wider than the window - the scrollbar at the bottom of the spreadsheet can be
used to scroll columns into view as required.
Values transferred from the Design dialog box are:
- gas throughput Qgi
- valve depths, and at each valve, the following data:
- wellbore temperature
- tubing transfer pressure Pt (to the P tubing column). These are the objective tubing
pressures plus design margins.
- casing pressure Pvo (to the P open valve column).
All of these - except the depths - may be edited.
The dialog box works like a spreadsheet, with calculations being updated each time you enter a
new value in any field. There are two main calculation sets: port sizing, and opening/closing/test
rack pressures.
A Valve Name of up to 15 characters may be entered in the appropriate column.
The Report button transfers the tabulated data to the browser, from where it may be transferred
via the Windows ClipBoard to a spreadsheet program such as Excel for further analysis.
209
Figure : 7.6.4 - 1 Gas Lift Valve Sizing Screen (Casing-Controlled)

Port Size Calculation
Port sizes are calculated to the nearest 1/64th inch, and may be edited subsequently. They are
calculated for the gas flow rate at the valve, at the valve temperature, using the tubing transfer
pressure Pt and the casing pressure Pvo. They are then rounded up to the next size listed in the
gasvalve.dat file for the selected Manufacturer and Valve Model. The default value of 0.865 is
typical for small port sizes, but a smaller value may be more appropriate for larger port sizes. A
warning message is issued if the largest size listed will not pass the required gas.
Note that if you edit the orifice size and subsequently alter one of the above inputs to its
calculation, it will be recalculated. The orifice size is not used elsewhere in WellFlo, so you can
overtype with the rounded sizes you require when you have finished calculations, for the purpose
of reporting.
The port sizes are calculated using the Thornhill-Craver equation (Report by Cook and
Dotterweich, C. of Arts and Industries, Kingsville, Aug 1946).
The Crit column shows whether a valve will be in critical flow for the given conditions.
Casing-controlled valves
R varies with the port size and valve model as defined in the gasvalve.dat file.
Note that there are several differently defined ratios applied to gas lift valves. For casingcontrolled valves we use:
Equation : 7.6.4 - II :
R=
Aport
Area acted on by tubing fluid
=
Bellows area
Abellows
This is typically of the order of 0.1 for casing-controlled valves - i.e. the tubing pressure exerts
only a small force via the port, and most of the bellows feels the casing pressure. R will vary
with both valve type (including design, size and materials) and the port size within a given valve
type.
Dome pressures: The dome pressures P dome can be calculated by two methods. Either method
can be assigned to any valve:
- use operating casing pressures (Pvo) - P open valve
- specify surface closing pressure (Psc) - P close surf
1) Use operating casing pressures Pvo: if the Calculate by P close column is set to No for a
valve, the casing pressure (calculated in Design or edited value) Pvo in the P open valve column
is used along with R and the P tubing (calculated in Design or edited value) to determine Pd
from the force balance equation:
The valve closing pressure Pvc is equal to Pd. These are displayed in the P dome and Pc valve
column.
The surface closing pressure Psc follows by correcting Pvc for the gas gradient and is listed as P
close surf.
2) Specify surface closing pressure Psc: select Yes in the Calculate by P close column at the
relevant valves and type in the desired surface closing pressures P close surf (Psc) for these
valves.
210
Equation : 7.6.4 - III :
Pd = Pvo (1 R) + Pt R

WellFlo will compute the in situ casing pressure Pvc from Psc and the gas gradient. This is, by
definition, the in situ dome pressure Pd. This is displayed in the P dome and Pc valve column.
The opening casing pressure Pvo at the valve is then calculated from Pd, R and the tubing
pressure Pt:
Equation : 7.6.4 - IV :
Pvo =
Pd Pt R
(1 R )
and listed in the P open valve column. P open surf, the surface opening pressure Pso, follows by
correcting Pvo for the gas gradient.
The spread-sheet now contains the in situ and surface opening and closing pressures and the
dome pressure at valve temperature.
Pd is converted to its value at 60F (oilfield units) and appears in the P dome at 60F column.
If you wish to use a test rack temperature other than 60F, the Registry can be modified (See
Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17), by selecting the Configure Registry menu option to
generate the Edit User Registry dialog, then entering an appropriate temperature value in the
Value Data field for the rack-temp-f Value Name (also refer to Configure Registry, on page
62):
rack-temp-f = xx
where xx lies between 40 and 120 (F).
Finally, the test rack opening pressure TRO is derived from Pd @ 60F for a tubing pressure of 1
atmosphere:
Equation : 7.6.4 - V :
TRO =
Pd ( 60) 14.65R
1 R
Rounded up/down values are displayed in the Set to ... column and may be edited.
211

Fluid-controlled valves
The spreadsheet that appears for fluid-controlled valves is similar, as shown here:
Figure : 7.6.4 - 6 Gas Lift Valve Sizing Screen (Fluid-Controlled)
The methodology is similar to that for casing-controlled valves, with a few important
differences.
Qgi (derived from Liquid rate and GLRi if necessary), valve depths and temperatures are
transferred from the Design section (Figure 7.6.1 - 1, Gas Lift Design Dialog Box, on page
198).
The design casing pressure values are transferred into the P casing column. The design closing
pressures (objective tubing pressures plus fluid closing pressure margins) appear in the Pt close
valve column. Both columns can be edited.
R varies with the port size and valve model as defined in the gasvalve.dat file. Note that there are
several differently defined ratios applied to gas lift valves. For fluid-controlled valves we use:
Equation : 7.6.4 - VII :
Area acted on by tubing fluid (Abellows - Aport )

=
Bellows area
Abellows
This is typically of the order of 0.9 for fluid-controlled valves - i.e. the port area is small so the
casing pressure exerts only a small force, and most of the bellows area feels the tubing fluid
pressure. R will vary with valve type (including design, size and materials) and the port size
within a given valve type.
The surface casing pressure (Pso) is expected to be a constant value, so the default P casing
values should be alright. They may, however, be edited if required for each valve.
The pressures in the tubing at which the valves are required to close are in the column Pt close
valve. These, too, may be edited.
The required dome pressure (Pd) at valve temperature is calculated from P casing (Pcsg), Pt
close valve (Pt) and R using the force balance equation:
212
R=

Equation : 7.6.4 - VIII :
Pd = Pcsg (1 R) + Pt R
This is listed in the P dome valve column.
Dome pressure is converted to 60F, and appears in the P dome at 60F column. If you wish to
use a test rack temperature other than 60F, the Registry can be modified (See Section 2. 3 The
Registry, on page 17), by selecting the Configure Registry menu option to generate the Edit
User Registry dialog, then entering an appropriate temperature value in the Value Data field for
the rack-temp-f Value Name (also refer to Configure Registry, on page 62):
rack-temp-f = xx
where xx lies between 40 and 120 (F).
The tubing racking pressure TRO is calculated from Pd @ 60F for a casing pressure of 1
atmosphere from:
Equation : 7.6.4 - IX :
TRO =
Pd ( 60 ) 14.65(1 R )
R
Note: The form of this equation depends on the definition of R (see above).
Rounded up/down values are displayed in the Set to ... column and may be edited.
Spring-operated valves
Either casing-controlled or fluid-controlled valves may be set to spring-operated instead of gascharged, in the Valve Type column. When this selection is made, dome pressures are still shown,
but they are now representative pressures, instead of actual nitrogen charge. The tubing racking
pressure TRO is still the pressure for which the valve should open when the spring has been
correctly set. There is no temperature correction for a spring-operated valve.
Orifice valves
For a casing-controlled valve, the casing pressure in the P open valve column is initially
calculated by adding the valve diff pressure from the Gas Lift Design screen (Figure 7.6.1 - 1,
Gas Lift Design Dialog Box, on page 198) to the value in the P tubing column. This
corresponds to the desired operating casing pressure after unloading.
For a fluid-controlled valve, the casing pressure in the P casing column is calculated by adding
the valve differential pressure to the pressure in the Pt close valve column.
The casing and tubing pressures may be edited. The orifice size required is calculated by the
Thornhill-Craver equation, as before.
213
A fluid-controlled valve, or a casing-controlled valve for which the Calculate by P close column
is set to No, may also be set as an orifice valve in the Valve Type column. Columns which are no
longer relevant (relating to opening and closing conditions) then become blank.
7.7.
Intermittent Gas Lift Design
This option designs the positions of gas valves for intermittent lift. The fields are as follows:
Initial CH pressure: The available casing head pressure.
Injection gas gravity: The injected gas gravity.
Min. valve spacing (TVD): The minimum Total Vertical Depth between valves.
Max. MD of injection: The maximum Measured Depth required for the operating valve.
Liquid rate: The target production rate.
Static fluid spec. grav: The specific gravity of the static fluid to be unloaded from the annulus.
Static fluid gradient: The pressure gradient of the static fluid in the annulus.
Wellhead pressure: The pressure at the wellhead.
Tubing pressure profile: Select constant gradient, varying gradient, or percent load.
Casing pressure profile: Select constant closing, constant opening, or decremented opening.
The conventional design methods consist of the following choices of profile:
Constant gradient in tubing, constant closing pressure in casing.
Varying gradient in tubing, constant closing pressure in casing.
Percent load in tubing, constant opening pressure in casing.
Constant gradient in tubing, decremented opening pressure in casing.
Design margins: This option opens the Intermittent GL Design Margins dialog box (see section
7. 7. 1 Intermittent Gas Lift Design Margins, on page 215) to select design margins appropriate
to the selected design method.
Design : Calculates the positions of the unloading valves according to the selected design
method, and shows the unloading plot. The valves are spaced so that unloading lines at the static
fluid gradient join the static fluid surface pressure to the casing pressure at the first valve, and the
tubing pressure at each valve to the casing pressure at the next valve. After spacing, the positions
are adjusted according to the Use exact MD option in the Design Margins dialog (see section 7.
7. 1 Intermittent Gas Lift Design Margins, on page 215). The designed positions replace any
previous valve details and positions in the spreadsheet.
214
7. 7. Intermittent Gas Lift Design
Figure : 7.7.0 - 1 Intermittent Gas Lift Design dialog box

If the tubing diameter is not uniform throughout the well, a value based on the internal diameter
at the maximum injection point will be used to determine the API spacing factor (tubing
gradient). The following dialog will be shown in this case allowing you to OK this option or
Cancel the design calculations.
Figure : 7.7.0 - 2 Tubing Diameter warning
Insert / Delete Row: Insert or delete a row in the spreadsheet. This will invalidate any sizing
results, as will switching a valve between active and inactive.
Sizing: Shows a dialog box to select valve models, port sizes, and test rack opening pressures for
each of the valve positions in the spreadsheet.
Re-calculate: Shows an unloading plot for the current valve positions in the spreadsheet and the
currently entered design data.
Once you are satisfied with the design data clicking OK takes the valves defined in the
spreadsheet and installs them in the well model. However, if the spreadsheet is empty, the valves
previously in the well model are retained.
Figure : 7.7.1 - 1 Intermittent GL Design Margins Dialog Box
Sets the safety margins for intermittent gas lift design. The fields are as follows:
Kick-off pressure: The kick-off pressure if available, or zero.
Depth of static fluid level (TVD): Check this box to type in the TVD, from reference, of the
surface of the static fluid at the start of unloading. Alternatively, uncheck the box, for a design
which will unload an annulus full of static fluid against the wellhead pressure.
Initial constant gradient: This applies only to design with a variable tubing pressure gradient.
Type in the value of the initially constant part of the variable gradient, typically 0.04 psi/ft.
Average well inflow pressure : This applies only to design with a variable tubing pressure
gradient. Check the box to type in the average pressure to be used. Alternatively, uncheck the box
to let WellFlo estimate the average well flowing pressure during the inflow phase.
215
7. 7. 1. Intermittent Gas Lift Design Margins
7. 7. 1. Intermittent Gas Lift Design Margins

Casing closing/opening pressure margin : This does not apply to design with a constant
opening pressure in the casing. For other cases this is the casing pressure decrement for the
second and subsequent valves. For a design with constant casing closing pressure, this margin is
typically 100 psi, and it is applied once after the first valve. For a design with decremented casing
opening pressure, it is typically 25 psi, and is applied in succession at each valve after the first. It
is a decrement in terms of surface pressure.
Operating valve setting pressure margin: The decrement for the surface closing pressure of
the operating valve. This is typically 20 psi for a 1.5" valve or 50 psi for a 1" valve, and flags the
valve for the operator. It is used only when setting its test rack opening pressure.
Percent load factor: This applies only to design with a percent load tubing gradient. Type in the
percentage of casing pressure which is to be used as the tubing pressure.
Use exact maximum MD of injection: In Design, the valves are spaced as has been already
described, until a valve is placed below the specified maximum depth. If the Use exact MD box
has been checked, all the valves are then proportionally repositioned so that the last valve is at
the maximum depth. If the box is not checked, the adjustment is simpler; the last valve is
repositioned at the maximum depth, and if this has put it at less than the Minimum valve spacing
from the second-last valve, it is deleted.
Figure : 7.7.2 - 1 Intermittent Gas Lift Sizing dialog box
This option allows the adjustment of the calculated temperatures and tubing pressures, and the
selection of different valve models and port sizes. For each selection, the spread between valve
opening and valve closing pressure is displayed for comparison with values recommended in the
literature, and the test rack opening pressure (TRO) is calculated and shown.
When a new valve model is selected, the initially preferred port size is the one whose port-tobellows ratio is closest to 0.2.
Details of the available valve models are loaded from the GASVALVE.DAT file. This is in keyword
format as follows, and may be edited by the user. The file is processed in the numerical order of
the section headers [valve-nn]. Gaps of up to 100 between header numbers are allowed. Note that
when the file is used in intermittent gas lift sizing, orifice valves and production pressure
operated valves are ignored.
216
7. 7. 2. Intermittent Gas Lift Sizing
7. 7. 2. Intermittent Gas Lift Sizing

[valve-nn]
manufacturer=NameA manufacturer name up to 11 characters, or default as for the
previous valve.
model=Code
A valve model code up to 9 characters, or default as for the
previous valve. It is recommended that the manufacturer name and
model code total 14 characters at most.
diam=Dia
1.0 if a one-inch valve, or default 1.5.
type=Type
Orifice, spring, or default gas-charged.
ppo=P
1 if the spring or gas-charged valve is operated by production
pressure, or default 0 if by injection pressure.
bellows=Areain square inches. Default 0.31 if diam=1.0, otherwise 0.77.
port-size=Sizein 64ths of an inch, from 1 to 80.
pb-ratio=RatioPort-to-bellows ratio, default Pi * (Size/128)^2 / Area.
cd=Coeff
Thornhill-Craver discharge coefficient, default 0.96 if
type=orifice, otherwise 0.865.
igl-pref=I
1 to make this valve the initial selection for intermittent gas lift, or
default 0. The value 1 can occur on two valves, one of diam=1.0
and the other of diam=1.5.
cgl-pref=C
1 to make this valve model the initial selection for continuous gas
lift, or default 0. The value 1 can occur on two valves, one with
ppo=1 and the other (spring or gas-charged) with ppo=0.
The defaults quoted for diameter, type, ppo code and bellows area apply only to the first valve of
each model. Any values entered become the defaults for subsequent valves while they have the
same model code.
The defaults quoted for port-to-bellows ratio, discharge coefficient, intermittent gas lift
preference and continuous gas lift preference apply to each port-size.
Report: Generate a hard-copy form of the data entered into the spreadsheet. This can be printed
out directly, or pasted into a spreadsheet for further analysis.
Methodology of Analysis
7. 8. 1. Calculations
Clicking the Calculate button in the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box (Figure 7.1.0 - 2,
Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box for Operating Point Mode, on page 178) will start the
calculations off. You will be advised of progress by a dialog box which changes at each step. The
pressure at each successive node, and the sensitivity case number, will be displayed.
You can abort calculation by double-clicking the Windows system menu icon (the symbol in
the top left-hand corner of the dialog box) or by using the keyboard short-cut ALT+F4. After a
few seconds, you will be asked to confirm that you want to abort. (You can click even though the
cursor is the "please wait" egg timer)
217
7. 8. Methodology of Analysis
7.8.

Calculation sequence:
- first, a temperature profile is calculated, bottom-up, for the current rate.
- then, if gas lift is to be done, the casing pressure profile is calculated using these
temperatures and the specified casing head pressure and injection gas gravity.
- if it is not certain which valve would be open, this is determined next by means of a partial
nodal analysis up to (if the solution node is above the topmost valve), or down to, (if the
solution node is below the bottom-most valve) the qualifying valve.
- then the full the pressure drop run is made between end node(s) and solution node for the
current flowrate. For this purpose, each node traversed is subdivided into computation
segments. These have a maximum length of 250 ft length, subdivided further where
necessary, for the non-coupled models. They are dynamically determined for the coupled
model. In the case of Operating Point calculation mode, the bottom-up (inflow) and topdown (outflow) pressure drops are calculated sequentially.
If you are running the coupled pressure-temperature model in operating point mode, you may see
the following warning when you start the calculations:
Figure : 7.8.1 - 1 Coupled Pressure-Temperature Model Run-Time Warning
This is simply pointing out that the top-down and bottom-up temperature calculations will not
agree at the solution node (except by pure coincidence!) - they are each starting at a fixed end
temperature and are computed independently. You can still proceed with the nodal analysis to
establish the operating point.
You could then run a bottom-up (Pressure Drop mode) calculation at this operating rate to
compute the correct top end temperature for this rate, and repeat the operating point analysis with
this revised temperature for T top node (Figure 7.3.4 - 1, Coupled Pressure-Temperature Model
Entry (Operating Point calculation mode), on page 190).
Completion of calculations:
A message box will appear at the end of the calculations, summarising the number of
successful and failed cases (Figure 7.8.1 - 2, End of calculation message box, on page
219), or the number of successful and no operating point cases.
A sensitivity case is an inflow/outflow or pressure drop calculation consisting of all the

specified flowrates, for one value of a sensitivity.
- A sensitivity case flagged as Successful means that an operating point was found for that
sensitivity value.
- A sensitivity case flagged as No operating point means that all the flowrates ran OK, but
no intersection was found, or it was found but was unstable if the Stability check was
switched on (See Section 7. 5. 2 Stability check, on page 196).
218
7. 8. 1. Calculations
Alternatively, use the Iteration to exact option (See Section 7. 5. 3 Iteration to exact operating
point, on page 196), and use a range of sensitivity values for the relaxation distance factor.
Examine the pressure-depth plot to find the value which eliminates the discontinuity.

- A sensitivity case flagged as failed means that no operating point was found, and there
was one or more flowrates for which WellFlo was unable to complete the calculation (unable
to converge, insufficient pressure to sustain flow, etc.).
All runs can be plotted and reported via the Results button.
A one-line summary of the reasons for any failure can be obtained by pressing the Yes button on
the message box (Figure 7.8.1 - 2, End of calculation message box, on page 219 - if there are
no failed cases, you will not get this option). This will display a message box like Figure 7.8.1 3, Calculation failure message box, on page 219, categorising the type of problem.
The results output includes information on whether or not a stable operating point was identified
for each case.
Figure : 7.8.1 - 3 Calculation failure message box
Figure 7.8.1 - 3, Calculation failure message box, on page 219 shows a fairly common cause of
run failure - the bottom-up calculation for a particular rate and sensitivity combination has
reached a zero pressure before getting as far as the solution node (flowrate too high, tubing too
narrow, etc.).
The .LOG file (if enabled as in Figure 6.2.2 - 2, Configure Preferences Dialog Box, on page
60) provides more detail about the calculations if required. If you have the .LOG option switched
off (See Section 8. 2. 3 Calculation Log Output, on page 246), you will have to switch it on in
Configure Preferences and repeat the calculation before you can inspect the computation details.
WELLFLO.LOG gives a modest depth of detail and may be adequate to diagnose failed runs.
For a more detailed report, look at the ANALYSIS.LOG.
7. 8. 2. Calculation Background Information

This section serves as a brief technical reference for the engineering calculations in WellFlo.
Where full details are available elsewhere, the appropriate reference is given. Where
modification work has been carried out in-house, it is explained briefly here.
The subjects covered here are: Pressure Drop Correlations, Pressure Drop Through a Restriction
and Temperature Modelling.
219
Figure : 7.8.1 - 2 End of calculation message box

Pressure Drop Correlations
There are 12 pressure drop correlations in WellFlo. Six are basically taken from standard theory,
four have been modified in various ways (variants of the Duns and Ros, Beggs and Brill, and
Hagedorn and Brown correlations), and one hybrid (Dukler-Eaton-Flanigan), and one is an inhouse mechanistic model (EPS mechanistic). The standard forms of the correlations follow the
published references as closely as possible. The BAX correlation is mechanistic
There are three sources of pressure drop:
Hydrostatic Gradient which arises from the density of the multi-phase column of fluids. It is
calculated from a knowledge of the liquid hold-up (the proportion of the flowing area
occupied by liquid), and the densities of the phases. It is proportional to the cosine of the
deviation, being zero in a horizontal pipe. Most correlations use a flow-regime map to
determine the type of flow, and then use a particular correlation for the flow regime
concerned to determine hold-up.
Friction Gradient arising from the drag of the fluids on the walls of the pipe. This is
calculated in a specific way for each correlation, but generally uses the concept of a Friction
Factor diagram (such as Moody's) to calculate the friction factor as a function of the Reynolds
Number and pipe roughness. The friction factor is used to calculate the friction pressure
gradient.
For annular flow, the pipe roughness specified for the tubing inside wall (tubing component
dialog box) is applied to its outside wall and casing inside wall.
Acceleration Gradient arising from the increasing kinetic energy of the fluids as they
expand and accelerate with decreasing pressure. This term is often negligible, but is always
included in these correlations. All correlations in WellFlo use an acceleration term proposed
by Beggs and Brill1, based on the mean phase velocities in each computational segment.
Duns and Ros follows the methods described by Brown. The correlation makes use of a flow
regime map covering bubble, slug and mist flow. There is a linear transition between slug and
mist. Each regime has its own holdup correlation. Holdup is not changed by deviation.
Friction is calculated with liquid properties for bubble and slug flow, and gas properties for
mist. In mist flow, wall friction is increased due to liquid ripples on the pipe wall. This
correlation is considered by some to be the best suited to gas lift stability prediction (using
GLRi as sensitivity, and Stability check switched on (See Section 7. 5. 2 Stability check, on
page 196)).
Duns and Ros (modified) has a flow regime map extended by the work of Gould et al. This
includes a new transition region between bubble and slug flow, and an additional froth flow
region at high flow rates. The holdup is considered as no-slip for froth flow, and is
interpolated over the bubble-slug transition. The other holdup relationships are as for the
standard Duns and Ros. To model deviation, the calculated holdup is modified using the
Beggs and Brill corrections (see below). Friction is calculated by the method proposed by
Kleyweg This uses a monophasic friction factor rather than two-phase, but involves use of an
average fluid velocity. This is claimed by Kleyweg to be a better method.
220
Each correlation is described in terms of these three pressure gradient components. Note that, for
the frictional gradient, the following correlations do not use the wall roughness entered in the
component dialog box, but compute their own roughness factors internally: Beggs and Brill,
Beggs and Brill (no-slip), Fancher-Brown, Dukler-Eaton-Flanigan.

Beggs and Brill again follows the methodology outlined by Brown1. This correlation is
unique in that it is based on a flow regime map for horizontal flow, from which a regime is
first determined as if the flow were horizontal. A horizontal holdup is then calculated by
correlations. Lastly, this holdup is corrected for the actual angle of deviation. Beggs and
Brill's correlation models up- and down-flow. It is therefore recommended for all pipeline
applications. However, since it was not derived for vertical flow, it must be used with
caution in vertical wells. Friction calculations in Beggs and Brill use an internally defined
two-phase smooth pipe friction factor. This may be expected to under-estimate friction in
rough pipes.
Beggs and Brill (no-slip) uses the same methodology as the standard Beggs and Brill, with
the exception that the holdup used is not the horizontal holdup described above, but simply
the no-slip holdup, without deviation correction.
Beggs and Brill (modified) also uses the same methodology as the standard Beggs and Brill,
with the following changes. There is an extra flow regime of froth flow, which (as in Duns
and Ros (modified)) assumes a no-slip holdup. This is triggered by highly turbulent flow. The
friction factor is changed from the smooth pipe model to the method used in Duns and Ros
(modified) - a single-phase friction factor using pipe roughness and average fluid velocity.
Fancher and Brown is a no-slip correlation1, with no flow regime map. It has its own
friction factor model, which is independent of pipe roughness. This correlation cannot be
recommended for general use. According to Brown, it is only suitable for 2 3/8 - 2 7/8 inch
tubings. It is included for any historical comparisons which may be required. Generally, it
differs widely from the results of the other seven correlations.
Orkiszewski is again based on the description by Brown1. This is perhaps the most
sophisticated correlation, as it uses the work of Duns and Ros and Griffith and Wallis, for
mist and bubble flow respectively (using a flow regime map similar to Duns and Ros'). It has
its own correlation in the slug flow region, which is based on the approach of Griffith and
Wallis. A transition between slug and mist flow is also modelled. The holdup is adjusted for
deviation using the Beggs and Brill correction (as in the modified Duns and Ros and
Hagedorn and Brown correlations). The friction factor calculation uses wall roughness but
varies with flow regime, and for mist flow retains the Duns and Ros extra friction due to
ripples in the film of liquid on the wall.
In the correlation the default in-situ water-cut for switching from continuous oil phase to
continuous water phase equations for slug flow is defined as 50%. If you wish to use a
different value the Registry can be modified (See Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17),
by selecting the Configure Registry menu option to generate the Edit User Registry dialog,
then entering an appropriate water-cut value in the Value Data field for the orkiszewskitransition-wc Value Name (also refer to Configure Registry, on page 62):
orkiszewski-transition-wc = x
where x lies betwen 0 and 100%.
221
Hagedorn and Brown again is as per Brown1, with the modifications to Hagedorn and
Brown's original work as recommended by them. These are: the use of the Griffith and Wallis
correlation for bubble flow (using a simplified flow regime map to detect bubble flow); and
the use of no-slip holdup if it gives greater density then Hagedorn and Brown's correlation.
There is no change to holdup with deviation. A two-phase friction factor using pipe
roughness is used.
Hagedorn and Brown (modified) involves the adjustment of the standard Hagedorn and
Brown holdup for deviation using the Beggs and Brill correction. When Griffith and Wallis'
holdup correlation is invoked (in bubble flow), it is also corrected. Otherwise, this is the same
as the standard Hagedorn and Brown correlation.

Gray: this is a widely recommended correlation6 for gas and condensate systems which are
predominantly gas phase (with liquid entrained as droplets). No flow regime map is used,
flow being treated as pseudo-single phase. Water or liquid condensate is considered to adhere
to the pipe wall, resulting in a modified roughness term.
Dukler-Eaton-Flanigan is a hybrid of the Dukler18 friction component and the Flanigan19
correlation for the hydrostatic component. A mixture density is calculated using Dukler's
equation, but with Eaton's holdup17 definition, and this is used in Dukler's friction term. The
liquid density is used in the Flanigan hydrostatic term. The acceleration component is
modelled with the Beggs and Brill correlation. This correlation can be recommended for
undulating surface flow, but it is not suitable for downflow.
EPS mechanistic: this has been formulated on physical modelling principles, and is therefore
applicable to all fluid types, pipe sizes and inclinations. However, it is not at present
recommended for annular flow. Its map of flow regimes is based on work by Wallis, Barnea,
Taitel and Dukler, and it models the following:
Slug flow according to Sylvester (ref. 21), with the Taitel and Barnea correlation (ref.
22) for the Taylor bubble velocity.
Stratified flow with the Sinai correlation (ref. 23) for the interfacial friction factor.
Annular and mist flow with the KLSA (or Oliemans') entrainment correlation (ref. 24),
Oliemans' correlation for gas core velocity (also ref. 24), the KLSA interfacial friction
model (also ref. 24), and Gray's correlation (ref. 6) for low liquid holdup.
Bubbly and dispersed bubble flow incorporating Wallis's drift flux model (ref. 25).
A table of the numbers used in the ANALYSIS.LOG file to identify the various flow regimes is
included in the section Calculation Log Output, on page 246.
The pressure drop through a restriction is worked out as follows. The upstream pressure is used
for fluid property evaluation. The heat capacities of the liquid and gas phases are found at
upstream conditions. The sonic velocity of the single or two-phase (gas-liquid) mixture is
determined from the heat capacity ratio, Cp/Cv.
If the actual throat velocity is greater than this, the flow is critical, and if less, it is sub-critical.
Critical and sub-critical flow are flagged in the Flow Regime column of the ANALYSIS.LOG
file (if enabled in Config Preferences): 0 = sub-critical, 1 = critical.
Note: In the case of single phase or nearly single phase 7(high GLR) systems only, this flag is used
in a general critical/sub-critical flow equation (Beggs ), which models the transition smoothly
between the two.
For low GLR systems, owing to the discontinuous nature of the available choke equations, the
flag is ignored, and the switch setting in the choke or restriction dialog box (See Section 6. 3
Well Description, on page 65) is invoked - i.e. the users choice of critical or sub-critical flow
is imposed. In this case, the flag is for information only.
Surface Chokes:
- For black oil fluid type, and gas, condensate or volatile oil with GLR < 10,000 scf/STB,
the pressure drop will be computed using a critical or a sub-critical flow equation, depending
on the choice made in the choke dialog box (Figure 6.3.3 - 10, Choke Data Editor Dialog
Box, on page 90).
Critical flow is handled by one of six correlations, selected in Figure 7.2.4 - 1, Nodal Analysis
Correlations Dialog Box, on page 183. These are listed in the following table together with the
three coefficients A, B, C and D
222
Pressure Drop Through Restrictions

.
Correlation
Gilbert
Baxendell
Achong
Ros
Aussens
Corpoven (oil or
volatile oil)
Corpoven (gas or
condensate)
A
1.89
1.93
1.88
2.00
1.97
1.9523
B
10.00
9.56
3.82
17.40
3.89
8.255814
C
0.546
0.546
0.65
0.50
0.68
0.501022
D
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0645
1.814859
7.700537
0.595821
0.962028
It may also be handled by a customised correlation with user-defined coefficients, as described in

Section Choice Of Flow Correlations, on page 182.
These coefficients are used in the equation:
Pup = (B * QlD * GLR C) / (DchokeA)
to determine the upstream pressure.
Note that downstream pressures cannot be determined in the case of critical flow, and if flow is
critical in an upstream-to-downstream computation in a producer, the computation will stop at
the choke. The same applies to an injection well, with flow in the opposite direction.
Sub-critical flow is modelled using a modified version of Beggs' SSV equation (section B.2 of
ref.7).
- For single phase gas, or high GLR gas / condensate / volatile oil systems (GLR > 10,000
scf/STB), flow is treated as (near) single phase, and critical or sub-critical pressure drops are
computed according to the sonic velocity test described above, using Beggs' general
equation7, regardless of the setting in the choke dialog box (Figure 6.3.3 - 10, Choke Data
Editor Dialog Box, on page 90).
Sub-surface restrictions: The same logic applies to sub-surface restrictions as to surface
chokes:
- black oil, or low GLR gas / condensate / volatile oil systems (GLR < 10,000 scf/STB): the
critical/sub-critical switch setting in the component dialog box is respected and the
appropriate equation is imposed; the sonic velocity test is ignored.
- single phase gas, or high GLR gas / condensate / volatile oil systems (GLR > 10,000 scf/
STB): the sonic velocity test is respected and Beggs' general equation7 is used; the critical/
sub-critical switch setting in component dialog box is ignored.
223
If the Corpoven critical choke correlation is selected, and critical flow has been selected in the
choke dialog box, then the GLR > 10,000 SCF/STB rule does not apply. The sub-critical
equation is used for single phase gas flow, and the Corpoven correlation appropriate to the fluid
type is used for two-phase flow at all values of GLR.

Temperature Modelling
There are four models in WellFlo for temperature calculation. Please refer to Section
Temperature Calculations, on page 187 for more details on the use of these at run time. This
section explains briefly the methods used for each option.
Manual Temperature Model is very simple, consisting of a fixed temperature at each node
in the system. For tubular components which have a finite length, the temperature at the
upstream end (bottom end in a producer) is specified. The temperature is interpolated linearly
between this and the temperature at the next node.
This model can be used to impose a fixed temperature profile on the system, but obviously,
this will really only be valid at the flowrate at which the profile was derived or measured.
Calculated Temperature Model is based on Ramey's4 and Willhite's5 heat loss correlations.
Pressure effects are not modelled. Ramey's exponential temperature loss model is used on a
component-by-component basis, taking account of the deviation, which affects the external
temperature gradient. A constant geothermal gradient is calculated from the layer and surface
temperatures over the TVD of the reservoir.
The exponential constant, or relaxation distance, A, for a given flowrate is calculated per
component from its heat transfer coefficient Uwb, the specific heat of the wellbore fluid
mixture Cpf, and the thermal conductivity Ke of the surrounding earth, water or air.
Relaxation distance:
Equation : 7.8.2 - I :
A=
qmC pf
2rciU t
Ut =
K eU wb
K e + U wb rci f D ( t )
rci is the inner pipe diameter. Uwb is the heat transfer coefficient appearing in the component
dialog box, and includes tubing, annulus fluid, casing and cement (well component), or
pipeline and insulating jacket (surface component).
fD(t) is a dimensionless transient heat conduction time function for the earth, derived from the
Hasan and Kabir33,34 approximation to the finite wellbore radius solution of Carslaw and
Jaeger35.
When performing non-sensitized calculations, the transient heat conduction time function
assumes a stable production time at default settings of 200 hrs for the coupled model and 100
hrs for the calculated model. For sensitivity calculations, other times may be entered in the
Nodal Analysis - Sensitivity Values dialog (refer to Figure 7.5.0 - 2, Sensitivity Values
Dialog Box, on page 194), when Pressure and Temperature are selected as a Sensitivity
Group and Elapsed Production Time is selected as a Group Variable (See Section 7. 5
Sensitivity Analysis, on page 193).
224
where qm is the mass flowrate, and Ut, the total heat transfer coefficient, is:
The Ramey model in the wellbore, and the simplified version of it beyond the wellhead, are
still used. However, the relaxation distances are calibrated so that the computed wellhead and
separator temperatures match values which are specified at a particular flowrate.
The well downhole relaxation distances are calibrated against the wellhead flowing
temperature (not the surface temperature). The surface facilities relaxation distances are then
calibrated against the temperature loss from wellhead to separator, again at the measured rate.
At other flowrates, the temperatures will be calculated using the calibrated scalers on the
relaxation distances. This model should therefore be the most accurate, when test data are
available for reference.
Coupled Pressure-Temperature Model solves the pressure equation (conservation of
momentum) and the energy equation16 simultaneously, thereby taking into account the effects
of changing pressure, including the Joule-Thompson effect, on the moving fluid column.
Heat transfer to the surrounding medium (rock, surface medium) is treated in the same way as
for the Calculated model option.
Critical unloading rate27,28

For gas, condensate and volatile oil wells, the critical unloading rate is computed from the Turner
critical velocity. This velocity can be plotted vs depth by selecting it under Select plot axes under
the main Configure option (See Section 6. 2. 2 Configure Menu, on page 59). The rate is
reported in the WellFlo report file (See Section 8. 2. 2 Report Output, on page 243), and in
WELLFLO.LOG (See Section 8. 2. 3 Calculation Log Output, on page 246). They will
available for every pressure drop calculation run, and for any operating point run (inflow/
outflow analysis) where the Iterate to exact option has been used. (This is simply because the
iteration terminates with a pressure drop run at the operating rate.)
The Turner critical velocity is computed at the wellhead using the equation proposed by Turner 27
and modified by Coleman et al28:
225
The model changes at the wellhead node. Instead of a varying external (earth) temperature Te,
there is assumed to be a constant ambient surface temperature for each component. The
overall heat transfer coefficient Ut is still used to find the relaxation distance, but the Ramey
model is simplified and becomes independent of depth, elevation and angle.
Where a surface component, or part of it, is below MSL, the external medium is assumed to
be water (equivalent default heat transfer coefficient with forced convection 1100 BTU/
ft2.D.F). Where the component, or part of it, is above MSL, it is assumed to be air and forced
convection is approximated by a default heat transfer coefficient of 130 BTU/ft2.D.F. An
option to (partially) bury the component is also available.
The thermal properties of the various components involved in the transfer of heat between the
wellbore fluid and surrounding medium are described under Casing Component and Flowline
Component in Section Well Description, on page 65. Note that the thermal conductivities
of earth, cement, liquid, gas, steel, and insulation can be customised in the Registry (as
described in The Registry, on page 17 and page 22) and the heat transfer coefficients for
forced convection in air or water can be specified in the wellhead dialog box (Figure 6.3.2 17, Wellhead Data Editor Dialog Box, on page 81).
There is also an option to specify the thermal properties of each surface component and its
surrounding medium, instead of using global values. This is described under Advanced heat
loss modelling (See Section Flowline Component, on page 86).
Calibrated Temperature Model is the same as the Calculated model, except that the above
heat transfer calculations are calibrated against measured temperatures.

1/ 4 ( )1/ 4
L
G
v gc = 1.593
1/ 2
With the critical velocity in ft/sec, interfacial tension in dynes/cm, and gas and liquid densities in
lbs/ft3. This is then converted to gas flowrate using wellhead pressure, temperature and tubing
ID.
To vary this coefficient with wells, it is available in the Nodal Analysis dialog box (Nodal
Analysis Correlations Dialog Box, on page 183).
Erosional velocity29
The erosional velocity is computed when a pressure drop calculation run is made, and for any
operating point run (inflow/outflow analysis) where the Iterate to exact option has been used.
(This is simply because the iteration terminates with a pressure drop run at the operating rate.)
It is listed in the ANALYSIS.LOG file (See Section 8. 2. 3 Calculation Log Output, on page
246). It can also be plotted vs depth, and listed in the report file, if it is selected in the Select plot
axes facility off the main Configure menu (See Section 6. 2. 2 Configure Menu, on page 59).
It is computed as7:
ve =
100
1f / 2
If you wish to use a coefficient other than 100, the Registry can be modified (See Section 2. 3
The Registry, on page 17), by selecting the Configure Registry menu option to generate the
Edit User Registry dialog, then entering an appropriate coefficient value in the Value Data field
for the erosion-coeff Value Name (also refer to Configure Registry, on page 62):
erosion-coeff = xxxx
where xxxx lies between 7.5 and 1000.
The erosional velocity can be compared directly with the computed gas phase velocity, by
selecting these two variables in the Select plot axes facility prior to a calculation run in Pressure
drop mode, or any operating point run (inflow/outflow analysis) where the Iterate to exact option
has been used. They can then be plotted together vs depth.
226
where f is in situ the mixture density (lbs/ft3).
7.9.
Advanced Gas Valve Modelling
The Advanced Gas Valve Modelling facility introduces true valve performance into the
computation of operating points, and provides a means of selecting a valve design (port size, etc.)
that is compatible with well performance. The introduction of realistic valve performance curves
allows you to study how the choice of gas lift valve, port size, valve settings, casing head
pressure, etc. will affect production. The methodology consists of:
Performing a sequence of nodal analyses for the well and reservoir over a range of gas
injection rates Qgi, or injection gas/liquid ratios GLRi, with the selected valve as solution
node.
This defines a production rate, flowing temperature, tubing and casing pressure at valve depth
for each Qgi or GLRi.
Using an appropriate correlation for valve performance to compute the gas flow through the
valve for each tubing/casing pressure pair and in-situ temperature.
Plotting the tubing pressure at the valve versus gas injection rate for both the well and the
valve and examining the plot for a point of intersection.
Ptubing = Pcasing (zero differential)
Valve performance
curve
Ptbg
Operating point for well

and valve
Calculation
limits
Well performance
curve
Q gi
(Valve Closing)
An intersection signifies compatibility between well and valve design, and defines the operating
production rate, gas injection rate, tubing and casing pressures, and temperature at the valve
depth. If the curves do not intersect, the valve design is deemed inappropriate for the range of
well operating conditions available.
The valve depth is selected from the completion data. The design features allow variations in
valve type, size and setting characteristics as well as gas injection parameters, casing head
pressure and various options relating to nodal analysis.
Selecting the Advanced Gas Valve Modelling option on the Analysis menu will open the dialog
box shown in Figure 7.9.0 - 2, Advanced Gas Valve Modelling dialog box, on page 228.
Since the analysis depends partly on a sequence of nodal analysis calculations, there are a
number of features common to this dialog box and those appearing in Figure 7.1.0 - 2, Nodal
Analysis Control Dialog Box for Operating Point Mode, on page 178.
227
7. 9. Advanced Gas Valve Modelling
Figure : 7.9.0 - 1 Graph schematic of Advanced Gas Valve Modelling
Figure : 7.9.0 - 2 Advanced Gas Valve Modelling dialog box
There are also some implicit assumptions which are run in the background. These are:
Injection gas can only pass through the valve chosen as the solution node. All other valves are
considered to be inactive.
The well flow correlation has been inherited from the nodal analysis dialog box input or its
default.
Selecting Plot after a calculation will display the well performance in the form of tubing pressure
at the solution node versus gas injection rate. A second curve defining valve performance will
also be displayed. This curve depends on the data recorded in Figure 7.9.1 - 1, Gas Valve
Modelling Details dialog box, on page 229, which may be accessed by clicking the Valve
Details button.
The Stability check tick-box refers to the stability of intersections in the well inflow/outflow
part of the analysis. Unstable intersections will be excluded if the check is switched on. WellFlo
does not check the stability of the valve performance.
228
7. 9. Advanced Gas Valve Modelling
Iterate to Exact operates by default to improve the accuracy of the inflow/outflow

intersections in the well performance part of the analysis (See Section 7. 5. 3 Iteration to
exact operating point, on page 196).

7. 9. 1. Gas Valve Modelling Details
Figure : 7.9.1 - 1 Gas Valve Modelling Details dialog box
The Gas Valve Modelling Details dialog box allows you to modify the characteristics of the Gas
Valve used in your model. The selection of Valve Type is discussed in Section Valve Type, on
page 199.
For the current version of Advanced Gas Valve Modelling only gas-charged and orifice valves
are available for selection. A spring-operated valve specified in the Gas Lift Data dialog box
(Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas Lift Data Dialog Box, on page 174) will be denoted as Gas Charged in
the Valve Details dialog box.
The Valve Type and Name appear in the Valve section of Figure 7.9.1 - 1, Gas Valve Modelling
Details dialog box, on page 229 and must be pre-defined. The data relevant to the valve have
been transferred from the Gas Lift Data dialog box (see Figure 6.8.2 - 1, Gas Lift Data Dialog
Box, on page 174). Some of these data items are editable; any changes made here will be
transferred to the Gas Lift Data dialog box if you OK from this screen.
This area of Figure 7.9.1 - 1, Gas Valve Modelling Details dialog box, on page 229 allows you
to enter details of the Casing Head Pressure (Operating Pressure), and the Port Size if you are
using Step Profile mode (described in the next section). Should you be using True Valve
Performance mode, then the Port Size option will be greyed out, as this will be managed by the
Valve Performance Data section below.
Figure : 7.9.1 - 2 Base Case Calculation for a Step Profile
229
Base Case Calculation

Valve Performance
In the Valve Performance Data section of Figure 7.9.1 - 1, Gas Valve Modelling Details dialog
box, on page 229, you have the option of selecting True Valve Performance or Step Profile.
Step profile: This option models the valve performance curve as a step profile where gas is
injected at the specified rate provided:
Tubing pressure < (casing pressure - valve diff. pressure)
and no gas injection occurs otherwise.
This replicates the way that WellFlo currently handles gas valves elsewhere in the program.
Figure : 7.9.1 - 3 True Valve Performance options for a Camco R20 Valve
The combinations of valve model, correlation, and port size appearing in the combo boxes are
simply those for which empirical data (the coefficients described above) are available. Other
input data also influence the valve performance calculations. These are:
Dome Size: This is read from the VALVPERF.BIN file and is not editable.
Fluid Vol.: This is the volume of fluid contained in the valve dome (and collared bellows),
and as such acts to modify the valves response to pressure. You may edit the default value.
Should the value entered here exceed the dome volume, a warning similar to the following
will be displayed, and the fluid volume will be returned to its default value:
230
WellFlo will perform the valve performance calculations using the Casing Head Pressure
defined in the Base Case Calculation area of the screen, and the Injection gas gravity, Valve
Diff. Pressure and Lift gas details provided in the Gas Lift Data section of the screen. The port
size is not in fact relevant in this mode of calculation, because the gas throughput or injection
GLR are user-specified. It is displayed for information only.
True Valve Performance: This option models the performance of orifice and pressurecontrolled valves more rigorously. For each valve type, a correlation defines the throughput of
gas for a given casing and tubing pressure, in-situ temperature and set of valve characteristics.
Instead of you specifying the gas injection rate or GLRi (step profile option), the program will
compute the gas throughput according to the valve specifications and well conditions.
Valve performance is modelled by correlations. A limited set is currently available, but this will
be extended as data become available. The correlations for the generic valve types (1.5" IPO,
1.0" IPO, 1.0" PPO and Orifice) are available to all users, but the correlations for proprietary
valves are individually licensed. As the list of available valves change with intermediate releases,
the on-line help lists the current list of available valves.
Referring to the Valve Performance Data area of the dialog box (Figure 7.9.1 - 3, True Valve
Performance options for a Camco R20 Valve, on page 230), the Correlation shown in the
combo box has been calibrated for the selected Valve Model and Port Size. It is represented as a
set of empirically derived coefficients stored in the valve performance data file VALVPERF.BIN
which is supplied with WellFlo.
In practice, it is not recommended to exceed 50% of dome volume.

Load Rate: The load rate is a measure of the valves resistance to opening. It is related to the
test rack opening pressure Ptro defined in the Gas Lift Data section of the screen by the
linear relationship:
RL = a (Pd) + b
where a and b are coefficients defined in the VALVPERF.BIN file, RL is the load rate and Pd is
the dome pressure (related to Ptro for any particular valve). These values are at test rack
conditions. Load rate cannot be edited directly. During the valve performance computation,
corrected values are used to reflect the in situ conditions at the valve.
Stem Travel: This is the maximum effective travel of the valve stem, and determines the
point of maximum gas throughput.
Correlation: In its current version VALVPERF.BIN contains data for the various available
correlations for each valve, with the choices available for the currently-selected Valve Model
displayed.
Port Size: For pressure-controlled valves, only those port sizes for which correlation
parameters are available are listed. The choice is therefore limited. However, the orifice valve
port size can be any value between 1 and 80/64ths of an inch. This has implications for the
port size sensitivity dialog box described below.
Gas Lift Data
Figure : 7.9.1 - 4 Gas Lift Data for Step Profile with Vary GLRi selected
Step Profile
Injection gas gravity: allows the user to edit the specific gravity of the injected gas.
Valve diff. pressure: Here you are required to enter the Valve Differential Pressure. When
pressure (tubing) < (pressure (casing) - Diff. pressure) then gas will be injected through the
valve at the specified rate (Qgi or GLRi). Otherwise there is no flow.
Vary Qgi: Selecting this allows you to enter a value for the Lift gas injection rate. The
independent variable in the well performance and operating point calculation will then be
Qgi. It is the variable that will appear on the X-axis of the performance plot.
231
The options available for editing in the Gas Lift Data section depend on whether Step Profile or
True Valve Performance has been selected.

Vary GLRi: With this option selected you may define the Lift gas/liquid ratio. Its function
in the calculation procedure is the same as for Qgi, and injection GLR will appear on the xaxis of the performance plot.
Figure : 7.9.1 - 5 Gas Lift Data for Step Profile with Vary Qgi selected
True Valve Performance

When true valve performance is being modelled, the fixed valve differential pressure is disabled,
and injection gas rate or gas/liquid ratio can no longer be specified. These now become outputs
from the analysis.
The Injection gas gravity and Vary Qgi / Vary GLRi buttons are described above, under the
Step Profile option.
Ptro: You need now only specify the test rack opening pressure Ptro at surface conditions.
This will be fed to the valve performance correlation along with the other valve data.
Figure : 7.9.1 - 6 Gas Lift Data for True Valve Performance
7. 9. 2. Sensitivities
Returning to the parent dialog box (see Figure 7.9.0 - 2, Advanced Gas Valve Modelling dialog
box, on page 228), the selection of sensitivities provides the option to automatically repeat the
valve performance calculations for different conditions.
The orifice valve, with a complete spectrum of port sizes available (1 to 80/64ths of an inch), has
sensitivity options to both Casing Head Pressure and Port Size (Figure 7.9.2 - 1, Valve
Performance - Sensitivity Variable dialog box for an Orifice Valve, on page 232).
7. 9. 2. Sensitivities
Pressure-controlled valves, with a limited number of port sizes, are only allowed Casing Head
Pressure as a sensitivity. Select the Port Size in the Valve Performance Data area of the screen.
Figure : 7.9.2 - 1 Valve Performance - Sensitivity Variable dialog box for an Orifice Valve
232

7. 9. 3. Calculate
The Calculate button computes the well operating conditions (production rate, and casing
pressure, tubing pressure, and temperature at the valve) for various gas injection rates or
injection GLRs. It also calculates, using the selected valve model and details, the rate at which
the valve would actually pass gas at each of those conditions. The points defining the valve
performance curve are each dependent on the tubing pressure, casing pressure and temperature.
7. 9. 4. Plot
The Plot button displays a performance curve for the well and one for the valve in the form of
tubing pressure versus gas rate (if Vary Qgi was selected in Figure 7.9.1 - 1, Gas Valve
Modelling Details dialog box, on page 229) or versus the gas/liquid ratio (if Vary GLRi was
selected).
An intersection will indicate the injection rate at which the valve can deliver for the prevailing
operating conditions. The absence of an intersection indicates that the selected valve cannot pass
enough gas for the well to operate at the specified conditions (casing head pressure, etc.).
The operating point parameters are listed in the description box if the two curves intersect.
Figure : 7.9.4 - 1 Plot of Orifice Valve with no Sensitivities selected
7. 9. 3. Calculate
Note: Each point on the valve curve is computed at a different temperature. Therefore its
appearance will not be exactly that of a performance curve at constant conditions.
233
Output of WellFlo Results
Chapter 8- Output of WellFlo Results

8.1.
Outputting the Input Data
The input data can be output in the following ways:

A description of the well system, and the PVT, IPR, Gas Lift and ESP data is provided in the
report listing. See Section 8. 2. 2 Report Output, on page 243 for more details.
Graphic of the well system (the File Print menu option). See Section 6. 2. 1 File Menu, on
page 55.
Plot of the IPR data. See Section 6. 7. 3 Layer IPR Calculation, on page 141 and See
Section 6. 7. 7 Composite IPR, on page 171 for plot information, and the Basics part of the
manual, Chapter 4, Using The FloSystem Interface, for more details on the printing
procedure.
8.2.
Outputting the Results of Analysis
Figure : 8.2.0 - 1 Analysis: View Results Option
Both routes lead you to the View Nodal Analysis Results dialog box (Figure 8.2.0 - 2, View
Nodal Analysis Results Dialog Box, on page 235). The Plot option (graphical output) is
described in Graphical Output, on page 236. The Report option (text output) is described in
Report Output, on page 243.
In addition to preparing plots and reports of the calculations you have just made, the View Nodal
Analysis Results dialog box (Figure 8.2.0 - 2, View Nodal Analysis Results Dialog Box, on
page 235) allows you to:
Save the current results in a .CLC file.
Recall a previous set of results from an existing .CLC file.
Generate graphical or text report output from the current or recalled results data.
234
Chapter 8 - Output of WellFlo Results
Results output is accessed through the Analysis menu, by selecting the View Results option
(Figure 8.2.0 - 1, Analysis: View Results Option, on page 234). It is also accessible via the
Results button in the Nodal Analysis Control dialog boxes (Figure 7.1.0 - 2, Nodal Analysis
Control Dialog Box for Operating Point Mode, on page 178).
Figure : 8.2.0 - 2 View Nodal Analysis Results Dialog Box
Saving Calculated Data

You can save a data set as a .CLC file by hitting Save As. This brings up a dialog box in which
you enter the name of the file (the .CLC extension is not necessary), and a scrollable text field for
other information (Figure 8.2.0 - 3, Save Calculation Result File (.CLC) Dialog Box, on page
235).
There is no directory handling on this dialog box. You can change the directory by doubleclicking in the Directories box on the left of the View Nodal Analysis Results dialog box
(Figure 8.2.0 - 2, View Nodal Analysis Results Dialog Box, on page 235). This is similar to the
File Open option described in SectionFile Menu, on page 55.
You also have the option of saving your data as an ASCII file by marking the named check box.
Recalling a Set of Results

You can recall the results corresponding to a previous run by double-clicking the .CLC file name
(provided one was saved) in the right hand Files list box, or by selecting a file name then clicking
Open. You can change the directory path via the Directories box. This is similar to the File Open
option described in Section File Menu, on page 55.
If you have just made a calculation run, current data is NOT lost if you recall a .CLC file. This
means that by switching between Current nodal analysis and Previously saved file in the Data
source box, you will be able to review current and past results.
Figure 8.2.0 - 4, View Results Dialog Box With File Recall, on page 236 shows this window
after a .CLC file has been recalled (Data source is a Previously saved file). With reference to the
numbering on the figure:
235
8. 2. Outputting the Results of Analysis
Figure : 8.2.0 - 3 Save Calculation Result File (.CLC) Dialog Box

1
Gives the total number of sensitivity cases run (no. of variables for sensitivity 1 x no. of variables for
sensitivity 2). The minimum is 1 x 1 - when no sensitivities have been invoked (i.e. base case only), or when
only 1 value has been specified for each sensitivity variable. The maximum is 10 x 10.
2.
Displays the variable assigned to each sensitivity.
3.
Gives the number of flowrates.
4.
Shows the text comment you entered when you saved the .CLC file. (This is not shown for new data).
5.
Shows the current directory path.
6.
Is the name of the file recalled (if any).
If you do not recall a file, Data source will be in Current nodal analysis status, field 4 will be
absent, and field 6 will read "current nodal analysis".
Figure : 8.2.0 - 4 View Results Dialog Box With File Recall
8. 2. 1. Graphical Output
Click the Plot button on Figure 8.2.0 - 2, View Nodal Analysis Results Dialog Box, on page
235. This leads to the Plot Options dialog box, Figure 8.2.1 - 1, Plot Options: Inflow/Outflow,
on page 237. In this dialog box, various plots are possible, as explained in the following sections.
- To retain a customised axis scaling for a plot (e.g. when repeatedly plotting the same
scenario with minor changes from run to run), please refer to the Save graph axis changes
option described in Section Configure Menu, on page 59.
- To retain all customised attributes of a plot (title, description box, axes, legends, line and
point styles, etc.), use the Save Template option in the plot File menu (See Section 4. 5. 2
Graphing Menu Bar, on page 41). Next time you display this plot, use the File Load
Template option to restore some or all of the custom settings. You may create any number of
presentation templates for a particular plot type.
Inflow & Outflow Plots

The Plot Options dialog box, Figure 8.2.1 - 1, Plot Options: Inflow/Outflow, on page 237, To
activate this option, select the Inflow/Outflow curves option in the Type of Plot section at the top
of the window.
236
Plot axes will normally be auto-scaled when the plot is first brought up, and default plot
attributes will appear.
Figure : 8.2.1 - 1 Plot Options: Inflow/Outflow
You can now select the sensitivity values to plot. The combo-boxes contain a list of all the
sensitivity values that the calculations have been run at, plus the entry All values, for plotting all
values of a sensitivity. Clicking Plot will show the Inflow/Outflow curves at the values you have
selected.
If, after viewing the plot, you minimise it, then select another pair of sensitivity values, pressing
Plot again will add the new curves to the plot (e.g. add the curves corresponding to, say,
GOR=1500 and Start pressure = 200 psia).
Measured data can also be plotted, by switching on the Measured data button. To read in a
measured data file, please refer to in Section File Menu, on page 55.
In Figure 8.2.1 - 2, Inflow/Outflow Plot, on page 238, the curves at GOR = 500 STB/SCF and
all values of start node pressure (50, 100 and 200 psia) have been plotted. The curves for GOR =
1500 SCF/STB at start pressure = 200 psia have been added as described above. The Pressure
drop over completion check box was selected (Figure 8.2.1 - 1, Plot Options: Inflow/Outflow,
on page 237) - this is the lower set of curves on the plot.
237
If your calculations have included the reservoir node, and the IPR is computed using Layer
Parameters, you can also plot the pressure drop over the completion (skin pressure drop) using
the check box.
Figure : 8.2.1 - 2 Inflow/Outflow Plot
Notice that the intersections qualifying as stable operating points (all of them in this example) are
listed beneath the plot, along with the rates of the separate phases and their respective ratios at
the operating liquid rate (or gas rate, for gas and condensate systems).
Figure : 8.2.1 - 3 Deepest Injection Point Study
This is an estimate, at each operating point, of the gain/loss in oil production dQo/dQgi that can be
achieved for an increase in gas injection rate. This is computed by finite forward differencing (so
there is no value for the last operating point), and is presented as STB/MMscf/day (or equivalent
metric units).
238
For a deepest injection point study, provided that injection rate Qgi or injection GLRi are used as
a sensitivity, the description box beneath the plot will contain for each case, alongside the
injection depth, a Payback Ratio.

Performance Analysis Plots
If you have run sensitivity cases, you can select Performance analysis instead of Inflow/outflow
curves at the top of the Plot Options window.
Figure : 8.2.1 - 4 Plot Options: Performance Analysis
Pick one or other of the sensitivity variables as the X-axis of the plot, by clicking its Use as
X-axis button. All the values used for that sensitivity variable (Produced GOR in the example
above) will be plotted.
Select Operating rate (gas or total liquid) or Operating pressure at the solution node as the
Y-axis variable.
In the unselected sensitivity variable box, select the value (or all values) to be plotted.
Using the options selected above, a plot like Figure 8.2.1 - 5, Performance Analysis Plot, on
page 240 will be produced.
239
Measured data can also be plotted when the selected Y-axis corresponds to the second
column of the data. The variable in the first column is plotted on the X-axis. The Measured
data check box will not be available when there is no measured data corresponding to the
currently-selected Y-axis.
Figure : 8.2.1 - 5 Performance Analysis Plot
Pressure - Depth Plots

If you have performed a pressure drop mode nodal calculation, or an operating point analysis
with Iterate to exact switched on, you can select the Pressure depth plot option in the Plot
Options dialog box (Figure 8.2.1 - 5, Performance Analysis Plot, on page 240) to get a plot of
the computed flowing pressure and temperature versus depth. You can choose Measured depth or
True vertical depth in the Depth format box.
Measured data can also be plotted, by switching on the Measured data button. To read in a
measured data file, please refer to in Section File Menu, on page 55. Conversion of the depths
of these data points will be handled automatically on the plot, according to your choice of Depth
format.
Figure : 8.2.1 - 6 Plot Options: Pressure depth plot
240

Normally, you will compute pressure and temperature in the nodal analysis run. You can,
however, substitute any of a number of alternative parameters (in situ rates, erosional velocity,
flow regime number, etc.) via the Select plot axes option on the main Configure menu (See
Section 6. 2. 2 Configure Menu, on page 59). The nodal analysis must be re-run when a new
selection is made.
You can plot the computed results versus depth for any combination of the sensitivities and flow
rates with which you performed your nodal analysis.
To plot, select the required value (or all values) of each sensitivity, and a flowrate (or all values)
from the combo boxes in Figure 8.2.1 - 6, Plot Options: Pressure depth plot, on page 240.
The values calculated at each computational increment are plotted, rather than just the pressure at
each node. This gives maximum detail to the profile (e.g. for a tubing component 10000 ft long,
the increments might be 250 ft). However, this statement does not apply to the temperature
profile if the manual , calculated or calibrated models have been used - then only the
temperatures calculated at the nodes are plotted, with linear interpolations between.
Where gas lift is included, the casing pressure will also appear on the plot (for annular
production, this will be tubing pressure). This includes gravitational and frictional gradients.
Horizontal lines at the gas lift valve depths will be dashed for a closed valve, solid for an open
valve (Figure 8.2.1 - 7, Plot of tubing and casing pressures and temperature vs TVD, on page
241). Any valves that you have set to inactive will be represented as dotted lines.
For plots of a single sensitivity value and a single flow rate, only one valve can be marked open.
For multiple sensitivity displays, there may be several solid lines - representing a different open
valve depth for each sensitivity/flowrate combination.
In the plot below, the second and third valves from the top, and the bottom and second-to-bottom
valves, opened (solid lines) for at least one of the selected sensitivities. The middle one is
inactive (dotted line). The other two valves (dashed) did not open for any of the selected
sensitivities.
Figure : 8.2.1 - 7 Plot of tubing and casing pressures and temperature vs TVD
241

Measured and true vertical depths: In the equipment editor, well component depths are
measured relative to a datum (e.g. KB), and flowline components are measured relative to the
wellhead. The relationship between depth zeroes is specified in the Xmas tree editor dialog box.
If the datum does not coincide with the wellhead (and it usually doesnt), it follows that when
well and surface components are plotted vs measured depth on the same plot, there has to be a
discontinuity between the start of the flowline (zero) and the top of the tubing (distance from
datum). This may or may not be noticeable, depending on the size of the gap.
A similar comment applies to TVD plots, where well components are still referenced to the
datum, while surface component elevations are referenced to MSL.
Flowrate description: the information normally listed beneath a pressure/depth plot is the
composition in each sensitivity case of each flowrate plotted. After a pressure drop analysis at a
single flowrate, from the reservoir upwards through multiple layers, when a single sensitivity
case is selected for plotting, the information listed instead is the contribution of each layer to the
total flowrate.
Gas Lift Diagnosis Plot
The Gas Lift Diagnosis plot is a special case of the pressure/depth plot. It may be selected after a
pressure drop analysis, or an operating point analysis with the iterate to exact option switched on.
It can only be plotted for a single flow rate, for a single pair of sensitivity values if any have been
used, and when pressure and temperature are the selected plot axes. The true vertical depth
option is automatically selected, and measured data is automatically included on the plot if any
has been loaded.
Figure : 8.2.1 - 8 Include a figure of a specimen plot from gldesign.wfl
242

For each gas lift valve in the well model, WellFlo computes the tubing pressure required to open
the valve against the calculated casing pressure. The computation uses the TRO pressures and
Apt/Ab ratios entered in the Gas Lift Data screen for each valve. It also uses the measured
temperature data if any, otherwise the calculated temperature profile, to correct the dome
pressure to the in-situ conditions. The tubing opening pressure of each valve is plotted as a box,
whose position relative to the calculated tubing pressure profile will help to form an estimate of
the stability of the gas injection point against variations in tubing pressure.
In the case of injection pressure operated (IPO) valves, the calculation is usually extremely
sensitive to the operating value of the Casing head pressure entered in the Gas Lift Data dialog.
On the plot, the differential pressure at the active gas lift valve should therefore be checked quite
carefully against the results of Advanced Gas Valve Modelling, or against manufacturer's data,
and the casing head pressure adjusted if required.
The description box under the plot lists the data and results for each valve. Two columns on the
right contain outline well test data in a form frequently associated with this type of plot. The data
can be accessed for editing, as usual, by double-clicking on the description box.
8. 2. 2. Report Output
Select the Report option on the View Nodal Analysis Results dialog box (Figure 8.2.0 - 2, View
Nodal Analysis Results Dialog Box, on page 235) to prepare the textual report output.
If you have just completed a calculation (Current nodal analysis mode in Figure 8.2.0 - 2,
View Nodal Analysis Results Dialog Box, on page 235), the Report option first creates a file,
WELLFLO.RPT, in the home directory (where you installed WellFlo). It will be overwritten the
next time you generate a report. This section will explain how to save it under a new name so you
can avoid this if you wish.
If you have opened an existing .CLC file (Previously saved file mode in Figure 8.2.0 - 2, View
Nodal Analysis Results Dialog Box, on page 235), and then you generate a report of those
results, the .RPT file will take the path and name of the .CLC file. The path and name are
displayed on screen while the report is created.
- For operating point calculation mode, the pressures calculated at the solution node in the
inflow direction and the outflow direction will be listed for each flowrate, along with the
operating point, and depth of gas injected if you are doing a gas injection analysis, case by
case. The operating point report lists the flowrates of each layer at each operating point. For
crossflowing layers in a production well, the crossflow rate is listed, with a negative sign.
For gas and condensate wells, the critical unloading rate, computed from the Turner critical
velocity, is included in the results if the Iterate to exact option was enabled for the inflow/
outflow analysis.
- If you chose the Pressure drop calculation mode, the results listing will contain the flowing
pressures and temperatures (at each computational increment) vs depth for each flow rate and
each sensitivity. The Casing Pressure is also presented to allow Pressure drop over the
completion to be examined. For gas and condensate wells, the critical unloading rates will
be reported for each sensitivity combination.
243
Report contents: The report contains a summary of the input data and system description
(Figure 8.2.2 - 2, Part of the report output for operating point analysis, using WordPad, on page
245), followed by the calculated results.

If you have used the Select Plot Axes option on the main Configure menu (See Section 6. 2. 2
Configure Menu, on page 59) to generate results other than pressure and temperature versus
depth, these will be listed here instead.
Some of these collectables are also part of the ANALYSIS.LOG output (See Section 8. 2. 3
Calculation Log Output, on page 246). Others, such as liquid and gas velocity numbers, can
only be listed in the report file (and plotted against depth). They can of course be read from the
report into a spreadsheet for further manipulation.
It is not necessary to keep each report as a file since it can be regenerated easily from the .CLC
file at any time (hence the automatic overwrite). If, however, you wish to save a report file for
your current calculated results under a chosen "safe" name, you should first save the results as a
.CLC file. Then Open this file to make the name current, as explained earlier in this chapter
under, and select the Report option.
The format of the report can be selected from the Preferences option of the Configure menu. this
will open the WellFlo Preferences dialog box.
Figure : 8.2.2 - 1 Report format section of the WellFlo Preferences dialog box
The RTF (default) option will produce a properly formatted report file with headings, correct
column alignment, etc., to any compatible word processor (WordPad, Word, Word Perfect, Ami
Pro, etc.) capable of reading .RTF files. The RTF format largely supersedes the Macro format
below.
The Tabbed text format option is a tab delimited text file, and as such is best suited for
importation into spreadsheet applications, and databases.
The Macro Format is output in a special tabbed and marked format suitable for importing into a
spreadsheet or word processor. Report Output, on page 243 describes the use of Microsoft
Word for this purpose, using a report template (which we supply with FloSystem) to format the
report.
The default browser for viewing the report on screen, printing, or saving to disk, is WordPad, a
simple word processor supplied with Windows. This is described next.
If you wish to use a different browser (such as Word), please refer to the paragraph under the subheading Reporting with a word processor after the next section.
WordPad will view the RTF or Tabbed text format versions of the report, however the RTF
option will display a fully formatted report. The Report button on the View Nodal Analysis
Results dialog box (Figure 8.2.0 - 2, View Nodal Analysis Results Dialog Box, on page 235)
will automatically open WordPad, and the report will appear (Figure 8.2.2 - 2, Part of the report
output for operating point analysis, using WordPad, on page 245). You can view the report on
screen (maximise the window), save the file to disk, edit, etc., using the WordPad menu options.
For more details on WordPad, see your Windows User's Guide or the on-line help supplied with
WordPad. Please note that WordPad is not an EPS product, and we are not in a position to support
it beyond the tips we give here. It does not constitute an integral part of FloSystem.
244
Reporting with WordPad
Figure : 8.2.2 - 2 Part of the report output for operating point analysis, using WordPad
If you require more control over the report output, you can import the data into your favourite
word processor or spreadsheet:
Alternative browser: modify the Registry by adding a browser entry (See Section 2. 3 The
Registry, on page 17). This will invoke a specified program as the default browser instead of
WordPad.
Rich text format: WellFlo will output a report presentation with bold headings, subheadings,
column alignment and pagination, etc. in rich text format. This is compatible with many word
processors (Word, Word Perfect, AmiPro, WordPad, etc.).
Simply check that the default RTF preference option is switched on (Figure 8.2.2 - 1, Report
format section of the WellFlo Preferences dialog box, on page 244). Your report will be
formatted automatically for the screen display.
You may save the file in .RTF format. It is advisable to change the extension from the default
.RPT to .RTF if your browser does not do this automatically.
Customised format: If you want to impose a customised format on the report, you could
write a report template for your browser. In this case:
- add the macro name to the browser entry in the Registry (See Section 2. 3 The Registry,
on page 17).
- switch on the Macro Format preference option (See Section 6. 2. 2 Configure Menu, on
page 59). This will produce the report file in a specially tabbed format that can be easily
scanned by word processor macros (See Section 2. 5 Using the Word Macro for Reporting,
on page 23).
See Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17 to find out how to pick up a report template that
we supply with the FloSystem installation (for use with Microsoft Word). Contact EPS if you
require further information. We have a document that contains a full description of the layout
of the Macro Format, for use with other word processors. The RTF option described above
will achieve the same result as the macro, but is not limited to Word (See Section 2. 5 Using
the Word Macro for Reporting, on page 23).
245
Reporting with a word processor

8. 2. 3. Calculation Log Output
WellFlo can write two log files containing calculation details, if you selected the Output to
WELLFLO.LOG or ANALYSIS.LOG options in the Set Preferences dialog box off the main
Configure menu (refer to Configure Preferences, on page 59). These files contain more details
about the calculations than are provided in the ordinary report output, and are intended for
diagnostic purposes. Do not switch these options on if you do not need to, as writing the file(s)
will slow down the calculations.
Successive calculation records are either appended to the previous .LOG files during a given
WellFlo session, or the files can be cleared at the start of each new run, depending on the setting
of the Clear .LOG every run check box in Configure Preferences.
By default, WellFlo writes these files into the WellFlo run directory. To send them to a different
directory, modify the Registry as explained earlier (See Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17
and Configure Registry, on page 62). Select the Configure Registry menu option to generate an
Edit User Registry dialog, then choose the user Value Name and make an appropriate entry in the
Value Data field:
user = xxx
where xxx is the directory path.
The files can be viewed or edited with Windows Write, WordPad, or a selected browser. Write is
the default browser and is automatically activated when you select View WellFlo or Analysis Log
on the Analysis menu (Figure 7.1.0 - 1, Analysis Menu Options, on page 177), unless you have
an alternative specified.
If you wish to use a different browser, you should modify the Registry by adding a browser entry
as explained earlier (See Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17).
If you want to keep a .LOG file, use the Save as option of the browser to save it under a new
name - otherwise it will be over-written next time you start the Nodal calculations in WellFlo.
The WELLFLO.LOG output has been formatted to have the correct column spacings if you use
the same Write font and tab settings as for the report (.RPT) output described above.
ANALYSIS.LOG, however, has been formatted (tabbed) to be read into a spreadsheet so that the
calculations can be analysed in more detail. To read the data into your spreadsheet, select the
appropriate filter for TAB-separated data and open ANALYSIS.LOG (see Figure 8.2.3 - 1,
ANALYSIS.LOG Output Displayed in Excel (Columns A-L and M-W)., on page 247):
246
Figure : 8.2.3 - 1 ANALYSIS.LOG Output Displayed in Excel (Columns A-L and M-W).
- pressures and temperatures

- in situ flowrates, densities and viscosities of each phase
- phase in situ and superficial velocities
- hydrostatic, frictional, accelerational and total pressure gradients
- no-slip and in situ liquid holdups
- flow regime identifiers
- erosional velocity
Note: that a number of other parameters not listed here can be specially computed in a pressure
drop run, instead of pressure and temperature. Select any two in the Select plot axes dialog box
on the main Configure menu (See Section 6. 2. 2 Configure Menu, on page 59), run the
calculation, and plot them vs depth or list them in the report (See Section 8. 2. 2 Report Output,
on page 243). They can be read from the report into a spreadsheet for further manipulation.
If your browser does not recognise text files with a .LOG extension, you can assign a different
extension, as explained under the browser entry in Viewing and Editing the Registry, on page
20.
247
The parameters currently listed are:
Fancher-Brown
Gray
Dukler-EatonFlanigan
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Gas
Gas
Liquid Liquid Liquid
Gas
Gas
Gas
Mist
Distributed
Gas
Transition
Dispersed
Gas
Froth
Froth
Trans'n
Gas
Slug
Semi-Dispersed Dispersed
Dispersed
Transition Slug
+ Hdg
Transition
Transition
Transition
Distributed Bub/Slug Mist
Distributed
Orkiszewski
Mist
Intermittent Bub/Plug Slug/Froth

+ Hdg
Gas
Hagedorn &
Brown (mod)
Segregated Bub/Plug Plug/Bub
/Froth
Flow Regime Numbers

Flow regime 1
2
number
Gas
Hagedorn &
Brown (std)
Not bubble Not bubble Intermittent Intermittent
Beggs & Brill

(mod)
Slug
Beggs & Brill (noslip)

Segregated Segregated
Beggs & Brill (std)
Bubble
Duns & Ros (mod)
All Bubble
Correlation
Duns & Ros (std)
2-phase 2-phase Bubble

10
248
20
21
22
30
40
41
50
51
52
Elongated bubble
Slug
Dispersed bubble
Annular
Mist
Stratified
Stratified, smooth
Stratified, wavy
Bubbly
Single phase gas
Single phase liquid
EPS Mechanistic Correlations

2
10
Flow regime 1
number
Description
Intermittent
Choke and Restrictions Flow Condition Numbers
Restrictions
Critical
Choke/
Subcritical
Figure : 8.2.4 - 1 Simulator File Export Options
WellFlo contains a facility to create ten specialised types of results file format, compatible with a
number of widely-used reservoir simulators.
Calculations are controlled by an "Applet", which runs WellFlo via a DLL link to compute
bottom-hole flowing pressures for different producing rates and up to four sensitivity types, in a
single run.
Options are provided for oil wells with gas lift, oil wells with ESP, gas and gas condensate wells.
The Applet approach overcomes WellFlo's own limitation of two sensitivity parameters. Under
the control of the Applet, WellFlo is run automatically as many times as necessary to calculate
flowing pressures for the full set of sensitivities specified.
Depending on the simulator, some or all of the following variables can be selected
simultaneously for each well type.
249
8. 2. 4. File export in VFP, BHP and other formats

Oil (with gas lift)
Oil (with ESP)
Gas
Condensate
Flowrates (Qoil or Qliq)
Qoil or Qliq
Qg
Qg
Producing GOR or GLR
GOR or GLR
OGR or LGR
Water fraction
Water cut
WGR
WGR or WC
Injection GLRi or Qgi
Pump stages or frequency
Wellhead/Separator
pressure
WHP/SepP
WHP/SepP
WHP/SepP
The Applet currently allows up to 10 values for each sensitivity variable, and up to 21 flowrates,
making possible a maximum of 210,000 combinations in a single run for an oil well with gas lift
or an ESP, for example.
File output is in ASCII form corresponding to the BHP format required for VIP-Executive, the
VFP format for Eclipse, etc. A choice of DOS or UNIX line separators is also provided.
Figure : 8.2.4 - 2 Single and batched multiple well options
The single well option (default) will run the Applet on the current well.
The batched wells option allows you to run the Applet from an external batch file to process
multiple wells. In this mode, settings in the Applet can be overridden by settings in the batch file
for individual wells if required.
Preparation of the Applet for single well operation is described first. External batch control is
described at the end of the section.
Preparation of the Applet

A set of input parameters should be prepared in the Applet for single well and batched wells
modes. For multiple well operation (described at the end of this section), you will be able to
specify different values for individual wells where necessary.
The computations are performed by WellFlo, under the control of the Applet. Therefore, the
basic information necessary for the pressure calculations must first be set up in WellFlo in the
usual way.
In the Reservoir Control dialog box, select the appropriate Fluid Type and enter the Fluid
Parameters.
250
For the Eclipse and CHEARS export options, there is an additional choice:

Set up the well description. You may include surface components if the simulator accepts
separator pressures - otherwise components after the wellhead will be ignored.
For an oil well under gas lift, enter the Gas Lift Valve data under Data Preparation.
For an oil well with an ESP, in the System Editor-ESP Data, switch Design mode only off, and
select the pump and motor, etc. Disable the downhole separator ( Gas separator present box not
ticked). Select the base case Number of stages and Operating frequency (either of these can be
specified as a sensitivity in the Applet - the base case value will be used for the other). Initialise
all other data as required.
Remember that the base case values entered in WellFlo for any of the variables listed in the
Applet table can be overridden when you set up the Applet Control.
Save the data to a .WFL file.
In the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box, select the Vertical flow correlation.
The Flowrates can be entered here, in which case they will appear as defaults when the Applet is
invoked. They can, however, be entered or edited on the Applet screen.
No selections need to be made in the tick boxes at bottom right of the dialog box. (The Applet
forces gas entry for gas-lifted oil wells regardless of the choice made here. Also, the sensitivities
to be used are dictated by the Applet, which overrides any selection in Nodal Analysis Control.)
No selection needs to be made for the Top, Bottom or Solution Nodes or Calculation Mode, the
Applet will force Pressure Drop mode from Xmas tree or Outlet to Casing.
The Applet is invoked from the Analysis menu through the Export to Simulator option (Figure
8.2.4 - 1, Simulator File Export Options, on page 249). Select the appropriate export option.
After a few seconds, the Applet Control dialog box will be displayed:
Figure : 8.2.4 - 3 Applet control window (shown here for VFP file export to Eclipse)
251
Accessing the Applet

Data entry
Select File and choose DOS or Unix line separator format for the file output.
Select Units and choose the Oilfield or Metric system (the various formats use different units
in both systems - the Applet takes care of this).
Enter the Table Number.
For some formats you have a choice of working with Liquid or Oil Flow Rates. Check your
choice in the Basis of BHP (etc.) data area.
In the various data entry dialog boxes described next, note that a zero is read as a value, and will
be used as a sensitivity value if valid. A "no entry" should be a totally empty field, not a "zero".
Values can be entered in any order - they will be sorted.
Figure : 8.2.4 - 4 Production rate data entry (total liquid rates option).
If this is the first run of the Applet, and you have already initialised the liquid flowrates in
WellFlo, they will appear as defaults here (the Auto-Range set is shown in the Figure). (They will
have been converted from WellFlo total liquid rates, using the base case water cut, if you are
working in oil flowrates for export.)
Type in flowrates if required (up to a maximum of 21 entries), or use the Fill option by
specifying the minimum and maximum values and the number of steps:
252
Note also that the first time you set up the Applet, the WellFlo base case values will
appear as defaults.
Select the Flow Rates button. The data entry box will appear. Enter or edit the flowrates
(minimum 1 value).
Figure : 8.2.4 - 5 Production rate data entry using the Fill option
Figure : 8.2.4 - 6 Gas/Liquid Ratio data entry (oil wells)
The data entry box will request the producing GLR, (or in the case of BHP export where users
have selected oil flowrates, the producing GOR will be requested). These exclude any lift gas.
For a condensate well, select the Oil Ratios button (or Liquid Ratios button for a condensate
well with export to Sensor), and enter values for the producing oil/gas ratio, OGR:
253
For an oil well, select the Gas Ratios button (not enabled for gas wells).
Figure : 8.2.4 - 7 Oil/Gas Ratio data entry (condensate well)
Select the Water Content button.
Figure : 8.2.4 - 8 Water Cut data entry (oil well)
For gas and other condensate wells, enter values for the Water/Gas Ratio:
Figure : 8.2.4 - 9 Water/Gas ratios data entry (gas and condensate wells)
Select the Gas Lift button (only enabled for an oil well with a gas lift valve) or the ESP values
button (enabled for an oil well with an ESP). You have the choice of specifying injection
GLRi or gas rate Qgi:
254
For an oil well (or a condensate well with export to Sensor), the data entry box will request the
Water-Cut:
Figure : 8.2.4 - 10 Gas lift data entry (showing injection GLR option)
Here, the base case value for the unselected alternative can not, of course, be used, since the
choices are mutually exclusive.
Figure : 8.2.4 - 11 ESP data entry (showing operating frequency option)
Whichever alternative you choose, the WellFlo base case value will be used for the other (e.g. in
the Figure, the base case number of stages specified in the System Editor - ESP Data dialog box
will be used).
Select the Pressures button, and enter pressure values and specify whether these are tubing
head or separator pressures.
255
For a pumping well, the choice is Number of stages or Operating frequency:
Figure : 8.2.4 - 12 Wellhead pressures data entry
Figure : 8.2.4 - 13 Multiple flow correlation and L-factor selection
If you switch on one or both of these boxes, the single correlation or L-factor that was selected in
Nodal Analysis Control will be over-ridden by selection(s) you will make here. If you switch a
box off, the correlation or L-factor will revert to the original Nodal Analysis Control choice.
These tables are stored in the well file.
Both options are available for export to Eclipse and Simbest. Only the L-factor option is
available for the other export formats.
To bring up a data entry dialog box, click the appropriate tick-box in Figure 8.2.4 - 13, Multiple
flow correlation and L-factor selection, on page 256. If it is already ticked, switch it off then on
again.
Figure : 8.2.4 - 14 Multiple flow correlation selection
256
In the Action area of Figure 8.2.4 - 3, Applet control window (shown here for VFP file
export to Eclipse), on page 251, for black oil and volatile oil systems, you can if you wish
select different flow correlations and/or calibration factors to be used with the flowrates and
water-cuts you have specified. You may, for instance, prefer different correlations for low
and high water-cuts, or may wish to tune a correlation differently as the water-cut increases,
based on calibrations against field data. This is applied to flow in the well only, not the
flowlines.

To specify the flow correlations, select a flowrate in the combo-box list on the left of the dialog
box in Figure 8.2.4 - 14, Multiple flow correlation selection, on page 256. Type flow
correlation numbers in the boxes under each water-cut. (This assumes you have already specified
the flowrates and water-cuts in their respective input dialog boxes.)
A list of correlations and their numbers is provided in the combo-box at bottom left for reference.
Figure : 8.2.4 - 15 Multiple L-factor selection
To specify the flow correlation L-factors, select a field in the Flowrate vs Water-cut table in the
Vertical L-factors dialog box (Figure 8.2.4 - 15, Multiple L-factor selection, on page 257).
Now type a value into the L-factor field at the top and click on the Set L factor button. You can
load the same value into a block of fields by selecting the block (drag right and/or down) before
clicking the Set button. You cannot type directly into the table.
Proceed in this manner with all fields in the table. If you want to interpolate L-factor values
between end-points, enter two end-point values and click the Interpolate button. L-factors are
interpolated linearly with water-cut, and logarithmically with flowrate. In the Figure, end-points
values of 0.9 and 1.1 have been entered for water-cuts of 0 and 0.95 at 1000 STB/day. Interpolate
will fill in the intermediate values according to the water-cut, as shown below:
Figure : 8.2.4 - 16 L-factor interpolation
257
Now select the next flowrate, and repeat the exercise. If you want the same settings as for the
previous rate, use the Copy from last rate button. If you want the same correlation number across
all water-cuts, enter the value under the first water-cut, then press the Fill to right button. This
can be used to fill right from any selected water-cut.

Horizontal and vertical interpolation are possible, over a whole or part row or column.
Running the Applet

Click the Create File button.
Select the path and name of the file to be exported:
Figure : 8.2.4 - 17 File name entry (showing BHP format export)
The Applet will now drive WellFlo with the set of flowrates and sensitivity values you have
entered. You can abort the run by clicking the cancel bar in the upper box that displays the run
status.
Figure : 8.2.4 - 18 Export completed successfully
You can view the exported file via Windows NotePad, WordPad, or any other editor. Note that
different screen editors react differently to the line separator characters written in the Unix
format.
Figure : 8.2.4 - 19 VFP output file in oilfield units
258
When the calculations have been completed, click OK in the announcement box, and you will
be returned to the Applet Control dialog box.

Flowing pressure file output from the Applet
The results are listed in the appropriate formats for the various simulators, as specified in their
user manuals. A few points are worth highlighting:
Where mid-perf depth is written to the file, it is defined as:
BHP, IMX, SB1 and SB2 files: TVD below wellhead
VFP files: TVD below MSL.
If a combination of sensitivity values is encountered where the top-down calculation cannot
be made (usually because the bottom hole pressure would be ridiculously high, or critical
flow is identified), a * is written in the results array of the BHP file, and 1E10 in the VFP file.
On completion of the calculations, an announcement box will inform you if any such markers
have been used.
long lines of output data in exported VFP files are broken at 130 characters. Make sure you
have an adequate length setting in the Eclipse control parameters before attempting to read in
the file (the default is 132).
Applet Configuration
When you click Exit from the Applet, the current set of input values is stored in the Registry.
This overwrites any previous values.
External batch control file

The export Applet facility is limited to one well at a time when run from within WellFlo. A batch
mode facility is available to allow flowing pressure export for Eclipse and CHEARS to be run on
any number of wells in a single operation. This batch option is only functional for oil producers
under gas lift - it will not run for injectors, pumping wells, or gas or condensate wells.
The option appears on the Analysis Export to Simulator menu for VFP and CHEARS export:
Figure : 8.2.4 - 20 Batch VFP Export Option
The batch mode is driven by a control file with extension .CTL, which is loaded from the dialog
box that appears when you select the Batched wells... option.
The control file, which you can create beforehand with any text editor, must be in the same
directory as the well file(s) it is going to be run on (for instance, c:\flosys\example in the next
figure).
259
When you invoke the Applet again, provided the WellFlo .WFL file is the same as before, the
previously used set of values will appear by default in the Applet data dialog boxes. If you have
recalled a different .WFL since last exiting the Applet, you will be asked if you want to retain the
previous Applet sensitivity values, or load new (base case) values from the current .WFL.

The batch control file structure is explained at the end of this section. The values of all flowrates,
water cuts, etc. to be used in the batch run must be entered in the control file. You may enter a set
of values per well, per group of wells, or one set of values for all wells (but please refer to the
Important points... note about L-factor calibration tables after Figure 8.2.4 - 24, Successful
VFP export in batch mode (3 wells), on page 261).
Figure : 8.2.4 - 21 VFP Export Batch Control File
format=dos
units=oilfield
gor=0.3
qgi=0 (6) 0.5
thp=100 (5) 200
liq=1000 (3) 7000
wc=0.75
FA08=2
FA07=1
FA03=4
Figure : 8.2.4 - 22 Example of a VFP export control file for 3 wells, all using the same sensitivities
... the VFP export Applet will be run on files FA08.WFL, FA07.WFL and FA03.WFL. The same
sensitivities will be used on all the wells.
Qgi, THP and Qliq have been assigned several values each (e.g. THP = 100, 125, 150, 175 and
200 psia), GOR and water cut have been kept constant. The tables will be saved as FA08.VFP,
FA07.VFP and FA03.VFP, and the internal table numbers will be 2, 1 and 4 respectively.
If you had wanted to use, say, a different set of gas injection rates for well FA03, keeping
everything else the same, the control file would have been like this:
260
Select the control file in the dialog box.

The batch processing will start as soon as the control file is opened. The relevant well files will
be loaded and processed in turn (the control file runs the export Applet on each well file, using
the input values you have specified in the control file). The flowing pressure tables will be
written to the same data directory.
In the following example of a batch control file......

format=dos
units=oilfield
gor=0.3
qgi=0 (6) 0.5
thp=100 (5) 200
liq=1000 (3) 7000
wc=0.75
FA08=2
FA07=2
qgi=0 (4) 1.0
FA03=4
Figure : 8.2.4 - 23 VFP export control file for 3 wells, with different Qgis for the last well
A successful run will terminate with an announcement like this:
Where any failures have occurred, an error file with the same name as the control file, and
extension .ERR, will be written to the data directory (e.g. BATCH1.ERR in this case). This will
explain what was wrong.
Important points regarding L-factor and flow correlation tables
L-factor tables: To apply variations in L-factor with water cut and production rate based on
calibrations for a particular well, you may set up a multiple L-factor table up in the export Applet
(see Figure 8.2.4 - 13, Multiple flow correlation and L-factor selection, on page 256). The table
is stored as part of the .WFL well file. You cannot set up an L-factor table in the batch control
file.
If you are running in batch mode, the rates and water cuts tabulated in the Applet will be used for
the flowing pressure calculations for that well, and your control file values of these two variables
will be ignored for that well.
In order to impose a different set of rates and water cuts for the calculations, you will have to
modify the table in the Applet (via the VFP file for Eclipse / Single well option in Figure 8.2.4 20, Batch VFP Export Option, on page 259) after loading the appropriate .WFL file in WellFlo.
This is because the Applet will always use the values in the table, if present, for the flowing
pressure calculations for the well concerned.
If there is no L-factor table in the Applet for a particular well, the flowrate and water cut values
in the control file will be used for that well.
You should therefore check each well to be processed in batch mode, to see if an L-factor table
has been set up at some time.
Flow correlation tables: In single well mode, you may set up a flow correlation table in the
Applet for a particular well, to account for variations in choice of flow correlation with water cut
and production rate (Figure 8.2.4 - 14, Multiple flow correlation selection, on page 256). The
table is stored as part of the .WFL well file. In batched wells mode, this table is ignored. You
must create a table in the batch control file, as explained in the chart on the following pages. As
with the other entries in the control file, you can enter a table per well, per group of wells, or one
table for all wells.
261
Figure : 8.2.4 - 24 Successful VFP export in batch mode (3 wells)
Figure : 8.2.4 - 25 Flow correlation numbers
Entry in control file
Description
Example
format=dos/unix
=dos: uses DOS line-break
format=dos
=unix: uses special unix line break

units=oilfield/metric
Switches between Eclipse oilfield and units=oilfield

metric units.
gor=GOR1 (j) GORj
Use j evenly-spaced GOR values from gor = 0.1 (5) 0.5

GOR1 to GORj.
The example (right) specifies 5 GORs:
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 Mscf/STB. To
specify a single value, just enter (for
example): gor=0.3.
Use k evenly-spaced Qgi values from qgi = 0 (4) 1500
Qgi1 to Qgi k.
qgi=Qgi1 (k) Qgi k
The example (right) specifies 4 Qgis: 0,

500, 1000, 1500 Mscf/day. To specify a
single value, just enter (for example):
qgi=500.
thp=THP1 (m) THPm
Use m evenly-spaced tubing head thp = 100 (3) 200

pressure values from THP1 to THP
m.
The example (right) specifies 3 THPs:
100, 150 and 200 psia. To specify a
single value, just enter (for example):
thp=100.
liq=Qliq 1 (n) Qliq n
Use n evenly-spaced liquid rate values liq = 1000 (6) 6000

from Qliq 1 to Qliq n.
The example (right) specifies 6 liquid
rates: 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000,
6000 STB/day. To specify a single
v a l u e, j us t e n t e r ( f o r e xa m p l e ) :
liq=2000.
262

Description
Example
wc=WCUT1 (z) WCUTz
Use z evenly-spaced water cut values wc = 0 (3) 0.50

from WCUT1 to WCUTz.
The example (right) specifies 3 water
cuts: 0, 0.25, 0.50. To specify a single
v a l u e, j us t e n t e r ( f o r e xa m p l e ) :
wc=0.25.
wellfilename=
tabnum
Generate a VFP table using the above AZ5=2

data for the .WFL file whose name is
wellfilename. Assign table number
tabnum to this table. The VFP file will
be saved as wellfilename.VFP.
The example (right) will create a VFP
file called AZ5.VFP for the well file
AZ5.WFL. The table number will be 2.
Generate a VFP table for another well, AZ6=1
using the above sensitivities, or different
ones if they have been specified after the
previous wellfilename entry.
I n t hi s ex am pl e , a se co nd t a bl e,
AZ6.VFP, will be generated from
AZ6.WFL using the same sensitivities.
The table number will be 1.
corrdivs= w1 w2 .. / q1
q2 ...
Flow correlation tables: A different

flow correlation can be assigned to each
water cut range 0<wcw1, w1<wcw2,
etc., and for each flowrate range Q q1,
q1<Q q2, etc.
You may specify up to 3 values (= 4

ranges) each for the water cuts and for
the flowrates.
In the first example (right), the water cut corrdivs= 0.2 0.4 0.8 /
ranges are 0.2, 0.20.4, 0.4 0.8 and 5000
>0.8. The flowrate ranges are 5000 and
(.contd)
In the second example (right), the water corrdivs= / 5000

cuts span the max range 0 1.0 (no
values specified), and the flowrate
ranges are 5000 and >5000.
If the corrdivs line is absent, the batch
file will use the correlation selected in
the well file.
263
wellfilename=
tabnum

Description
corrnums=n1 n2 n3......
The flow correlation to be used in each

of the ranges defined by corrdivs is
specified by a number (see Figure 8.2.4
- 25, Flow correlation numbers, on
page 262). Assign a correlation number
in each water cut range for the first
flowrate range, then in each water cut
range for the second flowrate range, and
so on.
Example
The first example (right) goes with the Corrnums=

first corrdivs example: the first four
correlations numbered 2,4,5 and 3 are 2 4 5 3 2 4 6 7
assigned to the four water cut ranges
defined by corrdivs , for flowrates
5000. Correlations 2,4,6 and 7 are
assigned to these four water cut ranges
for flowrates > 5000.
(.contd)
In the second example, since the water Corrnums=

cut has not been subdivided in corrdivs
(see above), correlation 3 is assigned to 3 5
the full water cut range 0 1.0 for
flowrates 5000, and correlation 5 for
flowrates > 5000.
The Export button in the Choose Layer IPR dialog box (Figure 6.7.2 - 20, Test Point Entry
Model dialog box, on page 138 and Figure 6.7.2 - 23, Manual Entry Model Dialog Box, on
page 140) allows you to write a table of multiphase pseudo-pressures versus pressure to a file,
extension PSP. The table covers the range 14.7 psia to layer pressure.
The PSP file is in ASCII format. It can be imported into PanSystem for use in multiphase
pressure transient analysis.
As well as the basic pseudo-pressure table, the file contains some supplementary data intended
for use in PanSystem and other EPS products.
Definition of multiphase pseudo-pressure:
The multiphase pseudo-pressure is defined as:
Equation : 8.2.5 - I :
( p) =
1
Cref
k rg g k ro o k rw w
14.7 g + o + w dp
264
8. 2. 5. Pseudo-Pressure File Export

For single and two-phase situations, the term(s) representing the absent phase(s) are excluded,
because the relevant rel perm goes to zero.
k
k
Cref = ro oi + rw wi
wi
oi
for oil fluid type.
and
Equation : 8.2.5 - III :

Cref = gi
gi
for gas and condensate fluid types.
PSP File structure
Line 1:
Jm
Fm AOFm F l u i d osc
type
wsc
gsc
oi
wi
So
Sw
gi
oi
wi
gi
Line 2:
Vwsc
Vosc
Vgsc
zgi
kro
krw
krg
Sg
Boi
Bwi
Bgi
p1
(p1)
Qmo(p1)
Qmw(p1)
Qmg(p1)
mph(p1)
Ch(p1)
z(p1)
p2
(p2)
Qmo(p2)
Qmw(p2)
Qmg(p2)
mph(p2)
Ch(p2)
z(p2)
pj
(pj)
Qmo(pj)
Qmw(pj)
Qmg(pj)
mph(pj)
Ch(pj)
z(pj)
Line 3 onwards (8 columns):
265

Where:
Jm is the productivity index (oil) in mass flow units (lbs/day/psi), or the Darcy flow coefficient B
(gas, condensate) in mass flow units (psi/lbs/day).

Fm is the non-Darcy flow coefficient, in mass flow units (psi/(lbs/day)2),
AOFm is the absolute open flow potential, in mass flow units (lbs/day),
Fluid type is the word Oil, Gas or Condensate,
osc
wsc
conditions,
gsc
are the specific gravities of oil, water (water=1.0) and gas (air=1.0) at standard
, , are the viscosities of oil, water and gas (cp) at layer P and T,
oi
wi
gi
, , are the densities of oil, water and gas (lbs/ft ) at layer P and T,
3
oi
wi
gi
P is the layer pressure (psia), T is the layer temperature (F),

Vosc, Vwsc, Vgsc are the fractional volumetric surface flowrates of oil, water and gas (vol/vol) at
standard conditions,
zgi is the gas deviation factor at layer P and T,
kro, krw, krg are the relative permeabilities to oil, water and gas (decimal fractions) at layer P and
T, at saturations So, Sw, Sg,
Boi, Bwi, Bgi are the volume factors of oil, water and gas at layer conditions (vol/vol),
p1, p2,....... pj ..... are the pressures (from p1= 14.7 psia to pj = P(layer)),
(p1), (p2),....... (pj) ..... are the corresponding multiphase pseudo-pressures (from (p1) =
0.0 to (pj) = (p(layer))),
Qmo(p1), etc. are the oil phase mass flowrates,
Qmw(p1), etc. are the water phase mass flowrates,
Qmg(p1), etc. are the gas phase mass flowrates,
mph
(p1), etc. are the multiphase viscosities,
Ch(p1), etc. are the hydrocarbon compressibilities,

z(p1), etc. are the gas deviation factors.
266
So, Sw, Sg are the saturations (decimal fractions) of oil, water and gas at layer P and T,
WellFlo Examples
Chapter 9- WellFlo Examples

9.1.
Example 1
Introduction
The example well is TEST1 and the data file TEST1.WFL is supplied with the FloSystem
installation disks. It is part of a multi-well system which is used as the worked example in the
FieldFlo part of this User Guide.
TEST1 is on gas-lift, and requires a minimum gas injection before production kicks off.
Figure : 9.1.0 - 1 Part of the well and surface system for TEST1, with Data Edit dialog box for
one of the gas-lift valves
To familiarise yourself with the system, check over the various casing, tubing and surface
components. Note that the surface piping elevation is relative to MSL, while the well
components are measured RKB. The wellhead data dialog box contains the necessary depth
information to tie the two references together.
267
Chapter 9 - WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.1.0 - 2 On-screen tabular display of well and surface system for TEST1
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.1.0 - 3 Gas Lift data dialog box
The Gas Lift Data dialog box (Figure 9.1.0 - 3, Gas Lift data dialog box, on page 268) has
been set up with a base case injection GLRi of zero. A range of GLRi values will be specified
elsewhere for sensitivity analysis.
9. 1. Example 1
The IPR diagram (Figure 9.1.0 - 4, IPR diagram derived from production test data, on page
268) was derived from production test data (Test point data option in the IPR Model Selection
dialog box). The curvature below the bubble point (5520 psia at 246.9 deg F) was modelled by
the Vogel method, and an AOF of almost 1600 BPD (1594.327 STB/day to be exact) total fluid
is predicted.
Figure : 9.1.0 - 4 IPR diagram derived from production test data
268
WellFlo Examples
Objectives
Owing to the low reservoir pressure, TEST1 will not produce without gas lift. We will run a
sensitivity study to examine the productivity at different injection GLRs, for different outlet node
pressures. The objectives here will be to ascertain the minimum GLR (injection) for production
at each pressure, as well as the performance curves for the well when producing. These
performance curves represent the necessary input data for this well in FieldFlo for the
optimisation of gas allocation to the field.
Sensitivity study
The Nodal Analysis Control dialog box (Figure 9.1.0 - 5, Nodal Analysis Control dialog box
for the gas lift sensitivity analysis, on page 269) is set up for calculations at eleven flowrates
which have been initialised using the Auto-Range option. This fills in rates evenly spaced
between 5% of AOF and 95% of AOF.
Figure : 9.1.0 - 5 Nodal Analysis Control dialog box for the gas lift sensitivity analysis
The Calculation mode has been selected to be Operating Point for this study. The inflow
calculations will start from the Reservoir (using the layer pressure of 2171 psia), the outflow
calculations from the outlet node (base case pressure 96 psia). The casing has been selected as
solution node so that the operating point pressures computed will be the bottom hole flowing
pressures.
The sensitivity 1 variable is the lift gas/liquid ratio (GLRi), and seven values have been entered
over a wide range from 500 to 3500 SCF/STB with a view to identifying kick-off (Figure 9.1.0 6, Sensitivity 1: lift gas GLR, on page 270). These values will override the base case value
specified in Figure 9.1.0 - 3, Gas Lift data dialog box, on page 268.
269
9. 1. Example 1
Looking at the Temperature models area of Figure 9.1.0 - 5, Nodal Analysis Control dialog
box for the gas lift sensitivity analysis, on page 269, the flowing temperature will be calculated
at each of the production rates. The model is calibrated against temperatures that were measured
at the wellhead and separator while the well was producing at 1332 STB/day (total liquid). Gas
in the annulus will be assumed since this is a gas-lifted well.
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.1.0 - 6 Sensitivity 1: lift gas GLR
The sensitivity 2 variable has been chosen as start node pressure, which in this case corresponds
to the outlet node. Three values have been entered to span a reasonable operating range (Figure
9.1.0 - 7, Sensitivity 2: start node (outlet) pressure, on page 270). These values will override
the base case value entered for the start node pressure in Figure 9.1.0 - 5, Nodal Analysis
Control dialog box for the gas lift sensitivity analysis, on page 269.
Figure : 9.1.0 - 7 Sensitivity 2: start node (outlet) pressure
Note that gas lift is not being forced (bottom right corner of Figure 9.1.0 - 5, Nodal Analysis
Control dialog box for the gas lift sensitivity analysis, on page 269), since we want to model
actual operating conditions with gas entry based on calculated casing pressures.
Click the Calculate button to perform the sensitivity analysis.
Results
Click the Results button to access the View Nodal Analysis Results dialog box. Save the results
as a .CLC file using the Save as... option (e.g. as TEST1.CLC).
270
9. 1. Example 1
The calculations will be performed using both sensitivities, making a total of 11*7*3 (= 231)
runs, from which a maximum of 7*3 (= 21) operating points could be determined if stable
intersections were found in all cases (Stability check is on in Figure 9.1.0 - 5, Nodal Analysis
Control dialog box for the gas lift sensitivity analysis, on page 269).
WellFlo Examples
Now select the Plot option.
Starting with the Inflow/outflow curves mode in the Plot Output Options dialog box, you can
produce separate plots of the Sensitivity 1 curves (Figure 9.1.0 - 8, Inflow/outflow plot for
sensitivity 1 (injection GLR) at 50 psia outlet pressure, on page 271) and Sensitivity 2 curves
(Figure 9.1.0 - 9, Inflow/outflow plot for sensitivity 2 (Start node pressure) at injection GLR =
500 SCF/STB, on page 271), versus the first case of the other sensitivity. You can plot versus
any (or even all) of the other sensitivity, but for this example, we will use the first case.
Figure : 9.1.0 - 8 Inflow/outflow plot for sensitivity 1 (injection GLR) at 50 psia outlet pressure
Referring to Figure 9.1.0 - 8, Inflow/outflow plot for sensitivity 1 (injection GLR) at 50 psia
outlet pressure, on page 271, note that a stable operating point was identified even at the lowest
injection GLR value (the intersections met the new stability criterion - See Section 7. 5. 2
Stability check, on page 196). This is for a outlet pressure of 50 psia. The operating points for
the other two outlet pressures can be read from the report listing (see Figure 9.1.0 - 12, Part of
the report, showing inflow/outflow analysis results for one of the sensitivity cases, on page
273).
271
9. 1. Example 1
Figure : 9.1.0 - 9 Inflow/outflow plot for sensitivity 2 (Start node pressure) at injection GLR = 500
SCF/STB
WellFlo Examples
In Figure 9.1.0 - 9, Inflow/outflow plot for sensitivity 2 (Start node pressure) at injection GLR
= 500 SCF/STB, on page 271, no intersections occur at all for the 150 psia outlet pressures (at
the injection GLR of 500 SCF/STB). Although there are two intersections for the 50 and 100 psia
cases, one of them is selected as the solution based on the stability criterion. The operating points
for the other six injection GLRs can be read from the report listing (see Figure 9.1.0 - 12, Part
of the report, showing inflow/outflow analysis results for one of the sensitivity cases, on page
273).
For an overall view of the effects of all the values of GLRi and outlet pressure on the production
rate, return to the Plot Output Options dialog box and click Performance analysis. You can now
plot the Operating point rate for each case against both sensitivities.
Figure : 9.1.0 - 10 Well performance plot for lift gas GLR
In Figure 9.1.0 - 10, Well performance plot for lift gas GLR, above, you can see clearly that the
well kicks off at a certain minimum lift gas GLR, and that the kick-off requirement increases
with outlet pressure. There is no production at 500 SCF/STB, from the well at the highest outlet
pressure (150psia).
Figure 9.1.0 - 11, Well performance plot for outlet pressure, on page 273 is a different way of
looking at the same scenario. All the curves show a decline in production with increasing Top/
Start node pressure. All, except the GLRi=500 curve are able to produce at all pressures.
9. 1. Example 1
Note: These are very coarse estimates, and only indicate the upper and lower minimum injection
limits for each outlet pressure.
272
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.1.0 - 11 Well performance plot for outlet pressure
For a report of the results of all the sensitivity cases, return to the View Nodal Analysis Results
dialog box and select Report. WellFlo will generate the file WELLFLO.RPT in the run directory.
9. 1. Example 1
You can now page through the results on screen and list out to the printer. Part of the report
containing the results for sensitivity Case 14" is shown in Figure 9.1.0 - 12, Part of the report,
showing inflow/outflow analysis results for one of the sensitivity cases, on page 273. As can be
seen, this case corresponds to a lift gas/liquid ratio of 2500 SCF/STB and a outlet pressure of 100
psia.
Figure : 9.1.0 - 12 Part of the report, showing inflow/outflow analysis results for one of the
sensitivity cases
273
WellFlo Examples
Since the original WELLFLO.RPT file will be overwritten when you generate a new report, you
would normally use the Save as... option in Write to save the report under a chosen name (and
path) if you wish to make a permanent file. Alternatively you could use the Word macro which is
described in the Basics Section of the manual.
Remember that a report can be regenerated from the .CLC file at any time, and that it will then
take the same root name (and path) as the .CLC file. To do this, go to the View Nodal Analysis
Results dialog box and double click on the .CLC file name in the Files box (you might have
several to choose from in a real situation). If you now select Report, a report file will be
generated from the data in this .CLC file.
Pressure-depth plots
As we chose to Iterate to Exact Operating Point in the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box, we
are able to plot a pressure-depth for any of the cases that were successful. To demonstrate this,
we can take Case 14 presented in Figure 9.1.0 - 12, Part of the report, showing inflow/outflow
analysis results for one of the sensitivity cases, on page 273. Selecting the 100 psia Top/Start
Node Pressure case and the 2500 scf/STB Lift Gas/Liquid Ratio on the Plot Options screen and
choosing the Pressure/Depth Plot option we can display the pressure-depth profile for that
sensitivity case (Figure 9.1.0 - 13, Pressure-depth plot for a selected case, on page 274).
Figure : 9.1.0 - 13 Pressure-depth plot for a selected case
The open gas lift valve at 11506 ft TVD (14695 ft MD RKB) is marked as a solid horizontal line.
(Since in this case there is enough casing pressure to open all the valves, the deepest one is
opened.)
In order to estimate the minimum GLR requirement more closely, we should make a run with
more closely spaced injection GLR values in sensitivity 1.
A separate run should be made for each of the three outlet pressures, so that we can specify a
narrow range of GLRi about each approximate kick-off point.
For instance, from Figure 9.1.0 - 10, Well performance plot for lift gas GLR, on page 272 we
know that at 100 psia outlet pressure, the well kicks off between 0 and 500 SCF/STB lift gas/
liquid ratio.
274
9. 1. Example 1
Minimum gas
WellFlo Examples
Set up the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box as for the original inflow/outflow analysis. For
the 100 psia outlet pressure case, edit sensitivity 1 to replace the six widely spaced values with,
for example: from 0 to 500 SCF/STB in five steps. Edit sensitivity 2 and enter a single pressure
of 100 psia.
Now run the analysis and bring up the performance curve plot of operating rate vs lift gas/liquid
ratio (Figure 9.1.0 - 14, Detailed analysis of minimum required lift gas/liquid ratio, on page
275).
According to this plot, the kick-off GLR lies between 200 and 400 SCF/STB, with an initial total
liquid production rate of around 980 STB/day.
This can be repeated for the other outlet pressures.
9. 1. Example 1
Figure : 9.1.0 - 14 Detailed analysis of minimum required lift gas/liquid ratio
275
WellFlo Examples
9.2.
Example 2
Introduction
The example well is CONDENS. The data file CONDENS.WFL is supplied with the
FloSystem installation disks. It is a single layer system producing a Gas Condensate fluid.
Figure : 9.2.0 - 1 The well system for CONDENS
The components in the well system are shown in Figure 9.2.0 - 2, On-screen tabular display of
well
system for CONDENS, on page 276. Note that the temperature at each node is reported as
60 oF, whereas the actual temperature distribution is calibrated as part of the Nodal Analysis
calculation.
Figure : 9.2.0 - 2 On-screen tabular display of well system for CONDENS
9. 2. Example 2
The specification of the system particular to this example, namely the fluid characterisation,
IPR and flow correlation, will be highlighted in the subsequent sections.
276
WellFlo Examples
Condensate Fluid Characterisation
From the PVT report, the properties of the produced wellstream were:
Gas Gravity0.700
Oil Gravity0.785
CGR105.0 STB/MMscf
along with a reservoir temperature of 230F and a measured Water-Gas-Ratio of 150 STB/
MMscf. This data was specified in the Condensate Fluid Parameters screen, see Figure 9.2.0 - 3,
Condensate fluid parameters, on page 277, reached after selecting Data Preparation Reservoir Control.
Figure : 9.2.0 - 3 Condensate fluid parameters
9. 2. Example 2
The Equation of State (EoS) model invariably requires tuning before being used in predictive
mode, therefore you should now proceed to the Match condensate properties shown in Figure
9.2.0 - 4, Match condensate properties, on page 277, by selecting the Match button on the
Condensate fluid parameters screen.
Figure : 9.2.0 - 4 Match condensate properties
277
WellFlo Examples
On entry to this screen, the displayed Match property is Dew point pressure, with an Observed
value of 5560.0 psia. Note that the three values in Tuning box are not their default values of
unity, indicating that tuning has already taken place. In fact, the three values deviating from unity
indicate that dew point pressure and liquid dropout have been tuned already.
Clicking the Calculate button will cause the Calculated value of dew point pressure (with the
non-unity tuning parameters applied) to be generated. This is 5560.069 psia.
[If the Reset tuning button is clicked so that the tuning parameter coefficients are reset to unity,
the EoS will calculate a dew point pressure of 4724.9 psia.]
Changing the Match property to Liquid dropout and clicking the Calculate button will produce
the screen below, see Figure 9.2.0 - 5, Match condensate properties - liquid dropout match, on
page 278. The values of the Tuning parameters apply to this match. This particular fit was
achieved in 8 iterations. You may watch this by clicking the Reset tuning button and then clicking
the Best Fit button.
Figure : 9.2.0 - 5 Match condensate properties - liquid dropout match
No other fluid property matching was performed but the variation of Gas Z-factor, Gas and Oil
viscosity and Surface tension can be observed by selecting the appropriate Match property.
Condensate IPR
9. 2. Example 2
Returning to the Reservoir control screen, see Figure 9.2.0 - 6, Reservoir control, on page 279,
we now need to check the Entry Model data. For this problem, Layer parameters were specified.
278
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.2.0 - 6 Reservoir control
Clicking the Edit Layer button then takes you to the Inflow Performance: Condensate (Layer
Parameters) - Layer 1 screen, see Figure 9.2.0 - 7, Inflow performance: Condensate, on page
279.
The layer pressure was given as 8050 psia. A Pseudo-radial geometry was chosen and by
clicking on the Configure button and selecting the Circular shape the Circular Drainage Area
dialog box, shown in Figure 9.2.0 - 8, Circular Drainage Area, on page 280, appears, allowing
entry of the External radius, Drainage area and Dietz shape factor.
279
9. 2. Example 2
Figure : 9.2.0 - 7 Inflow performance: Condensate
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.2.0 - 8 Circular Drainage Area
Straight line relative permeabilities are being used (select the Relative Perm button to get to the
IPR Relative Permeabilities - Layer 1 screen and then select the Edit Data button with
Parametric Relative Permeability Data active).
The skin used in the Inflow calculation is set by selecting the Skin Analysis button, which will
take you to the screen below, Figure 9.2.0 - 9, Skin Analysis: Completion - Layer 1, on page
280.
Figure : 9.2.0 - 9 Skin Analysis: Completion - Layer 1
9. 2. Example 2
The completion is Cased Hole, as selected: activating the Model button will then take you to the
Skin Analysis: Completion (Vertical) - Layer 1 screen, Figure 9.2.0 - 10, Skin Analysis:
Completion (Vertical) - Layer 1, on page 281.
280
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.2.0 - 10 Skin Analysis: Completion (Vertical) - Layer 1
This gives the Completion Skin Factors of -0.356 (Darcy) and 0.0045 (Non-Darcy). Returning
to the Inflow Performance - Condensate (Layer Parameters) - Layer 1 screen, Figure 9.2.0 - 7,
Inflow performance: Condensate, on page 279, we can now view the resulting IPR curve for
the reservoir/fluid system specified.
Figure : 9.2.0 - 11 Choose IPR model - Layer 1
Clicking the Plot button will now generate the display of the IPR curve for this system (Figure
9.2.0 - 12, IPR for CONDENS Reservoir/Fluid, on page 282).
281
9. 2. Example 2
From this screen, click the Choose IPRModel button which will give you the Choose IPR Model
- Layer 1 screen, Figure 9.2.0 - 11, Choose IPR model - Layer 1, on page 281. Note that only
Normalised Pseudo-Pressure IPR is available for Gas Condensates.
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.2.0 - 12 IPR for CONDENS Reservoir/Fluid
The horizontal dashed line is the dew point pressure at 5560.1 psia. Viewed full screen, you may
notice a change in slope of the line going from above to below dew point pressure. This is the
effect of the transition from 2-phase (gas/water) to 3-phase (gas/oil/water) reflected in the
relative permeabilities and phase density/viscosity changes with pressure.
Flow Correlation
Having defined the reservoir, wellbore and fluid, we are now in a position to model the pressure
drop behaviour. Returning out of the Reservoir Control panel, proceed by the Main options menu
(at the top of the displayed screen to Analysis, sub-option Pressure Drop).
9. 2. Example 2
Initially we will perform a Pressure drop calculation to check the computed pressure and
temperature drop. Specifying the Calculations Nodes as Reservoir (Start Node) and Outlet
Node (Solution Node), the calculation will be done using a Flow Rate of 10.0 MMscf/day. The
Calibrated temperature model is being used with the Wellhead temperature set to 213 oF, the
Outlet Node temperature set to 206 oF, Layer temperature to 230 oF (in Figure 9.2.0 - 7,
Inflow performance: Condensate, on page 279) and the Surface temperature to 60 oF. The Gas
in Annulus option is active.
282
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.2.0 - 13 Nodal Analysis Control - CONDENS.WFL
Before clicking the Calculate button to perform the pressure drop calculation, check the (flow)
Correlations by clicking the appropriate button. This will take you to the Nodal Analysis
Correlations screen, Figure 9.2.0 - 14, Nodal Analysis Correlations, on page 283.
Figure : 9.2.0 - 14 Nodal Analysis Correlations
Returning to the Nodal Analysis Control screen and clicking on the Calculate button, the
pressure drop calculation will be done. Once completed we can view the Results by clicking on
that button. This will take you to the View Nodal Analysis Results screen on which you should
click on the Plot button. This in turn will take you to the Plot Output Options screen on which the
Pressure depth plot option should be taken. This will then display the Pressure and Temperature
vs Depth plot, Figure 9.2.0 - 15, Pressure/Temperature vs Depth CONDENS base case, on
page 284.
283
9. 2. Example 2
Since this a Gas Condensate fluid, the Gray correlation is recommended.
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.2.0 - 15 Pressure/Temperature vs Depth CONDENS base case
Note that the wellhead temperature is 213 oF, as specified.

It was specified that this well should be run with a outlet pressure of 2000.0 psia. The flowrate
corresponding to this pressure can be determined by performing an Operating point calculation.
Figure : 9.2.0 - 16 CONDENS Operating Point Calculation
9. 2. Example 2
Returning to the Nodal Analysis Control screen, we switch to the appropriate calculation mode.
Four gas flowrates of 20.0, 40.0, 60.0 and 80.0 MMscf/day were specified. The resulting Inflow/
outflow curves are displayed above, Figure 9.2.0 - 16, CONDENS Operating Point
Calculation, on page 284. The operating point is found iteration to be 80.4 Mmscf/day.
284
WellFlo Examples
9.3.
Example 3
Introduction
This example covers the modelling of the inflow performance for a horizontal well for both
semi-steady state and steady state flow. The example file is HORIZON.WFL and is supplied
with the installation disks; it is a single layer, black oil system. The well has been set up as shown
in Figure 9.3.0 - 1, Tabular Display of nodes in HORIZON.wfl, on page 285:
Figure : 9.3.0 - 1 Tabular Display of nodes in HORIZON.wfl
The well has a measured depth of 10,000 ft of which the last 1000 ft is the horizontal section. The
fluid properties of this well are the default WellFlo values which have not been tuned to the
correlations. The produced GOR is 500 scf/STB and the water cut is 20%.
Inflow Performance
9. 3. Example 3
From the Data Preparation menu the Reservoir Control dialog box can be selected and the
various options for the inflow modelling can be chosen, see Figure 9.3.0 - 2, Reservoir Control
- HORIZON.wfl, on page 285. This dialog box can also be accessed via the main WellFlo
screen by double clicking on the reservoir icon.
Figure : 9.3.0 - 2 Reservoir Control - HORIZON.wfl
285
WellFlo Examples
In this example the Entry Model has been chosen as Layer Parameters and the Well Orientation
as Horizontal. Selecting the Edit Layer button takes you to the Inflow Performance screen as
shown in Figure 9.3.0 - 3, Inflow Performance Oil (Layer Parameters) - Layer 1, on page 286:
Figure : 9.3.0 - 3 Inflow Performance Oil (Layer Parameters) - Layer 1
Here the layer parameters; permeability, pressure, temperature and thickness are entered as
normal.
Semi-Steady State Inflow Performance

On the Inflow Performance screen you can select the Drainage area geometry which best
describes your reservoir. In this example we have selected the Pseudo-radial flow model.
Selecting the Configure button allows the user to select the Drainage Area Shape. Selecting the
Circular shape from the Semi Steady State (Goode and Wilkinson) options and then OK, takes
you to the dialog box where you define the size of the drainage area, see Figure 9.3.0 - 4,
Circular Drainage Area - data entry, on page 286.
The area has been set up with an external radius, re, of 3000 ft and the Dietz shape factor
corresponding to a circle. As the length of the open section of this horizontal well, LW, was 1000
ft, the use of the Pseudo-radial flow model is justified.
The model has been set up to use the calculated skin with the Completion being Open Hole. This
is done through Skin Analysis. From Figure 9.3.0 - 3, Inflow Performance Oil (Layer
Parameters) - Layer 1, on page 286 we see that this has been calculated as -5.111 and that the
Productivity Index, J, is 122 STB/day/psi. As the well length is relatively short for this well the
Pseudo-linear model should yield a similar result to the Pseudo-radial model. To verify this, from
the Inflow Performance screen select the Pseudo-linear model and then Configure. The Pseudolinear configuration should be as shown in Figure 9.3.0 - 5, Pseudo-linear Configuration, on
page 287.
286
9. 3. Example 3
Figure : 9.3.0 - 4 Circular Drainage Area - data entry
WellFlo Examples
Figure : 9.3.0 - 5 Pseudo-linear Configuration
Figure : 9.3.0 - 6 Semi-steady state productivity indices for pseudo-radial and pseudo-linear
geometries
It is clear from the data there comes a point where the pseudo-radial results start to diverge from
those of the pseudo-linear model, as the well length increases relative to the size of the reservoir.
We see that the divergence starts when the well length is approximately 2000 ft. We see also that
the reservoir anisotropy has a significant effect on the divergence.
As a general rule the pseudo-radial model will be valid if the well length is approximately half
the reservoir length or 3/8 the diameter, for longer well lengths the pseudo-linear should be used.
287
9. 3. Example 3
The length (7000ft) and breadth (4000ft) have been set up to give approximately the same area
(2.8E7ft) that was calculated for the circular configuration.
When you OK out of the Pseudo-linear configuration screen the data on the Inflow Performance
screen will automatically be updated. The productivity index is now 119 STB/day/psi,
comparable to the 122 STB/day/psi calculated with the Pseudo-radial model. The Total NonDarcy Skin for this configuration is much higher, 14.4, than for the Pseudo-radial case, but note
that these skins are not equivalent. We could have set up this Pseudo-linear model with a square
geometry, in which case, the length and breadth would need to have been 5357 ft (length of offset
= 2178.5ft for L = 1000ft, breadth offset = 2678.5ft). This geometry would yield a PI of 121
STB/day/psi.
With this square configuration and the circular geometry it is straightforward to do a series of
calculations of the productivity index to compare the effect of changing the well length on the
two models. Such comparative data is shown in Figure 9.3.0 - 6, Semi-steady state productivity
indices for pseudo-radial and pseudo-linear geometries, on page 287. In all cases the well was
positioned in the centre of the reservoir. The pseudo-radial data was from the original model with
an re of 3000 ft. The comparison was also made for reservoir models which had much higher
anisotropy, with kv/k being 0.01.
References
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Brown, K.E. & Beggs, H.D.: The Technology Of Artificial Lift Methods, Volume 1. Penwell
Books 1977.
Gould, T.L., Tek, M.R. and Katz, D.L.: Two - Phase Flow Through Vertical, Inclined or
Curved Pipe. JPT, August 1974.
Kleyweg. D. et al.: Gaslift Optimisation - Claymore Field. Offshore European Conference,
1983: Paper SPE 11885.
Ramey, H.J.: Wellbore Heat Transmission. JPT, April 1962.
Willhite, G.P.: Over-all Heat Transfer Coefficients in Steam Hot Water Injection Wells.
JPT, May 1967.
Gray: Appendix B, Vertical Flow Correlation - Gas Wells. API Users' Manual for API 14B,
2nd edition, API, Dallas, June 1977.
Beggs, H.D.: Production Optimization. Section 3,VII,A. OGCI Publications, Tulsa, 1991.
Furnival, S.R. and Baillie, J.M.: Successful Prediction of Condensate Wellbore Behaviour
Using an EoS Generated From Black Oil Data. Offshore European Conference, Aberdeen,
Sept. 1993: Paper SPE 26683.
Sutton, R.P. and Farshad, F.F.: Evaluation of Empirically Derived PVT Properties for Gulf
of Mexico Crude Oils. 59th annual technical conference, Houston, Sept. 1984: Paper SPE
13172.
Petrosky, G.E. and Farshad, F.F.: Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations for Gulf of
Mexico Crude Oils. 68th Annual Technical Conference, Houston, Oct. 1993: Paper SPE
26644.
Carr, N.L., Kobayashi, R. and Burrows, D.B.: Viscosity of Hydrocarbon Gases under
Pressure. Trans AIME 201 (1954), pp 264-272.
Lee, A.L., Gonzalez, M.H. and Eakin, B.E.: The Viscosity of Natural Gases. J. Pet. Tech.
18 (1966), pp 997-1000.
Dranchuk, P.M., Purvis, R.A. and Robinson, D.B.: Computer Calculation of Natural Gas
Compressibility Factors Using the Standing and Katz Correlations. Inst. Pet. Tech. (1974),
IP-74-008.
Standing, M.B.: Volumetric and Phase Behaviour of Oil Field Hydrocarbon Systems. SPE
Monograph series, 1977.
Corey, A.T.: The Interrelation Between Gas and Oil Relative Permeabilities. Prod. Mon.
19, 38, 1954.
Alves, I.N., Alhanati, F.J.S. and Shoham, O.: A Unified Model for Predicting Flowing
Temperature Distributions in Wellbores and Pipelines. New Orleans, Sept. 1990: paper
SPE 20632.
Eaton, B.A. et al: The prediction of Flow patterns, Liquid Holdup and Pressure Losses
Occurring During Continuous Two-phase Flow in Horizontal Pipelines. Trans AIME
(1966).
Dukler, A.E.: Gas-Liquid Flow in Pipelines. American Gas Association, Am. Pet. Inst.,
Vol. 1: Research Results (May, 1969).
Flanigan, O.: Two-Phase Gathering Systems. Oil and Gas Journal (March 1958).
Sagar, R., Doty, D.R., Schmdt, Z.: Predicting Temperature Profiles in a Flowing Well. San
Antonio, Oct. 1989: paper SPE 19702. Also SPEPE, Nov. 1991.
288
Chapter 10 - References
Chapter 10- References
References
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Sylvester, N.D.: A Mechanistic model for Two-Phase Vertical Slug Flow in Pipes, J. Energy
Resources Tech., 109, 206-213 (1987).
Taitel, Y., Barnea, D. and Dukler, A.: Modelling Flow Pattern Transitions for Steady
Upward Gas-Liquid Flow in Tubes, A.. I. Ch. E. J., 26, 345-354 (1980).
Sinai, Y.L.: A Charnock Based Estimate of Interfacial Resistance and Roughness for
Internal, Fully-Developed Stratified Two-Phase Horizontal Flow, Int. J. Multiphase Flow,
9, (1), 13-19 (1983).
Oliemans, R.V.A., Pots, B.F.M. and Trompe, N.: Modelling of Annular Dispersed TwoPhase Flow in Vertical Pipes, Int. J. Multiphase Flow, 12, (5), 711-732 (1986).
Wallis, G.B.: One Dimensional Two-Phase Flow, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1969.
Macary, S.M., El-Batanoney, M.H.: Derivation of PVT Correlations for the Gulf of Suez
Crude Oils. Egyptian Petroleum Research Institute, Jan 1993.
Turner, R.G.: Analysis and Prediction of Minimum Flow Rate for the Continuous Removal
of Liquids from Gas Wells. JPT, Nov. 1969, Trans. AIME 246.
Coleman, S.B., Clay, H.B., McCurdy, D.G., and Norris III, H.L.: A New Look at Predicting
Gas-Well Load-Up. JPT, March 1991.
Salama, M.M. and Venkatesh V.S.: Evaluation of API RP14E Erosional Velocity
Limitations for Offshore Gas Wells. OTC 4485, Houston, May 1983.
McCain, W.D. Jr.: Properties of Petroleum Fluids. 2nd edition, 1990.
CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics. 1st Student Edition, 1988.
Brill, J.P. and Beggs, H.D.: Two-Phase Flow in Pipes. University of Tulsa, INTERCOMP
Course, The Hague, 1974.
Hasan, A.R. and Kabir, C.S.: Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow in Wellbores: Part 1
- Formation Temperature, SPE ATCE Dallas TX, Oct. 1991: paper SPE 22866.
Hasan, A.R. and Kabir, C.S.: Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow in Wellbores: Part 2
- Wellbore Fluid Temperature, SPE ATCE Dallas TX, Oct. 1991: paper SPE 22948.
Carslaw, H.S. and Jaeger, J.C.: Conduction of Heat in Solids, Oxford University Press, 1st.
edition 1950, 2nd. edition 1986.
Chapter 10 - References
21
289
Introduction to Well Data Manager
Chapter 11- Introduction to Well Data Manager

11.1. Well Data Manager - Overview
The Well Data Manager is a spreadsheet application, which allows quick and easy access to a
large number of well models within a given directory. The details of operation vary between:
Vertical Lift Performance (Well Data Manager page 290).
Layer Inflow Performance (Layer Data Manager page 295).
Eclipse VFP Table Generation (Table Data Manager page 297).
One of these three operational modes is selected at startup time as illustrated in Figure 11.1.0 - 1
below:
In Well or Layer Data Manager, users can select some or all of the well models in a directory, and
display the performance that results from temporary values of selected production parameters.
There is an option to permanently update these parameters in the well models. Data in the Well
and Layer spreadsheets can be transferred, in whole or part, to and from other Windows
applications such as Excel or Word.
In VFP Table Generation, users can select well models from several directories, and generate
vertical lift performance tables in Eclipse format for specified sets of values of production
variables.
Note: WellFlo is automatically started-up in conjunction with Well Data Manager in any of these
three operational modes.
11.2. Vertical Lift Performance (Well Mode)

When this option is checked in the start-up dialog box and OK is selected, the Well Data
Manager dialog is generated. It exhibits three menu bar items, three function buttons and a
spreadsheet-style table for data entry (Figure 11.2.0 - 1, Vertical Lift Performance - Well Data
Manager Dialog Box, on page 291).
The window can be resized or maximised to suit the number of wells and production parameters
that have been entered. Use the vertical scroll bar to view extra wells and their calculated results,
and the horizontal scroll bar to view and enter extra production parameters.
290
Chapter 11 - Introduction to Well Data Manager
Figure : 11.1.0 - 1 Well Data Manager Start-Up Dialog Box
Figure : 11.2.0 - 1 Vertical Lift Performance - Well Data Manager Dialog Box
11.2.1. Wells Menu

The Wells menu item contains four selection options as illustrated in Figure 11.2.1 - 1 below:
Figure : 11.2.1 - 1 Wells Menu Item
These perform the following functions:

Well models can be added to the spreadsheet with the Add menu item.
Well models can be removed from the spreadsheet with the Delete menu item. This command
does not delete the corresponding well models from the current directory.
After performing an analysis, entering additional data or editing data, the well model can be
updated for the selected well/s with the Update menu item. Note that this will overwrite the
existing WellFlo (*.wfl) file.
After selecting Add, the Add Well Models dialog box is generated where users can select well
models to enter into a new spreadsheet or add to an existing spreadsheet (Figure 11.2.1 - 2, Add
Well Models Dialog Box, on page 292).
Note: The Well and Layer Data Management spreadsheets can only display models from a single
directory. If they already contain models from a different directory when OK is pressed, you will
be given the option either to clear them and add the newly-selected wells, or to return to the
spreadsheet window.
291
11. 2. 1. Wells Menu
Multiple copies of a well can be created with the Duplicate menu item.
Figure : 11.2.1 - 2 Add Well Models Dialog Box
Adding Wells
Select the relevant directory by double-clicking on the drive and directory lists (refer to Figure
11.2.1 - 2 Add Well Models Dialog Box). Select individual WellFlo files (*.wfl), by singleclicking and highlighting the filename in the list field on the right-hand side of the dialog.
Choose additional wells by either:
Pressing the Ctrl key and single-clicking and highlighting the filename as before
Selecting all wells up to a further well in the list field by pressing Shift key and singleclicking on the further well filename
Choosing the Select All button on the dialog to select all the wells listed.
On choosing OK, the selected wells will be added to the spreadsheet.
Deleting Wells
This action requires certain rows of the spreadsheet to be selected beforehand:
To select a row, click on the relevant row number.
To select a group of rows, single-click on the first row number, then select the Shift key, and
single-click on the last row number.
When these group selection operations are carried out on a previously selected group, they will
de-select it.
When an operation requires a row selection, but none has been made, the operation is carried out
on the row which contains the current active cell of the spreadsheet.
Duplicating Wells
Single-click on the name of the well to be duplicated, then select the Duplicate menu item.
When the Copy Well dialog box is generated, enter the number of copies required for the
specified well. Extra lines are inserted into the spreadsheet and the well name for the selected
well is repeated in each line.
292
To add another group of rows to the selection, select the Ctrl key and single-click on the first
row number, then select Shift+Ctrl and single-click on the last row number.

This process allows several different values to be entered for a production parameter, and the
analysis result for each value to be displayed separately. Surplus copies of a well can
subsequently be deleted with the Delete menu item.
Note: It is only possible to duplicate one selection at a time. If a multiple selection of wells is
made, only the first selected well will be duplicated the requisite number of times.
Update Wells
Following the same selection procedure described earlier for Deleting Wells and Duplicating
Wells, single-click on the well/s to be updated, then select this menu item. This will permanently
transfer the non-blank input parameters to the well models.
Note: When operating in Well mode, a fluid ratio parameter in a multi-layer well will be
transferred to all reservoir layers.
11.2.2. Sheet Menu

The Sheet menu item contains five selection options as illustrated in Figure 11.2.2 - 1 below:
Figure : 11.2.2 - 1 Sheet Menu Item

The New option clears the spreadsheet, after prompting to save any changes. This will allow
the Wells/Add menu item to operate immediately in a new directory.
The Open option clears the current spreadsheet, after prompting to save any changes and then
allows you to replace it with the contents previously saved into a named spreadsheet file
through the Save or Save As menu options. A standard Windows Open dialog is used to
browse for Well Data (*.wdm) files.
The Save As option saves the entire contents of the current spreadsheet into a Well Data
(*.wdm) spreadsheet file. The file name is subsequently shown in the window caption bar as
the current spreadsheet file.
The Exit option terminates the application.
Note: The directory selected for spreadsheet files is independent of the current well model
directory. Saved spreadsheets are not interchangeable between Well Mode, Layer Mode and VFP
Table Generation mode. When a previously-saved spreadsheet is opened, it will only work
correctly if the directory or directories of the associated well models still exist, and the well
models in it have not been deleted or renamed. Further, a Layer Performance spreadsheet will
only work correctly if the layers in the associated well models have not been moved or renamed,
and their active and inactive status has not been altered.
293
11. 2. 2. Sheet Menu
The Save option saves the entire contents of the current spreadsheet into a Well Data (*.wdm)
spreadsheet file as shown in the window caption bar.

11.2.3. Help Menu
The Help menu item contains a single option About... which gives users information about the
current version of Well Data Manager being used.
11.2.4. Using the Function Buttons and Spreadsheet

Once the spreadsheet has been populated with well data, the model/s can be compared, edited,
analysed and tuned as necessary through the following process (refer to Figure 11.2.4 - 1
Performing an Analysis in Well Data Manager):
Using a single-click on the column 2 header to activate a drop-down list, select one of the
calculated well performance parameters (e.g. Operating Rate).
Similarly, single-click on the headers for columns 4, 5 etc. to select the input well
performance parameters which are to be varied (one per column) and enter input values for
the well parameters as necessary.
After selecting one or more wells by highlighting the required rows, select the Analyse button
to display the value of the performance parameter selected in column 2. This analysis is
made in WellFlo after temporarily updating the model with the entered values of the input
parameters.
Figure : 11.2.4 - 1 Performing an Analysis in Well Data Manager
A value from a parameter cell can be copied down a column by selecting a block starting with
the cell to be copied, then pressing the Fill Column button.
To remove an unwanted input performance parameter, click on its column header and press the
Delete Column button.
294
11. 2. 3. Help Menu
Note: When an input value in a selected well is blank, the analysis in principle uses the value
currently in the well model. However, to calculate an operating rate, you must enter a wellhead
or outlet node pressure; to calculate a wellhead or outlet node pressure, you must enter a
flowrate; and to calculate a bottomhole pressure, you must enter a flowrate and either a wellhead
or outlet node pressure.
11.3. Layer Inflow Performance (Layer Mode)

When this option is checked in the start-up dialog box, the Layer Data Manager dialog is
generated. It exhibits four menu bar items, three function buttons and a spreadsheet-style table
for data entry (refer to Figure 11.3.0 - 1 Layer Inflow Performance - Layer Data Manager
Dialog Box).
The window can be resized or maximised to suit the number of layers and production parameters
that have been entered. Use the vertical scroll bar to view extra layers and their calculated
results, and the horizontal scroll bar to view and enter extra production parameters.
11.3.1. Wells Menu

The Wells menu item in Layer mode is similar to the menu illustrated in Figure 11.2.1 - 1, Wells
Menu Item, on page 291, except that in this case there is no menu option for well duplication.
The other options have identical functions to those discussed in Section 11. 2. 1 Wells Menu,
on page 291.
Note: In this mode, each active layer of each selected well is also displayed in the spreadsheet.
11.3.2. Layers Menu

The Layers menu item is specific to this mode of operation and contains two selection options as
illustrated in Figure 11.3.2 - 1 below:
Figure : 11.3.2 - 1 Layers Menu Item
295
11. 3. Layer Inflow Performance (Layer Mode)
Figure : 11.3.0 - 1 Layer Inflow Performance - Layer Data Manager Dialog Box

Users can make multiple copies of a layer with the Duplicate menu item. First select and
highlight the layer to be duplicated with a single-click, then choose this menu item. When the
Copy Layer sub-dialog box is shown, enter the number of copies required. This will allow
several different values to be entered for a layer parameter and the calculated result for each
value to be displayed separately.
Layer data can be removed from the spreadsheet with the Delete menu item.
Duplicating Layers
This action requires a row of the spreadsheet to be selected beforehand. To select a row, click on
the relevant row number. When an operation requires a row selection, but none has been made,
the operation is carried out on the row which contains the current active cell of the spreadsheet.
Note: It is only possible to duplicate one selection at a time. If a multiple selection of layers is
made, only the first selected layer will be duplicated the requisite number of times.
Deleting Layers
Choose the layer/s to be deleted, then select this menu item:
To select a row, click on the relevant row number.
To select a group of rows, single-click on the first row number, then select the Shift key, and
single-click on the last row number.
To add another group of rows to the selection, select the Ctrl key and single-click on the first
row number, then select Shift+Ctrl and single-click on the last row number.
When these group selection operations are carried out on a previously selected group, they will
de-select it.
When an operation requires a row selection, but none has been made, the operation is carried out
on the row which contains the current active cell of the spreadsheet.
Note: Only copies of layers created by the Duplicate menu item can be deleted, since at least one
line for each layer must be displayed in the Layer Data Manager until the whole well is deleted.
11.3.3. Sheet Menu
11.3.4. Help Menu


The spreadsheet shows each active layer for a well model loaded by the Wells/Add menu item
296
The Sheet menu item contains five selection options as illustrated in Figure 11.2.2 - 1, Sheet
Menu Item, on page 293. These options have identical functions to those discussed in Section
11. 2. 2 Sheet Menu, on page 293.

(refer to Figure 11.3.5 - 1 Performing an Analysis in Layer Data Manager). In this example the
Layers/Duplicate menu item has also been used to add two duplicate layers for subsequent
editing:
Using a single-click on the column 3 header to activate a drop-down list, select one of the
calculated layer performance parameters (e.g. AOF).
Similarly, single-click on the headers for columns 5, 6 etc. to select the input layer
performance parameters that are to be varied (one per column) and enter input values for the
layer parameters as necessary.
After choosing one or more layers by highlighting the required rows, select the Calculate
button to display the calculated value/s for the performance parameter previously set in
column 3. This calculation is made in WellFlo after temporarily updating the model with
the entered values of the input parameters.
Note: When an input value in a selected layer is blank, the value currently stored in the well
model will be used in the calculation.
A value from a parameter cell can be copied down a column by selecting a block starting with
the cell to be copied, then pressing the Fill Column button.
To remove an unwanted input performance parameter, click on its column header and press the
Delete Column button.
11.4. Eclipse VFP Table Generation

When this option is selected in the start-up dialog box, the Table Data Manager dialog is
generated. It exhibits five menu bar items, a drop-down Well Type list field, a single function
button and a spreadsheet-style table for data entry (see Figure 11.4.0 - 1, Eclipse VFP Table
Generation - Table Data Manager Dialog Box, on page 298).
297
11. 4. Eclipse VFP Table Generation
Figure : 11.3.5 - 1 Performing an Analysis in Layer Data Manager
Figure : 11.4.0 - 1 Eclipse VFP Table Generation - Table Data Manager Dialog Box
The window can be resized or maximised to suit the number of layers and production parameters
that have been entered. Use the vertical scroll bar to view extra layers and their calculated
results, and the horizontal scroll bar to view and enter extra production parameters.
11.4.1. Wells Menu

The Wells menu item in VFP Table Generation mode is similar to the menu illustrated in Figure
11.2.1 - 1, Wells Menu Item, on page 291, except that in this case there are no menu options
available for well duplication or updating. The Add and Delete options have identical functions
to those discussed in Section 11. 2. 1 Wells Menu, on page 291.
Figure : 11.4.1 - 1 Add Well Models Dialog Box for VFP Table Generation
11.4.2. Units Menu

The Units menu item is specific to this mode of operation and contains two selection options as
298
Note: Unlike the Well and Layer spreadsheets, the VFP Table Generation spreadsheet can
accommodate well models from multiple directories. To use this capability, select and Add
models from one directory, then change the directory. After selecting and adding more well
models, select Done to return to the spreadsheet (refer to Figure 11.4.1 - 1, Add Well Models
Dialog Box for VFP Table Generation, on page 298).

illustrated in Figure 11.4.2 - 1, Units Menu Item, on page 299. These menu options are used to
set the units system for entered data values and tabulated values within the spreadsheet.
Figure : 11.4.2 - 1 Units Menu Item
Unlike Well Data Manager and Layer Data Manager (which both open WellFlo and apply the
unit system setting that is currently selected in WellFlo), the VFP Table Generator either operates
in Eclipse field units or metric units, according to the Units menu item that is currently selected
with a tick mark (i.e. Oilfield Units); to change to the other unit system select it from the dropdown menu with a single mouse-click (i.e. Metric Units).
11.4.3. Sheet Menu

The Sheet menu item contains five selection options as illustrated in Figure 11.2.2 - 1, Sheet
Menu Item, on page 293. These options have identical functions to those discussed in Section
11. 2. 2 Sheet Menu, on page 293.
11.4.4. Generate Menu

The Generate menu item contains three selection options as illustrated in Figure 11.4.4 - 1
below:
Figure : 11.4.4 - 1 Generate Menu Item

The Selected menu option is used to generate VFP tables for the currently selected well
model/s (i.e. selected row/s in the spreadsheet).
The Stop menu option is used to terminate the VFP table generation process and is only
activated when tables are actually being generated.
11.4.5. Help Menu


The spreadsheet shows each well model loaded by the Wells/Add menu item (refer to Figure
299
The All menu option is used to generate VFP tables for all the well models currently loaded
into the spreadsheet.

11.4.6 - 1 Generating Eclipse VFP Table in Table Data Manager). Only one type of well can be
displayed at a time (liquid wells in this case):
Figure : 11.4.6 - 1 Generating Eclipse VFP Table in Table Data Manager
The drop-down Well Type list field is used to select the type of well model that is displayed in the
spreadsheet. To choose another well type for display, use the drop-down menu and select one of
the other well type options with a single mouse click.
Column 1 - Well Name indicates the WellFlo (*.wfl) filename associated with the well model.
By pausing the screen cursor over the column cell containing the filename, users can view the
path to the directory containing the selected well file in a pop-up window.
Column 2 - Table Name indicates the VFP table (*.vfp) filename associated with the well
model. The generated VFP tables are output to the same directory as the well models.
Column 3 - Number is an identifier to indicates the number of models loaded into the
spreadsheet. well models are assigned an identification number based on the order they are
loaded into the Table Data Manager.
Column 4 - THP at: serves to identify the location of the entered THP (tubing head pressure)
values. Users can specify from either Tubing Head, Outlet Node or Gauge Node (if one
exists), by selecting from the drop-down menu contained within each column cell (refer to
Figure 11.4.6 - 2, THP Measurement Options, on page 301).
Columns 5 onwards are used to enter production parameters for VFP table generation (e.g.
Flow Rate, Tophole Pressure, Water Content, etc.). The number of columns and production
parameters will vary depending on the Well Type selected from the drop-down list (e.g. Gas
Lifted Wells, Gas Condensate Wells, etc.).
300
11. 4. 6. Using the Function Buttons and Spreadsheet
The layout and function of the spreadsheet columns are described below:
Figure : 11.4.6 - 2 THP Measurement Options
Note: Values are generally entered in the form v1, v2, v3, ... vn (e.g. Gas Rate (MSCF/day) of 10,
20, 30, 40, 50, 60, etc.), but users may also enter n evenly spaced values from v1 to vn in the form
v1 (n) vn (e.g. Gas Rate (MSCF/day) of 10 (6) 60, will enter six evenly spaced values lying in the
range 10 to 60 MSCF/day). It is also possible to mix both of these data entry styles (e.g. 1, 2, 4,
10 (50) 50).
11. 4. 6. Using the Function Buttons and Spreadsheet
A value from a cell can be copied down a column by clicking on the cell to be copied, then
selecting the Fill Column button.
301
Introduction to FieldFlo
Chapter 12- Introduction to FieldFlo

12.1. FieldFlo - Overview
FieldFlo can be used for the optimisation of a number of types of fields - gas-lifted oil fields
(optionally with gas wells), condensate, gas fields, and gas production-constrained fields.
In a gas-lifted field, compressed gas is injected into each well (down the annulus) and enters the
flow stream at a certain depth (depending on the location of gas lift valves), where it mixes with
the reservoir fluids flowing up the tubing. Up to a point, the effect of the gas is to increase the
well production, as it lightens the oil column and therefore reduces the pressure at the bottom of
the well. This draws more oil from the reservoir into the well. This beneficial process passes
through a maximum, beyond which increasing the gas injection rate will actually decrease oil
production. This is when the friction pressure drop (an inhibiting factor) starts to outweigh the
reduction in fluid density (a beneficial factor). These effects are calculated (for each well) by
WellFlo.
The maximum field oil production, or revenue earned, will be obtained by injecting the right
amount of gas into each well such that it produces at its optimal oil rate or revenue return; or by
choking back a well that produces too much gas for the field. In theory, given a performance
curve for each well in a system, it would be possible to work out this optimum rate for each well.
In practice, it is frequently not possible to do this.
This is where FieldFlo becomes applicable: for the correct solution of the lift gas allocation
problem, it handles some of the more complex points, in particular the pressure drops along
surface gathering pipelines, the limited availability of lift gas and the cost of gas relative to oil
produced, and water disposal. For the correct solution to the maximum gas production problem,
it again handles the pressure drop along surface gathering pipelines, the choking back of highly
gassy wells, and the cost of gas produced relative to the oil produced.
FieldFlo takes as a starting point the description of each well, generated by WellFlo or manually
created. It also requires a description of the field network. It then builds and interpolates tables of
performance curves for the whole system, to solve the problem of allocation of gas including the
above constraints.
The solution includes lift gas allocation to each branch of the system and of course to each well;
choking back of wells; liquid and gas production from each well; and the calculation of flowing
pressures at all points in the surface piping.
In the limiting case where no gas injection is needed, e.g. in a field where all wells are strong
natural producers, a gas field, or an ESP-lifted field, FieldFlo will still compute the production
from each well, combined production at each manifold, and flow line pressures, and, in the
limited gas production problem, indicate which wells need to be choked back to satisfy the
production constraints.
302
Chapter 12 - Introduction to FieldFlo
As well as a network of gas-lifted wells, a network of naturally flowing wells, ESP-lifted wells,
or gas wells, or any combination of these wells, may be modelled.
12.2. This Section Of The Manual

The FieldFlo section of the manual consists of five chapters, from Chapter 12 Introduction to
FieldFlo, on page 302 to Chapter 16. 1 FieldFlo Example, on page 388:
Chapter 12 Introduction to FieldFlo, on page 302, introduces the program in terms of what
it does for the engineer and broadly how to do it.
Chapter 13 FieldFlo System Description, on page 310, covers data preparation: how to set
up a model for the wells and field ready for calculations.
Chapter 14 FieldFlo Solution Control, on page 370, explains how to actually run
calculations and gives the background to the calculations.
Chapter 15 FieldFlo Output, on page 381, covers data output in terms of initial data input
and results of the computations made.
Chapter 16 FieldFlo Examples, on page 388, gives an example of using FieldFlo in a five
well field.
An overview of the whole of FieldFlo use is provided in this chapter, in Section What Is
Involved?, on page 305
12.3. FieldFlo Applications

FieldFlo solves all the problems mentioned above. However, FieldFlo does more than provide a
numerical solution to the problem. It is a highly interactive program, with a data handling system
that enables complex models to be built and analysed. Sensitivity cases can also be generated.
This allows field system design to be investigated.
12.3.1. Gas Lift Optimisation/Allocation Applications

Some of the allocation problems that are specifically addressed by FieldFlo are as follows:
Note: The amount of gas available for gas lift depends on the supply. Normally, in the case of
offshore fields the supply is the produced (associated) gas from the oil field. The same gas is
re-injected, and re-produced. The restriction comes from the fact that, in re-circulating this
constant gas volume, a large amount of energy is needed for compression. Normally, the gas
compressors are fired by the same associated gas supply; thus effectively the problem is one of
fuel gas for compression. However, even on land, where gas might be more readily available from
a nearby field, there is the trade-off between selling the gas and using it to power compressors.
The maximum oil rate will certainly not coincide with the maximum economic rate. This is
because the rate of increase of oil production per unit gas injected becomes very small as the
maximum oil rate is approached. Thus, a lot of extra gas may be needed for a small increase
in oil rate, which is not economically justifiable.
303
12. 2. This Section Of The Manual
The amount of gas required to reach maximum oil production for each well may not be
available, (see note), yet we still want to get the best oil production for the circumstances out
of the system.
The performance curve for a well varies with wellhead pressure, so to calculate the optimum
volume of gas required, the wellhead pressure must be known. This is possible only if each
well can be operated in isolation. In practice, especially offshore, wells are connected
together in networks, so that a change to any one part of the network affects the pressure
everywhere else. Thus, it is not possible to solve the gas allocation problem without
considering the whole system.
There may be external constraints stopping us achieving maximum oil production. For
example, there may be a limit on the total amount of gas that can be handled in the field,
because, for example, environmental regulations may not allow gas flaring, or there is no
external market for the gas. In this case, we will want to ensure that as much oil is produced
(or revenue generated) for the gas production limit specified, so the allocation must be made
on the basis of gas produced, not injected.
Due to gas production constraints, we may need to choke back some of the natural producers
with high GORs. FieldFlo will work within these limits and identify which wells need to be
choked back to stop these constraints being breached.
12.3.2. Field Modelling Applications

The field modelling uses that FieldFlo can be put to include the following:
Building a field model incrementally and controlling access to WellFlo in an efficient way.
Building a model using previously created WellFlo files, or using "prototype" (or "typical")
wells to approximate the real field in order to obtain quick estimates. This would be
especially useful for field-wide gas lift design exercises.
Changing single components in a field model - e.g. particular pipelines. This means that
"what if" sizing or configuration studies can be performed easily.
Changing the configuration of a field without major work to the model. Again, this is very
useful for design studies.
WellFlo is an essential part of FieldFlo, the two programs collectively forming FloSystem.
WellFlo can be used as a stand-alone well analysis tool, without invoking FieldFlo at all.
However, if you are working with a gas lifted field and are going to use FieldFlo, then WellFlo
will be used extensively both for setting up the field description and "behind the scenes" during
calculations. FieldFlo will control WellFlo for you during these operations, so that you need not
worry about which WellFlo function you are performing.
Figure 12.4.0 - 1, WellFlo - FieldFlo Interaction, on page 304 shows the schematic form of the
WellFlo-FieldFlo interaction.
WellFlo
Stand Alone
Mode
WellFlo
Set up Wells
FieldFlo
Control Of WellFlow
WellFlo
Well
Performance
WellFlo
Set up
Pipelines
WellFlo
Calculate Pipe
Pressure Drops
Figure : 12.4.0 - 1 WellFlo - FieldFlo Interaction
304
12. 3. 2. Field Modelling Applications
12.4. Use of WellFlo within FieldFlo
Referring to Figure 12.4.0 - 1, WellFlo - FieldFlo Interaction, on page 304, you can see that
there are five ways in which WellFlo can operate within FloSystem (the five boxes labelled
WellFlo..). One is a stand-alone mode, and four modes are entered via FieldFlo.
From a FieldFlo perspective, there are four WellFlo functions (the four lower WellFlo boxes).
Two of them are set-up modes, and two of them are calculation modes. They are as follows:
Well Set-up mode. This is used to set-up well descriptions in WellFlo data files. Any normal
WellFlo operation can be carried out, so that for example, fluid property and flow
correlations can be checked and matched against measured data. The data file as finally saved
will contain the well description to be used by FieldFlo for the performance curve generation
mode. This set-up mode could also be done outside FieldFlo, and the well data files later
incorporated into the FieldFlo system.
Well Performance Curve Generation mode. This mode is one in which WellFlo is
automatically controlled by FieldFlo to generate the tables of well performance data that will
be the basis of the gas lift allocation. The well models created in the previous mode are used,
and WellFlo itself is automatically controlled so that the appropriate tables are created. You
will not need to enter WellFlo yourself during this mode.
Note: The pipelines associated with each well, i.e. those before the point where the well
production commingles with that from other wells, are included in the well set-up. Only pipelines
between units need to be described as independent pipelines.
Pipeline Pressure drop mode. Here again, WellFlo is controlled by FieldFlo automatically,
and you will not enter WellFlo yourself. This is the mode that is used during the field-wide
optimisation and allocation procedures (Build and Allocate). The pressure drops are
calculated using the pipeline model you set up in the previous mode.
12.5. Setting Up / Running A Field Optimisation

This section is to provide a brief overview of what is required to set up a FieldFlo model and to
run it. Each of the following four sub-sections summarises the contents of the four chapters in
this section of the manual.
12.5.1. What Is Involved?

FieldFlo requires a description of the field structure, which is easy to assemble using the
graphical editor, and a set of data for each item in it. Gathering the data may take some time - e.g.
each well requires full inflow and completion data. Also it is crucial to realise that FieldFlo can
only be as good as its input data, and that each well model must be checked against test data (at
the IPR, PVT and flowing performance levels) in order to give a field optimisation that can be
treated with confidence.
Once the data is prepared, running FieldFlo is simple. There are very few control options to
wrestle with, and the results are quite clear. You will need some understanding of how the system
works though, in order to control the quality of the results.
Gathering the detailed data, and quality controlling it, is by far the most time-consuming
305
12. 5. Setting Up / Running A Field Optimisation
Pipeline Set-up mode. This is akin to the well set-up mode, but here we are concerned with
pipelines that link the various manifolds etc. together. WellFlo is used in a mode that is
restricted to pipeline configuration. Once again, you can run calculations here in order to
check the applicability of the chosen model. The final model you save is the one to be used in
the pressure drop calculations.
operation. How much time-consuming depends on the size of your field system and the facilities
for data storage and retrieval in your organisation.
12.5.2. Data Preparation

FieldFlo runs using a data set that consists of three main data types:
The overall system structure, i.e. "what is connected to what?" and "what type of objects are
they?". This is where you connect wells and units (i.e. manifolds, separators, etc.) together
using the graphical editor.
The detailed description of each item. This is handled by WellFlo models of each well and
each pipeline.
The control parameters for the whole system (pressures, etc.) must be input into FieldFlo.
12.5.3. Calculations
Once the field description is set up, there are two main stages to generating a lift gas allocation:
Generating tables of performance data spanning the field's actual operating conditions. This is
done in two stages:
-Well Performance Curve Generation, by the WellPCG function. This requires valid well
descriptions and a suitable range of wellhead pressures to be specified.
-Field Performance Curve Generation, by the Build function. This requires all the wells to
have valid performance data, and also for the field network to have all pipeline descriptions
complete.
Calculating the allocation of lift gas. This can only be done when performance curves have
been generated for the whole field. The Allocate function is then used. The parameters
controlling Allocate are the field operating conditions at a particular time (separator pressure,
gas availability and cost factor).
Neither stage requires very much input, once the data is ready. They do take some time to
compute however, so for this reason it is worth having a fast PC, and also having taken the
trouble to ensure you have entered valid data!
Once the performance curves for all points in the field have been established by Build, you can
run Allocate any number of times for different field operating constraints (available gas,
economic factor) without any need to rerun Build.
306
TOTAL SYSTEM INPUT DATA
Other
Other Well
Re-run WELLPCG if a
well model is
changed in any way,
to update its
performance curves
WellFlo Model
Field
Configuration
1.Well & Manifold
connection
WellPCG
2. Pipeline
Models
Well
Performance
Curves
Re-run BUILD if :
- WELLPCG is re-run
and/or
- Field Configuration is
changed
Re-run ALLOCATE if:

- BUILD is re-run
and/or
- Constraints are changed
Build
Field
Performance
Curves
Field Operating
Constraints
Allocate
Field Production
Prediction
Figure : 12.5.3 - 1 FieldFlo Data and Calculation Overview
However, if you make any alterations to the system that would change the performance curves of
any of the components (for instance, an increased pipeline length), you must run Build again so
that this change can be taken into account. This would require running WellPCG first to update
well performance curves if any alterations have been introduced to a well model (a reduction in
reservoir pressure, a modification to a well completion, etc.).
- WellPCG must be rerun if any changes are made to the well description through WellFlo.
- Build must be rerun if a well performance curve is changed, or if any alterations are made
to the surface system.
- Allocate must be rerun if a performance curve in any part of the field is changed, or if any
of the field operating constraints are varied.
12.5.4. Outputting Your Work

Output of the performance curves, and of the allocation data, is most easily done by graphics, and
a range of plots can be made. You can also generate listings in LOG files, which can be printed
out as the basis for allocations. These LOG files are saved, by default, to the current field
directory. To specify a different directory, select the Configure Preferences menu option to
generate a Set Preferences dialog and in the Directories section of the dialog, specify a new
directory path in the Log Files data field (refer to Configure Preferences, on page 308 and also
see Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17). The performance curves themselves can be pasted
into a Windows spreadsheet.
307
Figure 12.5.3 - 1, FieldFlo Data and Calculation Overview, on page 307 summarises these
rules:
12.6. Configure Menu
Figure : 12.6.0 - 1 Configure Menu
From the main Configure menu you can configure the units system you want to work in, and
some presentation and computation preferences.
12.6.1. Configure Units

This option provides a choice of oilfield and a number of SI units systems. Refer to Section
FloSystem Units System, on page 28 in the Basics section of this User Guide for details on
how to select different systems, to change units within a selected system, and to create your own
units.
12.6.2. Configure Preferences
Figure : 12.6.2 - 1 Set Preferences Dialog Box
Auto Load Field option automatically re-loads the last field you were working on at the end
of a previous session when a new session of FieldFlo is started up.
Monochrome is used to turn on/off the monochrome buttons on a color display card (i.e. the
nodes in the Drawing Window will be drawn in monochrome rather than grey). This is useful
if you are running FieldFlo on a portable monochrome PC that may not be able to display all
the colours distinctly. On a monochrome set-up this is automatically selected, but on LCD
portables installed for EGA or VGA color, the selection states are difficult to recognize in
color, so monochrome should be selected.
308
12. 6. Configure Menu
Selecting the Preferences option from the Configure menu brings up the dialog box shown in
Figure 12.6.2 - 1, Set Preferences Dialog Box, on page 308, which allows you to customise
FieldFlo's operation:
View Node Names selects a double-height box for the field nodes and allows the node name
to be displayed together with any other data chosen from the View menu. When unchecked
only the chosen data is displayed.
Report Detail options, Results and Minimal, allow you to select how much detail will be
put in the report files from the produced output of calculation options. Normally the Results
option will be used (See Section 15. 2 Outputting the Results of Calculations, on page 381).
The Minimal option will produce no output.
WellPcg Control section contains an input field and check field as described below:
Max kickoff GLRi - enter the maximum GLRi value that will be required to kick-off
production in most wells when using the WellPCG tool (See Section 14. 2. 1 Running Well
Performance Curve Generator (WellPCG), on page 375). A different value can be entered
for individual wells in the Edit Field Pressures dialog (see Section 13. 6. 1 Editing Well
Performance Data, on page 338).
Extend curve to high Qgi - checking this field activates a facility to specify an upper Qgi
limit for WellPCG curves in the Edit Field Pressures dialog (see Section 13. 6. 1 Editing
Well Performance Data, on page 338).
Directories section is used in conjunction with the Browsers section and contains two input
fields and a function button as described below:
Log Files - in this field, enter the name of a directory for the output of log files from the
various FieldFlo actions. This option is useful when the default directories may not have
write permission. To save typing or errors in typing, the Browse button in the Browsers
section (described below), can be used to select the required directory from a browser
window instead.
Units System - the edit field initially displays the installation directory from which the
FieldFlo units system is loaded. Before customizing the units system (See Section 12. 6. 1
Configure Units, on page 308), enter the name of a writable directory for a copy of the
installed units system. The Browse button in the Browsers section (described below), allows
the required directory to be selected from a browser window and the Update Units button
makes the copy.
12. 6. 2. Configure Preferences
Browsers section is used to select a type of log file for which a particular browser is to be
preferred over the default browser (i.e. WordPad), and enter a filename. The Browse button
allows the browser to be selected from a window instead.
309
FieldFlo System Description
Chapter 13- FieldFlo System Description

13.1. Overview of Field System Description
This chapter deals with the subject of setting up and storing the FieldFlo model, in terms of data
types, data preparation, storage and editing. This section provides a brief overview.
The first section of the chapter, Section FieldFlo Data, on page 310, deals with the types of
data involved. Most of these are entered in the graphical editor.
The next section Using The Graphical Editor, on page 313, covers the operation of the
graphical editor itself - how to move around and select objects in the field, and view different
types of data.
Two sections then deal with setting up a FieldFlo system, the section Setting Up and Editing
The Field Structure, on page 330, covers the field structure (what is connected to what), and
section Setting Up And Editing Wells And Pipelines, on page 336, covers the WellFlo
functions for describing wells and pipelines.
The editing of well performance data and the generation of well performance curves using
WellPCG are discussed in the section Editing Field Data, on page 337.
Lastly, the sections Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode, on page 360 and Batch Control File
for Updating L-Factors, on page 361, cover the options available for calibrating a model to field
data.
13.2. FieldFlo Data
FieldFlo data is stored as a System. A system contains the input, control and output data for an
entire field. Each system is stored in an individual DOS directory (long directory/file names are
not yet supported). Within the system, various files are used to store the different data sets - e.g.
WellFlo data files, system structure files, results files etc., FieldFlo will handle all these files for
you. However, it is important to know what data is required, and where you have to be in order to
enter or edit it.
FloSystem can operate under a number of different operating systems/platforms (Windows;
Windows 95/98/2000; Windows NT; UNIX). The files that are created within the program are by
default, saved in binary format. Different platforms however, have different binary formats
which results in the files from one system not being compatible with another. For instance a file
saved from a Windows version of the software could not be successfully read into the program
running on a UNIX machine. In order that previously created files and models can be transferred
between systems it is necessary to save the files in a common, ASCII format. This is described in
Section Recalling and Saving Fields, on page 316 and also in Section File Menu, on page 55
in the WellFlo section of this User Guide. Windows 95/98/2000/NT files can be read into the
same version of FieldFlo running under Windows 3.x, and vice versa.
In this section, data is divided into three types: input data, control data and output data. Each data
type is described in a following sub-section. The data save and recall options are described in the
next section, Section Using The Graphical Editor, on page 313.
310
Chapter 13 - FieldFlo System Description
13.2.1. Data Organisation - Overview

FieldFlo has to model the whole production of an oilfield system, from reservoir to separator, in
order to perform its optimisation. There are therefore several types of data involving both
WellFlo and FieldFlo (as explained in Section Use of WellFlo within FieldFlo, on page 304).
The main elements of the system description are:
Well data, in the form of WellFlo data files (.WFL).
Pipeline data, also in the form of WellFlo data files (.WFL).
Field structure data, in the form of the FieldFlo graphical representation (see Figure 13.3.2 1, Field Graphical Representation, on page 314).
For calculation, a few other control variables are needed, such as pressures and gas availability.
Output data takes the form of gas allocation and predicted production figures for each well, plus
graphics showing the actual allocation. There is also a LOG file for each calculation.
13.2.2. Input Data

Field Model Information
This is the general information about the field model - the name of the field, a description, the
creator, and the date and time the field was created. This information is entered when a new field
is created, or it can later be amended, in the New Field dialog box (see Figure 13.3.3 - 2, New
Field Dialog Box, on page 317). The information that you enter here is stored in a file called
NET.DEF in the current field directory.
Field Network
The field network is the logical structure of the field. Fields are built up of wells and units. The
term units means, for example, manifolds and separators, i.e. components that are not wells. The
structure is stored in the SYS.DEF file.
Wells In The Field

Wells, as described in Section Data Organisation - Overview, on page 310, are configured in
WellFlo and saved in a file with a .WFL extension. The well description covers all of the well,
starting from the reservoir, up to and including all its surface facilities to the point where it flows
into the manifold above it.
Pipelines, also described in Section Data Organisation - Overview, on page 310, are
configured in WellFlo and saved in a file with the .WFL extension. The pipeline description
pertaining to a unit covers all of the pipeline belonging to the unit, starting from the unit itself, up
to the point where it flows into the next manifold or separator above it.
13.2.3. Solution Control Data

To determine a solution, FieldFlo needs to know the pressures that the wells and units will work
at. Each well or unit can have data (in the form of performance curves) corresponding to up to
five pressures associated with it. These should span the expected operating range of pressures for
that pipeline or well.
311
13. 2. 2. Input Data
Pipelines In The Field

To enter this data into FieldFlo, see Section Editing Well Performance Data, on page 338 and
Section Editing Unit Performance Data, on page 348.
13.2.4. Calculated Data

Once your model is set up, you can perform calculations on it as described in Running The
Calculations, on page 375. This produces an evaluation of the system performance according to
your specified input data.
Well Performance Curves

This is an example set of performance curves for a well at the pressure values you set up for your
model:
Figure : 13.2.4 - 1 Well Performance Curves
This plot is obtained by following the procedures described in Section Editing Well
Performance Data, on page 338. The curves consist of lift gas Qgi versus produced Qoil tables for
a range of pressures. These well performance curves are generated using WellFlo. The WellPCG
function can be used to automatically invoke WellFlo from within FieldFlo to perform these
calculations (See Section 14. 2. 1 Running Well Performance Curve Generator (WellPCG), on
page 375).
A unit's performance curves are made up from the performance curves created for each of the
wells or units connected upstream of the unit. They look similar to those pictured in Table 13.2.4
- 1, Well Performance Curves, on page 312. The plot is obtained by following the procedure
described in Section 13. 6. 2 Editing Unit Performance Data, on page 348. Unit performance
curves are generated during the Build function.
Gas Allocation Data

After running Allocate (See Section 14. 1. 3 Allocate Calculation, on page 373), the gas
injected, gas produced, oil produced, total liquid produced, and various other properties at each
node in the field is calculated, and can be examined graphically, as described in Section
Viewing Production Data, on page 327.
312
13. 2. 4. Calculated Data
Unit Performance Curves

FloSystem Calculation Log Files
As a permanent record, the results of the calculations are output in a text format into LOG files.
These contain a description of the results of the calculations at each step in the tree, and can be
viewed and printed as described in Section 15. 2. 4 Results Menu, on page 384.
13.3. Using The Graphical Editor

This section is concerned with the use of the Graphical Editor. This will concentrate on its
functionality - how to move around the field, how to change views, etc. The actual operations
which are performed (using the Tools) are described in subsequent sections.
13.3.1. The Graphical Editor
Figure : 13.3.1 - 1 FieldFlo Graphical Editor
The menu items across the top of the window are basically arranged as follows:
File is for system saving, recalling, etc. See Section 13. 3. 3 Recalling and Saving Fields,
on page 316.
Edit & View are for moving within the field and changing the data view. See Section 13. 3. 5
Moving About In A Field Structure, on page 322, See Section 13. 3. 6 Selecting Items For
Actions, on page 323 and See Section 13. 3. 7 Viewing The Field Data, on page 324.
Tools is functionally the same as the Toolbox (See Section 13. 3. 4 The Toolbox, on page
321). This applies the various functions described in later sections.
Mask is a field structure editing device used for temporarily excluding components from the
calculations. See Section 13. 4. 2 Editing Wells, on page 335.
313
13. 3. Using The Graphical Editor
The representation of the field structure and the access to all actions performed on it are through
the Graphical Editor, which appears when you start FieldFlo (Figure 13.3.1 - 1, FieldFlo
Graphical Editor, on page 313).

Calculations is to access the different field solution functions, Build and Allocate. See
Section 14 FieldFlo Solution Control, on page 370.
Results is for viewing the log files of calculation results (See Section 15. 2. 4 Results
Menu, on page 384).
Configure is for changing the Units System - see See Section 4. 3 FloSystem Units System,
on page 28 in the Basics part of the manual - and altering other system-wide settings (See
Section 12. 6. 2 Configure Preferences, on page 308).
Exchange is to transfer results of Allocate to individual pipeline and well models.
Help is for accessing the Help system - See Section 4 Using the FloSystem Interface, on
page 27 in the Basics part of this manual.
13.3.2. Representation of the Field Structure

FieldFlo uses buttons (which can be selected) to represent the field structure. Lines between the
boxes represent physical connections (see Figure 13.3.2 - 1, Field Graphical Representation,
on page 314).
Figure : 13.3.2 - 1 Field Graphical Representation
The field is actually represented by a combination of wells and units. These are logically
different - you cannot swap a well into a unit or vice-versa.
Wells are gas, condensate or oil wells. A well extends from the reservoir to the point where
you put the first unit, which may be where it commingles with other wells. A well is the
whole of the system which you have modelled in WellFlo, so any flowlines you configured
there are automatically included in the well model in FieldFlo and do not need to be
declared again as separate items.
If you wish to have the flowline as a separate entity in the FieldFlo model, leave it out of the
WellFlo model. (The advantage of this is that the wellhead is then a discrete FieldFlo node,
and wellhead operating pressure can be accessed.)
314
13. 3. 2. Representation of the Field Structure
You can move around the field and select objects (the items represented by the buttons) by
clicking them with the mouse. (See Section 13. 3. 5 Moving About In A Field Structure, on
page 322 and See Section 13. 3. 6 Selecting Items For Actions, on page 323. You can perform
actions using the Tools (See Section 13. 3. 4 The Toolbox, on page 321).

A number of annotations are used in the well icons for easy reference (the significance of
what they represent is described later):
- Gas wells are differentiated from oil wells by the letter G in the top left corner.
- SPt indicates that the well performance is represented by a single flowrate at each operating
pressure, rather than a range of flowrates for different injection rates. This would apply to a
natural oil producer without gas lift, or with only one injection rate entered (i.e. single point
performance curves), and to Condensate/Volatile Oil wells.
- FxI indicates that an oil well with a full performance table specified has been (temporarily)
assigned a fixed gas injection rate for the Build and Allocate calculations. (Effectively the
same effect as SPt except that an SPt well has a single value in the performance table itself.)
-MxL means the well or unit has been constrained to a maximum liquid throughput for the
Build and Allocate calculations.
Units are all the other points in the field system where flow converges, or possibly where you
need an intermediate calculation point. A unit optionally includes the pipeline downstream
from itself (as far as the next unit). This is explained below.
Referring to Figure 13.3.2 - 1, Field Graphical Representation, on page 314, there are 5 wells
at the bottom. There are then 2 units at the next level up, named HEADER 1 and HEADER 2.
These units represent manifolds, to which the wells are connected as shown (in two commingled
groups). As explained above, the pipeline from each wellhead to the appropriate manifold is part
of the well description.
The two manifolds then flow to the next unit, named MANIFOLD, where the two streams
commingle. The pipeline from each HEADER to the MANIFOLD is part of the description of the
HEADER.
There are some rules for the connecting of wells and manifolds:
A maximum of 96 wells may be connected to any one unit. If you want to connect more than
96 wells to a manifold, then use dummy manifolds as shown below in Figure 12.3.2 - 2,
Using Two Dummy Units To Connect Wells To One Manifold.
By specifying no flowlines between the dummy units and the physical manifold, they will all
be at the same pressure and the model will be correct.
Figure : 13.3.2 - 2 Using Two Dummy Units To Connect Wells To One Manifold
It is not possible to connect units and wells to another unit: it must have either units or wells
as its children. To model a manifold where well flowlines and pipelines from another
manifold commingle, insert a dummy unit. For example, in Figure 13.3.2 - 3, Mixing Wells
and Manifolds, using a Dummy Unit, on page 316, to commingle the two wells and the
manifold at the unit called Junction, you have to insert a unit between the wells and the
required unit. This is the unit Dummy in the figure.
315
13. 3. 2. Representation of the Field Structure
From the MANIFOLD the commingled stream flows to the SEPARATOR unit. Again, the
pipeline connecting these two is part of the MANIFOLD description.
Figure : 13.3.2 - 3 Mixing Wells and Manifolds, using a Dummy Unit
You may have non-connected units only at the top level. These represent parallel separator
trains, and in the calculations, these may be modelled as having different operating pressures.
Below this level, all units and wells in each group must be joined. All wells must be
connected to units (again, to model a stand-alone well, use dummy units). Figure 13.3.2 - 4,
System With Parallel Separators, on page 316 shows a small system with two independent
separators.
13.3.3. Recalling and Saving Fields

As in WellFlo, all the field recalling and accessing routines are handled under the File menu item
(Figure 13.3.3 - 1, FieldFlo File Menu, on page 316).
Figure : 13.3.3 - 1 FieldFlo File Menu
316
13. 3. 3. Recalling and Saving Fields
Figure : 13.3.2 - 4 System With Parallel Separators

Although this menu looks similar to the WellFlo File menu, the important thing to note about
fields is that they are not single files, but rather a collection of files (a system) all in one subdirectory. For example, a system may consist of a SYS.DEF and NET.DEF to describe the field
structure, and for each well and unit there may be .WFL, .PCD and .TOT files. So in FieldFlo, the
File commands will work on directories rather than just a single file.
Also, because FieldFlo is dealing with a complete directory, you must select a directory to work
on, and you will not be able to have an (untitled) field like an (untitled) well in WellFlo.
File New
This option will start a minimal system, consisting of just a single separator, to which you can
add your field structure using the edit facilities.
If you perform the File New command and have made changes to your previous system, you are
asked if you want to save the changes to it, before making a new system.
The New Field dialog box will appear (Figure 13.3.3 - 2, New Field Dialog Box, on page 317).
You can do the following in the New Field Dialog Box:

Type the name of the new field that you want in the New Field Name edit box. This becomes
the name of the directory where the system data will be stored, and so must be DOS
compatible. FieldFlo supplies an automatically-numbered default, SYST000X, which you
can replace if you want with your own name, to a DOS maximum of 8 characters (plus an
optional 3-character extension following a dot).
In the figure, the field Gartmore is being created under the DOS name Gartmore.
Double-click an existing field in the Fields list box to overwrite an existing one. You will be
warned that you are about to overwrite an existing field.
Enter a new Field Name, Created By, and Description into the relevant fields. The Field
Name you enter here will be used in the FieldFlo screen Title Bar and therefore can be an
ordinary text string. You must enter a Field Name, but the other two are optional.
Change the master directory that you want to create the field under by pressing the Change
Directory button. The Change System Directory Dialog Box (Figure 13.3.3 - 3, Change
System Directory Dialog Box, on page 318) appears.
317
Figure : 13.3.3 - 2 New Field Dialog Box
Figure : 13.3.3 - 3 Change System Directory Dialog Box
You can do the following in the Change System Directory dialog box:
Type the name of the new master directory that you want in the Select Directory edit box.
or
change master directory by double-clicking on the directory name in the Directories list
box (the left-hand one).
The left hand Directories in: box lists all the directories under the selected master directory. The
Fields list box (on the right) picks out only those directories which are fields (by identifying
certain file types).
In Figure 13.3.3 - 3, Change System Directory Dialog Box, on page 318, c:\flosys\example is
the selected master directory. It contains five sub-directories. Only three of these are FloSystem
field directories, and these are listed on the right.
On clicking the OK button, you would return to the New Field dialog box display shown in
Figure 13.3.3 - 2, New Field Dialog Box, on page 317.
This option allows you to open a previously created field. The Open Field dialog box appears,
which is identical to the New Field dialog box (Figure 13.3.3 - 2, New Field Dialog Box, on
page 317), except for the title. You can use the dialog box in the same fashion, only this time you
must select a valid field name before exiting.
File Save
File Save simply saves the current field to disk, under the current name.
File Save As..

This option allows you to save a field under a new name. The Save Field As dialog box appears,
which is identical to the New Field dialog box (Figure 13.3.3 - 2, New Field Dialog Box, on
page 317), except for the title. You can use the dialog box in the same fashion as described for
File New.
Note: The Save As option in this context is more like a file (i.e. field) copy option. This is because
a field is a directory where files are created and modified in numerous places during the
operation of FieldFlo, so the Save As... command is backing up the current state of the field to a
newly named directory. You can then continue with modifications to the data in the current
directory, leaving the intermediate data safely backed up.
318
File Open

If you want to edit a copy of a field but ensure that the original version is left alone, you should
select the File Save As... option immediately after you perform File Open.
Saving ASCII Files

This facility is required if you wish to transfer an existing field model to a new operating system/
platform, for instance from Windows to UNIX. Under the File Save As... option you can select to
save the field model in ASCII form by checking the box, as shown in Figure 13.3.3 - 4, Saving
Files In ASCII Format, on page 319.
Figure : 13.3.3 - 4 Saving Files In ASCII Format
Note: This action does not affect the WellFlo files associated with the nodes in the model. Any
changes that are made to these files from FieldFlo are made by running WellFlo and similarly,
these files must be saved in ASCII format from WellFlo itself, again using the Save As... option,
see Section File Menu, on page 55 in the WellFlo section of this User Guide.
The *.TOT files that are saved in the model directory are used to plot the results of a completed
Allocate run. These files should not be transferred but the Allocate repeated in the new platform/
operating system.
Once the FieldFlo and WellFlo files have been saved in the ASCII format, they are simply copied
to an appropriate directory on the new machine or can be accessed from a different operating
system.
Note: FieldFlo will recognise the structure files *.DEX automatically and it is not necessary to resave these in the new binary format. However, it will look for WellFlo files which have the
extension *.WFL. Therefore it is necessary to re-save the ASCII WellFlo files (*.WFX) in the binary
format of the new operating system, again using File Save As... option within WellFlo and
selecting the correct file type.
319
This will result in the SYS.DEF and NET.DEF files associated with the model being saved in
ASCII format with the file extension *. DEX in the selected directory. It will also re-write the
performance curve files, *.PCD, in ASCII format, even if there have been no changes to the node
since the last save. In so doing any older binary stored curves are re-written in ASCII.

File Delete
This option allows you to delete an old field. The Delete Field dialog box appears, which is
identical to the New Field dialog box (Figure 13.3.3 - 2, New Field Dialog Box, on page 317),
except for the title. You can use the dialog box in the same fashion as described for File New.
Once you have made your selection of a valid system, you are warned twice before it is deleted.
This is because the FieldFlo directory structure requires FieldFlo to delete EVERY SINGLE
FILE in the selected directory, so be very careful with this option.
For example, if you decided for some reason to create a field in your Windows master directory,
and then File Delete this field, you would lose the whole of your Windows set-up! You have
been warned!
File Merge
This option allows you to combine networks or branches of networks that have been created as
separate files (and therefore exist as separate "fields").
After loading or creating one file, use the File Merge option to bring in the second and
subsequent files. The procedure each time is the same as for File Open. They will appear in the
Graphical Editor area as separate trees.
To join two branches together, decide on two nodes, one in each branch, that are to share a
common parent node. This parent node will be the one where the two branches will join together.
With the mouse, drag one of the two nodes over to the other and release the mouse button (in a
manner similar to Figure 13.4.1 - 11, Dragging a Unit, on page 334). You will then see a
Moving Unit dialog box (Figure 13.4.1 - 12, Move a Unit Dialog Box, on page 334) - you are
moving a complete tree. Select Left or Right, then OK. The two branches will now be joined at
the parent node.
File Page Setup, Print and Printer Setup
The File Print command used here produces a graphic of the field, i.e. a copy of what you see
inside the borders of the FieldFlo window (e.g. see Figure 13.3.1 - 1, FieldFlo Graphical
Editor, on page 313).
320
These options are fully described in Chapter 4 Using the FloSystem Interface, on page 27,
refer to this chapter for more information.

13.3.4. The Toolbox
Figure : 13.3.4 - 1 FieldFlo Toolbox
The last choice on the Tools menu (Figure 13.3.4 - 2, The Tools Menu, on page 321) is
Toolbox. When this is checked on, the Toolbox shown in Figure 13.3.4 - 1, FieldFlo Toolbox,
on page 321 will appear on the Graphical Editor screen, as in Figure 13.3.1 - 1, FieldFlo
Graphical Editor, on page 313. If you click the Toolbox option off in the Tools menu, the
Graphical Editor will not show the Toolbox. You can close the Toolbox, or move it, using the
System Menu and Title Bar, respectively (see the Basics part of this manual).
The Toolbox is functionally the same as the Tools menu (Figure 13.3.4 - 2, The Tools Menu,
on page 321), the eight main menu items corresponding to the eight Toolbox icons.
Whether to use the Toolbox or the menu is a matter of personal preference - most users will
probably find the Toolbox more convenient. Whatever choice you have made, it will be saved
when you exit FieldFlo, and will be the current set-up when you next start the program.
Figure : 13.3.4 - 2 The Tools Menu
To select several wells for the same operation, select the tool, then press the Ctrl key and click on
the wells. Still with Ctrl depressed, double-click on one of them to activate the tool.
The eight tools are:
WellFlo (top left of Toolbox) which runs WellFlo on the selected well(s). See Section 13. 5.
1 Setting up and Editing Wells Using WellFlo, on page 336. The mouse pointer changes to
Figure 13.5.1 - 1, WellFlo Tool Mouse Pointer / Icon, on page 336.
WellPCG (top right of Toolbox) which runs the well performance curve generator on the
selected well(s). See Section 14. 2. 1 Running Well Performance Curve Generator
(WellPCG), on page 375. The mouse pointer changes to Figure 14.2.1 - 1, WellPCG Mouse
Pointer / Icon, on page 375.
321
13. 3. 4. The Toolbox
The Toolbox and Tools menu allow you to select one of eight tools to perform actions on the
FieldFlo model. The choice of tool is made by clicking the required icon in the Toolbox, or the
option on the menu. In most cases, the mouse pointer will then change to be the same as the tool
icon in the Toolbox. Now double-click on the subject well or unit to activate the tool.

Edit Field Data (second row left of Toolbox), which is used to bring up the data at each
object in the field for editing. See Section 13. 6 Editing Field Data, on page 337. The
mouse pointer changes to Figure 13.6.0 - 1, Edit Field Data Tool, on page 337.
Edit Surface Facilities (second row right of Toolbox) which runs WellFlo on the selected
unit(s) in order to set up pipeline descriptions. See Section 13. 5. 2 Setting up and Editing
Surface Facilities Using WellFlo, on page 337.
Add Unit (third row left of Toolbox) which adds Units to the system, see Section
Representation of the Field Structure, on page 314 for a description of a Unit, see also
Section Setting Up and Editing The Field Structure, on page 330.
Add Well (third row right of Toolbox) which adds Wells to the system, again see Section
Representation of the Field Structure, on page 314 for a description of a Well, see also
Section Editing Wells, on page 335.
Test Data Matching (bottom left of Toolbox) can be used to calibrate the performance of a
selected well or wells by matching to measured production data (wellhead pressure,
flowrates, gas lift, etc.). See Section 13. 7 Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode, on page
360 and See Section 13. 6. 3 Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351.
Quick WellFlo Update (bottom right of toolbox) allows you to load a number of new values
into the description of a selected well or wells, without having to invoke the WellFlo tool.
The Update Production Variables dialog box will appear:
The parameters that can currently be updated are reservoir (layer) pressure, producing GOR,
producing water-cut and casing head pressure (for gas injection), ESP operating frequency.
Select each in turn from the drop-down list and enter the desired value - correct values must be
entered for each, as the defaults are nominal values only.
On clicking OK, the values will be written to each selected well file. You will then have to rerun
WellPCG to update the well performance curves, and re-run Build to update the nodes above
each modified well.
13.3.5. Moving About In A Field Structure

Using The Mouse
To move about the field structure with the mouse, you can use the scroll bars on the right or the
bottom of the Drawing Window. The Up/Down or Left/Right Arrows move you around the
picture by a few rows at a time. Clicking on the grey area above, below, left or right of the marker
moves you by about a screen at a time. By clicking on the marker on the scroll bar and dragging
it with the mouse you can select the exact position you want to view at.
322
13. 3. 5. Moving About In A Field Structure
Figure : 13.3.4 - 3 Quick WellFlo Update Dialog Box

Using The Keyboard
The keyboard can also be used to move about the window. The UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, LEFT
or RIGHT ARROW keys are equivalent to pressing the Up, Down, Left or Right arrows on
the window scroll bars. The PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN, CTRL+PAGE UP or CTRL+PAGE DOWN keys are
equivalent to clicking on the grey area above, below, left or right of the marker. There is no
equivalent to dragging the marker, but the HOME, END, CTRL+HOME or CTRL+END keys move you
to the extreme left, right, top left or bottom right of the drawing window.
ARROW
Figure : 13.3.5 - 1 Edit Menu Options
The Edit Goto command also provides a quick way of moving to a specific node in a large field.
On selecting the command (or using the shortcut key CTRL + G ) the dialog box shown in
Table 13.3.5 - 2, Goto Item Dialog Box, on page 323 appears:
Figure : 13.3.5 - 2 Goto Item Dialog Box
The Goto Item list box holds the names of all the nodes of the selected type in the field.
On selecting a node and pressing OK, you are returned to the Graphing Window with the selected
node centred on the screen.
13.3.6. Selecting Items For Actions

Before you decide what action you want to perform on a well (WellPCG, Edit Performance
Curves or whatever), you have to choose the nodes that you wish to perform your actions on.
This can be done by either the mouse or the keyboard.
323
13. 3. 6. Selecting Items For Actions
The Show option buttons, Wells, Units or Both, determine what sort of nodes appear in the
list. As it states, Wells will list only the wells, Units will list only the units, and Both will list
all nodes in the field.

Using The Mouse
To select an object with the mouse, you place the mouse cursor over the object and press the left
mouse button. This selects the object, and any other previously selected objects become deselected. If you want to select more than one object, then you hold down the CTRL key as you
select an object. This adds the new object to the list of selected objects. In Figure 13.3.6 - 1,
Representation of Selected Objects, on page 324, for example, two wells kick-off well and
non-lifted well have been selected.
Figure : 13.3.6 - 1 Representation of Selected Objects
Using The Keyboard

As with most things in Windows, the selection of objects can also be done with the keyboard. To
do this, you need to choose the Edit Select menu option. This brings up a dialog box like this:
The Select ID list box holds the names of all the nodes of the selected type in the field. This
list box is a multiple selection list box, so more than one can be highlighted, as you can see in
Figure 13.3.6 - 2, Select Item Dialog Box, on page 324. Any nodes that are already selected
in the field before you enter the dialog box are automatically highlighted in this list box.
The Show option buttons, Wells, Units or Both, determine what sort of nodes appear in the
list. As it states, Wells will list only the wells, Units will list only the units, and Both will list
all nodes in the field.
The Select All button selects all the fields in the Select ID list box. This is useful if you have
Show Wells active and want to perform WellPCG on all the wells.
The Deselect All button de-selects all the fields in the Select ID list box.
13.3.7. Viewing The Field Data

The data displayed on the nodes in the drawing window can be changed using the View menu
(Figure 13.3.7 - 1, View Menu, on page 325), allowing you, for example, to see graphically the
percentages of oil produced by the last run of Allocate.
324
13. 3. 7. Viewing The Field Data
Figure : 13.3.6 - 2 Select Item Dialog Box

The current viewing mode has a tick mark beside it (View Names in this example).
Figure : 13.3.7 - 1 View Menu
Figure : 13.3.7 - 2 Viewing Item Names
View Names is the default view mode which you will see when you start up FieldFlo.
This displays the names of the nodes in the node icons on the screen and, when you select a node,
the name is displayed in the node name window (bottom left of screen). In the above case the
well called FLOFB12 is selected. When adding a well or unit to the system, FieldFlo assigns
default names to the nodes of the form WL00000X or UN00000X respectively. These node names
can be changed to reflect real names in the system by editing the text in node name window.
Select the node for which you wish to change the name by clicking on it with the cursor, then
select the text either by clicking on node name window with the mouse, or pressing the TAB key.
You can now type in the new name, when finished click back on the main screen area; press TAB
again or press enter to update the icon name.
325
Viewing Item Names

Viewing File Names
Figure : 13.3.7 - 3 Viewing Data File Names
View Files displays the root name of the files that are associated with the nodes and, when you
select a node, the file name is shown in the node name window (bottom left of screen). For
example, the file associated to the node selected in Figure 13.3.7 - 2, Viewing Item Names, on
page 325 is illustrated in Figure 13.3.7 - 3, Viewing Data File Names, on page 326. In the same
way as nodes are automatically named, so FieldFlo will assign a default file name to each node.
This file name will also be of the form WL00000X for wells or UN00000X for units. This file name
can be changed by editing the text in this window, using the same method as described in Section
Viewing Item Names, on page 325.
Figure : 13.3.7 - 4 Rename Disk Files Message Box
When you change the file name at a node the prompt shown in Figure 13.3.7 - 4, Rename Disk
Files Message Box, on page 326 appears.
If you answer No to this, the node file name in the model is still changed, from FloFB11_ to
FloFB32_ in this case (the node name is FloFB11), and so FieldFlo will now look for files with
the name FloFB32 when it needs to. No other action is taken by FieldFlo, so any files with the
name FloFB11are left intact. If you are not happy with the new name press the Cancel button.
If you select Yes, any files in the directory with the name FloFB11_ will be renamed to
FloFB32_, including any performance curve files.
326
You are most likely to be renaming files when you are first creating a field model and you may
be wanting to link existing well models to the field model. The existence and/or location of these
files will affect how you respond to the following prompts that appear when you rename the file
associated with a node.

Note: If you are dealing with a new FieldFlo model and WL000001 has not been created (i.e. you
have not double-clicked on that node with the WellFlo tool) answering Yes here has the same
effect as answering No as there are no files to rename anyway.
If you selected Yes, FieldFlo will also check to ensure that the chosen file name, FloFB32 does
not already exist. If this file is found in the field model directory the following message will
appear:
Figure : 13.3.7 - 5 File Already Exists Message Box
Answering Yes at this prompt will then leave the files unchanged.
Renaming of nodes and file names is dealt with in the example in this section of the User Guide.
Note: If you are unsure about overwriting and if you have existing well models which you wish to
use, it is better to save these in a directory separate to the FieldFlo model directory until you have
renamed the nodes and assigned the appropriate file names to each node. If they are not in the
FieldFlo directory you need only choose the No response to the dialog shown in Figure 13.3.7 4, Rename Disk Files Message Box, on page 326. If this approach is taken, copy the files into
the FieldFlo directory (from Windows Explorer or My Computer) after the renaming has been
completed.
Similarly if you wish to swap between different well models, answer No to Figure 13.3.7 - 4,
Rename Disk Files Message Box, on page 326 and just change which file is used, no changes
are made to the actual files.
As well as viewing the item or data file names, you can view Production Data. This is only
possible when you have run Build and Allocate from the Calculations menu.
The following production quantities can be displayed as percentage or actual quantities:
Injection Gas
Produced Oil
Produced Water
Produced Total Liquids
Associated (i.e. Produced) Gas.
Total Gas - produced plus injected.
Revenue from produced fluids.
The following production ratios can be displayed:
GOR Produced (or WGR for gas wells)
GOR Associated (or WGR for gas wells)
Water Cut (set to 100% for gas wells)
327
Viewing Production Data

and the following pressures:
Flowing Pressure in each well
Operating Pressure at surface at each node.
Operating Temperature at each surface node
and the following ESP variables (Figure 13.3.7 - 7, ESP Variables Sub-Menu, on page 328):
Intake Pressure and Discharge Pressure in each ESP well
Power consumed and operating frequency in each ESP well
Figure : 13.3.7 - 6 Viewing Gas Injection By %
The ESP Variables sub-menu is illustrated below in Figure 13.3.7 - 7, ESP Variables SubMenu, on page 328.
Figure : 13.3.7 - 7 ESP Variables Sub-Menu
328
The screen illustrated in Figure 13.3.7 - 6, Viewing Gas Injection By %, on page 328 shows
you the percentage of gas that was injected to each well or unit in the system. The other options
which could be displayed are listed above. The percentage shown on each button is the
percentage in relation to its parent node, so each family of children connected to a unit should
add up to 100%. Integer rounding, though, may result in the total being one or two percent over
or under.
Figure : 13.3.7 - 8 Viewing Actual Production Data
The screen from the example in Figure 13.3.7 - 8 above, shows the actual amount of gas that was
injected to each well or unit in the system. The alternative display sub-menu options are also
shown (i.e. Percentage or Actual). The units of this display are not shown, but they will be the
units selected from the Configure menu under the Units System option.
Zooming In And Out
To get a better picture of the system, you can zoom in/out on the Drawing Window. View Zoom
In makes the picture bigger, View Zoom Out smaller. View Zoom Normal returns you to the
default size. As you zoom out, the amount of text that can fit on the button decreases, as shown
in Figure 13.3.7 - 9, Zooming Out The Field View, on page 329. The Drawing Window
performance is not affected by zooming in/out .
Figure : 13.3.7 - 9 Zooming Out The Field View
329
13.4. Setting Up and Editing The Field Structure

All the wells and units in a field can be added to, deleted from and moved about according to a
set of rules described in the following sections.
13.4.1. Editing Units

Units can either be added to the current system, deleted from it, or moved about the system. Each
of these actions will be explained in turn.
Adding Units
First the Add Unit tool is selected (Figure 13.4.1 - 1, Add Unit Tool Icon, on page 330). When
operating over the Drawing Window, the cursor changes into this shape.
Figure : 13.4.1 - 1 Add Unit Tool Icon
Figure : 13.4.1 - 2 Add Unit Dialog Box
The Item to Place buttons indicate the type of item/node that users are about to place as a
reminder. Unit will be highlighted.
The Place option buttons indicate where the new unit will appear in relation to the doubleclicked one. If the placing of the unit will violate a rule, the relevant direction will be greyed
out. Where the Unit will actually appear will become apparent in the following dialog boxes.
Placing Beside: Target Unit Name reminds users where they are about to place the item.
330
13. 4. Setting Up and Editing The Field Structure
To add a unit, FieldFlo requires information about the unit or well that a new item/node is to be
placed beside, by double-clicking on the relevant unit or well. This operation generates the
following dialog box:
Figure : 13.4.1 - 3 Add Unit Example: Start Condition
Figure : 13.4.1 - 4 Add Unit Example: Adding Above
Add Above puts the new unit - UN0 in Figure 13.4.1 - 4, Add Unit Example: Adding Above,
on page 331 - downstream (but physically above in the Drawing Window) of the selected unit
ONE. The original pipeline data (if any) associated with One remains, connecting ONE to UN0.
331
13. 4. 1. Editing Units
Figure 13.4.1 - 3, Add Unit Example: Start Condition, on page 331 is the starting condition for
the following descriptions of Place Above, Right, Below and Left. When you double-click the
unit named ONE, the following diagrams will indicate what happens.
Figure : 13.4.1 - 5 Add Unit Example: Adding Below
Add Below puts the new unit - UN0 in Figure 13.4.1 - 5, Add Unit Example: Adding Below,
on page 332 - upstream (but physically below in the Drawing Window) of the selected unit. The
pipeline data associated with ONE (if any) still connects ONE to MANIFOLD.
Add Left puts the new unit - UN0 in Figure 13.4.1 - 6, Adding Unit Example: Adding to Left,
on page 332 - directly to the left of the selected unit. The new unit is now an extra input into
MANIFOLD.
Similarly Add Right adds directly to the right of the selected unit. If Add Right was performed
on the original system (Figure 13.4.1 - 3, Add Unit Example: Start Condition, on page 331),
the third row of the field tree would read ONE, UN0, TWO.
Note: The order of the units or wells at any level is not important to the calculations - you can
impose any order you wish on the units and wells, as long as all the pipes flow into the right
separators.
332
Figure : 13.4.1 - 6 Adding Unit Example: Adding to Left
Figure : 13.4.1 - 7 Add Unit Error Message: Well Selected
Occasionally you might see an error message shown in Figure 13.4.1 - 7, Add Unit Error
Message: Well Selected, on page 333 (although it is more likely to occur when adding wells See Section 13. 4. 2 Editing Wells, on page 335). It means that the new unit (or well) cannot be
added beside the selected item. Check the placement rules, for example, a maximum of 24 nodes
per unit, or wells only allowed at the bottom of the tree. See Section 13. 3. 2 Representation of
the Field Structure, on page 314.
Deleting Units
Once you have added units to a tree, you can delete them. To do this, first select the units you
want to delete, as described in Section Selecting Items For Actions, on page 323, then select
Edit Delete (or press the keyboard shortcut DEL). For each unit you have selected, you will be
prompted in turn to confirm the deletion and, in certain cases, you can select the type of deletion
that you want.
For example, if you select UN0 in Figure 13.4.1 - 7, Add Unit Error Message: Well Selected,
on page 333, and select Edit Delete, the message box shown in Figure 13.4.1 - 8, Delete This
Node Message Box, on page 333 appears:
Figure : 13.4.1 - 8 Delete This Node Message Box
Select Yes to delete the unit, No to leave it there.
Figure : 13.4.1 - 9 Must Delete Children Message Box
You must delete all of the sub-field "children" here - if just the unit was removed, you would end
up with wells and units connected to the same manifold. Press OK if you are sure, and delete all
the "children", or Cancel if you do not want to delete anything.
If, in Figure 13.4.1 - 5, Add Unit Example: Adding Below, on page 332, you selected UN0 for
deletion, the message box that appears is shown in Figure 13.4.1 - 10, Delete All Children Also
Message Box, on page 334.
333
If, in the same diagram, you selected ONE for deletion, the message you would see would look
like this:
Figure : 13.4.1 - 10 Delete All Children Also Message Box
Here, the whole sub-field can be deleted leaving ONE with no wells connected to it by pressing
Yes, or just the unit can be deleted, by pressing No, moving the wells back up to where they
started off in Figure 13.4.1 - 3, Add Unit Example: Start Condition, on page 331. If you do not
want to make any changes, just select Cancel.
Moving Units
To move a unit, place the mouse over the unit, hold down the mouse button, and drag the unit
across to the new location. In Figure 13.4.1 - 11, Dragging a Unit, on page 334 for example,
the left most unit is being moved to a position beside the right most unit. Note the outline of the
left most unit has been moved onto the top of the right most unit.
Figure : 13.4.1 - 11 Dragging a Unit
When the mouse button is released, the following dialog box appears:
Figure : 13.4.1 - 12 Move a Unit Dialog Box
334

This is similar to the Add Item dialog box (Figure 13.4.1 - 2, Add Unit Dialog Box, on page
330), except in this case the Move Complete Tree (i.e. sub-field) is checked. Selecting OK
within the dialog box in this state will move the left most unit and the associated well to the right
of the former right most unit, as can be seen in Figure 13.4.1 - 13, After Move Unit, on page
335.
Figure : 13.4.1 - 13 After Move Unit
13.4.2. Editing Wells

Adding Wells
First the Add Well tool is selected (Figure 13.4.2 - 1, Add Well Tool Icon, on page 335). When
over the Drawing Window, the cursor changes into this shape too.
Figure : 13.4.2 - 1 Add Well Tool Icon
To add a well, as with adding a unit, you have to tell FieldFlo what unit or well you want to place
your new object beside, by double-clicking on the relevant unit or well.
The same rules as mentioned in Section Adding Units, on page 330 are applied to placing
items, but remember that wells can only be added Below units that have no other wells attached
to them, and can only be added to the Left or Right of other wells. (Once a unit has wells added,
you add further wells by adding them to the left or right of the existing wells).
Deleting Wells
The process for deleting wells is identical to that described for units in Section Deleting Units,
on page 333, except that you will only ever get the one type of message box on deletion, the one
pictured in Figure 13.4.1 - 8, Delete This Node Message Box, on page 333, as wells will never
have any children to delete.
335
13. 4. 2. Editing Wells
On double-clicking the unit, the same dialog box as in Figure 13.4.1 - 2, Add Unit Dialog Box,
on page 330 appears, only with the Place Well option selected, and the Add oil well check box
is active, and may be used to control whether gas or oil wells are added to the system. Turn the
Add oil well check box off to add a gas well to the system.

Moving Wells
Wells can be moved by the same means as described for units in Section Moving Units, on
page 334, except that the Move Complete Tree option in the Move Unit dialog box (Figure
13.4.1 - 12, Move a Unit Dialog Box, on page 334) will never be checked, as wells will never
have any children to delete.
Masking and Unmasking Wells

For field design reasons, you may want to see the effect of temporarily removing a well from a
system and re-running Build or Allocate. To do this you use the Mask menu, with the two suboptions Mask and Unmask.
First, you select the wells you want to mask as described in Section Selecting Items For
Actions, on page 323. Then, select the Mask menu and Mask to mask all the selected wells out,
or Mask Unmask to put them back into the system.
Once a well is masked out, it has a cross drawn through it and the text is lightened, as seen in
Figure 13.4.2 - 2, Symbol For Masked Wells (Left), on page 336:
A masked well does not take any part in any calculations (Build or Allocate).
Units may also be masked out, and if they are, no wells upstream of them will be used in any
future calculations. For example, in Figure 13.4.1 - 3, Add Unit Example: Start Condition, on
page 331, if unit TWO was masked, then Well 1 and Well A1 would not produce any oil during
future calculations.
13.5. Setting Up And Editing Wells And Pipelines

Wells and pipelines in FieldFlo are actually designed using WellFlo. You will not be aware of
having to start WellFlo, since FieldFlo handles this. However, you should read the WellFlo part
of the manual for more details on these operations.
13.5.1. Setting up and Editing Wells Using WellFlo

First, you have to select the WellFlo tool, from the Toolbox or use the Tools WellFlo command.
The mouse pointer will change to that shown in Figure 13.5.1 - 1, WellFlo Tool Mouse Pointer
/ Icon, on page 336.
Figure : 13.5.1 - 1 WellFlo Tool Mouse Pointer / Icon
336
13. 5. Setting Up And Editing Wells And Pipelines
Figure : 13.4.2 - 2 Symbol For Masked Wells (Left)

The hot-spot (the tip) of the pointer is the top of the derrick, so place that over the well you want
to work on, and double-click. FieldFlo will invoke WellFlo (starting it up if you haven't used
WellFlo before in this session), and you can proceed with designing the well. When you are
finished, select File Done from WellFlo, (the Exit on the menu is changed to Done to remind you
that you are actually in FieldFlo). This returns you to FieldFlo. Alternatively, you can close down
WellFlo with its system menu, and return to FieldFlo.
In the unlikely event that WellFlo should crash, FieldFlo will be left with a Please Wait window
active. To get back to normal after this, System Close the Please Wait window to abort the
process.
13.5.2. Setting up and Editing Surface Facilities Using WellFlo

First, you have to select the Edit Surface Facilities tool, from either the Toolbox or use the Tools
Edit Surface Facilities command. The mouse pointer will change to this shape:
Place the pointer over the unit you want to work on and double-click. FieldFlo will invoke a cutdown version of WellFlo (starting it up if you haven't used WellFlo before in this session) that
only allows you to edit surface components, and you can proceed to design the pipeline.
Note: You can select the horizontal flow correlation and L-factor calibration term via the
correlations option in the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box. All pressure gradients will be
multiplied by L (default 1.0).
When you have finished, select File Done from WellFlo, (again the Exit on the menu is changed
to Done to remind you that you are actually in FieldFlo). Alternatively, you can close down
WellFlo with its system menu. Save the changes at the prompt. You will then be returned to
FieldFlo.
In the unlikely event that WellFlo should crash, FieldFlo will be left with a Please Wait window
active. To get back to normal after this, System Close the Please Wait window to abort the
process.
13.6. Editing Field Data

After a calculation has been run (Chapter 14 FieldFlo Solution Control, on page 370) the
output results are held in well performance tables. These can be examined by selecting the Edit
Field Data tool, from either the Toolbox or use the Tools Edit Field Data command. The mouse
pointer will change to the default pointer shape.
Figure : 13.6.0 - 1 Edit Field Data Tool
Place the pointer over the node you want to work on, and double-click. A large dialog box will
appear. For a unit, this cannot be edited but for a well you can manually enter data as described
in the next section.
337
13. 5. 2. Setting up and Editing Surface Facilities Using WellFlo
Figure : 13.5.2 - 1 Edit Surface Facilities Mouse Pointer / Icon

13.6.1. Editing Well Performance Data
Performance Curve Pressures
As described above, double-clicking on a well brings up the Performance Curve Pressures
dialog box shown in Figure 13.6.1 - 1, Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box, on page 338.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 1 Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box
The Notes button will invoke the comments section of the WellFlo General Data dialog box for
a selected well or unit. This is described in Section General Data, on page 98 in the WellFlo
section of this User Guide. It permits you to add comments about the well or unit from within
FieldFlo. Note that the Ctrl+V and Ctrl+C Windows keyboard commands can be used to paste in
from, or copy out to, other applications (such as a word processor) via the ClipBoard.
The main function of the Performance Curve Pressures dialog box is to allow you to specify
the manifold operating pressures at which you want to calculate (or type in) the performance
tables for the wells connected to the manifold.
Note: The Manifold pressures you enter here will apply to all the connected wells, since their
tables must all be at the same set of pressures.
When the WellPcg Maximum GLRi box is checked, the value in the edit field will be used for
WellPCG on this well. When unchecked, the value in the same field in the Configure Preferences
dialog in 12. 6. 2 Configure Preferences, on page 308 will be displayed and used.
There is an input table for each of up to 5 surface pressures (i.e. 5 tables). The surface pressures
chosen (minimum 2) should span the expected operating pressure of the study. The program will
interpolate between supplied curves where necessary - extrapolation beyond the pressures
provided is less desirable and a warning will appear whenever this occurs.
The performance tables must then be calculated for each well using WellPCG - exit the screen
338
13. 6. 1. Editing Well Performance Data
The Test Data button is described in Section Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351.
It accesses a facility where you can calibrate the flow correlation for each well by matching
calculated wellhead flowing pressures to measured data. A scaling factor (L) is derived for each
well which can be applied to all subsequent vertical lift computations made by WellFlo. (An
alternative L-factor calibration mode using an external batch control file is described in
SectionBatch Control File for Updating L-Factors, on page 361)

via OK and see Section Running Well Performance Curve Generator (WellPCG), on page 375
or by manually entering data - select the Edit tables option and see below.
Alternatively, you may already have built tables corresponding to the pressures displayed. In this
case, use the Plot or Edit tables options to display or modify the data if you wish.
In the Build area of the dialog box:
Curve lists the table / curve number for each pressure.
Manifold pressure are manifold operating pressures (minimum two entries). These will be
written to the tables automatically.
Edit tables will take you to the well performance tables for the specified pressures. You can
then enter data or modify existing tables (See Section Editing Well Performance Curves,
on page 342) if you wish.
Note: The performance table data are only valid if they correspond to the currently specified
pressures.
Plot will graph the performance tables for the specified pressures, if they have already been
built. A similar Plot option is provided on each table screen. When this option is selected, you
get the dialog box in Figure 13.6.1 - 2, Select Plot Axes for Performance Curves Dialog
Box, on page 339, and can choose to plot either gas injected or gas produced on the X-axis
versus oil produced (or gas produced for gas wells) on the Y-axis. The Y-Axis group and
Stacked Graph check box only becomes active when viewing results of an allocation study See Section 15. 2 Outputting the Results of Calculations, on page 381 for details.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 2 Select Plot Axes for Performance Curves Dialog Box
Fixed Qgi, and Minimum Qgi, Maximum Qgi options under Qgi Range: You may only
constrain Qgi at wells. If you have already established well performance tables, and wish to
temporarily impose a limit on Qgi at a well, click these options and enter values in the boxes.
339
The R-Axis (right-hand axis) area contains options to plot data in addition to the production
rates: the well flowing pressures, or the incremental oil production per change in injected gas
(dQo/dQgi), or per change in produced gas (dQo/dQgp), depending on the X-axis choice.
Two plots produced from these options are shown in Figure 13.6.1 - 6, The same well with
produced gas rate Qgp as the X-axis, also showing the bottom-hole flowing pressure., on
page 341.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 3 Entering a Qgi Range for a Well
Fixed Qgi holds the well to a specified gas injection rate, and does not allow any other rate
(apart from zero). Minimum and Maximum Qgi constrain the injection rate above and/or
below specified limits (subject to satisfying the Minimum Pwf constraint). Fixed Qgi is only
enabled if both Min Qgi and Max Qgi are switched off (see below), and vice versa.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 4 Entering a Fixed Qgi Value for a Well
The well icon in the system editor will contain the letters FxI when Qgi has been fixed, or
LmI when a max and/or min Qgi has been imposed.
Minimum Pwf: this constraint will only allow flowing conditions where the bottom hole
flowing pressure exceeds the specified minimum. The well icon will contain the flag Pwf.
Qgi values that result in too low a Pwf will not be allowed, even if they are above any
specified Minimum Qgi.
None of these constraints are available for unit nodes.
Build and Allocate will read the liquid production rates and other properties corresponding to the
specified Qgi from the performance tables, interpolating where necessary.
The following Figure was obtained via the Plot option with a Fixed Qgi setting of 3.5 MMSCF/
day.
340
The Fixed Qgi facility can be used when history matching the entire network performance
against field data (See Section 14. 1. 4 History Match Calculation, on page 374). In this case,
Fixed Qgi values - corresponding to the actual gas injected - should be entered for all the gaslifted wells in the network.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 6 The same well with produced gas rate Qgp as the X-axis, also showing the
bottom-hole flowing pressure.
341
Figure : 13.6.1 - 5 Well performance curves vs gas injection rate, including dQo/dQgi. This well
has a Fixed Qgi of 3.5 MMSCF/day.

Maximum liquid production: You may impose a maximum liquid throughput at a well (this
is also available for units):
Figure : 13.6.1 - 7 Entering Maximum Liquid Production
The well (or unit) icon in the system editor will contain the letters MxL when this constraint has
been imposed. The other throughput constraints are disabled for well nodes.
In the Allocate area of the dialog box:
The pressure displayed (if any) corresponds to the operating pressure at the manifold
calculated on the last run of Allocate (if made). This cannot be edited as it is a result.
The View Table button will display the calculated performance table data for this pressure.
(This is also accessible from within the performance tables by paging to the sixth table using
the Next curve button).
When you click OK to exit the Performance Curve Pressures dialog box, you will return to the
system graphical representation screen.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 8 Pressure Changed Warning Message
Click Cancel if you do not wish to exit the screen. You could then reset the manifold pressures to
their former values.
Click OK to retain the new values. You will need to run WellPCG to generate updated table data
appropriate to the new pressure(s). If you have typed in updated data instead, ignore the warning
message.
Since the new pressures apply to all wells connected to the manifold, you will need to generate
updated tables with WellPCG for them all (or type them in).
Editing Well Performance Curves

As indicated above in Section Performance Curve Pressures, on page 338, clicking Edit Tables
takes you to the well performance tables for the specified pressures. Here you can enter data or
modify existing tables if you wish. (See Figure 13.6.1 - 10, Performance table for a natural
producer with gas lift., on page 345). Use the Next Curve button to move between tables.
342
A warning message will appear if you have changed any Manifold Pressure from its former
setting (see Figure 13.6.1 - 8, Pressure Changed Warning Message, on page 342). This is
because the performance table data will no longer be valid and must be updated. The exception
here is if the pressures were all zero to start with, which would be the case if you were setting up
a new system.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 9 Performance table for a well requiring gas lift for initial kick-off
Since well performance tables can be edited, you could present any well to FieldFlo by typing in
the relevant production and gas lift data here, instead of calculating it with WellPCG.
The first column of data can be toggled between GLR inj and Q
by pressing the Qg inj
g inj
button (and vice versa). Similarly, Oil Rate can be switched to Liq Rate.
The seventh column of data can be toggled between showing the bottom-hole flowing pressure,
Pwf and the wellhead temperature, Twh. The incremental oil payback dQo/dQgi are also listed.
If you are editing data, Pwf is an optional input (listed automatically when you run WellPCG).
dQo/dQgi is computed from the oil production and gas injection columns.
The injection data need not be evenly spaced, but should cover the full range of interest, to just
beyond the value giving the maximum production rate if possible. This is automatically
performed if you generate the tables using WellPCG.
The Pressure field at the bottom cannot be edited here - return to the previous screen to
change operating pressures.
The Next Curve button will step you through the tables for each operating pressure (max 5).
Note: If you have run Build and Allocate, you will find a sixth table. This is the performance curve
at the actual operating pressure calculated by Allocate. This is only non-zero when Allocate has
been run, and will be reset to zero (and its table cleared) each time a new run of Build is made.
343
However, note that manually editing the data is DANGEROUS - it is much safer to design the
well in WellFlo and run WellPCG (See Section 14. 1. 1 Well Performance Curve Calculations,
on page 370) on the well data to produce the tables. This is because FieldFlo cannot know
whether tables you type in are valid or not. Using WellPCG, range checks are made during
calculation. We recommend that you only use manual entry for wells you cannot model with
WellFlo.

The Plot button produces a graph of the performance curves of the well, Qo vs Qgi or Qgp, at
the pressures specified, as seen in Figure 13.6.1 - 6, The same well with produced gas rate
Qgp as the X-axis, also showing the bottom-hole flowing pressure., on page 341. The same
options are available as for the Plot button on the main Performance Curve Pressures
dialog box, described previously.
The Calculate button interpolates the curves down to six points, useful if you have manually
entered more than that number of points. (6 is the number required internally for the
computations.)
The Copy and Paste buttons copy the performance curve tables (one table at a time) to and
from the Windows ClipBoard. This is useful for copying sets of data from one well to
another, or to another Windows application (e.g. a spreadsheet for more analysis).
There are five types of well which can be modelled with these performance data tables:
Non-naturally producing - needs gas lift for start-up:
The table will start with a production rate entry for a non-zero Qgi or GLRi. This should be close
to the exact kick-off point for that particular surface pressure if the tables have been generated by
WellPCG. The rest of the table will be the production figures for increasing gas lift, see Figure
13.6.1 - 9, Performance table for a well requiring gas lift for initial kick-off, on page 343.
Naturally producing - with gas lift:
Each table will start with a production rate entry for zero Qgi or GLRi representing the non-lift
production for that particular surface pressure. The rest of the table will be the production figures
for increasing gas lift, see Figure 13.6.1 - 10, Performance table for a natural producer with gas
lift., on page 345.
Each table will consist of a single production rate entry at zero Qgi or GLRi, representing the
natural production at that particular surface pressure. There will be no other entries in the table.
See Figure 13.6.1 - 11, Performance table for a natural producer without gas lift, on page 345.
The flag SPt will be displayed in the well icon in the system editor.
Fixed gas injection:
For each surface pressure, the table will consist of a single production rate with a single Qgi or
GLRi. Different values can of course be entered for each pressure. This represents a well where
for practical reasons the lift gas injection must be kept fixed. See Figure 13.6.1 - 12,
Performance table for well on fixed gas injection, specified as a single point, on page 345. The
flag SPt will be displayed in the well icon in the system editor.
A similar configuration can be achieved for a well with a full performance table at each pressure,
by switching on the Fixed Qgi button and imposing an injection rate (Figure 13.6.1 - 4, Entering
a Fixed Qgi Value for a Well, on page 340). The flag FxI will be displayed in the well icon in
the system editor. This option imposes the same Qgi at all operating pressures.
344
Naturally producing - without gas lift:

Gas wells:
These tables will consist of a single row with a Qgp, Qw, WGR, and the gravities of these phases.
These wells can be selected by unchecking the Oil well performance curve box in Figure 13.6.1
- 1, Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box, on page 338, or automatically by designing a
gas well using the WellFlo tool (See Section 13. 5. 1 Setting up and Editing Wells Using
WellFlo, on page 336). The flag G will be displayed in the well icon in the system editor.
The operation of the buttons on the dialog box in Figure 13.6.1 - 13, Performance table for a gas
well, on page 346 is similar to that for oil wells. These curves can be produced automatically by
WellPCG.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 11 Performance table for a natural producer without gas lift
Figure : 13.6.1 - 12 Performance table for well on fixed gas injection, specified as a single point
345
Figure : 13.6.1 - 10 Performance table for a natural producer with gas lift.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 13 Performance table for a gas well
The plots of these well types appear as follows:

Figure 13.6.1 - 14, Performance curves for a naturally producing well requiring a minimum gas
lift to start up, on page 346 is a plot of well performance curves (each corresponding to a
different surface pressure) for a well requiring a minimum quantity of gas to flow in a stable
manner.
Figure 13.6.1 - 6, The same well with produced gas rate Qgp as the X-axis, also showing the
bottom-hole flowing pressure., on page 341 is a plot of well performance curves for a naturally
producing well with gas lift (this plot shows curves for well flowing pressure as well as the
standard producing rates).
Figure 13.6.1 - 15, Performance curves for a naturally producing well without gas lift, on page
347 is a plot of well performance curves for a non-lifted naturally producing well.
Figure 13.6.1 - 16, Performance curves for a well with fixed gas injection, plotted by gas
produced, on page 347 is a plot of well performance curves for a well with a fixed allocation of
lift gas at each operating pressure.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 14 Performance curves for a naturally producing well requiring a minimum gas
lift to start up
346
Figure 13.6.1 - 17, Performance curves for a gas well, on page 348 is a plot of well
performance curves for a gas well.
Figure : 13.6.1 - 15 Performance curves for a naturally producing well without gas lift
Figure : 13.6.1 - 16 Performance curves for a well with fixed gas injection, plotted by gas
produced
347
Figure : 13.6.1 - 17 Performance curves for a gas well
Note that the well in Figure 13.6.1 - 5, Well performance curves vs gas injection rate, including
dQo/dQgi. This well has a Fixed Qgi of 3.5 MMSCF/day., on page 341 is naturally producing
with gas lift and has performance tables spanning a wide range of lift gas rates. In the figure, an
arbitrary fixed Qgi has been (temporarily) imposed for a forthcoming Build/Allocate run. This
fixes Qgi at the same value in each table (i.e. at all operating pressures).
The well in Figure 13.6.1 - 16, Performance curves for a well with fixed gas injection, plotted
by gas produced, on page 347, which might also be a natural producer, has a fixed allocation of
lift gas at each operating pressure, and has been represented by a single point entry in the table
for each pressure. (These injection rates may be different in each table.) Performance data on
either side of the specified injection rates has not been entered.
A unit Performance Curve Pressures dialog box (see Figure 13.6.2 - 1, Unit Pressure Entry
Dialog Box, on page 349) will appear when you double-click on a unit with the Edit Field Data
tool. This screen is similar to the equivalent dialog box for wells (See Section 13. 6. 1 Editing
Well Performance Data, on page 338).
348
13. 6. 2. Editing Unit Performance Data
13.6.2. Editing Unit Performance Data
Figure : 13.6.2 - 1 Unit Pressure Entry Dialog Box
The function of this screen is to allow you to specify the operating pressures at which you want
Build to calculate the performance tables for the selected unit, and to impose optional constraints
on production. These pressures need not be the same as the pressures of the children (wells, or
other units), connected upstream of this unit, and would normally span a similar, or lower, range,
depending on the expected pressure losses along the intervening flowlines.
The Unit Pressures you enter here will also apply to any other units commingled with the
selected one (i.e. sharing a common parent further downstream), since their tables must all be at
the same set of pressures.
The performance tables will be calculated for each unit when Build is run (exit the screen via OK
and see Section Build Calculation, on page 371).
The Notes button will invoke the comments section of the WellFlo General Data dialog box for
a selected well or unit. This is described in Section General Data, on page 98 in the WellFlo
section of this User Guide. It permits you to add comments about the well or unit from within
FieldFlo. Note that the Ctrl+V and Ctrl+C Windows keyboard commands can be used to paste in
from, or copy out to, other applications (such as a word processor) via the ClipBoard.
In the Build area of the dialog box:
Curve lists the table / curve number for each pressure.
Unit pressure enter parent unit operating pressures (minimum two entries). These will be
written to the tables automatically.
View Tables will take you to the unit performance tables (if built) for the specified pressures.
These tables cannot be edited - they are results, not input. They are the same as for wells (see
previous section for details), except that the Pwf flowing pressure column is always left at
zero.
Note: The performance table data is only valid if it corresponds to the currently specified
operating pressures. If you change the pressures, you should rerun Build to update the tables.
349
Alternatively, you may already have built tables corresponding to the pressures displayed. In this
case, use the Plot or View Tables options to display the data if you wish.

The Plot button produces a graph of the performance curves of the unit - Qgi or Qgp versus
Qo, with the option to display dQo/dQgi or dQo/dQgp - at the pressures specified.
Figure : 13.6.2 - 2 Computed performance curves for a unit (manifold)
Maximum production rates: maximum throughputs of water, oil, total liquid and/or total gas
at the unit node can be imposed here. These constraints will be taken into account during an
Allocate run. The flags MxW, MxO, MxL or MxG will appear in the unit icon in the system
diagram when any of these is invoked.
Pressure: (if any) corresponds to the operating pressure at the parent unit calculated on the
last run of Allocate (if made). This cannot be edited as it is a result.
View Table will display the calculated performance table data for the indicated pressure.
(This is also accessible from within the performance tables by paging to the sixth table using
the Next curve button).
Plot will graph the gas allocation and liquid production rates computed by Allocate, if it has
been run. These plots are described in Section Gas versus Gas, Oil or Revenue per Child,
on page 382. A similar Plot option is provided on the sixth performance table screen (See
Section 13. 6. 2 Editing Unit Performance Data, on page 348).
The Oil well performance curve check box is inactive because it is automatically determined
when calculations are performed - if all the children are gas wells or units, then the unit itself is a
gas unit, but if any children are oil, then the unit too is oil.
When you click OK to exit the Performance Curve Pressures dialog box, you will return to the
system graphical representation screen.
350
Note: The Min, Max and Fixed Qgi options are not currently available for a unit.
In the Allocate area of the dialog box:

If you have altered one of more of the Unit Pressures from its former setting, a warning message
will appear (see Figure 13.6.2 - 3, Unit Pressure Change Warning Message, on page 351. This
is because the performance table data will no longer be valid and must be updated. The exception
here is if the pressures were all zero to start with, which would be the case if you were setting up
a new system.
Figure : 13.6.2 - 3 Unit Pressure Change Warning Message
Click Cancel if you do not wish to exit the screen. You could then reset the unit pressures to their
former values.
Click OK to retain the new values. You will need to run Build to generate updated table data
appropriate to the new pressure(s). This will take care of all units connected to the parent node.
To edit a unit's performance data, double-click on the unit as before. A dialog box identical to
Figure 13.6.1 - 10, Performance table for a natural producer with gas lift., on page 345 (or
Figure 13.6.1 - 13, Performance table for a gas well, on page 346 for gas units) appears, except
that the columns of data cannot be edited, as these tables are calculated from the composite
performance of the upstream nodes. As for wells, the first column, GLR inj, can be toggled to
show Qg inj by pressing the Qg Inj button, and similarly, the Liq Rate can be toggled to show
Oil Rate. Both columns can be toggled back again.
Note: The sixth pressure table is the performance curve of the unit at the actual operating
pressure calculated by Allocate.
The Plot button produces a graph of the composite performance of the unit, Qgi or Qgp versus
Qo, at the pressures calculated, as seen in Figure 13.2.4 - 1, Well Performance Curves, on
page 312. See Section 15. 2. 2 Unit Performance Curves, on page 382 for more details of
performance curve output.
The Calculate button is always greyed out as this data cannot be edited (it is a calculated
table).
The Copy button copies the performance curve tables to the Windows ClipBoard (one
pressure at once). This is useful for copying sets of data from a unit to another Windows
application (e.g. a spreadsheet for more analysis). You cannot Paste into a unit's data table (it
is a calculated table).
13.6.3. Calibrating Well Performance Data

Before running WellPCG to compute the well performance curves (See Section 14. 1. 1 Well
Performance Curve Calculations, on page 370), you may wish to calibrate the flow correlation
against field data.
This can be done in batch mode (like WellPCG) using the Lf icon in the toolbox (See Section 13.
3. 4 The Toolbox, on page 321 and See Section 13. 7 Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode,
on page 360), or on individual wells via the Test Data button on the Performance Curve
Pressures dialog box (Figure 13.6.1 - 1, Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box, on page
338) for a selected well.
351
13. 6. 3. Calibrating Well Performance Data
The Pressure field cannot be edited.

This section deals with the Test Data button, which will take you to the Test Data screen:
Figure : 13.6.3 - 1 Test Data Screen
Principle of calibration
You can enter up to 64 sets of test data for a selected well. Each test data set consists of a gas
injection rate, the measured wellhead flowing pressure, (presently assumed to be at the Xmas
Tree) and oil, water and total liquid production rates. Any or all of the test data sets can be
selected for matching.
If more than one test data set has been selected for matching, an L-factor can be calculated
independently for each set (matching each to its measured wellhead pressure). You can do this
for just one, several or all of the test sets. The average of the L-factors is then taken, and all of the
pressure drops are re-computed using this average. The final wellhead pressure is displayed for
each test set, along with percentage errors and standard deviations relative to the field data.
Having established the best average L-factor for the well, WellPCG should be run (or re-run) to
generate the corresponding well performance curves (See Section 14. 1. 1 Well Performance
Curve Calculations, on page 370).
This L-factor can be transferred to the .WFL well file to become a part of the well data, and will
be permanently associated with the flow correlations (Table 7.2.4 - 1, Nodal Analysis
Correlations Dialog Box, on page 183).
Facilities are also provided in WellFlo itself to experiment with the L-factor as a sensitivity, to
study its effects on the flow correlation (See Section 7. 5 Sensitivity Analysis, on page 193).
352
For each selected data set, WellFlo is invoked in pressure drop mode to compute the wellhead
pressure for the specified Qgi, Pwh and Qliq, working bottom-up starting from reservoir pressure.
A single multiplier L is applied to the computed pressure gradients in all calculation segments up
the well so as to make the calculated wellhead pressure match the measured value to within a
tight tolerance. The optimum L is determined by iteration.

Test data entry
You must enter test data here, whether you are going to use the L-factor Toolbox icon for batch
mode calibration or proceed on a well-by-well basis using the Test Data button.
Figure : 13.6.3 - 2 Test data entry
In the Test data area of the dialog box, enter the following data in the left-hand half:
Test: identifying number for the test (any number between 0 and 999999, not necessarily
sequential). A maximum of 64 entries is permitted.
Gas injected: the measured gas injection rate (Qgi).
Pxmas Meas: the measured wellhead flowing pressure (assumed in the current version to be
at the Xmas Tree node).
GOR: enter the produced GOR measured on the test, or leave the column blank to assume the
value according to the current IPR model in the well file.
Enter any two of the following - the third will be initialised automatically:
Oil Prod: the measured oil production rate.
Water prod: the measured water production rate.
Liquid Prod: the measured total liquid production rate.
To select a test to match, double-click in its Oil Calc'd box in the right-hand half of the Test data
area. The entire line will become blue.
Figure : 13.6.3 - 3 Selecting a Single Test Data Set (Test 3) for Matching
You can select one or several (or all) tests in this way. Double-click again to deselect a test.
Note: If you are going to use the L-factor Toolbox icon for batch mode calibration, you should
OK from the dialog box at this stage. Then set up the test data in the same way for all wells to be
calibrated, and go to the Toolbox (See Section 13. 3. 4 The Toolbox, on page 321 and See
Section 13. 7 Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode, on page 360).
If you are not going to use batch mode, continue as described below.
Now click the Calculate L Factor button.
353
Test data matching

If you get this message immediately....
Figure : 13.6.3 - 4 Calibration Aborted Message
....you have either not entered any test data, or have forgotten to highlight at least one set. Rectify
and proceed.
Figure : 13.6.3 - 5 Results of Match to Test Data (Test 3)
When L-factors have been determined for all selected tests, the average is computed and all the
wellhead pressures are re-computed using this averaged L in the place of the individual Lfactors. The resulting wellhead pressures ( Pxmas Average) are displayed next to the Average L
in the right-hand section of the Matching data area (Figure 13.6.3 - 5, Results of Match to Test
Data (Test 3), on page 354). These should be compared with the measured Pxmas Meas in the
left-hand section.
In the figure, since only one test was selected for matching, the average L is the same as the
individual L. The corresponding matched wellhead pressure is 247.455 psia (compared to 242
psia measured).
A nodal analysis is then run (automatically) for each set of test conditions, using the average Lfactor as a pressure gradient multiplier, and new operating points are determined. The new total
liquid rates at these operating points are listed in the left-hand part of the Test data area, along
with the constituent oil and water rates, for comparison with the measured rates (Figure 13.6.3 6, Average L Used to Re-compute All Tests, on page 354).
Figure : 13.6.3 - 6 Average L Used to Re-compute All Tests
If, in the example above, all three sets of test data were used for the match, an average L-factor
of 0.9917 would be computed, this being the average of the three individual L-factors.
354
The program will now iterate on an L-factor for each selected test in turn. In Figure 13.6.3 - 5,
Results of Match to Test Data (Test 3), on page 354, the L-factor for test 3 was 0.9937,
indicating that a less than 1% decrease in computed pressure gradients was required to match the
measured wellhead pressure.
Figure : 13.6.3 - 7 Match Results Based on All Tests
Computed parameters
The quantities appearing in the two screen areas following the matching operation are defined as
follows:
Match data area
Depending on your screen resolution, you may have to scroll left-right to see all of these:
Gas injected: measured gas injection rate (same as test data).
Oil prod: measured oil production rate (same as test data).
Water prod: measured water production rate (same as test data).
Liquid prod: measured total liquid production rate (same as test data).
Pwf Test: sandface flowing pressure corresponding to the measured total liquid rate
(calculated from the IPR curve).
Pxmas Meas: measured wellhead pressure (same as test data).
Pres Drop: difference between Pwf Test and Pxmas Meas. This is effectively the
"measured" sandface-to-wellhead pressure drop.
L-factor: individual L-factor computed for each test.
L error: % error between the measured Pres Drop and the pressure drop calculated with the
L-factor. This is rarely zero because the iterations on L are terminated when a tolerance
factor* is satisfied.
* Tolerance factor: when the difference between computed Pxmas and measured Pxmas is
less than 0.04% of the measured pressure drop (Pres Drop), or 0.04% of measured Pxmas
(Pxmas Meas) itself, whichever is the greater.
Average L: the average of all the individual L-factors.
Pxmas Average: the wellhead pressure re-computed using the Average L (bottom-up,
starting from the reservoir).
355

Pdrop Error: % error between the sandface-to-wellhead pressure drop Pdrop Average
(computed with Average L), and the measured Pres Drop.
Pdrop Average: sandface-to-wellhead pressure drop computed with Average L (the
difference between Pres Drop and Pxmas Average).
Listed below the Match data panel are:

Average L factor: same as Average L above.
Arithmetic Error: arithmetic average of the pressure drop errors: (Pdrop Average Pres
Drop) /n.
Absolute Error: average of the absolute pressure drop errors: (Pdrop Average Pres
Drop) /n.
Standard Deviation: root mean of the squares of the individual absolute pressure drop errors
relative to the average Absolute Error.
Test data area
Depending on your screen resolution, you may have to scroll left-right to see all of these:
Gas injected: measured gas injection rate (input data).
Pxmas Meas: measured wellhead flowing pressure (input data)
Oil Prod: measured oil production rate (input data).
Water Prod: measured water production rate (input data).
Oil Calc'd: oil production rate calculated from total liquid rate (Liquid Calc'd), respecting
the water cut specified in the input test data.
Water Calc'd: water production rate calculated from total liquid rate (Liquid Calc'd)
respecting the water cut specified in the input test data.
Liquid Calc'd: total liquid production rate at the operating point determined by nodal
analysis using the Average L Factor as multiplier on the pressure gradients.
Liquid Error: % error between Liquid Calc'd and measured Liquid Prod.
Oil Diff: difference between Oil Prod and Oil Calc'd.
Water Diff: difference between Water Prod and Water Calc'd.
Liquid Diff: difference between Liquid Prod and Liquid Calc'd.
356
Liquid Prod: measured total liquid production rate (input data).

Listed below the Test data panel:
Arithmetic Error: arithmetic average of the liquid production rate errors: (Liquid Calc'd
Liquid Prod) /n
Absolute Error: average of the absolute liquid production rate errors: (Liquid Calc'd
Liquid Prod) /n.
Standard Deviation: root mean of the squares of the individual absolute liquid production
rate errors relative to the average Absolute Error.
Notes:
(1) The L-factor and nodal calculations use all of the settings in the .WFL well file with the
following exceptions (temporarily, for the purpose of the calibration - no permanent changes
are made to the well file):
- base-case water cut(s) specified in the Fluid Parameters are ignored, and the water cuts
implicit in the test data (Water Prod / Liquid Prod) are imposed for each test,
- forced gas entry is switched on
- if fewer than 3 flowrates have been specified in Nodal Analysis Control, the auto-range
flowrate values are substituted. Otherwise the actual rates will be used.
(2) For a multi-layered reservoir, the water cut implicit in the test data (Water Prod / Liquid
Prod) is imposed on all layers instead of the base-case water cut(s) specified in the Fluid
Parameters. This gives improved vertical lift computation (by taking into account actual test
conditions) at the expense of a slight inaccuracy in the inflow term where the total test water
cut differs significantly from the base-case values per layer.
Transfer of L-Factor to WellFlo
Figure : 13.6.3 - 8 Transfer of the L-Factor to WellFlo
If you answer Yes, you will return to the Performance Curves Pressures dialog box (Figure 13.6.1
- 1, Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box, on page 338), and the average L-factor you
have just determined will be written (and saved) to the .WFL well file. If you answer No, you will
return to the Performance Curves Pressures dialog box, but no transfer will be made.
If you Cancel, you will be returned to the Test Data dialog box.
If you have answered Yes, and now use the WellFlo tool on this well and go to Correlations in the
Nodal Analysis Control dialog box, you will see the average L displayed as the Vertical L
factor:
357
After performing the match, click OK to exit the screen. The following prompt will appear:
Figure : 13.6.3 - 9 Average L-Factor Transferred to WellFlo
Other functionality
The Copy buttons transfer the Test data or Match data to the ClipBoard. All fields are tabseparated for easy import into a spreadsheet program like Excel.
The Paste button will paste six columns of data (which have been copied to the ClipBoard
from a spreadsheet like Excel) into the first six columns of the Test data area. If you already
have some rows of data in place, be sure to click a field in the first empty row before pasting,
to avoid accidentally pasting over existing data.
If there are more than six columns on the ClipBoard, Paste will only take the first six.
Insert Row: inserts a blank row into the Test data area, above the row you last clicked in.
Delete Row: in the Test data area, deletes the row you last clicked in.
Cancel: exits the screen, returns you to the Performance Curves Pressures dialog box (Figure
13.6.1 - 1, Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box, on page 338), and ignores any
changes you have made in the Test data for... dialog box (editing, matching, etc.) since you
last entered it.
OK: exits the screen, returns you to the Performance Curves Pressures dialog box (Figure
13.6.1 - 1, Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box, on page 338), and retains any
changes you have made in the Test data for... dialog box (editing, matching, etc.) since you
last entered it. A prompt will appear to transfer the L-factor to WellFlo (see Figure 13.6.3 - 8,
Transfer of the L-Factor to WellFlo, on page 357).
Print: brings the LFACTOR.LOG file into Write or WordPad (or alternative browser. The LOG
file is written during the matching process provided you have switched Results on in
Configure Preferences (Figure 12.6.2 - 1, Set Preferences Dialog Box, on page 308).
358
Figure : 13.6.3 - 10 Match Data Copied to Excel

Warning messages
If when re-running the bottom-up computations using the average L-factor, WellFlo runs out
of pressure (i.e. reaches zero pressure before it gets to the wellhead), the following message
will appear:
Figure : 13.6.3 - 11 L-factor Warning
If this occurs, you probably have one or several bad sets of test data, or the flow correlation
you are using is particularly inappropriate. The failed test data set(s) will have a Pxmas
Average of zero in the upper spreadsheet. In this error condition, the nodal analyses will not
be run, and the average L will not be transferred to WellFlo.
If the mean absolute error (defined above) exceeds 5%, a warning will be displayed when
the matching exercise and nodal analyses have been completed:
This is simply to warn you that there is a large scatter in the matching results, which may reflect
on the quality of the test data and/or of the flow correlation (or other aspects of the well model)
you are using. When you OK from the Test data for.... screen, a prompt about transferring the
average L to WellFlo will appear:
Figure : 13.6.3 - 13 Transfer of the L-Factor to WellFlo
Please refer to the description of Figure 13.6.3 - 8, Transfer of the L-Factor to WellFlo, on
page 357 for an explanation of the significance of the options.
359
Figure : 13.6.3 - 12 Large Absolute Error Warning
13.7. Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode

Before running WellPCG to compute the well performance curves (See Section 14. 1. 1 Well
Performance Curve Calculations, on page 370), you may wish to calibrate the well flow
correlation against field data.
You must first enter the test data for the well or wells you wish to calibrate, and select the test sets
to match to, via the Test Data button on the Performance Curve Pressures dialog box (Figure
13.6.1 - 1, Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box, on page 338) for a selected well. This is
described in Section Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351 under the topic of Test
Data Entry and the first paragraph of Test Data Matching.
There are then two ways to do the calibrations:
- you can go ahead and calibrate each well in turn, staying within the Test data option, as
explained in Section Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351.
- rather than deal with each well in turn, you can select the L-factor icon from the Toolbox
(See Section 13. 3. 4 The Toolbox, on page 321), pick the well or wells on the Graphical
Editor screen, and run the full suite of calibrations in batch mode.
This section deals with the second option.
On selecting the L-factor icon (or the Test data matching option from the Tools menu), the mouse
pointer changes to:
Pick the well or wells to calibrate by clicking them. Hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple
wells. Still holding down the Ctrl key, start the calibration by double-clicking one of the wells.
The following dialog box appears:
Figure : 13.7.0 - 2 Batch Test Data Matching Control Dialog Box
Select the options you require.
360
13. 7. Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode
Figure : 13.7.0 - 1 L-Factor Calibration Tool

In the Errors area, you choose how to handle a large mean absolute error (>5%) on the
average L-factor, should it occur. After each calibration, the L-factor for the well concerned
is normally transferred (and saved) to the well file for the subsequent WellPCG run. For a
calibration that produces a large L-factor error, you can choose whether to transfer it anyway,
or to consider it as a "failure" and not transfer it.
In the WellPCG area, you choose whether to have WellPCG compute the new performance
curves for a well immediately after its L-factor calibration (... run WellPCG on the well first
option), or to finish calibrating all the wells first (... just proceed with the next well option).
In the latter case, you will need to run WellPCG as a subsequent operation using the WellPCG
tool (See Section 14. 2. 1 Running Well Performance Curve Generator (WellPCG), on page
375), but you will have the opportunity to inspect the matching results (as explained in Section
Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351) first.
The ... run WellPCG on the well first option is recommended when you are certain that all
calibrations will proceed without problem. If you are making a first pass through the calibrations,
you should either choose just proceed with the next well, or do each well individually via the
Test Data button on the Performance Curve Pressures dialog box (Figure 13.6.1 - 1,
Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box, on page 338) so you can see what is going on. This
is described in Section Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351 under the topic of Test
Data Matching.
Figure : 13.7.0 - 3 Test Data Matching Completed
In the event of failures, you should inspect the test data and the details of the matching - either in
the LFACTOR.LOG file (see Other functionality, on page 358), or via the Test data entry, on
page 353 option for that well - as there is probably something wrong (bad test data, error in well
model, inappropriate flow correlation, etc.).
Note: One very simple thing to check in a well that failed is that you have entered some test data,
and have selected at least one test for calibration (blue highlight).
13.8. Batch Control File for Updating L-Factors

This facility is similar in principle to the batch update mode described in Section Calibrating
Well Data in Batch Mode, on page 360, with the following differences:
it is controlled by an external control file, (extension .POI) supplied by the user, instead of
being set up within a FieldFlo dialog box.
361
13. 8. Batch Control File for Updating L-Factors
Click OK to proceed. The program will then work through the selected wells, matching the test
data and determining an L-factor for each well. At the end of the matching (or matching and
WellPCG), a status box will be displayed announcing the number of successful and failed runs.

calibration of the new L-factor, error analysis, and re-evaluation of the operating points are
only performed on the tests whose numbers are specified in the control file. Any earlier test
data that might already be present in the FieldFlo Test Data section will not be touched,
unless it, too, is selected in the control file. (In the internal batch mode described in Section
Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode, on page 360, after calibration with selected data, the
operating points of all existing test data sets are automatically re-evaluated with the new Lfactor).
13.8.1. Well Test Data Update

This section will start with a simple example of how to update the L-factor with a single set of
test data. After that, there will be an example involving several test data sets. The control file is
described fully in Section Batch Control File Structure, on page 368.
Calibration with a single test

Suppose we have a well, AZ-3, which already has a set of test data from some time ago,
measured at three different gas injection rates and wellhead pressures (see Test data area in
Figure 13.8.1 - 1, Well Test Calibration Status Prior to Introduction of New Data, on page
362). The L-factors for each test were found to be 0.9962, 0.9800, and 0.9559. This calibration
was performed using all three sets to obtain an average L-factor of 0.9774, which it was hoped
would cover a wide range of conditions. (This calibration was done using the internal test data
calibration described in Sections Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351 and
Calibrating Well Data in Batch Mode, on page 360, but it could also have been done with the
external batch file method described here.)
Figure : 13.8.1 - 1 Well Test Calibration Status Prior to Introduction of New Data
Current operating conditions correspond approximately to those of test #2 (i.e. about 1.5
MMSCF/day injection rate). New test data is now available:
Gas injection rate: 1.60 MMSCF/day
Oil production rate: 2595 STB/day
Water production rate: 905 STB/day
Wellhead pressure: 95 psia
GOR: 501
and it has been decided to re-calibrate the flow correlation L-factor:
362
13. 8. 1. Well Test Data Update
Using this average, the computed pressure drops for all three tests matched the observed ones
with an average absolute error of 1.566% (see beneath Matching data area), and the computed
liquid production rates with an average absolute error of 1.285% (see beneath Test data area).

The batch control file was set up with a text editor (See Section 13. 8. 2 Batch Control File
Structure, on page 368) as follows:
loglevel=full
errlim=4
wellpcg=no
test3
4 1.6 2595 3500 95 501 #Test, Qgi, Qoil, Qliq, Pwh, GOR
lfac
Figure : 13.8.1 - 2 Batch Control File, 1 Test
.... and saved as TEST#4.POI.

This batch file has been configured with (line by line):
max error tolerance of 4%; WellPCG will not be re-run automatically with the new L-factor;
name of well file (AZ-3.WFL); test number and data (with comments after the #); L-factor
calibration command.
To load the batch file select the Well Test Data Update option on the Exchange menu:
Figure : 13.8.1 - 3 Well Test Data Update Option
Figure : 13.8.1 - 4 Loading the .POI External Batch File.
The test data are loaded into FieldFlo, and the L-factor calibration is performed on the new test
data.
363
The default extension for the external batch control file is .POI:

The following message will appear after a successful calibration:
Figure : 13.8.1 - 5 Calibration Completed
Computation details are written to a .LOG file in the same directory as the .POI file. The file is
given the same name as the . POI file, so in this case it will be TEST#4.LOG:
L factor data OK in line: loglevel=full
L factor data OK in line: errlim=4
L factor data OK in line: wellpcg=no
L factor data OK in line: test3
L factor data OK in line: 4 1.6 2595 3500 95 501
Test 4: Qgi = 1.600 MMSCF/day, Qoil = 2595.000 STB/day, Qliq =
3500.000 STB/day, GOR = 501.000 SCF/STB, Pwf = 1566.542 psia,
Pwhd(meas) = 95.000 psia, Lfac = 0.9677, Pwhd(match) = 95.568 psia
Pwhd(meas) = 95.000 psia, Lfac(avge) = 0.9677, Pwhd(avge) = 95.568
psia, error = +0.04%
Pwhd(meas) = 95.000 psia, Lfac(avge) = 0.9677, Qliq(calc) = 3534.551
STB/day, error = +0.99%
Mean absolute error in well pressure drops = 0.04%
Well TEST3: L factor updated from 0.9752 to 0.9677
Figure : 13.8.1 - 6 TEST#4.LOG Record of Calibration
- firstly, the calibration of the L-factor for the Test #4 data;

- then the wellhead pressure computation using the average of all new L-factors computed
here (in this case, only one, so its the same). The error is the average absolute error in
calculated sandface-to-wellhead pressure drop/s relative to the measured one/s;
- finally, the results of the new operating point calculation/s for the specified test/s using this
new average L-factor. The error is the average absolute error in calculated liquid
flowrate/s relative to the measured rates.
The last line states that the new average L-factor has been written into the WellFlo file for that
well (so if you check the Correlations dialog box in WellFlo Nodal Analysis Control, you will
see the new value). This will only happen if the error (average absolute error in calculated
sandface-to-wellhead pressure drop/s, relative to the measured one/s) is less than the errlim
specified in the first line of the control file.
364
The first four lines confirm that the batch control data were okay (it would also indicate where
errors had occurred), and the rest is a summary of the calibration results (boxed off here for
clarity). There are three stages (each starting with Test 4: in the .LOG record):

The results of the calibration can also be read in Test Data screen for the well. Double-click on
the well in the system diagram, and click the Test Data button in the Performance Curves
dialog box. The updated Test Data screen for this well now looks like this:
Figure : 13.8.1 - 7 Updated Test Data Screen
In the Test data area (lower panel, left half), the data for test #4 have been added to the existing
list. The L-factor calibration results for this test are displayed in the upper Matching data area an L of 0.9679 was required. Since only one test set has been matched, the wellhead pressure
computed with this L-factor (95.009 in the Pxmas Average column, top right) should be
identical to the measured value (95.00 in the Pxmas Meas column).
The computed flowrates at operating point are displayed in the Test data area, right half.
This example shows how to use several sets of test data in the batch control file. Suppose you had
new data from three production tests, and wanted to re-calibrate the L-factor using these.
The procedure is the same as that described for a single test. The control file, TEST456.POI, might
be as follows:
loglevel=full
errlim=4
wellpcg=no
test3
4 1.6 2595 3500 95 501
5 1.58 2510 3450 92 501
6 1.55 2490 3479 93 501
lfac
Figure : 13.8.1 - 8 Batch Control File, 3 Tests
365
Calibration with several test data sets

L factor data OK in line: loglevel=full
L factor data OK in line: errlim=4
L factor data OK in line: wellpcg=no
L factor data OK in line: test3
psia, error = -0.76%
psia, error = +1.42%
psia, error = -0.87%
Mean absolute error in well pressure drops = 1.01%
Well TEST3: L factor updated from 0.9751 to 0.9752
The first section echoes the input data.

The second section refers to the calibration of L against each test data set. L-factors of 0.9676,
0.9904 and 0.9662 were required to match the measured wellhead pressures.
366
The resulting TEST456.LOG file is:

The third section shows how the average of these L-factors (0.9747) matches the measured
wellhead pressures. The absolute % errors (0.76, 1.41 and 0.88) are averaged (1.02%) and
compared with errlim (4%). If the average error is less than this, the new average L-factor will
be transferred into the well file, as is the case here. This is confirmed by the bottom two lines of
the .LOG file.
If the error exceeds the specified errlim, the following will appear in the bottom line of the .LOG
file, and no L-factor transfer will occur:
Note: The mean absolute error of 5.23% in the well pressure drops is more than 4.00%
The fourth section shows the re-evaluation of the operating points using the average L-factor.
The liquid flowrates are compared with the measured rates, and the % errors reported. The
FieldFlo Test Data screen will have been updated as follows:
The three new test sets have been appended to the list in the Test data area. The individual and
average L-factors are displayed in the left part of the Matching data area. The operating points
computed with the average L-factor are displayed in the left part of the Test data area. Note that
no computations have been made on the earlier Tests 1, 2 and 3 (compare with Figure 13.8.1 - 1,
Well Test Calibration Status Prior to Introduction of New Data, on page 362).
The average Absolute error of 1.018% beneath the matching data panel corresponds to the
average error (1.02%) in TEST456.LOG that was compared with errlim.
In Figure 13.8.1 - 8, Batch Control File, 3 Tests, on page 365, if it had been desired to include,
say, test #3 from the earlier test data list (Figure 13.8.1 - 1, Well Test Calibration Status Prior to
Introduction of New Data, on page 362) in the calibration, along with the three new tests, the
lfac line would have been specified as:
lfac = 3, 4, 5, 6
367
Figure : 13.8.1 - 9 Updated Test Data Screen

13.8.2. Batch Control File Structure
The table on the at the end of this section explains the entries in the batch control file for L-factor
calibration. Create this file using any text editor and save it (e.g. to the field data directory), using
a suitable name and the extension .POI. DOS editors, or Windows Notepad, WordPad, Word, etc.
may be used, provided they write text only, without escape commands and other hidden symbols.
There are examples of batch control files in the previous section.
Notes:
1. L-factor calibration is only carried out on the test numbers indicated in the lfac line in the
control file.
- if no numbers are specified, all the tests in the control file will be used. In the example in the
following table, writing lfac=8, 9, 10 would be the same as just writing lfac.
- if numbers are specified, they can refer to test sets specified in the control file and/or to test
sets already in FieldFlo (Test Data screen for the well) and therefore not listed in the control
file. In the example in the following table, lfac=7, 8, 10 would perform the calibration on test
sets 8 and 10 in the control file, and test #7 already in FieldFlo (assuming such a test exists).
- if you omit the lfac command altogether, the test data are just copied into the Test Data
screen in FieldFlo (for information), and no calibration is performed.
2. You can include other wells in the same control file. Just append an identical set of lines
beneath the lfac line, with the appropriate data entries for the next well, and so on. There is no
limit to the number of wells you can include. Each well should have an lfac command line for
calibration. If you omit the lfac entry for a particular well, no calibration will be performed
for that well (but its test data will still be loaded into FieldFlo, as explained in Note #1).
If you have several wells in the control file, you may set wellpcg to yes or no independently
for each well. Alternatively, once set to say, wellpcg=yes, it will apply to all following wells
until it is switched off by including wellpcg=no in the file.
4. Make sure your test numbers are different from any test numbers already listed in the Test
Data section of FieldFlo for that well. Where a duplicate number is used, the new data will
overwrite the old data.
5. The errlim entry can be used to check if new data is in line with previous data, or whether a
significant change in the L-factor has occurred. This is best done by calibrating with the new
test data set and one or two of the previous tests that have already been calibrated, (rather than
with all of the previous tests). The error assessment is based on the new average L-factor, and
this will be more sensitive to change the fewer the test sets used in the average.
6. You can select to update the water cut into the WellFlo file, either from the new test
transferred from the control file or from the set of tests used for the calibration calculations.
WcutUpd=no will not transfer any water cut and is the default, if the line is omitted
altogether. WcutUpd=yes will transfer the latest water cut from the new tests which have
been transferred in the .POI file. WcutUpd=ave will transfer the average water cut from the
tests which were used in the actual L-factor calculation. As with the Wellpcg entry in the
control file, WcutUpd can be specified on a well by well basis, or used for a group of wells at
a time. The operation is reset/switched by entering the WcutUpd= line in the file again
where necessary.
368
13. 8. 2. Batch Control File Structure
3. If you leave wellpcg=no, you will have the opportunity to inspect the calibrations before
running WellPCG from the FieldFlo toolbox. With wellpcg=yes, it will be run automatically
after the calibration.

Note: The transfer is made only if the errlim criterion is satisfied.
Entry in control
file
Description
Example
errlim
=%
Max acceptable % value for mean absolute error in L-factor calibrations. If not exceeded, the new average L-factor will be transferred into
the well file after calibration.
errlim = 4
wellpcg
=yes/no
=yes: run WellPCG automatically with new average L-factor

=no: do not run WellPCG automatically (you can run it later from the
FieldFlo toolbox).
wellpcg=no
wellname
Name of well FILE (not necessarily the same as the well itself).
The example well file (right) was DB5Z.WFL (the extension should be
omitted).
DB5Z
Test no, Qgi,

Qoil, Qliq, Pwh,
GOR
Test no, gas inj rate, oil and liquid prod rates, wellhead pressure and
produced GOR, in current units.
The inclusion of GOR is optional, and when omitted the value according
to the current IPR model in the well file is assumed.
Use spaces or commas between numbers. Up to 64 lines of test data can
be entered, one test set per line.
The example (right) shows data from tests 8, 9 and 10.
8 3.25 1540 1678

123.5
=yes: transfers latest water cut from tests in .POI file to well file (provided errlim criterion is satisfied)
WcutUpd
=yes
WcutUpd=yes/
ave/no
9 2.80 1362 1530

105.0
10 3.01 1465 1650

115.5
=ave: transfers the average water cut to well file, calculated

from all tests used for the L-factor calculation (provided
errlim criterion is satisfied)
=no: (default) no transfer is made
The lfac command will start the calibration. If you want to calibrate
using all the specified test data, just put lfac. To calibrate on selected
tests, put lfac= followed by the test selected numbers, separated by
spaces or commas.
In the example, although tests 8, 9 and 10 are available, it was decided
to use only 8 and 10 for the calibration (perhaps #9 looked anomalous).
You can also select tests that are already in the Test Data section of
FieldFlo - just enter their test numbers.
lfac=8,10
13. 8. 2. Batch Control File Structure
lfac or lfac=test
numbers
369
FieldFlo Solution Control
Chapter 14- FieldFlo Solution Control

14.1. Overview of Calculations
Figure : 14.1.0 - 1 FieldFlo Calculations Menu
There are four calculation modes on the FieldFlo Calculations menu: Build, Build All, Allocate
and History Match. FieldFlo calls on WellFlo via the DDE link for pipeline pressure drop
calculations where necessary during these mode runs. A fourth calculation mode, WellPCG, is
invoked via the toolbox.
Build and Build All take care of the building, from the bottom of the system - upwards, of a
series of performance curves and tables, at each node in the network, describing the field
production over a specified range of operating conditions. Build All will always (re)compute
over the entire network (excluding masked components). Build will only (re)compute at
nodes where conditions have changed since the last Build or Build All. Thus, if you alter the
performance table of one well, Build will only re-compute the performance tables of the
downstream nodes affected by that change. This can save a lot of time in large fields.
Once Build has been run, Allocate may be run repeatedly to optimise the allocation of gas for
different values of gas available, separator pressures and production constraint.
If you make any changes to well or surface configurations, or to the performance of any well,
you must rerun Build to generate the new performance tables.
In History Match mode, no optimisation is performed. Instead of the program computing gas
allocations, you specify the observed gas injection settings on each well. You then run Build,
then History Match at the measured separator pressure/s.
FieldFlo will compute operating pressures, etc. throughout the system for history matching
purposes. Pressures and flowrates should match measured data to validate the model.
WellPCG calculates the performance curves for selected (or all) wells in the system using
WellFlo via the DDE link. (Performance tables may also be entered manually.)
14.1.1. Well Performance Curve Calculations

WellPCG performs these calculations automatically. It controls WellFlo to generate performance
curves for the selected well/s, over the range of pressures you enter.
The calculation consists simply of repeating the analysis of the well performance to find the
operating points, over a range of values of gas injected. Clearly, this calculation can only be as
good as the WellFlo model, which is why it is important to model the well correctly, and check
the model against real data where possible.
370
Chapter 14 - FieldFlo Solution Control
Allocate then interpolates these curves, from the top of the system - down, for any set of
conditions specified by the user which fall within the range prepared in Build, and applying a
selected constraint to the calculations.

WellPCG searches over a range of gas injection rates (automatically selected) so as to find the
minimum required lift gas rate (if any) to kick off production at each separator pressure
specified, and the optimum gas rate giving maximum production for each of the separator
pressures. It then interpolates the data to generate smooth performance curves for use in Build
and Allocate.
The search for the minimum gas requirement will be capped by the WellPCG Maximum GLRi
setting in the Preferences option of the main Configure menu (Figure 12.6.2 - 1, Set
Preferences Dialog Box, on page 308).
Each computed well performance curve is stored as 6 data points between zero (or the minimum
required) gas injection rate and a value slightly beyond the optimum for the well.
WellPCG may also be used on gas wells to generate their performance points at each of the
operating pressures. As a gas well will not have gas lift, there will be no curves, just single point
values.
Note:WellPCG uses all of the settings in the .WFL well file with the following
exceptions:
- forced gas entry is switched on
- if fewer than 3 flowrates have been specified in Nodal Analysis Control, the auto-range
flowrate values are substituted. Otherwise the actual rates will be used
- the selected sensitivities are ignored and are replaced by the specified manifold pressures
(Figure 13.6.1 - 1, Performance Curve Pressures Dialog Box, on page 338) and the
WellPCG gas lift injection rates.
14.1.2. Build Calculation

Build: Calculation Structure
There will be a set of tables for each node (well or unit) in the system. Those for the wells have
been calculated by the WellPCG function, or entered manually (See Section 13. 6. 1 Editing
Well Performance Data, on page 338). The tables for the higher levels of units are generated
during a run of Build, and cannot be edited manually.
Build and Build All: Build All will always (re)compute over the entire network (excluding
masked components). Build will only (re)compute at nodes where conditions have changed since
the last Build or Build All. Thus, if you alter the performance table of one well, Build will only recompute the performance tables of the downstream nodes affected by that change. (Nodes
needing re-calculation after a change contain red text in the system diagram). This can save a lot
of time in large fields.
Unless specified otherwise, references to Build also apply to Build All in the following
description.
371
14. 1. 2. Build Calculation
Starting from the well performance curves, and working upwards through the system, Build
calculates a series of curves describing the field production performance at each node. The
curves are in the form of tables of Qo(oil rate), as a function of Qgi (lift gas injection rate), for a
range of pressures (a maximum of 5, which you specify yourself). They are computed at each
node point in the system. There are 6 other parameters (water cut, etc.) stored together with Qo
(see for example Figure 13.6.1 - 10, Performance table for a natural producer with gas lift., on
page 345). The curves can be plotted against Qgi (with the option to display dQo/dQgi) or against
Qgp (total gas rate), with dQo/dQgp.

Build consists of a series of routines which operate on each unit in the system, from bottom-up.
The output of these routines is, for each unit, a set of performance tables. These form the input
for the next unit up the field tree.
Figure : 14.1.2 - 1 Schematic of a Field
In Figure 14.1.2 - 1, Schematic of a Field, on page 372, the following calculation order is
performed automatically in Build:
1. Calculate Header 1, using as input the tables for Wells 1, 2 and 3, and store results as tables
for Header 1.
2. Ditto for Header 2, using as input the tables for Wells 4 and 5.
3. Calculate Manifold, using as input the tables for Header 1 and Header 2.
The actual calculations take the form of several sub-sections and these together form one
calculation loop. The whole loop is repeated in the order shown above until the top level units are
reached. You will see Build working through the calculations in this order when you run it.
Build: Calculation At Each Unit
First, the different streams are combined and lift gas is allocated in "packets" on the basis of
maximising oil production or revenue. The "child" with the highest increase in oil production or
revenue per incremental volume of gas injection or gas production receives the next gas packet at
each step.
This is continued one packet at a time through all the gas available.
Build starts off at the well performance level. When building by gas injected, it may have to
handle wells which require a minimum amount of gas to start up production. At each step of the
packet allocation process, it checks these non-starters. If any of them would satisfy the packet
allocation criterion if it were kicked off, Build will grab the entire quota of kick-off gas needed
for that well in one go, and start the well up.
For Build, there is an unlimited gas supply, so that all wells presented by WellPCG as
startable(i.e. the wells will kick-off successfully) will be started, and each well can be taken to its
maximum production.
372
14. 1. 2. Build Calculation
At each unit, Build works to commingle streams which flow into that unit. There are several
stages to this process.

The results of the calculation are shown in Figure 14.2.1 - 1, WellPCG Mouse Pointer / Icon,
on page 375 and similar plots (See Section 15. 2. 2 Unit Performance Curves, on page 382).
This figure shows how Build allocated gas continuously through the range of injection gas used.
The resulting composite performance curve therefore represents, for any amount of gas
available, the best unit performance that could be achieved.
Once this is done, Build transfers the performance curves to the downstream end of the pipeline
running from that unit. The pipeline pressure drop is calculated using WellFlo, which computes
the liquid rates corresponding to the pressures you specified for the next unit.
These performance curves are then stored, each at 6 values of Qgi ranged between zero and just
beyond the optimum. This is the tabulated data you can view with the edit function (See Section
13. 6. 1 Editing Well Performance Data, on page 338).
Build is ready to commingle at the next level up the field.
Note: The performance curves associated with a unit include the pressure losses down the
pipeline from that unit. They therefore correspond to the input of the next unit downstream.
14.1.3. Allocate Calculation

Allocate: Calculation Structure
Allocate is the second main function in FieldFlo. It relies on the tables created in Build to allocate
lift gas to all the wells in the field system. Allocate can be used repeatedly to find the lift gas
allocation as the operating conditions (pressure at the separator, lift gas availability, gas
production limits, etc. or the cost factor) vary on an hour-by-hour basis.
The tables made in Build can be used repeatedly by Allocate, as long as the status of the system
itself remains unchanged. By a status change, we mean either that the performance of a well
changes, the nature of the field network changes, or the configuration parameters (see Figure
14.2.2 - 1, Configure Calculations dialog box, on page 376) change. This might involve:
A change in the field structure might be the shutting-in of a well, which although it involves
no changes to well performance curves, would require remodelling by Build after masking
out the appropriate well; an alteration to the pipeline specifications, or even a change in the
flow correlation used to model pipeline flow; etc.
A change in the configuration parameters might be a new value for oil or gas sales revenue,
switching from allocating by gas produced to by gas injected, or optimising on revenue rather
than on oil produced. This will involve Build being re-run, as the different parameters will
change the shape of the curves produced.
Allocate interpolates the tabulated values prepared by Build to generate a performance curve for
the operating pressure at each node as it works top-down through the system. These pressures
will not be any of the "round number" values you probably specified in Build. Instead, they will
take any value; e.g. the separator pressure may be, say 73 psia, whereas the Build tables may
have been made at, say, 50, 100 and 150 psia.
Referring again to Figure 14.1.2 - 1, Schematic of a Field, on page 372, the calculation
sequence of Allocate is:
373
14. 1. 3. Allocate Calculation
A well performance change, which would require remodelling with WellFlo, followed by regeneration of its performance curves by WellPCG, followed by a re-calculation of the field
tables by Build.

1. Starting from the total gas specified as available for injection or as the limit of gas production
desired, calculate injection gas distribution to all top level units (in this example, there is only
one - SEPARATOR). This now gives the performance and operating condition prediction for
SEPARATOR. Any other top level units' performances would also be known now.
2. Using these operating conditions, it is possible to allocate gas between all the "children" of
these units. The result is the allocation to each child, and its predicted performance.
3. The pressure at the upstream end of each child is now calculated. This forms the basis of its
operating condition as a parent unit, for the next step down the tree structure.
4. For each child, the process is repeated, until the individual gas allocation for each well, and
its performance, are known. The sum of the well performances is the total field performance.
Allocate: Calculation At Each Unit

Allocate has to allocate lift or production gas at each unit in the system, within the "top-down"
framework just described. This is done in several steps, using the performance curve tables
generated in Build as input.
Knowing the operating conditions for a unit (pressure, gas available or allowable, and cost
factor), a performance curve can be generated at these conditions for each child by
interpolation in the Build curves. These interpolated performance curves are then used to
calculate gas distribution on the same basis as described in Section Build: Calculation At Each
Unit, on page 372.
This allocation is recorded, and the operating condition of each "child" is transferred using
WellFlo to the upstream end of the unit's pipeline, ready to begin the calculation again.
At the well level, the same kick-off criterion is applied as in Build for any wells which are not
natural producers. However, since we now have a finite limit to the gas supply, a well which
satisfies the packet allocation criterion can only be kicked off if there is enough gas as yet
unallocated to meet its kick-off quota.
When running Allocate by gas production, naturally flowing wells will not automatically come
on stream, or may be choked back. This means that a gassy well may only be allowed to produce
a fraction of its total oil capacity in order to limit the total amount of gas entering the system.
14.1.4. History Match Calculation

In order to run a history match calculation, all wells must be on fixed point status. This means
that their performance tables must be either:
- a single point entry at each operating pressure (Figure 13.6.1 - 11, Performance table for a
natural producer without gas lift, on page 345 to Figure 13.6.1 - 13, Performance table for a
gas well, on page 346), representing the current observed performance of each well
and/or:
- a full set of performance data at different injection rates, but pegged by the Fixed Qgi
option (See Section 13. 6. 1 Editing Well Performance Data, on page 338) at a specific
injection rate. This should correspond to the observed field value at each well.
Build is run in the normal way, then History Match is run with the measured separator
pressure(s). No optimisation will be performed, and any cost factor constraint will be ignored.
374
14. 1. 4. History Match Calculation
This logic means that Allocate will not necessarily start up all (or any) wells requiring kick-off
gas - it will depend on available gas and whether it is worth starting them up anyway.

History Match calculates the pressure losses along the network, and respects the gas allocations
imposed by the fixed point values at the wells, rather than distributing them according to the
logic described in the previous sections. It also automatically switches on the Fixed Qgi option in
all wells that have a fixed Qgi value entered, but not currently selected. The End History Match
option will switch it off again in these wells only.
You can then compare measured and computed pressures, flowrates, etc., at each node in the
network, using the View menu option (Figure 13.3.7 - 1, View Menu, on page 325).
14.2. Running The Calculations

14.2.1. Running Well Performance Curve Generator (WellPCG)
To run WellPCG, select the WellPCG Tool from the Toolbox, or use the Tools WellPCG menu
command. The cursor changes to Figure 14.2.1 - 1, WellPCG Mouse Pointer / Icon, on page
375.
Figure : 14.2.1 - 1 WellPCG Mouse Pointer / Icon
With this cursor, you may select well(s) for action:

Double-click a well to run WellPCG on it, or:
Select one or more wells, and press
menu command.
ENTER
to start WellPCG, or use the Tools Apply Tool
Figure : 14.2.1 - 2 WellPCG Selection Dialog Box
After looking at each well, the WellPCG Pressures dialog box Figure 14.2.1 - 3, WellPCG
Pressures Dialog Box, on page 376) appears for each parent unit which is associated with the
wells selected. Wells common to each unit must have the same pressures; however, different
units can have well performances calculated at different pressures.
375
14. 2. Running The Calculations
Before calculations start, the dialog box in Figure 14.2.1 - 2, WellPCG Selection Dialog Box,
on page 375 appears. If you answer Yes to this, you can review all the selected wells. This is
useful in a large field model.
Figure : 14.2.1 - 3 WellPCG Pressures Dialog Box
The pressures displayed in the dialog box are those currently existing (if any) for the parent
unit, whose name appears in the title bar. If you change the pressures for any one well, then you
must re-run WellPCG for all the other wells. This will be done automatically, if you select OK in
the dialog box (Figure 14.2.1 - 4, WellPCG Change Pressures Dialog Box, on page 376).
Figure : 14.2.1 - 4 WellPCG Change Pressures Dialog Box
If you select Cancel in this dialog box, you return to the WellPCG pressures dialog box.
Once WellPCG is running, a series of message boxes keeps you informed on progress. (You can
abort the process by clicking the top left corner of the message box). At the end, a summary of
the calculation appears, showing if any wells generated error conditions. If they did, you can look
in the ALLOCATE.LOG file to investigate. Otherwise, the performance curves will now be filled in
and can be viewed or plotted as described in Section Editing Well Performance Data, on page
338.
14.2.2. Running Build
Figure : 14.2.2 - 1 Configure Calculations dialog box
You may also enter the operating cost per unit of produced water disposal, and per unit of gas
injection.
376
14. 2. 2. Running Build
Build does not require any extra input if the data are all set up, but the form of the Build and
Allocate calculations needs to be configured. You can optimise on Oil Produced (the default) or
Revenue Earned, and allocate by Gas Injected (the default) or Gas Produced . The oil
produced and gas produced can both be assigned values to weight the costing equation, as shown
in Figure 14.2.2 - 1, Configure Calculations dialog box, on page 376.

Build and Allocate decide which well to give the next increment of gas to by evaluating one of
the following equations, depending on the selections in the dialog box above:
Table 1:
Optimise on
Allocate by
Oil produced
Gas injected
Oil produced
Gas produced
Gas Utilisation Factor
Q o
Q gi
Qo
Qgp
Revenue earned
Gas injected
Qo $ o + Qgp $ gp Qw $ w Qgi $ gi
Qgi
Revenue earned
Gas produced
Qo $ o + Qgp $ gp Qw $ w Qgi $ gi
Qgp
Disposal and injection costs are only considered if optimising on revenue earned.
Unless there is an error in the input data, selecting Calculations Build or Build All will set the
process in operation. Build All will always (re)compute over the entire network (excluding
masked components). Build will only (re)compute at nodes where conditions have changed since
the last Build or Build All. Thus, if you alter the performance table of one well, Build will only recompute the performance tables of the downstream nodes affected by that change. (Nodes
needing re-calculation after a change contain red text in the system diagram).
If the pressures at the children of any commingling unit are not equal, then the message in
Figure 14.2.2 - 2, Build Error Message, on page 377 appears. This is most likely to be because
you have not entered equal pressures at the commingling units in the Pressure box in the
Performance Curve dialog box (See Section 13. 6. 2 Editing Unit Performance Data, on page
348).
Once again, a series of message boxes advises on progress, and the field picture moves to show
progress upwards from bottom to top level.
If you have changed operating pressures at a manifold connected to wells since last running
Build, and have not rerun WellPCG, you will get a warning message if you try and run Build. See
Figure 14.2.2 - 3, Build - Pressure Change Error Message, on page 378.
377
14. 2. 2. Running Build
Figure : 14.2.2 - 2 Build Error Message
Figure : 14.2.2 - 3 Build - Pressure Change Error Message
You can go ahead by clicking OK, but your results will be invalid if the well tables have not been
updated. (You may of course have typed in new tables instead of running WellPCG.)
You should use a wide enough range of pressures for FieldFlo to work in interpolation rather than
extrapolation. At the top-most level this should exceed the range of anticipated operating
conditions. At intermediate points, it is important to ensure that high enough pressures are
specified to cover the maximum values of pressure and production rate expected at the upper
level. Otherwise FieldFlo will have to extrapolate the performance curves to high pressures, with
attendant errors.
In a real field, the likely range of pressures down to the wellhead will be known. In a design
study, you may need to model each section of the network with WellFlo, in order to assess the
likely pressure distribution.
Figure : 14.2.2 - 4 Successful completion of BUILD
14.2.3. Running Allocate

Allocate requires just three items of data (plus the configuration data in Figure 14.2.2 - 1,
Configure Calculations dialog box, on page 376):
Gas Availability or Production Limit.
Cost Factor.
These are input in the Separator Data dialog box (Figure 14.2.3 - 1, Allocate Input Dialog
Boxes, on page 378). This box expands as necessary to show the total number of separators.
Figure : 14.2.3 - 1 Allocate Input Dialog Boxes
378
14. 2. 3. Running Allocate
Separator Pressure (for each separator in a multiple separator system).

The Max gas injected or Max gas produced label will depend on whether you are allocating by
Qgi or Qgp (see Calculations Configure, Figure 14.2.2 - 1, Configure Calculations dialog box,
on page 376).
The minimum cost factor (the second field on the dialog box) also changes depending on what
options you selected in Calculations Configure. It will take the form of:
[Allocate by... parameter] per [Optimise on... parameter]
This value is used as a cut-off in the calculations; once the return (oil produced or revenue generated)
calculated by the equations in Section 14. 2. 2 Running Build, on page 376 drops below the
minimum value entered, no more gas is allocated or produced. This may result in Allocate
showing less actual gas used than was made available.
At the end of the calculation, a message is displayed showing the actual gas injected, associated
and produced, the oil and total liquids production rates, and the revenue earned (Figure 14.2.3 2, Allocate Results Panel, on page 379).
Figure : 14.2.3 - 2 Allocate Results Panel
Again, the actual detailed results are stored in the system model, and the ALLOCATE.LOG file is
available for viewing in case of any problems.
When running Allocate, if the operating pressure calculated at any unit or well is outside the
range covered by the performance tables, two checks are now made:
The just higher and just less criteria correspond to 20% of the pressure range spanned by
the performance table pressures. As an example, if the tables at a certain node correspond to
pressures of 80, 150 and 200 psia (span = 120 psia), Allocate will extrapolate out to a
maximum of 224 psia (= 200 + 24), or a minimum of 56 psia (= 8024), should the need
arise. The lower limit must of course be above atmospheric pressure.
This is considered to be a reasonably safe range - however, you would be advised to re-run
Build (and/or WellPCG) with more widely spaced pressures to ensure the best results, as the
quality of the extrapolation cannot be guaranteed.
Where the pressure is outside these 20% limits, Allocate will terminate the calculations, and
the error message in Figure 14.2.3 - 3, Allocate Calculations Stopped Warning, on page
380 will be displayed.
379
14. 2. 3. Running Allocate
If the operating pressure is just higher than the maximum pressure in the tables, or just less
than the minimum, the program will extrapolate the performance curves.
Figure : 14.2.3 - 3 Allocate Calculations Stopped Warning
In this case you will have to either re-run Allocate at a more acceptable separator pressure (so
as to keep all system pressures in range), or to re-run Build (and/or WellPCG) with more
widely spaced pressures.
14.2.4. Running History Match

In order to run a history match calculation, all wells must be on "fixed point" status. This means
that their performance tables must be either:
- a single point entry at each operating pressure (Figure 13.6.1 - 11, Performance table for a
natural producer without gas lift, on page 345 and Figure 13.6.1 - 12, Performance table for
well on fixed gas injection, specified as a single point, on page 345), representing the current
observed performance of each well
and/or:
Figure : 14.2.4 - 1 Separator Data dialog box for History Match mode
History Match mode is otherwise identical to Allocate, except that gas allocation does not need
to be optimised, and no constraints are applied.
Measured pressures can be compared with computed pressures, at each node in the network,
using the View menu option (Figure 13.3.7 - 1, View Menu, on page 325).
380
14. 2. 4. Running History Match
- a full set of performance data at different injection rates, but pegged by the Fixed Qgi
option (See Section 13. 6. 1 Editing Well Performance Data, on page 338) at a specific
injection rate. This should correspond to the observed field value at each well.
The only input required in the Separator Data dialog box for history match mode is the
separator pressure(s). The Max gas injected entry is forced internally to be the sum of the
fixed values at each well, and the cost factor is ignored. Both fields are greyed out and any
numbers they may contain are not relevant.
FieldFlo Output
Chapter 15- FieldFlo Output

15.1. Outputting The Input Data
15.1.1. Field Description
The field description can be output by one of two means. The first is to output the contents of the
Drawing Window to the printer by means of the File Print and associated commands, as
described in FieldFlo System Description, on page 310, and Section File Page Setup, Print
and Printer Setup, on page 320.
The second way is to copy the picture to the ClipBoard for pasting into other applications. To do
this, select Edit Copy Picture (see Figure 13.3.5 - 1, Edit Menu Options, on page 323). This
places a MetaFile image of the picture into the ClipBoard. You can now switch to your word
processor or graphics tool and select the Edit Paste command from its menu. This should copy
the FieldFlo field description into the other package.
Figure : 15.1.1 - 1 Field Description in ClipBoard
If you do, then the program you are trying to paste into is at fault, so please read its manual to
check how to paste a MetaFile from Windows ClipBoard into it.
15.2. Outputting the Results of Calculations

FieldFlo results come in four forms:
Production information for the actual (optimal) condition calculated by Allocate. Produced
fluid data, lift gas injected data, fluid ratios (e.g. GOR) and pressures at each point in the
system (from separators down to well heads) can be displayed, using the Graphical Editor.
This is a very quick and interactive way to study your field model.
381
Chapter 15 - FieldFlo Output
If this doesn't work, run the ClipBoard application in your Windows Main program group, try
Edit Copy Picture in FieldFlo again, and switch back to the ClipBoard application. You should
see something like this:
FieldFlo Output
Interpolated curves of gas injected against oil produced for each pressure during the Build
calculations.
Gas injected per unit against gas injected or oil produced per upstream child unit or well
during the Allocate calculations.
Log files containing full details of a WellPCG, Build or Allocate run.
15.2.1. Gas Allocation and Oil Production

This is simply using the View menu to change the way that the data on the buttons are displayed.
See Section Viewing Production Data, on page 327 for information on how to do this. When
the relevant data is displayed on the buttons, the field can then be printed out, or copied to the
ClipBoard, for a permanent record to be made, see, for example Figure 13.3.7 - 6, Viewing Gas
Injection By %, on page 328.
15.2.2. Unit Performance Curves

The unit performance curves are the combined performance curves of the upstream nodes of the
tree, produced after Build calculations have been performed. They can be plotted using the
method described in Section See Section 13. 6. 2 Editing Unit Performance Data, on page 348,
and then committed to paper by using the usual File Print commands. Alternatively, to get a text
version of the performance curve data into another application, use the Copy command in the
Unit Performance Curve dialog box, and then the Paste command of the other application.
Note: The performance curves associated with a unit include the pressure losses down the
pipeline from that unit. They therefore correspond to the input of the next unit downstream.
After an Allocate calculation, data is stored on how each packet of gas has been distributed
between the upstream units or wells connected to a unit. This data can be viewed by selecting the
Unit Performance Data dialog box again, then viewing the performance curves at the Allocate
pressure, (this is stored at the sixth pressure in the table (See Section 13. 6. 1 Editing Well
Performance Data, on page 338) - click Next pressure 5 times to see it) and pressing the Plot
button. The following dialog box appears:
Figure : 15.2.3 - 1 Plot of Gas Allocation Data Dialog Box
The X-Axis option buttons select whether total Qgi or Qgp is plotted on the X-axis.
The Y-Axis option buttons select whether Qgi, Qo, Revenue, or Qgp per child is plotted on
the Y-axis.
382
15. 2. 1. Gas Allocation and Oil Production
15.2.3. Gas versus Gas, Oil or Revenue per Child
FieldFlo Output
The R-Axis area allows dQo/dQgi or dQo/dQgp to be plotted (depending on the X-axis
choice), provided Oil produced has been selected for the Y-axis.
The Stacked Graph check box determines whether or not to do a cumulative-style graph of
performance.
Pressing OK with these above options selected produces a graph like Figure 15.2.3 - 2, Stacked
Graph: Cumulative gas injected at a unit, and gas injected per child, on page 383.
This stacked plot for a five-well field indicates that at a manifold pressure of 60 psia, the first
0.54 MMSCF of gas was allocated to well fixed Qg well, then gl-flowing well received a tiny
amount of gas before kick-off well received 1.65 MMSCF of the gas to start it flowing. Next the
gl-flowing well was allocated 1.53 MMSCF. The remaining gas was shared between the glflowing and the kick-off wells.
Figure : 15.2.3 - 3 Stacked Graph: Cumulative oil produced at a unit and per child
Figure 15.2.3 - 3, Stacked Graph: Cumulative oil produced at a unit and per child, on page 383
is the corresponding stacked graph presentation of the cumulative oil production at a unit,
showing the oil produced per child.
383
15. 2. 3. Gas versus Gas, Oil or Revenue per Child
Figure : 15.2.3 - 2 Stacked Graph: Cumulative gas injected at a unit, and gas injected per child
FieldFlo Output
Non-lifted well is a natural producer not on gas lift, and appears as a constant production rate in
the plot. Lift gas is fed initially to well fixed Qgi, but is then allocated to gl-flowing well (very
small amount initially) and then kick-off well. Further gas is not allocated to gl-flowing well and
then it is shared between this well and the kick-off well.
Similar plots can be obtained for gas produced and revenue earned per well, for further analysis
of the best wells in the field.
15.2.4. Results Menu

The log files that contain detailed information about the results of the calculations can all be
accessed from the Results menu Figure 15.2.4 - 1, FieldFlo Results Menu, on page 384.
Note: These files only contain useful information if the Results option has been switched on in
the Preferences option on the main Configure menu.
Figure : 15.2.4 - 1 FieldFlo Results Menu
These four options invoke the Windows Write program and auto-load the relevant .LOG file.
From Write you can print out the results, or save the file (with a different name). For full details
on the Write program, you can read its on-line help, or consult the Windows User Guide.
The Test Data Matching file, LFACTOR.LOG, is written if the well performance calibration facility
is used (See Section 13. 6. 3 Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351).
Results - Build
15. 2. 4. Results Menu
This option allows you to view the results of the Build calculations. Here is a typical screen
captured in WordPad:
Figure : 15.2.4 - 2 Build results in Windows WordPad
384
FieldFlo Output
Results - Allocate
This gives you the results of the Allocate calculations. The interesting thing to note about these is
that two sets of results are given - the estimated results on the way down, calculated by
interpolation, and then the exact results on the way back up, recalculated from the final figures
produced for each well.
Figure : 15.2.4 - 3 Part of Allocate results output in WordPad
Results - WellPCG
WellPCG results are simply the pressure curves calculated for each well at the pressures you
chose. The values in the log file will be identical to the values contained in the performance
curve tables after a successful WellPCG run.
Results - Test Data Matching

The Test Data Matching file, LFACTOR.LOG, which is written if the well performance calibration
facility is used (See Section 13. 6. 3 Calibrating Well Performance Data, on page 351), is
tabbed for convenient viewing in a spreadsheet program such as Excel.
15.3. Exchange Menu
The first three options in the Exchange menu deal with the output and import of data in ASCII
format. These are described in the current section. The fourth option accesses the new flow
correlation L-factor calibration facility, run in batch mode through an external control file. This
feature is described in Section Batch Control File for Updating L-Factors, on page 361. The
last option transfers the results of an Allocation to WellFlo in order that pressure drop studies can
be carried out and is described in this section.
385
15. 3. Exchange Menu
Figure : 15.3.0 - 1 The Exchange Menu
FieldFlo Output
15.3.1. Reservoir Data Output
This option leads to a File Save type dialog box. The default file extension is .RES.
Figure : 15.3.1 - 1 Reservoir data output
The file is in text format with tab separators between items, and UNIX-compatible line breaks.
The following example was output for a small field containing 5 producers.
TEST12171.00010.7001.3309
GASTEST4000.0000
TEST26000.00025.0001.2500
TEST35000.00025.0001.0204
TEST45000.0000
1.2500
Data are read from the .WFL well file pertaining to each well. Each line contains the well file
name, layer pressure, water cut, and productivity index (oil wells only). All values are in the
current FieldFlo units.
15.3.2. Reservoir Data Import

This option leads to a File Open type dialog box. The default file extension is .RES.
The file structure is the same as in the previous (output) section. Any valid separators are allowed
(spaces, tabs, commas, semi-colons, etc.). Blank lines are permissible, and comments can be
added at the end of each line by entering a # followed by the comment - for example:
#Data revised 3-July-95
or by inserting a new line whose first character is a #.

Imported data will be loaded into the Layer and Fluid Parameters sections of the named .WFL
files. If there are errors in the import file, this sort of warning will appear:
Figure : 15.3.2 - 1 Error message on file import
A file with extension .LOG is created in the same directory as the .RES file, with the same name
(EXAMPLE.LOG in this case). This points out any error/s:
386
15. 3. 1. Reservoir Data Output
TEST26000.00025.000 0.974
FieldFlo Output
Imported data OK in line: TEST12171.00010.7001.3309
Out-of-range data in line: GASTEST4000.00000
Imported data OK in line: TEST45000.00001.2500
In this case, out of range data has been specified in the second line. You may amend this data in
the .RES file and re-import.
15.3.3. Gas lift allocation output

This option leads to a File Save type dialog box. The default file extension is .CON.
The .CON file contains the results of the last FieldFlo Allocate run, in Eclipse production well
control data format.
WCONPROD
'TEST1' 10* 3886 /
'GASTEST' 10* 0 /
'TEST2' 10* 0 /
'TEST3' 10* 2839 /
'TEST4' 10* 540 /
/
There is a line of data for each well in the field, each item being separated by a space. Well file
name is enclosed in , followed by 10*, then the lift gas allocated to that well, in Eclipse units
(MSCF/day). The 10* and gas allocation are replaced by SHUT if the well is masked. Each line
is terminated by a space and a forward slash, and the file is terminated by a space and slash.
15.3.4. Pipeline Data Update
15. 3. 3. Gas lift allocation output
This function works on a single, or several pipelines, which have been selected in the normal
way. It will transfer the fluid properties (GOR and water cut) and rates, calculated from the last
Allocate run, into the WellFlo files of the selected pipelines. These can then be used to perform a
pressure-drop analysis in WellFlo.
387
FieldFlo Examples
Chapter 16- FieldFlo Examples

16.1. FieldFlo Example
Objectives
This example FieldFlo model contains 5 wells, connected to one manifold. The manifold is
connected to a separator by a pipeline. See Figure 16.1.0 - 1, FieldFlo example system, on page
388.
The objectives of this example are:
To show how you would set up this field model.
To illustrate the different types of well behaviour modelled by FieldFlo.
To show some of the options of field behaviour which can be modelled.
Chapter 16 - FieldFlo Examples
The entire field (EXAMPLE) is supplied with the FloSystem installation, and you can skip the
first objective if you do not wish to practise setting up a model. In this case load EXAMPLE field
and proceed directly to the section on Generating Well Performance Curves, on page 396, or
after Building Field Performance Curves, on page 400. Otherwise, do not load the field, and
you can build it up from scratch.
Figure : 16.1.0 - 1 FieldFlo example system
388
FieldFlo Examples
Setting Up The Model Structure
If you wish to work through this section and create the field from scratch, do not load the
supplied field EXAMPLE.
The first step is to set up the logical field structure, i.e. the way in which wells and units are
connected together. Only once this is done is it possible to enter the data corresponding to these
items. (The exception to this rule is the well models. You can work on these in WellFlo
independently, and then bring them into the field model later. This will be illustrated below.)
To create a field such as this example, use the File New command. You can fill in the New Field
Name and description in the dialog box (see Figure 16.1.0 - 2, Initialising a new field Testcase, on page 389). A new field, consisting of just one unit, will appear. Remember that
this action creates a new directory with the field name you entered. This will be a sub-directory
(c:\flosys\testcase) of the path named in the Fields in line of the dialog box (c:\flosys). All the
files for this field will be stored in this new directory.
Figure : 16.1.0 - 2 Initialising a new field - Testcase
In the figure, there is another field - "example" - already under this path. This is the supplied
example data set supplied with the installation.
You can now add the field components using the Add Well and Add Unit tools (see Figure 16.1.0
- 3, The first unit (separator), on page 390). In this example you would:
1. Add the manifold with the Add Unit tool, by double clicking on the separator unit. See Figure
16.1.0 - 3, The first unit (separator), on page 390 and Figure 16.1.0 - 4, Adding the
manifold, on page 390. Note that in Figure 16.1.0 - 4, Adding the manifold, on page 390
we have clicked the Below button in the Adding Node Beside.. dialog box, to place the new
unit below the existing one.
389
16. 1. FieldFlo Example
The components you add to the new field will be numbered automatically by FieldFlo as you add
them. There is no need to re-name them manually, but in most cases you will find it easier to
apply names which correspond to the actual field. In this example, we will build up the field first,
then change the names to our preferred ones.
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 3 The first unit (separator)
2. Next, you add the wells. You must first select the Add Well tool. Then, double-click on the
unit you wish to add the well below (see Figure 16.1.0 - 5, Adding a well to the second unit,
on page 391). This time, the Adding Node Beside.. dialog box will show Well selected (on
the left), and Below is the only position available (see Figure 16.1.0 - 6, Positioning the
well, on page 391).
390
Figure : 16.1.0 - 4 Adding the manifold
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 5 Adding a well to the second unit
Figure : 16.1.0 - 6 Positioning the well
3. The result is shown in Figure 16.1.0 - 7, Adding a second well, on page 392. Here, we are
about to add the next well, by double-clicking on the well we have just placed. Note that you
cannot add more wells by double-clicking the manifold, as FieldFlo needs to know whether
the new well is to be placed Left or Right of the existing well. This is shown in Figure 16.1.0
- 8, Positioning the second well, on page 392.
391
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 7 Adding a second well
4. The second well will be a gas well, so remember to turn off the Add oil well check box. For
the third, fourth and fifth well, recheck the Add oil well box.
5. Once the structure is complete, we will re-name the items in it. This is done easily by
selecting the item (a single click on it is needed), and then clicking in the Node Name Window
(bottom left of screen) to start editing the name. See Figure 16.1.0 - 9, Renaming the top
unit, on page 393 where we are just about to rename the selected item (the top level unit,
currently called UN000001) as SEPARATOR. Either RETURN or clicking another item will
confirm the new name. Note that this operation has renamed the item. The file name
associated with it retains the old, default name, unless you rename it separately. This is not
normally necessary - see below for more details.
392
Figure : 16.1.0 - 8 Positioning the second well
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 9 Renaming the top unit
6. Once the renaming is complete, you will see the field structure with your choice of names, as
in Figure 16.1.0 - 1, FieldFlo example system, on page 388. Note that the name displayed
on the button is truncated to allow the characters of the name to be clearly viewed on
screen. The full name may be longer, and can be read in the Item Name Window by clicking
on the item.
Setting Up The Model Data

There are two kinds of static data to be added; well data and pipeline data. Both are set up
using WellFlo, but in special modes which FieldFlo controls for you (See Section 13. 5 Setting
Up And Editing Wells And Pipelines, on page 336).
The data for both wells and pipelines is stored in WellFlo data files (extension .WFL). This is
handled for you automatically - you will just need to answer Yes to Save Data Files when you
leave WellFlo to return to FieldFlo, and the correct name is used. The only time you need to
concern yourself with file names is if you wish to import an existing WellFlo file, since in this
case FieldFlo has no prior knowledge of the file; an example is given below.
For the other wells, all you need to do is select the WellFlo tool
and double-click on the
required well. This will invoke the WellFlo program, which will contain a Default Well
Description if there is not a data file already in existence for that well. If there is a data file
already, it will be automatically loaded. You can then do all the work you wish to in WellFlo to
set up a model for the well. Finally, select File Done (this is in place of File Exit when you have
entered via FieldFlo), and return to FieldFlo. Continue until all the wells have been described.
Note that in this field, the well called Fixed Qgi Well has not had its performance curves made by
the WellPCG function. Instead, they have been manually entered. Therefore, no WellFlo model
need exist for this well. This could be the case for any well which you do not wish to model in
WellFlo; this is explained below.
393
Let us suppose, in the current example, that you have a WellFlo model already of the wells called
Kick-off well and gas well. For the other wells, you do not have WellFlo files.
FieldFlo Examples
In the case of Kick-off Well, we are assuming that we have already prepared a WellFlo model. It
is in fact the example well from the examples in the WellFlo part of the manual. To bring this
well into the FieldFlo model, we take the following steps:
1. Put a copy of the file (in this case TEST1.WFL) into the FieldFlo field directory (in this
example, it would be c:\flosys\example\testcase). You could do this by the File Save As..
command in WellFlo, or by using Window's File Manager, or the humble DOS Copy
command.
Note: The master directory under which field sub-directories are stored is shown as Fields in the
New Field (or Open Field, etc.) dialog box (c:\flosys\example in this example - it will probably
be different in your installation). The actual field sub-directory is testcase in this case. This is the
Field Name shown at the top of the New Field (or Open Field, etc.) dialog box, which you
selected in the list box on the left (see Figure 16.1.0 - 2, Initialising a new field - Testcase,
on page 389). Remember that FieldFlo has a complete directory, not just a file, for its data
storage - refer to Section Recalling and Saving Fields, on page 316 for more information.
2. Now the file is in the field's directory, all you have to do is tell FieldFlo what file you want it
to use.
Select View Files from the View menu item.
Figure : 16.1.0 - 10 Renaming the wells
The same operations may now be carried out for the remaining wells. The following file
assignments should be made:
WL000002:GASTEST.WFL
WL000003:TEST2.WFL
WL000004:TEST3.WFL
WL000005:TEST4.WFL
To insert a Pipeline from Manifold to Separator;
394
Select the well (Kick-off well here) by clicking it.

Type the new file name required in the Item Name Window, followed by RETURN.
The Rename Disk Files dialog box appears (Figure 16.1.0 - 10, Renaming the wells, on
page 394). Answer No to proceed. (This node will now be associated with the file
TEST1.WFL, but no file renaming has taken place.
FieldFlo Examples
select the Pipeline tool
and double-click the manifold unit. The surface facilities version
of WellFlo is invoked across the DDE link. Again, file handling is automatic, unless you wish to
use renaming functions described above, although this is unlikely for pipelines.
Use the WellFlo Edit Add Flow Line option to insert the flowline between the Manifold and the
Separator. (If this option is greyed out, go to Configure Preferences and enable Allow graphic
node edit.)
Figure : 16.1.0 - 11 Add Flow Line option
Position the spanner tool between the two nodes:
Figure : 16.1.0 - 12 Entering a pipeline from Manifold to Separator
As soon as you release the mouse button, the Flow Line Data dialog box will appear. Enter the
following data:
395
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 13 Pipeline data
The Heat transfer coefficient is updated from the data when you OK from the dialog box.
Now return to FieldFlo via Done on the File menu and say Yes to the Save prompt.
Note: To follow this example further you will have to ensure that the Well and riser flow
correlation is set to Duns and Ros [std] in the Nodal analysis correlations dialog of Wellflo. See
Section 7. 2. 4 Choice Of Flow Correlations, on page 182.
Generating Well Performance Curves

If you decided to skip the previous phase of building up the field model from scratch, you should
load the EXAMPLE field via File Open and proceed from here.
Gas lifted well which requires minimum (kick-off) gas (TEST1).

Gas well (GASTEST).
Naturally flowing well with no gas lift (TEST2). This category could also includes ESP-lifted
wells.
Gas lifted well which can flow with no lift gas (TEST3).
Well with externally defined, fixed gas lift requirement (TEST4). As stated above, this could
be a well with no lift gas or, as in this case, a well which is required to have a fixed quantity
of gas for external reasons.
For this exercise, we will first generate well performance curves for all wells except the fixed gas
lift well (TEST4). We will define the performance of this well externally, i.e. by manual entry of
single point data (see below), just for the practice. We could, of course, apply WellPCG to this
well too, and set the fixed gas injection using the Fixed Qgi facility (Figure 13.6.1 - 4, Entering
a Fixed Qgi Value for a Well, on page 340).
396
With all the data set-up, we are ready to generate well performance curves, followed by field
performance curves. The current example contains one example each of the five types of well
model handled by FieldFlo:
FieldFlo Examples
Generation of well performance curves is very simple once the well files (.WFL) have been
created, as in this case. It is done automatically by the WellPCG function.
It is necessary for wells joining at a manifold to have a common pressure. Therefore, WellPCG
must be run at the same pressure for all "children" wells of a given manifold. (A different set of
pressures may be specified for the wells of different manifolds). FieldFlo checks that the
pressures are the same for all wells connected to a manifold. If you change any of the pressures
for one well, FieldFlo warns you to re-run WellPCG on all wells connected to the same manifold.
The correct selection of pressures is important. It is necessary to span the approximate range of
expected operational pressures at the manifold. This will allow interpolation of performance
curves during optimisation. (Extrapolation is performed if operational conditions are outside the
range of generated curves, but this is clearly a possible source of errors). On the other hand, it is
not desirable to have an excessive range of pressures spanned. This is because of the way
FieldFlo transfers performance data from one end of a flow line to the other. Due to the variation
with pressure in gas volumes needed to achieve kick-off and maximum production, an excessive
pressure range can have the effect of "blurring" the performance curves higher up the field.
In this case, anticipating pressures at the manifold of around 100 psia, we will generate the
performance curves at 50, 100 and 150 psia.
We want to run WellPCG on four wells, excluding the Fixed Qgi well. The latter well is to have
its performance data entered manually. We can do this first, or after generating the performance
curves for the other wells with WellPCG.
For wells which cannot produce without lift, the minimum gas requirement is determined
automatically by WellPCG, which converges on the first stable flowing condition, changing
GLRi in increments until this is found. You should set the Maximum GLRi to be tried for
production start-up, in Configure Preferences (see Figure 16.1.0 - 14, Setting the maximum
injection GLRi for WellPCG, on page 397). This will prevent WellPCG from wasting time
trying to start wells needing an impossibly high kick-off - however, it must clearly not be set too
low for other, better behaved, wells (you may need to investigate this in WellFlo first). Also now
there is an option to set WellPCG Maximum GLRi for individual wells, (see WellPCG maximum
GLRi on page 309).
Figure : 16.1.0 - 14 Setting the maximum injection GLRi for WellPCG
397
FieldFlo Examples
Now return to the network drawing window;
and using the WellPCG tool

, select the four wells needing performance curve generation
(hold down CTRL and click each well to make a multiple selection), then either double-click any
well whilst holding down CTRL, or press RETURN, to start the WellPCG function. The WellPCG
pressures dialog box appears, after confirmation has been made of the selection dialog boxes
and the three pressures (in this case) are entered. See Figure 16.1.0 - 15, Entering the WellPCG
pressures for the manifold, on page 398.
Figure : 16.1.0 - 15 Entering the WellPCG pressures for the manifold
The performance curves are calculated at the three pressures for a range of Qgi values from zero
or kick-off to just beyond maximum production. This may take some time!
The results of WellPCG;
you may see these by selecting the performance curve edit tool
four wells we have generated curves for in turn:
and double-clicking the
For Kick-off well, the curves consist of 6 points with the initial point at a finite value of Qgi
for 100 and 150psi (Figure 16.1.0 - 16, Performance curve table (100 psia) for the well
needing a minimum gas injection rate, on page 398)
For Gas well, the curves consist of a single point, containing only gas- and water-related
properties (Figure 16.1.0 - 17, Performance curve table (50 psia) for the gas well, on page
399)
For Non-lifted well, which has no active gas lift valves in its completion, the curves consist of
a single point, at Qgi=0, for each pressure (Figure 16.1.0 - 18, Performance curve table (50
psia) for the natural producer without gas lift, on page 399).
For Gl/flowing well, the curves are 6 points, but start at Qgi=0, since this well does not need
minimum gas (Figure 16.1.0 - 19, Performance curve table (50 psia) for the natural producer
on gas lift, on page 399).
Figure : 16.1.0 - 16 Performance curve table (100 psia) for the well needing a minimum gas
injection rate
398
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 17 Performance curve table (50 psia) for the gas well
Figure : 16.1.0 - 18 Performance curve table (50 psia) for the natural producer without gas lift
Figure : 16.1.0 - 19 Performance curve table (50 psia) for the natural producer on gas lift
Figure : 16.1.0 - 20 Performance curve tables for the well on fixed gas lift (for 50 psia, 100 psia
and 150 psia resp.)
As noted above, this could be done at either a fixed Qgi value (as here) in order to force a well to
receive a certain amount of gas.
399
Lastly, we will enter manually the fixed performance of the Fixed Qgi well. This is done by
bringing up its (empty) performance curve dialog box and typing in the values required. Type
them in across a single row, for each of the three operating pressures, as shown in Figure 16.1.0
- 20, Performance curve tables for the well on fixed gas lift (for 50 psia, 100 psia and 150 psia
resp.), on page 399.
FieldFlo Examples
Note: You will notice that a well file (TEST4.WFL ) does in fact exist for the fifth well. As an
additional exercise, you should generate performance curves for this with WellPCG. The
Performance curve pressures dialog box (See Section Editing Well Performance Curves, on
page 342) will then enable you to reinstate this well to Fixed Qgi mode by enabling the Fixed Qgi
option (Figure 13.6.1 - 4, Entering a Fixed Qgi Value for a Well, on page 340) and entering the
injection rate (0.54 MMSCF/day in this case). The corresponding production rate, etc., for each
pressure will be read from the performance tables you have just generated.
This feature has the advantage that the production data corresponding to any specified fixed Qgi
will always be read correctly from the performance tables, thus avoiding the need for manual
entry.
Building Field Performance Curves

All that is necessary to build up the performance curves for the various stages in the rest of the
field network is to assign a set of operating pressures to each unit, decide what you want to
optimise on and allocate by, add gas and oil sales revenue, and then run Build. The result will be
a set of performance curves at each unit.
Note: To decide which pressures to enter, it is necessary to appreciate that the pressures you
specify for any unit are those at the downstream end of the pipeline (if any) connecting it to its
parent unit.
When we ran WellPCG on the wells, we specified 50, 100 and 150 psia. Each well description
includes the flow line connecting it to the manifold, so these pressures in fact represent the entry
pressures at the manifold.
To generate the manifold performance curves, we now need to specify pressures at the end of the
pipeline connecting it to its parent unit - the separator. If we had multiple manifolds converging
at the separator, each would need to have the same set of pressures.
If the pressure losses along the flowlines are not expected to be very large, it should be feasible
to use the same pressures as were specified for the well performance curves. Otherwise, it may
be necessary to do some work with WellFlo with estimated production rates in order to get a feel
for the pressure drops which will occur.
The objective is simply to make sure the range of pressures specified at each unit is broad enough
to cover calculated operating pressures when Allocate is run. The program will not extrapolate
more than 20 percent beyond the lowest or highest specified pressure at any unit.
Next, we decide how to configure the calculations. For this example we will be optimising
revenue earned, but as we have a gas handling problem, we will allocate by gas produced, so that
Build will generate the maximum amount of revenue for each unit of gas production. We will
also accept the default oil and gas prices, and ignore water disposal and gas injection costs. See
Figure 16.1.0 - 21, Example calculations configuration, on page 401.
400
As a first step, in this case, let us specify the same pressures at the units as at the wells. Doubleclick on the manifold to bring up the Performance Curve Pressures dialog box. Enter the
pressures 50, 100 and 150 psia. Do the same for the separator.
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 21 Example calculations configuration
If you flare gas or otherwise dispose of it (rather than sell it), you can give Gas sales revenue a
value of 0 $/MMSCF.
The performance curve tables will of course be empty at this stage, so next run Calculations
Build. This takes a few tens of seconds. At the end of this, you will find the performance curves
for the manifold and separator (one of the tables is shown in Figure 16.1.0 - 22, Performance
curve table (50 psia) for the manifold, on page 401).
Figure : 16.1.0 - 22 Performance curve table (50 psia) for the manifold
Figure : 16.1.0 - 23 Performance Curve Plot for the Manifold
If you are happy with the results, you should save the new tables with File Save or File Save
As....
401
You can plot these by selecting Plot on the Performance Curve dialog box.
FieldFlo Examples
Predicting Field Performance And Gas Allocation.
Once the Build function has been run, Allocate can be run many times with different production
constraints in order to calculate total production and optimum lift-gas allocation, although if you
change the options in Calculations Configure you will have to re-run Build.
You will need to enter data as required in the dialog box for each top-level unit (Figure 16.1.0 27, Entering the operating constraints for gas lift allocation, on page 403).
Suppose first we have an unlimited gas handling capability, and are not interested in a cost factor
(effectively, the gas has no value).
Figure : 16.1.0 - 24 Allocating unlimited gas
20 MMSCF/day is more than adequate for the wells in this field. We set a separator pressure of
75 psia.
Figure : 16.1.0 - 25 Allocation results
If we enter a cost factor of $1000/MMSCF for the Minimum revenue per unit of total gas
production, the results are markedly different.
402
The results panel shows that 14.732 MMSCF/day is the optimum produced gas rate,
corresponding to an injection rate of 6.476 MMSCF/day. Since we have placed no restrictions on
the allocation, each well should be operating at the optimum position in its performance curves
for the prevailing pressure. Total oil production is 9418 STB/day, and oil+gas revenue
$152.494k/day.
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 26 Allocation results with cost factor
As we had a minimum cost factor, the system does not now produce as much fluid as before, as
it would have been uneconomical to produce any more gas. The results show that it would no
longer be economically viable to inject more than 3.744 MMSCF/day, producing 111.921
MMSCF/day of total gas for 9359 STB/day of oil and a revenue of $151.465k/day. Note that a
substantial reduction in the gas injection rate has only in fact decreased total revenue by 0.7%.
Now suppose we have a maximum network gas capacity of 8 MMSCF/day and we are not
interested in a cost factor.
Figure : 16.1.0 - 27 Entering the operating constraints for gas lift allocation
Figure : 16.1.0 - 28 Summary of optimised gas allocation
The program will have allocated injection gas to each well so as to optimise total revenue earned,
while respecting the maximum allowable produced gas rate of 8 MMSCF/day.
If pressures had gone out of range (i.e. Allocate computed a flowing pressure at some unit which
necessitated extrapolating too far outside the performance tables for that unit), then a warning
would be displayed in a second dialog box (Figure 16.1.0 - 29, Pressures out of range warning,
on page 404). (You can reproduce this in the current example by specifying a separator pressure
of, say, 200 psia and a max gas produced of 20 MMSCF/day in Figure 16.1.0 - 27, Entering the
operating constraints for gas lift allocation, on page 403.)
403
Figure 16.1.0 - 28, Summary of optimised gas allocation, on page 403 is a summary of the
results:
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 29 Pressures out of range warning
If this happens during normal operation of the program, you can examine the ALLOCATE.LOG to
discover where the problem occurred. To avoid the problem in future, you must then increase the
range of pressures that the manifold operates at, and re-run Build and Allocate. See Section 14. 2.
3 Running Allocate, on page 378 for more details on this problem.
The results of this calculation (the one at 75 psia separator pressure 8 MMSCF/day produced
gas) can be seen in three main ways:
1. By looking at the distribution of fluids (by percentage or actual amount) using the View menu
options. See Figure 16.1.0 - 30, Total Produced gas distribution in the field, on page 404
and Figure 16.1.0 - 31, Injection gas distribution to the field, on page 404 for example.
Figure : 16.1.0 - 31 Injection gas distribution to the field
In this case, the Kick-off well produced no gas (it was not allocated any injection gas). We had
only 8 MMSCF total production allowed, and this was produced by the gas well, non-lift oil
well, fixed Qg and gl/flowing well for optimum revenue. The revenue earned to contribute to
this total can be seen in Figure 16.1.0 - 32, Revenues throughout the field with no cost on
injection, on page 405.
In this case, the gas well is not producing (to meet the total gas production of 8MMSCF from
the field). This is intuitively incorrect. However, since no cost has been assigned to the
injection gas (under Calculations - Configure).
404
Figure : 16.1.0 - 30 Total Produced gas distribution in the field
FieldFlo Examples
The calculations weigh injection and non-injection options equally. If we define injection gas
cost the same as Gas Sales Revenue ($2500/MMSF), we could see the gas well being
preferred over the kick off well without lowering the revenues significantly. The two revenue
distributions are shown below:
Figure : 16.1.0 - 32 Revenues throughout the field with no cost on injection
Figure : 16.1.0 - 33 Revenues throughout the field with cost on injection
2. By looking at the pressure distribution calculated for the field - see Figure 16.1.0 - 34,
Pressure Distribution Through the Field, on page 405.
3. By looking at the sixth performance table for each item, which corresponds to the interpolated
or extrapolated performance at the calculated operating condition. (The Pressure field on this
table is the calculated operating pressure for the item.)
Thus in the current optimisation, we can see by looking at, say, well gl/flowing, the predicted
performance curve at the calculated operating pressure of 79.830 psia (see Figure 16.1.0 - 35,
Performance curve table for the gl/flowing well at the computed surface operating pressure,
on page 406).
405
Figure : 16.1.0 - 34 Pressure Distribution Through the Field
FieldFlo Examples
Figure : 16.1.0 - 35 Performance curve table for the gl/flowing well at the computed surface
operating pressure
Remember that this pressure of 79.830 psia is at the downstream end of the flowline connecting
the well to the manifold, i.e. at the entry to the manifold.
Looking at the Allocate (sixth) performance table for the manifold, you will see a pressure of 75
psia. This is the pressure at the downstream end of the flow line connecting the manifold to the
separator, i.e. at the entry to the separator (see Figure 16.1.0 - 34, Pressure Distribution
Through the Field, on page 405).
A step-by-step breakdown of the gas allocated to the wells, and liquid production from them, can
be seen via the Plot options of the Pressure Entry Dialog Box for the parent manifold.
For instance, Figure 16.1.0 - 36, Optimised Revenue from the wells, on page 406 shows the
revenue earned from each well, and the total revenue (upper solid line), as a function of the gas
being produced at the manifold as the Allocate calculation progresses, up to the specified
maximum of 8.0 MMSCF/day. The production rates at 8.0 MMSCF/day are the final
optimised results.
The gl/flowing well comes on stream first, then contributes a fixed revenue to the total. Next the
non-lifted well comes on and produces about 1 MMSCF/day of gas and a constant revenue
contribution. Then the fixed Qg well looks more economic and is allocated its gas requirement
and starts to produce. Then gl/flowing is allocated more gas packets, and produces most of the
rest of the revenue. Finally, the gas well comes on line, making up the final total of 8.0 MMSCF/
day. The kick-off well is never started up.
Figure : 16.1.0 - 36 Optimised Revenue from the wells
406
FieldFlo Examples
Allocate can be run many times provided the field data is not changed. If wells are taken out of
production (using Mask), Build must be re-run, before new allocation calculations can be made.
Similarly, if any options in the Calculations Configure dialog box are altered, Build must be rerun. If any well is altered, WellPCG must be rerun on that well, followed by Build and Allocate.
It is worth experimenting with various combinations in order to appreciate how FieldFlo handles
different cases.
For example, re-running the data at 125 psia separator pressure gives a different distribution. See
Figure 16.1.0 - 37, Revenue Distribution at 125 psia Psep, on page 407, which shows that now
the Non-lift oil well is producing less revenue - the well has been choked back, in response to the
different manifold pressure. Compare Figure 16.1.0 - 37, Revenue Distribution at 125 psia
Psep, on page 407 with Figure 16.1.0 - 32, Revenues throughout the field with no cost on
injection, on page 405.
Figure : 16.1.0 - 37 Revenue Distribution at 125 psia Psep
The corresponding revenue profile is shown in Figure 16.1.0 - 38, Optimised Revenue at 125
psia Psep, on page 407, which can be compared with Figure 16.1.0 - 36, Optimised Revenue
from the wells, on page 406 (there is a slight difference!).
Figure : 16.1.0 - 38 Optimised Revenue at 125 psia Psep
407
WellFlo - ESP Overview
Chapter 17- WellFlo - ESP Overview

17.1. WellFlo - ESP: General Introduction
WellFlo-ESP is an extension module to WellFlo which adds the capability of modelling ESPlifted wells to the WellFlo capabilities. Two modes of ESP modelling are provided: ESP design
and ESP analysis/diagnosis.
WellFlo takes as its input, a description of the reservoir, of the well completion (i.e. the hardware
within the well), and of the surface hardware (i.e. pipelines etc.). This is combined with fluid
properties data. The program then performs calculations to determine the pressure and
temperature of the fluids, through the reservoir wellbore, and flowlines. WellFlo-ESP adds the
ESP as a further "node" and allows it to be modelled in the context of the full well model. An
ESP can be included in the downhole tubing of the well model or a Surface ESP can be included
in a flowline, above the wellhead in the model. In most cases the way in which you can use these
two options is the same. (The one exception being when the Surface ESP is included in a pipeline
model within FieldFlo. In this situation the user must ensure that there is no gas separator in the
pump.)
An important feature of WellFlo-ESP is its full integration with WellFlo. This means that all
WellFlo features are available when modelling ESPs. It also means that ESPs can be studied with
respect to all applicable WellFlo sensitivities, as well as ESP-specific sensitivities. Lastly, it
gives a very easy route to comparing ESP- and gas-lifted wells, as the same well model can be
built (reservoir, completion, surface facilities and PVT), and then quickly altered to include an
ESP or gas lift valves.
The WellFlo-ESP section of the manual consists of five chapters, Chapter 17 WellFlo - ESP
Overview, on page 408 to Chapter 21 ESP Example, on page 452:
Chapter 17 WellFlo - ESP Overview, on page 408 introduces the ESP module, in terms of
what it does for the engineer and broadly, how to do it.
Chapter 18 ESP Description, on page 413 covers data preparation for the well and ESP,
ready for calculations.
Chapter 19 ESP Design and Analysis, on page 429 explains how to actually run ESP
calculations, and gives the background to the calculations.
Chapter 20 Output from WellFlo-ESP, on page 444 covers output of data, both input and
the results of the computations made.
Chapter 21 ESP Example, on page 452 illustrates the use of WellFlo - ESP on a low
productivity well.
An overview of the whole of WellFlo-ESP is provided in Section Running ESP Design or
Analysis, on page 410.
Note: Wherever standard WellFlo procedures or details are required, you will be directed to the
appropriate place in the main WellFlo section of this User Guide. If you are not already familiar
with this section, or with the use of the WellFlo program, you are advised to read and become
familiar with the basic WellFlo features as a starting point, since this section only includes
information on the additional functionality of WellFlo-ESP.
408
Chapter 17 - WellFlo - ESP Overview
17.2. This Section of the Manual
17.3. WellFlo - ESP Applications

There are two main types of ESP-specific applications in WellFlo-ESP. These are:
Designing an ESP installation. This means sizing the pump, and selecting a pump/motor
based on power consumption. Selection of suitable components is made from a catalogue of
five manufacturers' data.
Analysing an existing ESP. In this mode, you already know the pump and motor that is in the
well, but you wish to run sensitivity studies, either for pump variables, e.g. frequency, or
other variables, such as water cut or wellhead pressure.
17.3.1. Designing an ESP Installation

In this application mode, you insert an ESP in a well, but without knowing which size of pump
or motor is needed. You also enter the flowrate you would like to achieve. The program then
calculates which pumps and motors will meet the criteria set, and you can select a combination
from a list based on correct sizes, capacities, power consumptions and efficiencies.
The data you need to enter is the reservoir, the well completion, the PVT, and the specific ESP
data; the design production rate, frequency and range of pump ODs you wish to consider. There
are some calculation options for wear factors and corrections for viscosity or free gas.
The calculation selects suitable pumps on the basis of:
Pump OD between the lower and upper limit you specify.
Pump capacity at the design frequency spans the design rate.
Number of stages required is not greater than the number which the pump can be fitted with.
Pump shaft horsepower needed does not exceed specified limit.
Free gas through pump does not exceed a critical limit (optional).
The motor selection is based on:
Pump horsepower needed can be supplied by the motor.

You then make a pump and motor selection from a list of suitable combinations. You are shown
the number of stages required for each pump, the power needed, and the motor electrical power
needed for each motor/pump combination. You can fine-tune the design for a different operating
frequency, number of stages, etc. if required.
You may also further extend the design scope by studying the variation of key properties against
the setting depth of the ESP.
17.3.2. Analysis of an ESP Installation

This calculation mode is the Analysis mode of WellFlo, but with the addition of the ESP as an
integral part of the reservoir-well-surface model. ESP-specific sensitivity variables are added to
the standard WellFlo sensitivity variables. The ESP variables are:
409
17. 3. WellFlo - ESP Applications
Motor OD between the lower and upper limit you specify.

Frequency, for Variable Speed Drive applications.
Number of stages.
Gas separator efficiency.
Pump and Motor wear factors.
ESP setting depth
For each "run", the operating rate of the well, and the motor amps, can be displayed together with
the pump discharge and tubing intake curves. The maximum and minimum flowrates for the
pump are also shown for each sensitivity run, so that you can see how far from the limits the
pump is operating at, over a range of sensitivity values. Warning messages are given when rates
become excessive or too much free gas flows through the pump at the operating condition.
17.4. Running ESP Design or Analysis

This section is to provide a brief overview of what is required to run WellFlo-ESP. It is
essentially a condensed version of each of the four chapters in this section of the manual. Most of
the material which is common to WellFlo in normal (non-ESP) mode is excluded; instead you are
referred to the relevant parts of the WellFlo section (Part 2) of this FloSystem User Guide.
Note: Users can set up WellFlo-ESP to work in different units systems. EPS supply oilfield and
various forms of metric systems; you can also customise your own system. See Section 4 Using
the FloSystem Interface, on page 27.
17.4.1. WellFlo-ESP Software Protection
Figure : 17.4.1 - 1 Menu Appearance With (left) & Without (right) ESP Module Enabled
The menus of WellFlo appear with the ESP options enabled (black text) if the license is enabled
for WellFlo-ESP, Figure 17.4.1 - 1, Menu Appearance With (left) & Without (right) ESP
Module Enabled, on page 410, left, shows one example. If the security licence is not WellFloESP enabled, the ESP options are greyed-out, and cannot be selected (Figure 17.4.1 - 1, Menu
Appearance With (left) & Without (right) ESP Module Enabled, on page 410, right). Also if the
relevant parts of the software were not selected when the programs were installed the text will be
greyed-out. In the same way, the ESP options under the Analysis and Configure menus will be
black when enabled by the security licence etc.
410
17. 4. Running ESP Design or Analysis
WellFlo-ESP is an additional module to EPSs WellFlo product. This means that licensees of
WellFlo (only) will not be able to use WellFlo-ESP. If you have licensed WellFlo-ESP, the
software protection device (FlexLM) will be enabled to run WellFlo-ESP. However, a standard
WellFlo license will not run WellFlo-ESP. If you wish to upgrade from WellFlo to WellFlo-ESP,
or if you believe you should be licensed for WellFlo-ESP but cannot access it, please contact EPS
(See Section 1 Introduction to FloSystem, on page 11).

17.4.2. What Is Involved?
WellFlo-ESP requires the setting up of a well model, for which layer IPR, well completion,
surface facility, and fluid property data are needed. Vertical flow correlations, temperature
models and PVT correlations etc. should be chosen in the normal way. Either enter the ESP
pump and motor data manually, or (when in Design Pump only mode) these will be transferred
following the installation of one of the pumps selected in the design.
You have control over the type of analysis you do, and over the sensitivity variables to be
studied. At the end of any calculations, you can store the results as a file which can be recalled
later, or you can view the results on graphs and make hard copies.
17.4.3. Data Preparation

For an overview of the building of the basic well model required, See Section 5. 4. 2 Data
Preparation, on page 51. For more details; See Section 6 WellFlo System Description, on
page 53.
Note: there is an optional emulsion viscosity correction available in the Fluid Parameters
section.
The ESP data preparation is quite straightforward; for Design mode, you use the Data
Preparation-ESP Data option to place the ESP at the required measured depth, or you can use
(with Graphic node editing turned on) the graphical editor to click on the well schematic at the
point (node) where you wish to include the ESP but this method will be restrictive with regard
to the possible pump depths as you will not be able to place it within a tubing section say, only at
one or other of its ends. You then enter some basic sizing (OD) and calculation parameters in the
ESP dialog box.
The following four fields are required:

Pump series.
Number of stages (select from the catalogue range of numbers or manually enter).
Motor series.
Motor nameplate rating.
The pump capacity range and motor actual nameplate rating, at the operating frequency
specified, are displayed.
17.4.4. Design and Analysis

The choice of flow correlations, temperature models and control pressures (e.g. WHP) are again
common with standard WellFlo. For an overview; See Section 5. 4. 3 Analysis, on page 51. For
more details see Chapter 7 WellFlo Analysis Section, on page 177.
411
17. 4. 2. What Is Involved?
For Analysis mode, you do the same, except that in the ESP dialog box, you must select the pump
and motor specification from the catalogue data listed. The pump and motor data is arranged by
manufacturer, with five manufacturers currently available to be included (Reda, Centrilift, ODI,
Ramco-Alnas and ESP Inc). The selection of these manufacturers can be defined by clicking on
the ESP manufacturers button, in the Wellflo preferences dialog box.

In Design mode you only have to enter a target production rate, a WHP (or other "top node")
pressure, and percentage adjustments to a chosen pump's minimum and maximum recommended
flow rate. You may select to vary the setting depth of the ESP as an optional sensitivity in this
mode. The program then makes a Nodal Analysis run and matches all the pumps and motors
which would be suitable. You then choose the pump to install in the well model from the list of
suitable pumps.
In Analysis mode, the calculation control is the same as for standard WellFlo, with just the
addition of the ESP sensitivity variables. The default Solution Node (i.e. the point in the well
where inflow and outflow curves are calculated) shifts from the mid-perforation Casing node in
standard WellFlo to the pump discharge point (i.e. the base of the Tubing node above the pump).
This gives inflow/outflow curve plots showing the pump discharge pressure (PDP) and tubing
intake pressure.
17.4.5. Outputting Your Work

The results may be saved to file, sent to a report file, or plotted on the screen with hard copy
option, as in standard WellFlo. There is also an optional log file. See Section 5. 4. 4 Outputting
Your Work, on page 52. For more details; See Section 8 Output of WellFlo Results, on page
234. The Design mode report file is useful as it lists details of each suitable pump, and the design
run characteristics. The plot for this mode is a pressure-depth profile, showing the calculated
pressures and temperatures along the well and across the pump. The Analysis mode report file
includes the details of the currently selected pump. The plots are the inflow/outflow curve plots
with extra ESP information in the form of pump flowrate minima and maxima and motor current.
Performance curve plots can also be made, of operating rate or pressure versus sensitivity
variable (e.g. frequency).
The pump performance plots generated in the Pump Data Editor can be output as hard copy.
For more details on the graphics plotting capabilities in WellFlo; See Section 4 Using the
FloSystem Interface, on page 27. This also contains information on setting up a printer under
Windows.
412
ESP Description
Chapter 18- ESP Description

18.1. ESP Data Entry Overview
This chapter explains how an ESP node is added to the well, and what data you have to enter for
both Design mode and Analysis mode. The pump and motor databases are also described.
The starting point for this chapter is that you have a well model built already, using the functions
described in the Section WellFlo System Description, on page 53. The well must be for a
Black Oil fluid type. You can edit the well model in any way after inserting your ESP into it, so
it is not necessary to have everything fully defined before inserting the ESP.
18.2. Inserting an ESP in the Well

The simplest way to insert an ESP is to select the ESP Data option from the Data Preparation
menu, then type in a depth at which to place it, as in Figure 18.2.0 - 1, Inserting an ESP at 2346
ft, on page 413.
Figure : 18.2.0 - 1 Inserting an ESP at 2346 ft
Alternatively, you can insert an ESP in the well by selecting Add ESP from the Edit menu. The
cursor will change from:
: to the system component tool:
You can now click to insert the ESP at any given point. See Section 6. 3. 1 Using The Tabular
and Graphical Editors, on page 65 for more details.
Whichever way you do it, there are some exceptions you may encounter:
You cannot place more than one ESP in a model.
You cannot place an ESP (anywhere) if you have gas lift valves in the well (only one form of
artificial lift is allowed).
You cannot place gas lift valves if you have an ESP (anywhere) in the well (only one form of
artificial lift is allowed).
You cannot have an ESP in a gas or condensate well.
These situations will give rise to appropriately worded message boxes.
413
Chapter 18 - ESP Description
the arrow
ESP Description
18.2.1. Moving an ESP in the Well
The simplest way to move an ESP is to simply select the ESP Data option from the Data
Preparation menu again, then type in a new measured depth to set it at, as pictured in Figure
18.2.0 - 1, Inserting an ESP at 2346 ft, on page 413. However, if the ESP data is being edited
having selected the icon from the screen, you will find that the Depth entry field is greyed out
and cannot be changed. Either delete the node or edit the data via Data Preparation - ESP Data.
Alternatively, as with any other component, to move the ESP, select the ESP, drag it the new
location and release it - See Section 6. 3. 1 Using The Tabular and Graphical Editors, on page
65 for more details on dragging.
Note: No matter which method is used, the ESP is modelled as having no length of its own. In
addition it cannot be place in the surface part of the well, only between the wellhead and the top
of the casing. There is a Surface ESP which can be added to the flowline section, above the
wellhead. Only one ESP can be included in a model, regardless of whether it is a downhole or
surface type.
18.3. ESP Design Mode Data Entry

If you wish to design an ESP installation, you need only enter minimal data about the pump's
environment. The program will determine which pump(s) will achieve the requirement. The
calculations are explained in Section See Section 19. 2 ESP Design, on page 429. This section
explains the ESP data you need to define the pump environment.
18. 2. 1. Moving an ESP in the Well
When you place an ESP in the well by selecting Data Preparation - ESP Data (or Surface ESP
Data) the System Editor: ESP Data dialog box shown in Figure 18.3.0 - 1, ESP Design Mode
dialog box, on page 414 appears. This dialog box will be called up subsequently any time you
double click on the ESP icon, or select ESP Data from the Data Preparation menu.
Figure : 18.3.0 - 1 ESP Design Mode dialog box
For Design mode, the Design pump only option is clicked on.
The dialog box controls three types of data:
414
ESP Description
Pump environment area: setting depth, size constraints, design frequency and temperature
(needed only if manual temperature model is being used).
Wear factors/Efficiencies area: modifiers for pump or motor wear.
Calculation options area: Optional correction factors for viscosity or free gas during the
design calculations.
The Analysis equipment area is greyed out in Design mode, since you don't yet know what it
will be. (If you want to enter a known pump the proceed to Section ESP Analysis Mode Data
Entry, on page 417.)
These items are described in the following sections. As always, click OK to confirm your data,
Cancel to return with no changes kept, and Delete to remove the ESP from the well. The Plot
option is disabled in Design mode until a pump and motor have been selected.
Note: If you select the Analyse pump button, the dialog box changes to become like Figure 18.4.0
- 1, ESP System Editor Analysis Mode, on page 418. In Analyse mode, you will not be allowed
to OK from the dialog box until a valid pump and motor is selected. If you wish to let WellFloESP choose the pump and motor, then use Design mode.
18.3.1. Pump Environment - Design Mode

The first step is to enter the range of pump and motor sizes that you wish to select from. Only
pumps and motors whose ODs fall between these two values will be selected in the design run.
This is done in the two entry fields called Min Equt OD and Max Equt OD. Enter the range
you require.
Figure : 18.3.1 - 1 Pump Equipment section
The initial value for Max Equt OD corresponds to the minimum casing ID found between the
wellhead and the pump depth. If you change this to a diameter larger than the minimum value the
following warning will be displayed allowing you to return the entered value to that of the
minimum casing ID between the wellhead and the pump depth.
Figure : 18.3.1 - 2 Node Edit warning
415
18. 3. 1. Pump Environment - Design Mode
Normally the maximum will correspond to your casing ID minus the clearance for cable that you
require. The Max Equt OD must be greater than the Min Equt OD. You can enter a nominal
range to span only the size of pump/motor you wish to install.
ESP Description
Changing the measured depth, when this is allowed, will cause the same message to be displayed
when the minimum casing depth at a new depth is smaller.
Note: Some pump/motor combinations have different nominal outside diameters (ODs). For
example, pumps of 3.372" and 3.996" both work with 3.75" motors. Thus to ensure that only one
of these pump/motor combinations are selected, you would need to enter a minimum/maximum of
3.3" / 3.8", or 3.7" / 4" respectively.
The Operating Frequency is the supply frequency at which you wish to size the pump and
motor. At a later stage, in Analysis Mode, the effects of varying the frequency on the pump
performance can be seen.
The Upstream Temperature is only needed for manual temperature mode calculations.
Normally, you would use a calculated temperature model, in which case you can leave this field
as the default. If, however, you wish to specify manual temperatures throughout the well system,
enter here the temperature at the upstream (i.e. intake) end of the pump/motor system. See
Section 19. 1 Setting up the Calculations - General, on page 429 for more details on the
temperature modelling options.
18.3.2. Pump Wear Factors and Efficiencies

There are five controls and entries in this section of the dialog box. These are used to control
three types of calculation modification:
Pump Efficiency
If the Head Factor is selected, the pump head is degraded by the wear factor, i.e. the head
produced at a given flowrate (from the performance curve) is multiplied by the wear factor, and
power input needed remains unmodified. This would normally be the case for a worn pump.
If the Power Factor is selected, the pump head remains unmodified, but the power needed is
multiplied by (1/wear factor). This can be used to approximate the extra power taken up by a gas
separator.
Thus, a wear factor of 0.8 could either degrade the head to 80% of the manufacturer's figure, or
increase the power needed to (1/0.8) = 125% of the manufacturer's figure.
Motor Wear
The Motor Wear Factor is a modifier to the motor current required for a given power. It has the
effect of increasing the heat dissipation of the motor. If for example a value of 0.9 is entered here,
the motor current for a given power requirement is increased to (1/0.9) = 111% of the unmodified
figure. The excess (11% here) is dissipated as heat.
Gas Separator
The last two controls of this section of the dialog box concern gas separation. Click Gas
Separator Present On to model a gas separator below the pump. If this option is selected, the
last field, Separator Efficiency is used to input the fraction of free gas at the ESP intake
conditions that will be split off from the well stream and assumed to be vented up the annulus,
e.g. if the efficiency is set at 0.75, 75% of the free gas will be split off from the stream.
416
18. 3. 2. Pump Wear Factors and Efficiencies
Pump Wear Factor is a modifier to the pump performance. When it is 1.0, no modification is
made. When it is less than 1.0, the pump performance is degraded, as controlled by the Head
Factor - Power Factor selection buttons.
ESP Description
18.3.3. Calculation Options
The last group of controls for Design mode are three Calculation Options at top right. These
control the Design mode - Analysis mode choice, as discussed at the beginning of the section,
and the optional viscosity and gassiness corrections.
Viscosity Effects
This check box switches on the WellFlo-ESP viscosity corrections for ESP calculations. See
Section 19. 4. 4 Viscosity Effects, on page 443 for details on the calculations. The selection
here applies to both Design mode and analysis mode.
Free Gas Effects

This check box switches on the WellFlo-ESP free gas corrections for ESP calculations. See
Section 19. 4. 5 Gassiness Effects, on page 443 for details on the calculations. The selection
here applies to both Design mode and analysis mode.
18.4. ESP Analysis Mode Data Entry

In Analysis mode the ESP System editor dialog box is used to enter extra information that
WellFlo-ESP needs to know in order to analyse the ESP. The dialog box is changed to allow the
extra data to be entered when you check the Analyse pump option. This enables the Analysis
equipment area of the dialog box, where the ESP and Motor are specified, for editing. There are
three cases when this is needed:
If you wish to enter pump and motor data without performing ESP design first (e.g. to model
an existing well).
If you wish to change the pump choice at any time, you can do so here by double-clicking the
ESP icon and editing.
18. 3. 3. Calculation Options
When you have chosen a pump and motor at the end of a Design mode run (See Section 19. 2.
6 Choosing Which ESP to Use, on page 434), this dialog box appears and you can review
the selected pump before proceeding. You might do this to modify for example, the number
of stages, or the motor nameplate rating, which WellFlo-ESP has selected for you.
417
ESP Description
Figure : 18.4.0 - 1 ESP System Editor Analysis Mode
Most of the functions are identical in Design and Analysis modes. These are described briefly
here. The ESP selection, which is not performed in Design mode, is described in Section
Choosing an ESP and Motor, on page 419. The common functions are:
The Wear Factors and Efficiencies. See Section 18. 3. 2 Pump Wear Factors and
Efficiencies, on page 416 for details.
The Pump environment and Analysis equipment areas of the dialog box are treated differently,
as described below.
18.4.1. Pump Environment - Analysis Mode

The two entry fields Min Eqpt OD and Max Eqpt OD are the same as in Design mode. Enter
the range you require. In Analysis mode, the size range is used to restrict the choice of pumps and
motors in the Analysis equipment selection. If you already know which pump you want, then
just expand the size range to be sure it covers the required pump. Note that some pump/motor
combinations have different nominal ODs as mentioned before in Section Pump Environment Design Mode, on page 415.
The Operating Frequency is the frequency for your base case analysis of the pump and motor.
You can, after the design, in Analysis, see the effect of varying the frequency on the pump
performance, using sensitivity runs. This field is linked to the Analysis Equipment area of the
dialog box. When you change this frequency, the displayed pump and motor characteristics
change to reflect the new frequency. See Section 18. 4. 2 Choosing an ESP and Motor, on page
419, for more details.
The Upstream Temperature is only needed for manual temperature mode calculations. See
Section 18. 3. 1 Pump Environment - Design Mode, on page 415, and See Section 19. 1
Setting up the Calculations - General, on page 429, for more details on the temperature
modelling options.
418
18. 4. 1. Pump Environment - Analysis Mode
For the options for corrections for viscosity and gassiness; see Section 18. 3. 3 Calculation
Options, on page 417 for details.
ESP Description
18.4.2. Choosing an ESP and Motor
This section of the dialog box is only editable if Design mode is switched off. It allows you to
select different pumps and motors from the database, and specify number of stages and
nameplate rating, respectively. Information to help you make the choice is also displayed.
The Pump Model list is used to select the pump. The list of pumps is arranged by manufacturer,
and each entry shows: model name - manufacturer name, e.g. A230 - Reda. You may choose
which manufacturers to include, or exclude, via the ESP Manufacturers button on the Configure
Preferences dialog box described in Section 6. 2. 2 Configure Menu, on page 59. Only the
pumps with ODs between the minimum and maximum specified above will be shown, see Figure
18.4.2 - 1, Selecting The Pump Model, on page 419. If no pumps exist in the range specified,
the list field will be blank.
Figure : 18.4.2 - 1 Selecting The Pump Model
Note: You are advised to contact the pump manufacturer before operating a pump outside its
recommended range.
The Number of Stages box allows you to select the number of stages from the stage lists in the
database. You can also type in your own number of stages, provided this is between the minimum
number of stages and maximum number of stages in the stage list.
Figure : 18.4.2 - 2 Selecting The Number of Stages
419
18. 4. 2. Choosing an ESP and Motor
Referring back to Figure 18.4.0 - 1, ESP System Editor Analysis Mode, on page 418, the Min
Flow Rate and Max Flow Rate fields are for information and show the manufacturer's
recommended minimum and maximum in-situ capacity from the database. These fields link to
the Operating Frequency field, and show the actual rating at the frequency entered. For
example if you have the first pump in the database selected, the Reda A230, then at 60Hz, it has
a recommended flow capacity range of 100-350 bbl/day. If you change the frequency to 66Hz
(+10%), the range shows 110-385 bbl/day (also +10%).
ESP Description
Any number will be accepted, but you will get a warning if the number that you enter is not in the
stage list in the database.
In Figure 18.4.2 - 2, Selecting The Number of Stages, on page 419, for example, we could type
in numbers of stages from the list, e.g. 196 or 200. On the other hand, we could select a number
not on the list - e.g. 199 stages, which may be physically possible but not a standard catalogue
number. WellFlo-ESP will accept this but will first give you a warning message (see Figure
18.4.2 - 3, Pump Stages not in Database Warning, on page 420) when you try to OK from the
editor screen. However, you cannot enter a number of stages less then the minimum or greater
than the maximum allowable for that pump.
Figure : 18.4.2 - 3 Pump Stages not in Database Warning
The Motor Model list works in a similar way to the Pump Model list, but will include all of
motors satisfying the size range; it is not restricted by the Pump manufacturer name.
The Nameplate Rating is a list of all the motor's nameplate specifications possible for the motor
series currently selected. It will default to the first nameplate on the list if a new motor series is
selected. The ratings are at the design frequencies specified by the manufacturers and these can
be seen in the motor database (See Section 18. 5. 2 Motor Database, on page 426).
As an example, if you have the first pump and first motor in the database selected, the Reda A230
and 375 Series motor with nameplate rating 7.5 hp, 410 V, 14A, the Operating Rating will not
be 7.5 hp, 410 V, 14A at 60Hz, but 8.25 hp, 451 V, 14A at 66Hz (i.e. 10% higher power and
terminal voltage at the same current).
Cable size: select the cable size required. The voltage loss/amp/1000 ft for each cable size is
stored in a file ESPCABLE.DAT supplied with the program. You may edit the values, or add new
cable sizes, if you wish. The values entered must be in volts/amp/1000 ft, regardless of the units
system you are working in. A maximum drop of 30V/1000ft is usually recommended.
18.5. ESP Pump and Motor Database

The databases of pumps and motors which are used throughout WellFlo-ESP can be viewed and
edited within WellFlo-ESP using the ESP Pump Data editor and the ESP Motor Data editor.
These are accessed through the Configure main menu item, as shown in Figure 18.5.0 - 1,
Pump and Motor Database Menu Items, on page 421.
420
18. 5. ESP Pump and Motor Database
The Operating Rating is the nameplate specification modified for the current Operating
Frequency (See Section 18. 4. 1 Pump Environment - Analysis Mode, on page 418). This
enables you to select the nameplate rated motor you want from the list at the manufacturers'
design frequencies, whilst also viewing the actual nameplate rating the motors will have at the
frequency you wish to operate at.
ESP Description
Figure : 18.5.0 - 1 Pump and Motor Database Menu Items
You can, if you require, permanently delete some pumps or motors from the databases, using a
text editor on the database files themselves. This is not in general recommended, but is described
in Sections Making Permanent Changes to Pump Database, on page 425 and Making
Permanent Changes to Motor Database, on page 427.
Modifications to the pump and motor databases are worked through in the example at the end of
the WellFlo-ESP section.
18.5.1. Pump Database

Selecting Configure, ESP Pump Data from the main WellFlo-ESP menu brings up the ESP Pump
Data Editor dialog box, Figure 18.5.1 - 1, ESP Pump Data Editor, on page 421.
Figure : 18.5.1 - 1 ESP Pump Data Editor
The dialog box contains data fields to describe the pumps as required by WellFlo-ESP. These
fields and their interaction are described below:
Pump Manufacturer allows you to select the manufacturer you wish to see. The Pump Model
below will show the first entry in the database for that manufacturer. The Pump Model is not an
exclusive list for the current manufacturer, but can be scrolled up or down, in which case, when
the list scrolls into another manufacturer's data, the Pump Manufacturer field will change
accordingly.
Pump OD which is used to select pumps by size (See Section 18. 3. 1 Pump Environment Design Mode, on page 415 and See Section 18. 4. 1 Pump Environment - Analysis Mode, on
page 418.
421
18. 5. 1. Pump Database
Viewing Pump Data
ESP Description
Design Frequency and Design Stages which are used in conjunction with the head and power
curves to size pumps. These numbers are the frequency and number of stages for which the
manufacturers supply the curves. WellFlo-ESP calculates the actual performance at other
frequencies and numbers of stages, during calculations. To do this WellFlo uses the following
equations, where the subscript ref. refers to the catalogue data:Motor Data Adjustment:-
Power : Voltage : -
HP = HPref *
V = Vref *
ref
ref
Motor speed (rpm) is not currently corrected for slippage versus load, and is assumed to be
proportional to supply frequency.
Pump Data Adjustment:Rate limits :
Q = Qref *
ref
Head :

H = H ref
ref
Power :

HP = HPre f
ref
@ Q = Qref *
ref
@ Q = Qref *
ref
Min flowrate and Max flowrate are manufacturers' ratings for the recommended in-situ
minimum and maximum total volumetric throughput. Again these are used by WellFlo-ESP,
corrected to the actual frequency, for pump selection and error condition detection.
The central part of the dialog box is taken up by the performance section. This contains a 12
point entry of the head and power curves, as a function of in-situ flowrate and for water as the
pumped medium, calculated from the manufacturers' supplied polynomial coefficients. Of the 12
points: three are equally spaced between zero flow and the Minimum flowrate, six are equally
spaced from the Minimum to the Maximum flowrates, and the remaining three are equally
spaced between the Maximum flowrate and the approximate top end of the performance curve
supplied by the manufacturer, as the last data point or the crossing of the zero-head axis,
whichever is the smaller.
WellFlo-ESP uses interpolation of these curves to find actual performance at any flowrate.
Extrapolation is used beyond either end, but such conditions would be very unlikely. To see what
these curves look like, use the plotting described in Section Plotting Pump Data, on page 423,
by clicking the Plot button.
The bottom left corner of the dialog box is the Number of stages section, for adding to, or
deleting from, the pump stage list. This is only allowed in edit mode - see Section Editing or
Inserting Motor Data, on page 427.
422
The Max shaft power is another manufacturers rating and is used in WellFlo-ESP as a check for
the maximum power which may be safely supplied to a pump.
ESP Description
Plotting Pump Data
Clicking Plot creates a graph of the ESP's head and power curves, as shown in Figure 18.5.1 - 2,
Plot of An ESP's Performance Curves, on page 423. This shows
Head on the left axis.
Power on the right axis.
Minimum and Maximum flowrates as vertical dashed lines, with flowrate as the abscissa.
The title shows the pump name and the design stages and frequency for which the plot is valid.
Figure : 18.5.1 - 2 Plot of An ESP's Performance Curves
This graph uses all the same functionality as other FloSystem graphs, for more details see Using
the FloSystem Interface, on page 27 and Output from ESP Pump & Motor Database, on page
451.
You cannot change the data for the supplied ESP data. It remains "greyed out" in the ESP Pump
Data Editor. In order to edit a pump, you need to create a new pump based on the existing one,
then edit that. The same procedure is required to make a new pump. The example at the end of
this section includes a detailed description of the procedure for editing the pump and motor
databases.
To allow editing, give the pump a new name, by tabbing to the Pump model field and typing in
a new name: RC5-mod. in this example (see Figure 18.5.1 - 3, Editing Pump Data - New
Name, on page 424).
423
Editing or Inserting Pump Data
ESP Description
Figure : 18.5.1 - 3 Editing Pump Data - New Name
Figure : 18.5.1 - 4 Plot of Modified ESP's Curves
When you select a new pump, WellFlo-ESP asks if you wish to keep the changes for the pump
you were just editing. Answer Yes or No as appropriate. When you click OK, you leave this dialog
box and any changes to the pump database are written to the disk file ESPPUMP.DAT. If you click
Cancel, no changes are written. If you do change the database in this way, you will find that you
can select the pump in the ESP System Editor, and it will be included in design runs if its criteria
are appropriate. See Figure 18.5.1 - 5, ESP Editor with Modified Pump Selected, on page 425
424
Once you tab out of this field, the whole dialog box is enabled for editing. Tab to the field you
wish to change and enter the new data.
The relevant number of stages should be added and unwanted cases deleted using the Add and
Delete buttons at the bottom left of the dialog box. (Add and Delete buttons only refer to the stage
entries).
If you now click Plot, the modified plot will appear as shown in Figure 18.5.1 - 4, Plot of
Modified ESP's Curves, on page 424.
ESP Description
showing how the modified pump can now be selected.
Figure : 18.5.1 - 5 ESP Editor with Modified Pump Selected
Making Permanent Changes to Pump Database

In order to do this, you need to edit the text file ESPPUMP.DAT.
The file is arranged by manufacturer, as follows:
[manufacturer-name]
[pump-name] [locked] [OD] [design-freq] [design-stages]
[q-min] [q-max] [max-hp]
[number-rates]
[rates]
[head-coords]
[power-coords]
[num-stages]
END
[pump-name] [locked] [OD] [design-freq] [design-stages]
[q-min] [q-max] [max-hp]
etc
END
END
where the pump details are as follows:

[manufacturer-name] ::=[text string]
[pump-name]
::=[text string]
[locked]
::=[number: 1 = locked, 0 = unlocked]
[OD]
::=[number](feet)
[design-freq]
::=[number](Hz)
[q-min]
::=[number](BPD)
[q-max]
::=[number](BPD)
[max-hp]
::=[number](HP)
[number-rates]
::=[number]
[rates]
::=[numbers](BPD)
[head-coords]
::=[numbers](FT)
[power-coords]
::=[numbers](HP)
[num-stages]
::=[number]
END
[design-stages] ::=[number]
marks the end of each pump models data set.
425
ESP Description
Put two consecutive END lines to mark the end of a manufacturers pump list. Enter a new
[manufacturer-name] on the next line to start a new manufacturers list.
If [number-rates] = 12, there are 12 entries in the rates, head and power lines.
So, for example:
Reda
A230 1 0.28100 60.00 100 100.0 350.0 32.0
12
25.000 50.000 75.000 100.000 150.000
200.000 250.000 300.000 350.000
383.333 416.667 450.000
1740.122 1792.7771813.4901804.768
1709.034 1525.612 1274.542 975.860
649.607 426.681 206.345 -5.465
3.850 4.276 4.645 4.961 5.434 5.708 5.795
5.706 5.456 5.204 4.889 4.514
94118 142 166 190 214 238
260284 308 310 332 356 380
404428 452 476 498 522 546
570594
END
You can edit this file to remove whole manufacturers or enter your new data. However, we warn
against doing this unless you feel you have to, as WellFlo-ESP does not have error checking on
this file (since we supply the file, and have facilities for users to edit it inside the program).
18.5.2. Motor Database
Figure : 18.5.2 - 1 ESP Motor Data Editor with changed Motor Model name and tabbed through
to release data fields for editing
Viewing Motor Data
426
18. 5. 2. Motor Database
Selecting Configure ESP Motor Data from the main WellFlo-ESP menu brings up the ESP
Motor Data editor dialog box, Figure 18.5.2 - 1, ESP Motor Data Editor with changed Motor
Model name and tabbed through to release data fields for editing, on page 426. This operates in
a very similar way to the ESP Pump Editor. The data is stored in a separate file, ESPMOTOR.DAT.
ESP Description
The Motor Manufacturer and Motor model fields operate in the same way as for pumps - see
above in Section Viewing Pump Data, on page 421.
The Motor OD and Design Frequency are similarly the manufacturer's data for motor size and
for the frequency at which the nameplate ratings are defined.
The Nameplate Ratings section contains a list box containing all the nameplate ratings possible
for the currently selected motor model. Below this are three entry fields showing the Power,
Voltage and Current for the current motor nameplate rating. These replicate the information in
the list box and are non-editable for EPS-supplied motors.
Editing or Inserting Motor Data

This function works in a similar way as the edit function for ESP Pumps, see the example at the
end of the section for more details. To edit a motor's data, you must change its name. You can
then edit either its OD or design frequency, and then add new nameplate ratings by typing in
power, voltage and current and clicking Add. To delete existing nameplate ratings, use the Delete
button.
If you do not Add or Delete, WellFlo will not recognise that a new motor has been added. In order
to save the changes you have made, select another motor; WellFlo will display a prompt asking
if you wish to save the changes made, as shown in Figure 18.5.2 - 2, Saving Changes to Motor
Database Prompt, on page 427.
Figure : 18.5.2 - 2 Saving Changes to Motor Database Prompt
Making Permanent Changes to Motor Database

In order to do this, you need to edit the text file ESPMOTOR.DAT.
The file is arranged by manufacturer, as follows:
[manufacturer-name]
[motor-name] [locked] [OD] [design-freq]
[HP] [volts] [amps]
[HP] [volts] [amps]
..
..
END
[motor-name] [locked] [OD] [design-freq]
[HP] [volts] [amps]
..
etc
..
END
END
427
ESP Description
where the motor details are as follows:
[manufacturer-name]=[text string]
[motor-name]
=[text string]
[locked]
=[number: 1 = locked, 0 = unlocked]
[OD]
=[number]
(feet)
[design-freq]
=[number]
(Hz)
[HP]
=[number]
[volts]
=[number]
[amps]
=[number]
END
marks the end of each motor models data set.
Put two consecutive END lines to mark the end of a manufacturers pump list. Enter a new
[manufacturer-name] on the next line to start a new manufacturers list.
So, for example:
REDA
375 Series 10.315 60
7.5 410 14
10.5 390 20.5
15 400 28
...
127.5 1850 51
END
You can edit this file to remove whole manufacturers or enter your new data. However, we warn
against doing this unless you feel you have to, as WellFlo-ESP does not have error checking on
this file (since we supply the file, and have facilities for users to edit it inside the program).
Please refer to the worked example in Chapter 21 ESP Example, on page 452 for more details
on updating the databases.
428
ESP Design and Analysis
Chapter 19- ESP Design and Analysis

19.1. Setting up the Calculations - General
The analysis section of WellFlo-ESP is accessed through the Analysis menu item. See Figure
19.1.0 - 1, Analysis Menu Items, on page 429.
Figure : 19.1.0 - 1 Analysis Menu Items
The ESP Design performs pump and motor selection and sizing, and is described in below. The
Operating Point and Pressure Drop options are broadly the same as for WellFlo in the general
case, but with some special ESP functions, and is described in Section ESP Analysis Mode, on
page 438.
19.2. ESP Design
Figure : 19.2.0 - 1 Nodal Analysis: ESP Design Dialog Box
Note: The following controls and control areas are identical to those in general WellFlo. See
Section 7 WellFlo Analysis Section, on page 177.
The Temperature model control.
The choice of Correlations for vertical, horizontal and choke flow, etc.
The functions of Results which takes you to the results output section (See Section 20
Output from WellFlo-ESP, on page 444).
The OK and Cancel buttons.
429
Chapter 19 - ESP Design and Analysis
The Nodal Analysis ESP Design dialog box, as shown in Figure 19.2.0 - 1, Nodal Analysis:
ESP Design Dialog Box, on page 429, is similar to the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box in
WellFlo, but has some ESP design features.

The other functions of this dialog box are described in the following sections.
19.2.1. Selecting the Range of Nodes and Pressures

ESP design is done by Nodal analysis as "bottom up" and "top down" calculation to the ESP, and
then sizing a pump to supply the "missing" pressure. The Calculation Nodes section of the
dialog box allows you to set the top and bottom nodes. The defaults are outlet node and reservoir,
respectively.
If the bottom node is the reservoir, its pressure cannot be entered here as it is set in the Data
Preparation reservoir control section. The other choice of bottom node and both top nodes have
their pressures defined in the Top node pressure and Bottom node pressure fields, as shown in
Figure 19.2.1 - 1, Pressure Entry for Design Control Nodes, on page 430, which shows the
bottom node set as the casing.
Figure : 19.2.1 - 1 Pressure Entry for Design Control Nodes
ESP Design works at a single Design Liquid Flowrate. This is entered in a single field in terms
of total liquids (oil + water), as seen in Figure 19.2.0 - 1, Nodal Analysis: ESP Design Dialog
Box, on page 429. Note that neither multiple flowrates nor any sensitivities, other than variable
setting depths, can be run while performing a design.
Note: In order to estimate the design rate in an "unknown" well, you can run Analysis with the
ESP set to Design Pump Only, which effectively removes it from the calculation and allows you
to see the performance of the well with no ESP installed. This will give a good indication of the
target rate required for the sizing of the pump.
19.2.3. Designing setting depth with the Vary Depth Function

The Vary depth option allows you to run the design criteria against a range of up to 10 depths
within your model. It is best suited to the initial design phase when you wish to find the optimum
depth for the location of your ESP. With this in mind this design makes the assumption that no
particular ESP has been identified for inclusion in the well. Accordingly, no viscosity corrections
are made, and this should be taken into account when viewing the resultant plot of Total
Dynamic Head. See Section 19. 2. 7 ESP Selection Criteria, on page 437.
The effect of varying setting depth can be studied by clicking on the Vary Depth button, which
will take you to the ESP Design -variation with depth dialog box.
430
19. 2. 1. Selecting the Range of Nodes and Pressures
19.2.2. Entering the Design Rate
Figure : 19.2.3 - 1 ESP Design - variation with depth dialog box
Figure : 19.2.3 - 2 Nodal Analysis -Sensitivity Values dialog box
This operates the same way as the other Nodal Analysis - Sensitivity Values dialogs in Wellflo.
Now return to the ESP Design - variation with depth dialog box.
You may now proceed by clicking on the Calculate button to process your depth selections
against your ESP model.
When the calculations have finished you may select a Type of plot, then click on the Plot button.
The plot options are:
Pressure depth plot - This option provides you with a graph displaying Pressure and
Temperature against Measured Depth (MD) for each setting depth.
431
19. 2. 3. Designing setting depth with the Vary Depth Function
To define the depths you wish use, click on the Select depths button. This will open up the
Nodal Analysis - Sensitivity Values dialog box.
Figure : 19.2.3 - 3 Pressure/depth plot
Figure : 19.2.3 - 4 In-situ rates plot
ESP gassiness - Here you may examine a graph plotting Pressure at the Pump Inlet against
the In-Situ Vapour Liquid Ratio (fraction) for each of the setting depths. Lower and Upper
Gassiness Thresholds are also displayed (See Section 17. 4. 5 Outputting Your Work, on
page 412).
432
19. 2. 3. Designing setting depth with the Vary Depth Function
In-situ rates - This is a plot of in situ rates at the pump inlet and outlet versus setting depth.
Figure : 19.2.3 - 5 ESP gassiness plot
Figure : 19.2.3 - 6 Total dynamic head plot
19.2.4. Adjusting the Recommended Pump Flow Rates

When choosing a pump for your well, you may want to pick one that may initially run slightly
above the recommended flow rate range, but as the reservoir depletes, the flow rate will drop
back into the optimum operating range. To specify this and referring again to Figure 19.2.0 - 1,
Nodal Analysis: ESP Design Dialog Box, on page 429, you can enter percentage modifiers to
the minimum and maximum recommended flow rates.
Note: Please consult your pump supplier about any conclusions drawn from specifying modified
minimum and maximum flowrates.
433
19. 2. 4. Adjusting the Recommended Pump Flow Rates
Total dynamic head - This is a plot of total dynamic head versus setting depth. This graph
makes no correction for the viscosity of the well product.

19.2.5. ESP Design Calculations
To make the design run, select Calculate. This runs the Nodal analysis top-down and bottom-up,
and sizes pumps of the appropriate diameter and rating for the required flowrate and head. You
will see a dialog box showing progress through the calculations.
When calculations are complete, a dialog box is displayed, which indicates if the design run has
succeeded or not.
Figure : 19.2.5 - 1 Successful Completion of Design Run
If the run has failed, this may be because the design flowrate was above the AOF of the reservoir.
A successful run does not necessarily mean that pumps have been found to fit the requirement merely that the Nodal calculations ran without errors being detected.
19.2.6. Choosing Which ESP to Use
Figure : 19.2.6 - 1 Selecting Pump and Motor from Design Run
This dialog box allows you to see the pump and motor combinations which WellFlo-ESP has
determined are suitable for the design requirements. Displayed are the Pump/Motor/
Manufacturer/Cable combinations, with the number of stages , pump power requirement,
motor current, electrical power needed, and the motor load (the motor current as a percentage
of the name-plate current. Under Stages, you will find the calculated number, and the actual
(nearest higher) number of stages available in the manufacturer's catalog.
Plot
Select a pump and click Plot button to see the pump performance curve of Head and Motor Load
versus In-situ flowrate for the calculated number of stages.
434
19. 2. 5. ESP Design Calculations
After performing the ESP design run, select the Choose ESP.... button to see a list of suitable
pumps. The Choose ESP for Analysis dialog box appears (Figure 18.4.2 - 1, Selecting The
Pump Model, on page 419).
Figure : 19.2.6 - 2 ESP Performance Plot
The operating rate and manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum rates are also
displayed (Figure 19.2.6 - 2, ESP Performance Plot, on page 435). There is a summary of inlet
and discharge pressures, motor performance data etc. in the description box beneath the plot.
Figure : 19.2.6 - 3 ESP Data Dialog Box after Install
This is described in Section ESP Analysis Mode Data Entry, on page 417 (Figure 18.4.0 - 1,
ESP System Editor Analysis Mode, on page 418). Cancel returns you to ESP Design, with no
pump selected or installed in the well.
435
19. 2. 6. Choosing Which ESP to Use
Install
You can scroll through the list and select the combination you wish to analyse further by clicking
Install. This copies the selected details into the ESP System Editor and brings up that dialog box
for you to check the installation:

Optimising The Chosen Pump
The Optimise button takes you to the Optimise Pump Performance dialog box shown in Figure
19.2.6 - 4, Optimise Pump Performance Dialog Box, on page 436, which shows the Fluid
velocity past motor for a selected pump and flow rate.
Figure : 19.2.6 - 4 Optimise Pump Performance Dialog Box
This facility allows you to optimise the configuration of the selected pump in terms of cable size,
operating frequency, number of stages or three performance criteria: minimum or maximum
flowrate, or most efficient operating point.
The selected pump, flowrate at in-situ conditions (average pressure and temperature across
pump), and cable size are displayed at top left of the dialog box.
Frequency: the ESP design calculations will be repeated to recompute the optimum number
of stages to achieve the target flowrate for this frequency setting.
Number of stages: select a number from the drop-down catalogue list, or type in a value (can
be intermediate). The new operating frequency is estimated by reiteration, solving the
equation:
2.31p
target = oper
n
f H qoper oper ntarget target
target
ndesign
where
oper is the operating frequency specified in the System Editor: ESP Data dialog box
(Figure 19.2.6 - 3, ESP Data Dialog Box after Install, on page 435)
ndesign is the number of stages listed in the Calc column in the Choose ESP for Analysis
dialog box (Figure 19.2.6 - 1, Selecting Pump and Motor from Design Run, on page 434)
f H ( ) is the head function for the scaled operating rate inside the brackets
At convergence, the revised frequency and other optimised parameters will be listed in the
Optimisation results area.
Performance: the operating frequency and number of stages are computed by iteration such
that the operating rate (at average P and T across the pump) corresponds to the minimum,
maximum or best efficiency value as specified.
436
19. 2. 6. Choosing Which ESP to Use
Target area: select the parameter you wish to optimise on:

Click the Optimise button, and the new pump specs will be listed in the Optimisation results
area.
Optimisation results area: this area contains the results of the optimisation.
Motor current, voltage, power, efficiency, etc. are re-computed as necessary. Electrical
power is consumption at surface, and includes cable losses.
Calc number of stages is the number computed (or brought through from the initial design).
Number of stages is the nearest higher catalog number to the calculated number.
Operating frequency
Operating range gives the position of the in-situ operating rate between the manufacturer's
recommended minimum and maximum for that frequency, as a fraction of the total min-max
range (0.5 = in the middle). This ignores any catalog flowrate adjustments you may have
entered.
Plot
Click the Plot button to see the pump performance curve of Head and Motor Load versus In-situ
flowrate for the calculated number of stages. The operating rate and manufacturer's
recommended minimum and maximum rates are also displayed (Figure 19.2.6 - 2, ESP
Performance Plot, on page 435). There is a summary of inlet and discharge pressures, motor
performance data, etc. in the description box beneath the plot.
Cancel
Cancel will return you to the Choose ESP for Analysis dialog box without retaining any
changes to the pump specifications resulting from optimisation.
OK
OK will return you to the Choose ESP for Analysis dialog box and will update the entries for the
selected pump with any changes to its specifications resulting from optimisation.
19.2.7. ESP Selection Criteria
To select suitable Pumps:

Pump Size - only pumps whose OD is between the minimum and maximum (from the pump
environment section of the ESP system editor) will be considered further.
Flowrate Capacity - only pumps with a flowrate range which spans the in-situ flowrate (with
the modifiers discussed in Section Adjusting the Recommended Pump Flow Rates, on page
433 applied) will be considered further.
Number of Stages - the total dynamic head required is calculated. The head per stage of
suitable pumps (by the above criteria) is calculated. The only pumps considered further are
those with numbers of stages (in their stage list) equal to or greater than the number of stages
required for the head.
Maximum Shaft Horsepower - the power required for the total number of stages is checked
against the maximum SHP for the pump, and it is only considered further if the power is
below the SHP limit.
437
19. 2. 7. ESP Selection Criteria
This section explains the criteria used in WellFlo-ESP in Design mode to select pump and motor
combinations, as displayed in the Choose ESP.... list, Figure 19.2.6 - 1, Selecting Pump and
Motor from Design Run, on page 434. The following is the logic of the selection:

For each suitable pump, the following is calculated:
Stages - the number of stages to achieve the total dynamic head is calculated. The next
highest number of stages available from the pump's stage list is also displayed.
Power - the pump horsepower requirement is displayed.
Next, for each correctly-sized pump, the suitable motors are selected:
Manufacturer - only motors from the same manufacturer as each pump are considered
further.
Motor Size - only motors whose OD is between the minimum and maximum (from the pump
environment section of the ESP system editor) will be considered further.
Power - only motors with a sufficiently high nameplate power rating are considered further.
The next highest nameplate rating for power is selected. Where there are multiple voltages
with the same power, the highest voltage model is selected. This is because this model would
give minimum cable power losses. You can change to a lower voltage model in the System
editor if required. The current and electrical power for this nameplate rating are then
calculated and displayed.
More details of the design run than can be fitted onto this screen are contained in the Report File.
See Section 20. 4. 1 ESP Analysis Report, on page 447.
19.3. ESP Analysis Mode
Figure : 19.3.0 - 1 Nodal Analysis Control Dialog Box
The controls and control areas are identical to those in the general WellFlo program, i.e. the
Calculation Node control; Temperature model control; OK and Cancel buttons; choice of
Correlations for vertical, horizontal and choke flow etc.; the Results option (see Chapter 40);
Calculate; Auto Range and Edit Rates buttons; check box for switching on Stability Check and
the check boxes for Sensitivity 1 and 2.
The differences in controls are described in the following sections.
438
19. 3. ESP Analysis Mode
The ESP Analysis functions are part of the general WellFlo Nodal Analysis functions. They are
all based on the Nodal Analysis Control dialog box (Figure 19.3.0 - 1, Nodal Analysis Control
Dialog Box, on page 438). This dialog box is identical to the general WellFlo one, described in
WellFlo Analysis Section, on page 177. Only differences when an ESP is present in this
section will be highlighted here.

19.3.1. Selecting the Range of Nodes and Pressures
This function is similar to the standard WellFlo function, but with two ESP-related differences:
The default Solution Node is changed to the tubing above the ESP. This corresponds as always
to the bottom of the tubing, i.e. the pump discharge. This means that the inflow-outflow curves
show the pump discharge pressure (inflow) and the tubing intake above the pump (outflow). This
is done to make the effect of the pump most obvious with respect to the minimum and maximum
flowrate constraints.
You can change the solution node but if you have a gas separator, the solution node cannot be
below the ESP because WellFlo-ESP does not know how much free gas was split out of the well
stream unless it runs from bottom up and through the gas separator. The top-down run cannot
therefore pass the ESP. This choice is forced upon you - the nodes from the ESP down are simply
not available if a gas separator is included.
19.3.2. Entering the Flowrates
The ESP may not have physical flowrate capacity for high rates therefore the default 5% to
95% of AOF (from the Auto Range button) may give rates too high for the pump's
performance data. In this case, the run will abort and an error will be reported (See Section
ESP Error Conditions, on page 440). However, any flowrates which were within the
pump's capacity will be used to plot and calculate results. To get the best results from
WellFlo-ESP, it may be necessary to manually enter the flowrates after the first Nodal run
with default flowrates.
The ESP may have to operate above its recommended maximum flowrate, even though there
is still a head capacity. This will not cause an error, but the fact that the flowrate exceeded the
recommended maximum will be reported on the plots (See Section ESP Error Conditions,
on page 440).
The high flowrates may "run out of pressure" before reaching the ESP if the ESP is a long
way up the well. 5% to 95% of AOF will always give a complete inflow at the casing level,
but maybe not at the ESP. Again, this will not affect the use of runs which were successful in
the results.
19.3.3. ESP Analysis Sensitivity Studies

All the normal sensitivity studies relevant to the type of inflow model and completion can be
modelled, in addition to the standard fluid properties and controlling pressure (WHP, Reservoir
pressure, etc.). Also there are ESP specific sensitivities that can be run, either on their own or in
conjunction with standard WellFlo sensitivities.
The following ESP sensitivities may be run:
Frequency.
Number of Stages.
Pump Wear Factor.
Gas Separator Efficiency.
Motor Wear Factor.
ESP Setting Depth
439
19. 3. 1. Selecting the Range of Nodes and Pressures
This function is identical to the general WellFlo case. However, it is necessary to note the greater
restrictions on flowrate in ESPs.

Figure 19.3.3 - 1, Setting Up Special ESP Sensitivity Variables, on page 440 shows the choice
of Operating Frequency being selected from the ESP sensitivity group in the Nodal Analysis
Sensitivity Variables dialog box (the window in the background), where up to 10 values can be
entered (the window in the foreground).
Figure : 19.3.3 - 1 Setting Up Special ESP Sensitivity Variables
19.3.4. ESP Analysis Calculations

Subject to the variations mentioned above, the Nodal Analysis calculations run in the same way
as for general WellFlo applications. The pump and motor are included in the calculation if
Design Pump Only mode is Off (See Section 18. 3 ESP Design Mode Data Entry, on page
414) and affect the pressure and temperature calculations. If Design Pump Only mode is On,
then the pump and motor are ignored in the calculations.
The error condition reporting is slightly different in the case of ESPs, as described in the next
section.
ESP Error Conditions
Flowrate greater than ESP maximum capacity.

Too much free gas (only if Gassiness Correction On in ESP System Editor (See Section
Free Gas Effects, on page 417). The logic of the gassiness correction is described in
Section Gassiness Effects, on page 443.
Shaft Horsepower greater than pump limit.
Any of these will trigger the appropriate message box to appear at the end of Nodal Analysis. See
Figure 19.3.4 - 1, Error Detected During Nodal Analysis, on page 441 and Figure 19.3.4 - 2,
ESP Error Messages, on page 441.
440
19. 3. 4. ESP Analysis Calculations
The errors which can arise in ESP calculations are:
Figure : 19.3.4 - 1 Error Detected During Nodal Analysis
Figure : 19.3.4 - 2 ESP Error Messages
19.4. Methodology of Analysis

This section gives brief background information to the calculations performed by WellFlo-ESP.
19.4.1. ESP Pressure Calculations

The pressure rise over an ESP is calculated as follows:
The number of stages per group is increased by 1 from one group to the next (1, 2, 3, 4, .....) up
to a maximum equal to one tenth of the total. Thus maximum precision is obtained in the early
stages where changes in fluid properties are likely to be most severe.
Note: The maximum number of stages can be edited via the max-esp-substages registry string
(refer to The Registry section of this manual on page 22).
At each group of stages, the pressure increase is calculated by taking the in-situ total flowrate and
looking up the water head, from the manufacturer's data, at that rate. The water head is corrected
for the actual fluid gravity and this gives the actual head. This is then used to calculate the
pressure at the end of the group of stages.
Fluid properties are evaluated at the average of the intake and discharge pressures of each group,
so that an iterative process is needed to converge on the right pressure drop. This is entirely
analogous to the way in which pressure drop along a pipe is calculated in small increments.
Power needed is obtained in the same way as head, from the manufacturer's data. At the end of
each iterative process, the power requirement of the group of stages is added to the running total
and then the calculation proceeds to the next group.
441
19. 4. Methodology of Analysis
The pump stages are split up into groups, and the calculation done group by group through the
pump. This method accounts for the changing fluid properties through the pump, as a function of
both the increase in pressure and temperature due to heating.

For frequencies other than the design frequency, the pump manufacturer's performance data is
modified for the actual frequency within WellFlo. Flow capacity, head and power requirement
are all affected by frequency.
19.4.2. Motor Current and Power Calculations

The motor needs to supply the power required by the pump, as described above, the output power
is therefore defined. The current required to produce this power is taken from the relationship of
(actual power/nameplate power) nameplate current, i.e. a linear power-current relationship is
*
assumed. This is a good approximation
providing the power is not too far from the nameplate
rating (50% - 150% is a reasonable range).
The electrical power consumed is simply Volts (nameplate) Amps (actual) 1.732 (for a three*
*
phase motor) plus cable power loss. The nameplate volts-amps-power
includes
an implicit
electrical power to mechanical power efficiency and the assumption of a linear power-current
relationship (above) holds this efficiency constant. You can modify the efficiency by setting the
Motor efficiency to non-unity (See Section Motor Wear, on page 416).
19.4.3. Temperature Effects
The motor also provides heat, due to its inefficiency. The difference is that the amount of heat is
not known until the pump calculation is complete, so an initial estimate is used, and an iteration
over the pump and motor is performed until the heat and power calculations balance. However,
in design mode, the motor heat is not treated in the iterative way, but is just estimated.
With the calculated and calibrated temperature models the temperature profile is pre-calculated,
so the whole WellFlo model uses an estimate of the ESP/motor temperature rise based on a
simplified model. Within the pump during the actual run, the model described above is used, but
above the pump in the tubing calculations, the pre-estimated model is used.
442
19. 4. 2. Motor Current and Power Calculations
Temperature rises over the pump due to the difference between energy supplied and the energy
imparted to the fluid. This is the pump efficiency, and it is implicit in the manufacturers' data.
The excess energy is dispersed as heat, with the temperature of the pumped fluid rising. The
temperature rise in the fluid is included in the stage-group by stage-group traverse of the pump,
as described in Section ESP Pressure Calculations, on page 441. The temperature rise is
calculated from the energy dispersed as heat and the heat capacity of the multiphase mixture
passing through the pump.

19.4.4. Viscosity Effects
Highly viscous oils have a degrading effect on the pump performance. This takes the form of a
reduction in flow capacity, a decrease in head and a decrease in efficiency.
These viscosity effects can be optionally modelled in WellFlo-ESP (Viscosity Effects, on page
417). The option allows you to see the effect of viscosity on a case-by-case basis.
1
The WellFlo-ESP viscosity corrections are based on work by the American Hydraulics Institute .
This work suggests three correction factors be applied to the pump performance: a capacity
modifier, a head modifier and an efficiency modifier, all less than 1.0. The magnitude of all the
modifiers is a function of the specific viscosity of the fluid passing the pump (this is a function of
viscosity, head per stage and flowrate). The magnitude of the head modifier is in addition a
function of the specific speed of the pump (this is a function of the flowrate and head per stage).
The modifiers can be as much as 0.5 in highly viscous systems, and this has the effect of both
seriously downgrading the pump performance and increasing the amount of energy lost as heat.
There is an option to force the mixture viscosity (either the averaged or emulsified viscosity),
used in the ESP calculations, to revert to the water viscosity above a specified water cut. The
threshold value is controlled from the Registry (see Section 2. 3 The Registry, on page 17). For
more details see the notes on Emulsion Viscosity in Section 6. 6 Reservoir Control - Fluid
Properties, on page 100.
19.4.5. Gassiness Effects

The existence of free gas in the fluid also2 has a degrading effect on the pump performance.
WellFlo-ESP has a method due to Dunbar which incorporates an algorithm for both the head
degradation due to the presence of free gas and a "critical" free gas ratio above which the pump
should not be operated. Again, this is an optional calculation, so you can examine the effects of
using or ignoring the free gas corrections. The default thresholds are 1.0 and 2.0. Dunbar
recommended values of 0.8 and 2.0.
The method works by using an algorithm to calculate the "critical free gas ratio", which is
roughly proportional to the pressure in the pump (i.e. the higher the pressure, the more free gas
you can pump).
There is an option to plot the in situ vapour/liquid ratio and upper and lower critical curves in the
Analysis Results section (Figure 20.4.1 - 1, Plot Option to Display Motor Amps, on page 447).
1.
Ippen, A.T.: The Influence of Viscosity on Centrifugal Pump Performance. Trans.
A.S.M.E., Nov. 1964, pp. 823 - 848. EPS would also like to acknowledge the assistance of Reda
Pumps in this implementation.
2.
Dunbar, C.E.: Determination of Proper Type Gas Separator. Reda Tech. Bulletin.
443
19. 4. 4. Viscosity Effects
This critical ratio is compared to the actual free gas/liquid ratio at in-situ conditions. For an
actual free gas/liquid ratio below 1.0 times critical, no degradation is made; between 1.0 and 2.0,
a degradation is made; and above 2.0 times critical, the calculation stops and an error condition
is generated. These values are the default values that WellFlo uses - they can be edited to
whatever you feel reflects your actual situation.
Output from WellFlo-ESP
Chapter 20- Output from WellFlo-ESP

Graphical and tabular results output options are available from the Analysis menu, either by
clicking the View Results option (Figure 20.0.0 - 1, View Results Option, on page 444), or by
selecting any of the analysis options and clicking the Results button on the subsequent Nodal
Analysis dialog box (for example, Figure 20.1.0 - 1, Report File - ESP Input Section, on page
445 and Figure 20.4.1 - 4, ESP gassiness Plot Showing In Situ VLR at the Pump Inlet, and
Upper/Lower Limits, on page 450).
Figure : 20.0.0 - 1 View Results Option
Most of the WellFlo-ESP output is the same as for WellFlo. This chapter highlights the
differences where WellFlo-ESP is concerned. Chapter 8 Output of WellFlo Results, on page
234 in the WellFlo part of this FloSystem User Guide contains full details of the general WellFlo
output facilities.
The Report button appears on the View Nodal Analysis Results dialog box, which you access
via the Results button on the Nodal Analysis dialog box. There are no extra facilities here, but
note that a description of the ESP used is included in the report file in Analysis mode. The
relevant section is shown in Figure 20.1.0 - 1, Report File - ESP Input Section, on page 445:
444
Chapter 20 - Output from WellFlo-ESP
20.1. Input Data
Figure : 20.1.0 - 1 Report File - ESP Input Section
20.2. General Results Output

This section briefly reviews the options available for WellFlo-ESP results output.
Saving/Recalling Calculated Data: The ESP is included in the .CLC file, and this function is
unchanged with an ESP in the system.
Graphical Output: The Inflow/Outflow curves in Analysis mode include more information as
they show minima and maxima of pump capacity in addition to the standard display. Motor
current can also be plotted. The text box includes the pump status.
Report Output: The Design mode report is specially designed to give more detailed
information on the available pumps.
WellFlo Log File: This includes the details of the pressure and temperature gain over the
pump, the power consumed by the pump, and cable losses.
20.3.1. ESP Design Report

The Report button appears on the View Nodal Analysis Results dialog box, which you select
using the Results button on the Nodal Analysis dialog box.
The Design mode report contains two sections of particular interest:
The design summary shown below, which shows the main pump design parameters that went
into the pump selection process. This is useful for manual comparisons.
445
20. 2. General Results Output
20.3. ESP Design Output
Figure : 20.3.1 - 1 Report File: ESP Design Summary
The list of pumps and motor combinations that are suitable. This is shown in Figure 20.3.1 - 2,
Part of ESP Design Report in Write Program, on page 446.
This table shows, in addition to the information in the Choose ESP for Analysis dialog box (See
Section 19. 2. 6 Choosing Which ESP to Use, on page 434), the exact number of calculated
stages required, the overall efficiency of power used (energy imparted to fluid/electrical energy),
and the motor nameplate rating selected.
20.3.2. ESP Design Pressure-Depth Plot

If you have run ESP Design, you will be able to make a pressure-depth plot. The Plot button
appears on the View Nodal Analysis Results dialog box. This works in the same way as the
general pressure depth plot and includes the pressure increase over the pump (and for which the
pumps were sized), and the approximate temperature increase (recall the comments in Section
Temperature Effects, on page 442). Figure 20.3.2 - 1, ESP Design Pressure-Depth Plot, on
page 447 shows an example, note the ESP increase in pressure and temperature near the bottom
of the well.
446
20. 3. 2. ESP Design Pressure-Depth Plot
Figure : 20.3.1 - 2 Part of ESP Design Report in Write Program
Figure : 20.3.2 - 1 ESP Design Pressure-Depth Plot
20.4. ESP Analysis Output

20.4.1. ESP Analysis Report
20. 4. ESP Analysis Output
The Report button also appears on the View Nodal Analysis Results dialog box. The report for
an ESP analysis run is a standard WellFlo report (Section 8. 2. 2 Report Output, on page 243),
with the addition of the ESP description shown in Section 20. 1 Input Data, on page 444 and
the current and power consumption at the operating point.
Figure : 20.4.1 - 1 Plot Option to Display Motor Amps
447

ESP Inflow/Outflow Plot
On the inflow/outflow plot, you can choose to display motor current by clicking the ESP current
button on (Figure 20.4.1 - 1, Plot Option to Display Motor Amps, on page 447).
Figure 20.4.1 - 2, ESP Inflow/Outflow Plot - Single Sensitivity, on page 448 shows the result
of a Nodal Analysis run with an ESP in the system, a single base case is plotted. The solution
node was the tubing above the ESP, so the inflow curve is the pump discharge pressure, and the
outflow the tubing intake above the pump. The ordinate label states which node is the solution.
In some cases, this may make the inflow higher than reservoir pressure - this is correct as the
pump has increased the pressure.
Figure : 20.4.1 - 2 ESP Inflow/Outflow Plot - Single Sensitivity
The following features can be seen:
The Pump Minimum and Maximum Flowrates, as vertical dotted lines. These represent the
Stock Tank Barrels (i.e. surface rate) equivalent of the pump's recommended in-situ rate
capacities. The important point here is that the limiting flowrates on the plot do correspond to the
pump limits, but will not be numerically equal to the catalogue pump limits, as one is expressed
in surface volume and the other in in-situ volume. The conversion is needed as the WellFlo
convention for displaying production is at surface conditions.
Note: Such a conversion is only possible where a solution was obtained - that is, an operating
rate and pressure was calculated. This is the pressure at which to convert in situ to surface rates.
So, if you do not get an intersection, you will not see the capacity limit lines.
Pump Status in the description box beneath the plot, shows the operating pressure and pump
throughput. If the intersection is outside the recommended operating limits, the comment Below
Pump Minimum or Above Pump Maximum will be reported here.
When sensitivity cases are run the results can be plotted in the same way as in WellFlo generally,
the plot is often too cluttered if the motor current is plotted as well as the inflow/outflow curves,
but this remains an option.
448
20. 4. 1. ESP Analysis Report
The Motor Current, plotted against the right-hand axis.
We recommend the default solution node (tubing above pump) be used with ESPs. Note that if
you have a gas separator, you cannot place the solution node below the pump in any case
(explained in Section Selecting the Range of Nodes and Pressures, on page 439).
The Performance Analysis plots are unchanged from standard WellFlo ones.
449

ESP Performance Plot
The ESP Performance option on the Plot Options dialog box will produce the performance
curves in terms of Head and Motor Load versus Flowrate (in-situ), and will include:
(after operating point analysis) the operating points for the different sensitivities used
or
(after pressure drop analysis) the specified flowrate/s, converted to in-situ conditions.
the manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum flowrates, and the optimum rate
(for maximum pump efficiency).
Figure : 20.4.1 - 3 ESP Performance Curve Plot for a Single Frequency, Showing Operating
Points
When several pump sensitivities are plotted the minimum, maximum and optimum rates plot as
curves across the range studied. The operating points or flowrates for each run are still plotted
(see the example at the end of the section). The format of this plot is the same as the "tornado
plot" used by manufacturers to present pump performance.
Figure : 20.4.1 - 4 ESP gassiness Plot Showing In Situ VLR at the Pump Inlet, and Upper/Lower
Limits
450
ESP Gassiness Plot

This is a plot of the VLR at the pump inlet versus pressure. The value at the computed pump
intake pressure is plotted as a single point (square). The two curves correspond to the operating
limits defined by the upper and lower threshold multipliers defined in the System Editor dialog
box (Figure 18.4.2 - 1, Selecting The Pump Model, on page 419), which act on a computed
critical free gas/liquid ratio (See Section 19. 4. 5 Gassiness Effects, on page 443). No head
degradation occurs to the left of and above the line corresponding to the lower VLR threshold
(the upper curve on the plot). Degradation occurs between the two curves, and operation is not
possible to the right of and below the curve corresponding to the upper VLR threshold (the lower
curve on the plot).
ESP Pressure-Depth Plot

The Pressure/Depth Plot option on the Plot Options dialog box will produce a plot of the same
format as the one shown in Figure 20.3.2 - 1, ESP Design Pressure-Depth Plot, on page 447.
When multiple sensitivities and flowrates are run, you can plot the curves corresponding to one
or all values of each group.
20.5. Output from ESP Pump & Motor Database
20. 5. Output from ESP Pump & Motor Database
WellFlo-ESP output is restricted to hard copies of the graphs using the File, Print command.
Reports of the pump and motor database are not included in this version, although you could
print out the files ESPPUMP.DAT and ESPMOTOR.DAT (use any text editor or the DOS print
command).
451
ESP Example
Chapter 21- ESP Example

21.1. Introduction
The file, ESPEXAMP.WFL on which this example is based, is supplied with the installation disks.
This example includes an ESP design and also the addition of non-catalog pump and motor data.
The model is of a vertical, low productivity oil well which has an ESP at 8000ft. The perforations
are at a depth of 8500ft but the layer pressure is only 3000psia with a productivity index of just
over 5 STB/day/psi. The design criteria can be checked by selecting the ESP data option from
the Data Preparation menu.
This well will not flow to surface without artificial lift of some kind, in this case an ESP. This can
be verified by selecting Data Preparation ESP data and switching from Analysis mode to
Design mode. If you now do an Operating Point calculation, no operating point will be found as
the inflow and outflow curves do not intersect without a pump in place.
Figure : 21.1.0 - 1 ESP Design dialog box
Selecting the Calculate button will result in the design calculations being made which will then
give a list of pump/motor/manufacturer combinations under Choose ESP..... It was decided that
the R32/70Series ODI pump/motor combination should be used as shown in Figure 21.1.0 - 2,
ESP Options from Design, on page 453.
452
Chapter 21 - ESP Example
Proceed to the ESP Design screen from the Analysis section. Here we can enter the design rate at
which we wish the well to flow, as shown in Figure 21.1.0 - 1, ESP Design dialog box, on page
452, 3000 STB/day. Notice that, as we have yet to do the design and therefore have not identified
a selection of suitable pumps/motors, the Choose ESP... button is greyed out.
ESP Example
Figure : 21.1.0 - 2 ESP Options from Design
Before installing this ESP, we would like to optimise it. Proceed by selecting the Optimise button
and you will see the screen shown in Figure 21.1.0 - 3, Optimise Pump Performance Options,
on page 453.
Figure : 21.1.0 - 3 Optimise Pump Performance Options
21. 1. Introduction
Suppose the power supply is restricted to a frequency of 70 Hz. Although the design was carried
out assuming a frequency of 60 Hz, we can optimise the performance for this 70 Hz which gives
the results shown in Figure 21.1.0 - 4, Optimised Pump Performance, on page 453.
Figure : 21.1.0 - 4 Optimised Pump Performance
453
ESP Example
Before we install this pump, check the performance plot. It should be as shown in Figure 21.1.0
- 5, Optimised Performance Curve for the Pump Chosen, on page 454. Now install the pump
by returning to the screen shown in Figure 21.1.0 - 4, Optimised Pump Performance, on page
453 and selecting the Install button.
Figure : 21.1.0 - 5 Optimised Performance Curve for the Pump Chosen
This will take you out of the ESP Design section and to the System Editor ESP Data screen.
Notice that Design Pump only/Analyse pump option has now automatically been switched to
the Analysis mode as we have completed the design of our pump. The details of the R32 ODI
pump have also been entered by the program.
If we now exit this screen by selecting OK and proceed to the Analysis menu we can do an
Operating Point calculation (with the solution node at Tubing 1, and the liquid flow rates set to
auto range) which should yield the results shown in Figure 21.1.0 - 6, Operating Point Results,
on page 454, with an operating rate of 3037 STB/day.
The Pressure/Depth plot corresponding to this solution is shown in Figure 21.1.0 - 7, Pressure/
Depth plot at solution rate, on page 455. This shows clearly the pressure increase and
temperature rise at the pump.
454
21. 1. Introduction
Figure : 21.1.0 - 6 Operating Point Results
ESP Example
Figure : 21.1.0 - 7 Pressure/Depth plot at solution rate
Figure : 21.1.0 - 8 Sensitivity to Water Cut
Running a sensitivity to water cut for say 60%, 75% and 90% we can see how the pump will cope
with these changing conditions. Figure 21.1.0 - 8, Sensitivity to Water Cut, on page 455 shows
the inflow/outflow curves for the 60%, 75% and 90% cases. For the 90% water cut case the
intersection of the two curves falls outside the range set by the minimum and maximum rates for
the pump, so WellFlo reports the solution below.
It may be better to install the pump with more stages; sensitivities to this parameter and the water
cut show that increasing the number of stages to 80 would mean that the pump would still
operate at a water cut of 99% as shown in Figure 21.1.0 - 10, Sensitivity to Number of Stages,
on page 456. If the pump was installed with 80 stages when the water cut was still 60%, instead
of producing at 3036 STB/day, the well would make 3404 STB/day, still within the
recommended range of the pump.
455
21. 1. Introduction
We would like to install a pump that would operate at the highest anticipated water cut for this
well, 99%. Running sensitivities to pump frequency at 70Hz, 80Hz and 90Hz and water cut
shows that with a higher frequency, 80Hz, the pump would flow at a water cut of 90%. These
results are shown in Figure 21.1.0 - 9, Sensitivity to Pump Frequency, on page 456. This may
not be a practical method of extending the use of the pump.
ESP Example
Figure : 21.1.0 - 9 Sensitivity to Pump Frequency
Figure : 21.1.0 - 10 Sensitivity to Number of Stages
21.1.1. Entering New Motor Data
Proceed to the Configure menu and select ESP Motor Data, taking you into the motor database.
What you will see is shown in Figure 21.1.1 - 1, Initial Screen Seen on Entering the Motor
Database, on page 457.
456
21. 1. 1. Entering New Motor Data
Suppose that the motor chosen is not available, but one very similar, with a non-standard
Nameplate rating can be used in its place. This requires the motor details to be entered in the
database.
ESP Example
Figure : 21.1.1 - 1 Initial Screen Seen on Entering the Motor Database
Figure : 21.1.1 - 2 New Data Entered for 70 Series EPS Motor
Select the Add button to add this nameplate rating to the list for this motor. You can also Delete
any unwanted motor nameplate ratings by scrolling through the list and using the Delete button.
To make sure that your changes are saved to the database when exiting the editor, select another
motor model. You will then see a prompt as shown in Figure 21.1.1 - 3, Saving Changes Made
to the Motor Database, on page 458. (If you omit the choosing of another motor after Adding or
Deleting, your data should be saved when you exit the editor. It is better to use the method
described above so that you are sure that it will be saved).
457
21. 1. 1. Entering New Motor Data
As an existing motor cannot be altered (as indicated by the greyed out fields) a new model must
first be created, which will be based on a standard catalog motor. Our original choice of motor
was the ODI 70 Series. Select this motor by scrolling down the list after pressing the arrow key
alongside the Motor model.
Type in the new name for the motor, say 70 Series EPS; when you tab out of the name field you
will see that the all of the data fields are now black and can be edited in the normal way. Enter the
new data as shown in Figure 21.1.1 - 2, New Data Entered for 70 Series EPS Motor, on page
457.
ESP Example
Figure : 21.1.1 - 3 Saving Changes Made to the Motor Database
If the Nameplate rating is changed and the Add and Delete buttons are not used, WellFlo will
not recognise that ANY changes have been made. (Choosing another motor will not produce the
prompt shown in Figure 21.1.1 - 3, Saving Changes Made to the Motor Database, on page 458,
and the new entries will be lost.)
21.1.2. Entering New Pump Data

If the pump that we wished to use was also non-standard and therefore not already in the
database, we could enter the required data in a similar manner to that described for the motor
database.
Figure : 21.1.2 - 1 Modified Pump Data Entry
As with the motor database, you can use the Add and Delete buttons to modify the available
number of stages for the pump. Again, selecting another pump will result a prompt asking you if
you wish to retain the changes to the R32 mod pump. If you have not used the Add and Delete
buttons but have entered new data, selecting a new pump will still result in the prompt about
saving the changes made. If you do not wish the revised pump data to be saved, exit the editor
using the Cancel button.
458
21. 1. 2. Entering New Pump Data
The original pump that we choose in this example was the ODI R32 model. Proceed to the ESP
Pump Data from the Configure menu and select this pump. The data will be greyed out, as in the
motor case, until the pump is given a new name, say R32 mod. Tabbing out of this field will allow
editing of the data. Increase the maximum rate to 3700STB/day and increase the Head data by
10% as shown in Figure 21.1.2 - 1, Modified Pump Data Entry, on page 458.
21. 1. 2. Entering New Pump Data
ESP Example
459
Index
Alphabetic Index
A
Bend Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Beggs and Brill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
(Modified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
(No-slip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Acceleration Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Binary File Format (.WFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Browser
Advanced Gas Valve Modelling . . . . . . . 180, 227
.LOG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Step profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Valve performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Calculation Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Data Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Calculation Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Bugs, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Add-to-Plot Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Allocate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Calculation at Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Allocate Calculation
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Build All Calculation Mode. . . . . . . . 369, 370, 376

Build Calculation
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Allocate Calculation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Build Calculation Mode . . . . . . . . . . 369, 370, 376
C
Allow Graphic Node Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Calculated Data (FieldFlo). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Calculated Temperature Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Methodology of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
View Results Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Model Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relaxation Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transient Heat Conduction Time Function. . . .
188
224
224
224
Allocate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
History Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Well Performance Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372
370
373
369
374
369
ANALYSIS.LOG Output Displayed in Excel . . 246

Annular Flow
Calculated Values Area (IPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Wall Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Calculations (FieldFlo)
AOF
Injection wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Producing wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 302

ASCII file format (.wfx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 318
Association
Calculations (WellFlo)
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Background Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Load File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Exact Iteration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowrate Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Load File, Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic L-factor Calibration
Nodal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-regression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
219
196
181
179
217
Operating Point Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Range of nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Auto-Range Button for Flowrates . . . . . . . . . . 182

Auto-Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Calculation Failure Message Box . . . . . . . . . . 219
B
Calculation Result File Save Dialog Box . . . . . 234
Back Pressure, IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 140, 145 Calibrated Temperature Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Model Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Batched Well Mode
BHP format
File Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Calibration of Flow Correlation . . . . . . . . 350, 359

Calibration of Well Data
Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
458
Index
Flowing Pressure Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

VFP Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Index
Well-by-Well. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FieldFlo Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
375
308
308
308
307
307
C-and-n Method, IPR . . . . . . . 138, 140, 142, 145

Casing Closing Pressure Margin, Unloading Valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 203
Casing Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Configure Menu (WellFlo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ESP Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Casing-Controlled Valves
Design Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Casing Head Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 198

Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
ESP Pump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Plot Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
59
62
63
59
Casing Pressure, for Gas Injection . . . . . . . . . 240 Connecting Wells and Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Choke
Constant Pressure Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Flow Condition Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Constant Pressure Boundary Geometry . . . . . 136
Choke Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Contacts, EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Choking Back Wells, Allocate . . . . . . . . . 373, 406 Contributory effects, Skin Analysis . . . . . . . . . 157
Choose IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Convergence Skin, Horizontal Well . . . . . . . . .160
Circular Drainage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 133 Copy Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 350, 380 Corey Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Closing Pressures, Gas Lift Design . . . . . . . . 199 Correlation
Tuning Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Commands
Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Correlations
Choke, Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Completion models
Fractured wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slant wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
159
154
154
Customised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Flow, Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Flow, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Additional curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Include measured data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot phase components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot - Black Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot - Condensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot - Dry Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
172
172
172
173
173
Critical Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Critical flow
CORRLIST.CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Completion Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Coupled Pressure-Temperature model . . . . . . 190
Model Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Completion Skin Factors Area (IPR). . . . . . . . 136
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Composite IPR
Run-Time Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Critical Unloading Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 242

Critical Unloading Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 242
Crushed Zone Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Current Directory Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Customised Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
459
Index
Composite Reservoir IPR Plot (Condensate) . 173

Composite Reservoir IPR Plot (Black Oil). . . . 173
Composite Reservoir IPR Plot with Individual Phase
IPRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Computer Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Condensate IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Configure Menu (FieldFlo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Choke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 222

Choke Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Critical Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Index
Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Damage skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Data
Drainage area geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Constant pressure boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Pseudo-linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Pseudo-radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Solution Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Data Entry for a Frac-and-Pack Completion . . 166

Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Data Input for a Choked Fracture . . . . . . . . . . 165
Data Input for Proppant Darcy Properties. . . . 163
Data Input for Proppant Non-Darcy Properties 164
Data Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 309
Data Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Data Preparation Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Deepest Injection Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Deepest Injection Point Options . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Deepest Point, Gas Injection . . . . 175, 198, 237
Deep Well
Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Default Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Delete Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Deliverability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Depth and Deviation of Well Components . . . . 68
Depth of Static Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Design Margins
Gas Lift Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Design Operating Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Detail of Previous Gas Lift Design Plot . . . . . . 206
Deviation of Surface Components . . . . . . . . . . 82
Deviation of Well Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Deviation Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Dialog Boxes
Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Differential pressure, GLV . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 198
Display Composite IPR Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . 172
Document
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Document Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dome Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Downcomer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Dry Gas IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Dukler-Eaton-Flanigan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Duns and Ros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
(Modified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
DVP file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
E
Editing
Field Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Editing Flowrates Using the Fill Option. . . . . . . 182
Unit Performance Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Clear a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Duplicate a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Edit Menu, Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Effective Permeability, Layer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Electrical Pump Component (in flowline). . . . . . 91
Elevation and Deviation of Surface Components 82
End of Calculation Message Box . . . . . . . . . . 219
Enhancements, Requesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
EPS Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
EPS Mechanistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 248
Erosional Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 226, 246
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Data Entry (showing operating frequency option)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Manufacturers Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Exchange Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Export Completed Successfully. . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Export, Multiphase Pseudo-Pressures . . . . . . 148
F
F1 key, Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Failed Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fancher and Brown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fetkovich, IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 140, 142
Field
Moving Within with Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Representation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
460
Index
Index
Selecting Items with Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Selecting Items with Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Field Description
Calculated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Input data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
FieldFlo
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Field Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Functions of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Gas Lift Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Principle of Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Transfer of L-Factor to WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
What Is Involved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
FieldFlo Applications
Cost of Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited Gas Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipeline Pressure Drops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
302
302
303
303
FieldFlo Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Choking Back Wells, Allocate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Field Performance And Gas Allocation . . . . . . 401
Field Performance Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Gas Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Performance Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Kick-Off Wells
Performance Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Accessing Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowing Pressure File Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applet Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
258
258
249
257
File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

File Menu (FieldFlo)
ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Setup, Print and Printer Set-Up. . . . . . . .
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
319
319
316
317
319
317
317
File Menu (WellFlo)

Main, system diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Page and Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Save/Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
File Name Entry (showing BHP format export) 257

File Selection
Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Files (FieldFlo). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Transferring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
File Types
ASCII (.wfx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55, 57
Binary (.WFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55, 57
Keyworded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
KWF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
File Export (WellFlo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 263

Flowing Pressures (BHP, VFP, etc). . . . . . . . . 248
From EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Flow Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
461
Index
Field Model Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Fill Down Equipment Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Field Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Fill page, page setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Finite conductivity skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Field Optimisation
Fit to page, page setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Setting-Up and Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Fixed Qgi at Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Field Performance And Gas Allocation . . . . . . 401
FloSystem
Field Performance Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Field Structure
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Moving Within . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Moving Within With Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Screen Region Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Field, Set-Up and Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Well Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
File
FloSystem Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
FloSystem Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Index
Numbers 261
Flow Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Tables vs Water-Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 260
Flow Correlation, for Flowlines . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Flow Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
For Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
For Nodal Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
G Flag, Well Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 344

Gas Injection Constraints, Well Nodes . . . . . . 338
Gas Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Opening Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,
Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Entry (Showing Injection GLR option) . . .
Diagnosis Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
254
241
174
Gas Lift Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Flow Regime Numbers . . . . . . . . . . 64, 246, 247 Gas Lift Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Flowline Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Gas Lift Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 197
Closing and Transfer Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Flowline Replication Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Design Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Flowline, Subsea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Design Margins - Casing Controlled Valve. . . . 200
Design Margins - Fluid Controlled Valve . . . . . 202
Flowline, Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Design Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Flow Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Plot of Pressure vs TVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fluid-Controlled Valves
Design Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fluid Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Black Oil Fluid Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Condensate Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Dry Gas Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 100
Transfer Reservoir Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Volatile Oil Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fonts, Edit for Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Forced Gas Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Frac-and-Pack Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fractured Well
Fracture Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fractured Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half-Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intersection Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
162
163
163
Fracture Well, Skins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Choked Fracture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Connection Skin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Finite Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fracture Face Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Limited Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Total Skins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Friction Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

FxI flag, Well Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 339, 343
Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-calculate Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
215
216
208
209
199
Gas Lift Design Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

After Design Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Gas Lift Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Gas Lift Parameters area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Gas Lift Valve Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Gas Lift Valve Port Size Calculations . . . . . . . 210
Gas Lift Valve Sizing Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Gas Lift Valve Sizing Screen (Fluid Controlled) 212
Gas/Liquid Ratio Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Gas to MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Gas Utilisation Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Gas Valve Modelling
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Gas Valve Modelling Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Base Case Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Lift Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensitivities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
233
231
233
232
230
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Gas in Annulus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 190

Gas-Charged Valves, Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 391

Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345, 398
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
WellPCG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
462
Index
Gas AllocationData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Gas Wells
Index
Gauge Component (in flowline) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Gray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
General Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 H
Copying and Pasting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Hagedorn and Brown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
GLRi, Base Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
(Modified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Goode and Wilkinson Model, Horizontal Well Inflow Hard Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installing a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 136, 160
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Graphical Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 312 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 312
Use of the Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Heat Loss Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Default System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Display Icons/Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Tabular Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Zoom In/Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Heat Transfer Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 81, 87

Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 88
Graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
X Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Y Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
T-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Copy and Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
GraphTemplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
X Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Y Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
T- Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Zoom Region Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Zoom Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Zoom In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Zoom Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Zoom Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Gravel pack
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Context Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Screen regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
FloSystem system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
From EPS support desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Screen Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Help from EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Help Menu - FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
History Match Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Inner radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Earth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Sea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Holdups, Computed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Horizontal Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Segmented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fractured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
135
135
159
How To Force Gas Entry/Use Sensitivity Analysis

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Hydraulically Fractured Vertical Well. . . . . . . . 134
Hydrostatic Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
ID of Casing (external) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 78

Gravel pack skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 IIR
463
Index
Graphical Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Index
Layer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
IIR Calculation models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Joshi Model, Horizontal Well Inflow

IIR, plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 133, 136, 160
Importing Data
K
Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Include in Text Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Infinite conductivity skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Inflow Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Inflow/Outflow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Injection Gas Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 198
Injection Wells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 145
Injection Wells, IIR plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Input Data (FieldFlo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Input Data for Fracture Face Damage Skin . . . 165
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Insulation, flowline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Insulation, Thermal Conductivity. . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Intermittent Gas Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Intermittent Gas Lift Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
IPR
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Layer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Relative permeabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Reservoir sensitivities in nodal analysis . . . . . . 173
Skin analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Keyworded file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Keyworded Files
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Kick-Off Pressure, Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 203

Kick-Off Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Kill Fluid Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

KWF
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Selection of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
KWF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
L
Layer Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Layer IPR Group Sensitivity Values Dialog Box 195
Layer Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Layer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
For IPR/IIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 126
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Licensing
Valve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
L-factor
Flow Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
IPR Calculation models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Flowlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IPR Model area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Sub-Critical Chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
IPR, layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Tables vs Water-Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 260
Wells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
IPR, plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
L-factor
Calibration
IPR/IIR
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batch Control File Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batch Control File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating Water-Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
360
367
368
L-factor Icon, Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Iterate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 LFACTOR.LOG file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Iteration to Exact Operating Point. . . . . . . . . . 196 Lift Gas
Injection Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Liquid Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
464
Index
Entry models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

From flowing test data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
From layer parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
From manual input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tabulated entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 143
Index
Limited Entry Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 MxL flag, Well or Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 341
Limited Fracture Height Skin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 N
Line Thickness Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Nodal Analysis
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Load Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Control Dialog Box for Operating Point Mode . 178
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Flow Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Sensitivity Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
.LOG Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Node Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 180
Logging Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Normalised pseudo-pressure, IPR . 143, 144, 145
M
Notes, for Well or Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337, 348
Macro, WORD, for report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Macro format, reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 243
O
Manifold Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Office
Manual
Americas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 302
Far East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How To Use It . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Venezuala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Well Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Offshore
Well
WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Temperature Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
WellFlo ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Manual Input, for IPR data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Open Hole Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Manual Temperature Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Opening Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Model Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Operating Casing Pressure Curve . . . . . . . . . 207
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Operating Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Maximum Production Constraints
At Unit Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
At Well Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Flowrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Range of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Operating Point Calculation Node Range . . . . 180

Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Orifice Valves
Measured Data
Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 239
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 263
Export File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Field Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Gas Injected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Output Options
Multiple Flow Correlation Selection. . . . . . . . . . 255
Performance Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 239
Multiple L-factor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Output Results (FieldFlo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Allocate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Multiplier Selection
Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
MxI flag, Well Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
465
Index
Merging Network Branches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Orkiszewski . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Mid-Perforation Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 130, 140 Outlet Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Minimum Pwf, Well Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Calculation Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Monochrome, Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Graphical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Multilateral Wells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Inflow/Outflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Multi-Layered Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 74, 140, 146
Performance Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Multiphase Pseudo-Pressure
Pressure-Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Index
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Factor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results of Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Performance Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WellPCG Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
380
384
381
383
380
381
384
Overlay Multiple Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pressure and Temperature vs TVD.. . . . . . . . .
Pressure-Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure vs TVD (After Calculate) . . . . . . . . . .
146
240
239
208
Plot Axes, Select Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Plotting Variables versus Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
P
Port Size Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
p2-form, IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Port sizing, GLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Preferences, Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 307
Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Pressure Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Flowrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Parametric format rel. perm. dialog box . . . . . 168
Range of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Calculation Node Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Parametric, rel. perm. format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Partial penetration skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Correlations, Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Through Restrictions, Background . . . . . . . . . . 222
Parting pressure, layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Print Setup
PC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
For Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
For System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Perforation
Crushed zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Printer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Printer types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Shape factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Printing The Well System Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Perforation Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Printing See Hard Copy
Performance Analysis Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Production Rate Data Entry
Total Liquid Rates Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Performance Curve Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Using the Fill Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Performance Curve Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Proppant Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164
Performance Curves
Pseudo-Linear Flow Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Burial Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Pipelines
Set-up with WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Set-up and Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Description of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Pipeline Data Update 386

Pipe Wall Roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Customised Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
(Excel) of Relative Permeability Curves Defined by
Corey Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
IIR models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
IPR models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
ASTM Oil Viscosity in Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Best Fit, PVT data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble Point Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emulsion Viscosities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emulsion Viscosity Calculate Options . . . . . . .
Emulsion Viscosity Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emulsion Viscosity Correction Table . . . . . . . .
Emulsion Viscosities Inversion (ESP) . . . . . . .
Emulsion Viscosity vs Water Cut Plot . . . . . . .
Flash Experimental Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matching Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properties Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solution GOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Black Oil Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASTM selecting correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
107
104
110
112
110
111
113
113
104
105
103
104
101
103
466
Index
Pseudo-Radial Flow Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Phase Velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 PVT
Black Oil
Pipeline
Anchored and Free Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Index
Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
With Bubble Point Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
102
102
102
103
101
105
103
Tuned Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Tuned Liquid Dropout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Tuning PVT properties . . . . . . . 105, 115, 119, 125
Volatile Oil Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Checking Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matching Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volatile Oil Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volatile Oil Fluid Parameters Dialog Box . . . . .
Volatile Oil Properties Check Dialog Box . . . . .
Volatile Oil (bubble-point system) Warning . . .
Condensate Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Calculated Dew Point Before Tuning . . . . . . . .
Copy Previous Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matching Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principles of Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relative Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surface Tension, Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Need for Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Liquid Dropout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Untuned Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Condensate (dew point system) Warning . . . . .
Condensate Fluid Parameters Dialog Box . . . .
Condensate Model Parameters for Tuning . . . .
Condensate Properties Check Dialog Box . . . .
121
118
117
117
119
122
119
118
123
123
123
121
125
117
120
118
Correlations
Black oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Dry Gas Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inorganics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matching Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dry Gas Model Parameters for Tuning . . . . . . .
115
114
113
114
115
114
116
Fluid Parameters
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fluid Properties
Reservoir Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fluid Type Area for an Injection Well . . . . . . . . 101

Gas Fluid Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 114
Gas Properties Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Match Condensate Properties Dialog Box. . . . 120
Match Quality, PVT Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Match Volatile Oil Properties Dialog Box . . . . . 125
Oil Fluid Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Oil Properties Check Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Oil Viscosity
ASTM in Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Produced GOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

PVT Correlation Matching Dialog Box . . . 105, 107
Reservoir Control
Fluid Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Reservoir Control Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Solution GOR Tuning
Anchored at Standard Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
124
124
125
124
124
124
119
Water, fluid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pwf Flag, Well Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Q
Qgi, Base Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Quick WellFlo Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
R
Racking Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Rectangular Drainage area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Configure FieldFlo Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Configure in WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entries
All-Values-Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Analysis-Log-Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Analysis-Log-Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Anchor-PbRs-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Density-Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Erosion-Coeff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ESP-Gas-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ESP-Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 20
ESP-Performance-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
GLV-Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
In-Outflow-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Max-ESP-Substages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Orkiszewski-Transition-WC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Performance-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Please-Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PVD-Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Rack-Temp-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 213
Report-Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 23
Report-Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Therm-Cond-Cement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 78, 87
Therm-Cond-Earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 78, 87
Therm-Cond-Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 188
Therm-Cond-Insulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 78, 87
Therm-Cond-Liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 188
Therm-Cond-Soil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 78, 87
467
Index

Correlations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Produced GOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Black Oil Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Black Oil Model Parameters for Tuning . . . . . .
Choosing The Black Oil Correlations . . . . . . . .
Index
Therm-Cond-Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 78, 87
Units-Dbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 20
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
User-Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Viscosity-Inversion-Threshold. . . . . . . . . . 22, 113
WellFlo-Log-Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
WellFlo-Log-Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Viewing and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Relative Injectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Relative permeabilities
Data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tabular. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
168
169
170
Relative permeabilities, IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Relative permeability data setup format . . . . . . 167
Relaxation Distance Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Remarks box, General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
File Format - Rich Text Format (RTF) . . . . . . . 244
Word Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
WordPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Reports (FieldFlo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Report Detail, Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Report Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 384
Reporting Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Macro Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
RTF (rich text format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Tabbed Text Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
S
Save Graph Axis Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Saving Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Save Setup on Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Security
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FlexLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Segmented horizontal well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Select Correlations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Selecting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Sensitivity Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Sensitivity Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Sensitivity Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Sensitivity Variables Selection Dialog Box . . . 193
Separator Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Simulator File Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Single and Batched Multiple Well Options . . . 249
Single Well Mode, Flowing Pressure Export . . 249
Sizing, Gas Lift Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Skin Analysis
Calculated totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Component skins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 159, 162
Contributory effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
From welltest results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Layer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Totals calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Report Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Skin Analysis dialog box for a fractured well . . 162
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Import Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 243 Skin Analysis dialog box for a horizontal well . 159
RTF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Skin Analysis dialog box for a vertical/slant well 155
WRITE Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 243
Skin Analysis option button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23
Skin Analysis, for IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Reservoir Data
Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Skin Analyser (Contributory Effects Area). . . . 157
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Slant wells, skins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Restriction Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Slotted Liner Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Restrictions
Solution Node, Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Flow Condition Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Spreadsheet
Results
Data Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Spring-Operated Valves
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Riser Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
SPt Flag, Well Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 343
RTF
Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
RVP File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Stability Check, Operating Point . . . . . . . . . . . 196
468
Index
Recalling a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

Saving a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Index
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Seawater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 190
Wellhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Temperature Modelling, Background . . . . . . . 224

Temperature Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupled Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
189
190
187
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Deleting a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Edit and Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Editing a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Editing a Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 329
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Field names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Saving a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
469
Index
Stacked Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Template

For Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Starting FloSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
For Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Test Data
Calibrating Well Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Well Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
For calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Static Fluid Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
For IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Static Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Test Rack Pressure, Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Stem Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Thermal Conductivities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Customising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 87
Step Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 87
Straight Line IPR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Soil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Sub-Critical Choke
Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
L-Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Sub-Critical Flow, Criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Total Skin Calculations
Sub-Sea SMUBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Horizontal Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Vertical Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Sub-Surface Safety Valve Component . . . . . . . 79
Transfer
Pressure Margins . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 203
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
FloSystem manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Transfer Pressures
From EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Gas Lift Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Support Desk At EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Transfer Reservoir Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Surface Chokes
TRO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Surface Components Description . . . . . . . . . . . 82 True Valve Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
T
Tubing Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tabular and Graphical Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Tubing-Controlled Valves
Tabulated IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 143
Design Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Tabular format rel. perm. dialog box (gas/oil) . 170 Tuning Tables
Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Tabular format, rel. perm. data . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Turner critical velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 242
Tabular Surface Deviation Data Entry . . . . . . . 85
U
Tabular Surface Equipment Data Entry . . . . . . 86
Units
Tabular Well Deviation Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . 70
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Tabular Well Equipment Data Entry . . . . . . . . . 72
Associated unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Associating with Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Temperature
Creating a New Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Atmosphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 190
Creating a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
At Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
At Outlet Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Default Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Index
Selecting System to Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Switching Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
System Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
System Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Terminology & Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Text Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Unit classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Unit Performance Curves

Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Web-site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Wedge-Shaped Drainage Area (horizontal and
vertical wells). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Well and Flow Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Annular Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Injection Well (water or gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Pipeline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Well and Riser

Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
UNIX, ASCII file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

L-factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Update
Wellbore Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Pipeline Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Well Components Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Well Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Update with Computed Casing Head Pressure 207 Well Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Valve Data
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Valve Depths Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Velocity numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Liquid and Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Vertical permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 160, 166

Vertical wells, skins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
VFP Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Batch Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Control File for 3 Wells, with Different Qgi for Last
Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Output file in Oilfield Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Successful Export in Batch Mode (3 wells) . . . 260
VFP Export Control File (Example). . . . . . . . . 259

Viewing
File Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Production Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Viewing The Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

View Node Names, Configure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
View Results Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
View Results With File Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Virtual Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Vogel IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Customising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Volatile Oil IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
W
Water/Gas Ratios Data Entry (Gas and Condensate
Wells). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Adding Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Deleting Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Duplicating Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Eclipse VFP Table Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Generate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294, 296, 299
Layer Inflow Performance (Layer Mode) . . . . . 295
Layers Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Sheet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 296, 299
Units Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Update Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Vertical Lift Performance (Well Mode) . . . . . . . 290
Well Data Manager Spreadsheet . . . 294, 297, 300
Wells Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291, 295, 298
Well Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Wellhead Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Wellhead Depth Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Wellhead Pressures Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . 255
WellFlo
Access through FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Access through Well Data Manager . . . . . . . . . 24
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Performance Curve Generation (WellPCG) 304, 374
Pipeline Pressure Drop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Pipeline Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Setting Up and Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Start-up Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
System Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Use of in FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Well Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
WellFlo Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Example 1 - Gas-Lifted Well. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Gas Lift data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Nodal Analysis Control dialog box for the gas lift
sensitivity analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
470
Index
Index
273
269
269
266
266
272
272
271
Example 2 - Condensate Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Choose IPR model - Layer 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Circular Drainage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
CONDENS Operating Point Calculation . . . . . . 283
Condensate fluid parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Detailed analysis of kick-off lift gas/liquid ratio 274
Inflow performance - Condensate. . . . . . . . . . . 278
Inflow performance - Reservoir control . . . . . . . 278
IPR for CONDENS Reservoir/Fluid. . . . . . . . . . 281
Match condensate properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Match condensate properties - liquid dropout match
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Nodal Analysis Control - CONDENS.WFL . . . . 282
Nodal Analysis Correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Presure/Temperature vs Depth CONDENS
base case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Skin Analysis: Completion - Layer 1 . . . . . . . . . 279
Skin Analysis: Completion (Vertical) - Layer 1 . 280
Tabular Display - CONDENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
The well system for CONDENS . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Example 3 - Horizontal Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Circular Drainage Area - data entry . . . . . . . . . 285
Inflow Performance Oil (Layer Parameters) - Layer 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
IPR diagram derived from production test data 267
Pseudo-linear Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Reservoir Control - HORIZON.wfl. . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tabular Display - Nodes in HORIZON.wfl. . . . . 284
References
Methods Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
WellFlo-ESP
Affinity Laws
Motor and Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Analysing an ESP
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Analysis
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Analysis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Applications of WellFlo-ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Artificial Lift Installation Error Messages . . . . . 412
Cable Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Calculation
Gassiness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methodology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor current and power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure increase across pump. . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viscosity effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
442
440
441
440
441
442
Changing Choice of ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416, 418

Changing Database Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Changing Number of Pump Stages . . . . . . . . . 418
Data for ESP
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Data Output
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Data Preparation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Database of Pumps and Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Manual Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 426
Depth Sitting Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Design and Analysis Functions
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Design Mode
Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Design, Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Designing an ESP
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Emulsion Viscosity Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Entering New Pump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Error
Flow Above ESP Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Conditions in ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
ESP Analysis
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing the pump & motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowrate entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Report output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensitivity studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
439
418
438
409
446
438
438
ESP Analysis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

ESP Analysis Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
ESP Data
Analysis mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving pump in well. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pump and motor database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
416
413
413
412
419
417
ESP Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

ESP Design
Adjusting pump flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Calculation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
471
Index
Pressure-depth plot for a selected case . . . . . .

Sensitivity 1- lift gas GLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensitivity 2 - start node pressure. . . . . . . . . . .
System diagram for TEST1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tabular Display - TEST1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST1 report listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Well performance plot for separator pressure. .
Well performance plot for lift gas . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
433
429
445
414
444
433
429
ESP Design or Analysis

Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Task Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
ESP Design Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ESP Design Ouput. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESP Error Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESP Gassiness Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESP Motor Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESP Pump Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESP Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering New Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering New Pump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Changes to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . .
428
444
439
432
425
420
436
450
454
456
450
455
Flow Capacity of ESP, Exceeding . . . . . . . . . . 438

Gas Corrections for ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Gas Separator Efficiency Factor . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Gas Separator Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Gassiness Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Gassiness Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Graphical Editor Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Graphical Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Inflow/Outflow Plot, ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Input Data
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
In-Situ Rates Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Install, Selected Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual
431
434
434
407
444
WellFlo-ESP Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Motor Current calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Motor Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Editing Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Permament Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Motor Nameplate Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Wear Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving an ESP in Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nameplate Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nodal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nodal Analysis For ESPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimise
419
415
415
413
419
437
428
417
Selected Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Output
Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESP Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESP Design Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESP Design Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pump & Motor Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling a Set of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Calculated Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
446
444
446
445
444
444
444
443
444
411
449
444
444
444
Output of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Performance Curves, ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Plot Pump Performance Curve. . . . . . . . . 433, 436
Plots
Inflow/Outflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Pressure/Depth Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 445
Pressure Calculation Across Pump . . . . . . . . . 440

Pump Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Editing Pump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permanent Changes to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotting Pump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Pump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
422
424
422
420
Pump Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Pump Efficiency Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Pump environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Pump Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Pump Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Pump Wea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Report Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Running Sensitivities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Saving Changes to Databases . . . . . . . . . 423, 426
Select Pump/Motor/Cable Combination to Analyze
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Sensitivity Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Sensitivity Values Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Software Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Temperature Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Tornado Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Total Dynamic Head Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Variation with Depth Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Viscosity Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Viscosity Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
VLR, In-Situ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442, 449
Wear Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
What is Involved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Well Orientation in the Reservoir Control Dialog Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
On Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
On Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 WellPCG Calculation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
On Stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s 435 WellPCG Control, Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
472
Index
Choosing the ESP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Design flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pump environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Report output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
Well Performance Curves Data . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Well Performance Data, Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Wells
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set-Up with WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set-Up and Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
334
334
310
334
335
335
335
335
Well Test Data

Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Word Macro for Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

WordPad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Write, For Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Index
Zooming In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
473

FloSystem V3.6e User Guide - Print

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FloSystem V3.6e User Guide - Print

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FloSystem User Documentation

EDINBURGH PETROLEUM SERVICES LTD

FloSystem User Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2 - Getting Started With FloSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 3 - On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Chapter 4 - Using the FloSystem Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

FloSystem User Documentation

4. 1. Working With WellFlo and FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Chapter 5 - Introduction to WellFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

5.4.2.Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Chapter 6 - WellFlo System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chapter 7 - WellFlo Analysis Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

FloSystem User Documentation

7. 1. Setting Up Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

7. 7. Intermittent Gas Lift Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Chapter 8 - Output of WellFlo Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Chapter 9 - WellFlo Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Chapter 10 - References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

FloSystem User Documentation

11. 1. Well Data Manager - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

Chapter 12 - Introduction to FieldFlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Chapter 13 - FieldFlo System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Chapter 14 - FieldFlo Solution Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

FloSystem User Documentation

14. 1. Overview of Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

Chapter 15 - FieldFlo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

15.3.1.Reservoir Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

Chapter 16 - FieldFlo Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Chapter 17 - WellFlo - ESP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Chapter 18 - ESP Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Chapter 19 - ESP Design and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

FloSystem User Documentation

19. 1. Setting up the Calculations - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429

Chapter 20 - Output from WellFlo-ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

20. 1. Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444

Chapter 21 - ESP Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

FloSystem User Documentation

Alphabetic Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Gas Lift Valve Spacing and Sizing

How To Use This Documentation

Read the sections

Chapter 1- Introduction to FloSystem

Chapter 1 - Introduction to FloSystem

To run the FloSystem on a PC, you require the following hardware:

Versions of the Software

How To Use This Manual

WellFlo (including gas lift)

FloSystem Product Support

1. 5. FloSystem Product Support

Getting Started With FloSystem

Chapter 2- Getting Started With FloSystem

Figure : 2.1.0 - 2 Copying Files Status Box

Chapter 2 - Getting Started With FloSystem

Figure : 2.1.0 - 1 Installation Status Bars

Getting Started With FloSystem

Licensing and Accessing Valve Data

2. 2. Licensing and Accessing Valve Data

Getting Started With FloSystem

Figure : 2.3.0 - 1 Windows Registry Run Dialog

Figure : 2.3.0 - 2 Windows Registry Editor Dialog

Figure : 2.3.0 - 3 Flosystem Hierarchy Within The Registry

The FloSystem installation procedure automatically creates a sub-folder called flosys3x.ini

Getting Started With FloSystem